Title Catalogue for 1966-1967 Publisher Monterey, California

Author(s) Naval Postgraduate School (U.S.)

Title Catalogue for 1966-1967

Publisher Monterey, California. Naval Postgraduate School

Issue Date 1966

URL http://hdl.handle.net/10945/31696

This document was downloaded on May 22, 2013 at 14:30:59

UNITED STATES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA

CATALOGUE FOR 1966-1967

UNITED STATES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA

CATALOGUE FOR 1966-1967 Paul Henry Nietze Secretary of the Navy MISSION

The Secretary of the Navy has defined the mission of the Naval Postgraduate School as follows:

"To conduct and direct the Advanced Education of commissioned officers, to broaden the professional knowledge of general line officers, and to provide such other indoctrination, technical and professional instruction as may be prescribed to meet the needs of the Naval Service; and in support of the foregoing, to foster and encourage a program of research in order to sustain academic excellence." Superintendent Edward Joseph O'Donnell Rear Admiral, U. S. Navy B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1929; U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1939 Senior Professor Chief Administrative Officer of Faculty Robert Fross Rinehart B.A., Wittenberg College, 1930; M.A., Ohio State Univ., 1932; Ph.D., 1934; D.Sc, Wittenberg Univ., 1960 a: c c c £

15!

*— k e a

O4) £

1*3 U. S. NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Deputy Superintendent Henry Filledes Lloyd

Captain, U.S. Navy B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1939; U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1945; M.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1946; Industrial College of the Armed Forces, 1956

Director of Programs John William Murph

Captain, U.S. Navy B.A., Wofford College, 1939; Naval War College, 1958

Dean of Programs Wilbert Frederick Koehler

B.S., Allegheny College, 1933: M.A., Cornell Univ., 1934; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins Univ., 1948

Executive Assistant to the Director of Programs Thomas Andrew Melusky

Captain, U.S. Navy B.S., Univ. of Washington, 1941; M.S., George Washington Univ., 1963

Dean of Curricula Brooks Javins Lockhart B.A., Marshall Univ., 1937; M.S., West Virginia Univ., 1940; Ph.D., Univ. of Illinois, 1943

Dean of Research Administration Carl Ernest Menneken

B.S., Univ. of Florida, 1932; M.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1936

Head of Computer Facility Douglas George Williams

M.A. (honors), Univ. of Edinburgh, 1954 STAFF NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Superintendent's Staff Assistants

Aide to the Superintedent Lt Matthew A. McCarthy, usn

Plans Officer Cdr Loren I. Moore, usn

Comptroller Capt Edward A. Sanford, Jr., sc, usn

Staff Secretary Ltjc Donald Edwin Towne, usn

Industrial Relations Officer Mr. John J. Coyi.e

Aviation Officer (CO, NALF) Capt Mark Twain Whittier, usn

Senior Medical Officer (NALF) Lcdr Theodore J. Trimble, mc, usn

Marine Corps Representative LtCol Edwin M. Rudzis, usmc

Submarine Liaison Officer Cdr Boone C. Taylor, usn

Senior Chaplain Capt Samuel D. Chambers, ChC, usnr

Programs Administrative Staff

Registrar „ Mrs. Bessie Wilk

Class Scheduler Mrs. Jacqueline M. Olson

Cataloguer Mrs. Mary Klotz Burton

Foreign Officer Coordinator Cdr George W. Fairbanks, usn

Flight Officer Cdr Edward D. Jackson, usn

Administrative Officer for Curricular Programs Lcdr Nancy L. Denton, usn

Program Allotment and Material Control Officer Lcdr Deroy L. Hanson, usn

Administrative and Logistic Services

Director of Logistics _ Capt William A. Pitcher, usn

Head, Administration Dept _ Cdr Phillip W. Nicholas, usn

Head, Supply Dept _ Cdr Mary J. Aplin, SC, usn

Head, Public Works Dept Cdr Wayne S. Mitter, CEC, usn

Head, Dental Dept Capt Edmund H. Frizzell, DC, usn

Catholic Chaplain _...Cdr Francis J. Fitzpatrick, ChC, usn

Protestant Chaplain Capt Samuel D. Chambers, ChC, usnr

Public Affairs & Visit Liaison Lcdr John A. Widder, Jr., usn

Legal Officer _ _ Lt M. J. Gormley, III

Communications Officer.-. Lt Ronald J. McAfee, usn .

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL CALENDAR

POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL CALENDAR CALENDAR FOR 1966 J \m \m Academic Year 1966-1967 FEBRUARY ... ,121314 5 213 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 101112 9 1011 121314 IS 13 14 1516 1718119 16171819202122 20 2122 23 24 25 26 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3031.. r...... Ti:i::l::l: 1966 M\R<:H APRIL

...112 3 4 5 Fourth of July (holiday) Monday, 4 July 6 7 8 9 IO.U'12 3 1 5 6 13141516 17 is [0 10 11 12 1! Eight Week Summer Term Ends Friday, 15 July 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1718 1920 27 28 29|30 31 .... 24 25|2627|28

Registration for all Curricular Areas Monday, 25 July .-I.- 1 MAY JUNE Fifth Term Ends (1965-1966) Thursday, 28 July 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...... 1 2 3 4

9 Hill 12 1*11 ! First Term Begins (1966-1967) Monday, 1 August 8 5 6 7 8 ! 9 lOJll 15161711819 20,21 1213141516ll7il8

.'. 24'25:26'27 Graduation Wednesday, 3 August 22 23 l 28 19 20 21,2223 24J25 29J303l|...... 2627 28 29301. Labor Day (holiday) Monday, 5 September JULY AUGUST First Term Ends Thursday, 6 October ...... 1 2 ..123456 Second Term Begins Monday, 10 October 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 10111213 1011 1213141516 14!l5;i617|1819 20 Graduation Wednesday, 12 October 1718 19 202122 23 2122 23:24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27,28 29 30 28,29:301311.. I.. .. <1 Veterans' Day (holiday) Friday, 11 November I..U..U. SEPTEMBER Thanksgiving Day (holiday) Thursday, 24 November 12 3 .. .. II Second Term Ends, Christmas Holiday Begins Friday, 16 December 4 [5 I 6 17 8 9 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15]16 17 9 101112 13 14 15 1819,20:2122 23124 1617|1819 20 2122 Graduation _ „ Wednesday, 21 December 25 26i27 28'29 30. 23:24 25 26 27 28 29

30|31 . .1..! Registration for all Curricula except Navy NOVEMBER DECEMBER Management, Management/Data Processing, ....12345 ...... 1 2 3 6 7|8l9 101112 4 ! 5 6 7 Nuclear (Effects), and Engineering Electronics Tuesday, 27 December | 8j9ll0 13 14 15 1617 1819 1112 1314151617 20 2122 23 24 25 26 1819 20 2122.23 24 27 30I...... 25 26 28J29 27|28j29J30j31

CALENDAR FOR 1967 JANUARY FEBRUARY

12 3 4 5 6 7 ...... 1 1 2 3 4 |

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 6 7 I 8 9 1011 I 1516 17 18 19 20 21 12131415161718 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 192021:222324 25 1967 293031...... 26 27 28 ... Third Term Begins Tuesday, 3 January MARCH APRIL S M T W T F Washington's Birthday (holiday) Wednesday, 22 February ..|..|..|1|2|3|4 ...... 1

' 7 9 1 5 6 8 1 ! 1011 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ends _ Thursday, 9 March 12131415161718 9 101112131415 Third Term 19 20 2122 23 24 25 16171819202122 Begins _ Monday, 13 March . Fourth Term 26 27,28 29 30 311 . 23,24,25;26;27:28!29 30...... Wednesday, March MAY JUNE Graduation ~ 15 Fourth Term Ends Thursday, 18 May 12 3 4 5 6 ...... 1 2 3 7 8 9 1011)1213 415 9110 j 6| 7|8 J 14151617181920 11121314151617 Fifth Term Begins -....Monday, 22 May 2122 23 2425 2627 18 19 20 21 22 23J24 28 29,30:311.. I..I.. 25 26 27 28 29 30 Graduation - - Friday, 26 May

JULY AUGUST Memorial Day (holiday) Tuesday, 30 May T W T F Friday, 30 ...... I ..I.. 1 2 3415 Six Week Summer Term Ends June 3 4 5 6 7 8 617 8 9 10 11 12 1011 12'13!l4'15 1314151617.18:19 Fourth of July (holiday) Tuesday, 4 July 1718 19 20 2122 20 2122 23 24 25 26 23]24 l 25;26'27 28 29 27 28 29 30 31;.... Friday, 14 l Fifth Term (1966-1967) Ends July 3031 ...... I.. SEPTEMBER OCTOBER Registration for All Curricula Monday, 24 July

1|2]3|4|5|6 7 First Term (1967-1968) Begins...... Monday, 31 July

1 i|4 5 1 6 7 | 8 9 819,1011 121314 101112,13141516 151617181920 21 Graduation Wednesday, 2 August 17,18119,20,21,22 23 22 23 24 25 2627(28 24,25j26 l 27,28;2930 29 3031k. I......

..I.. I.. I. I.. I.. I.. NOVEMBER DECEMBER t f a ...... 1 2 3 4 ...... 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 1011 3|4|S|6 7 8 9 12131415|l617;i8 1011 1213141516 1920:2122 23 24 25 17 18 19 20 21 22j23 2627128 29 30j..|.. 24 25 26,27 28,2930 31|. 1.1...... 53 EC

Cti NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

Among those who have completed a postgraduate curriculum who attained flag (USN) or general (USMC) rank on the active list are the following: (The asterisk (*) indicates those on active list as of 1 January 1966.)

Admiral Walter F. Boone Vice Admiral Truman J. Hedding Vice Adm ral Wendell G. Switzer Admiral Arleigh A. Burke Lieutenant General Geo. D. Hermle Vice Adm ral John Sylvester General Clifton B. Cates Vice Admiral Ira E. Hobbs Vice Adm ral Aurelius B. Voseller Admiral Maurice E. Curts Vice Admiral Ephraim P. Holmes* Vice Adm ral Homer N. Wallin Admiral Arthur C. Davis Vice Admiral George F. Hussey, Jr. Vice Adm ral James H. Ward Admiral Robert L. Dennison Vice Admiral Olaf M. Hustvedt Vice Adm ral Charles E. Weakley* Admiral Donald B. Duncan Vice Admiral Thomas B. Inglis Vice Adm ral Charles Wellborn, Jr. Admiral Frank G. Fahrion Vice Admiral Robert W. Hayler Vice Adm ral George L. Weyler Admiral Cato D. Glover, Jr. Vice Admiral Andrew M. Jackson, Jr.* Vice Adm ral Charles W. Wilkins Admiral Roscoe F. Good Vice Admiral Albert E. Jarrell Vice Adm ral Ralph E. Wilson Admiral Charles D. Griffin* Vice Admiral Harry B. Jarrett Vice Adm ral Chester C. Wood Admiral Byron H. Hanlon Lieutenant General Clayton C. Jerome Vice Adm ral George C. Wright Admiral Royal E. Ingersoll Vice Admiral Robert T. S. Keith Rear Adm ral John W. Ailes, III Admiral Albert G. Noble Vice Admiral Ingolf N. Kiland Rear Adm ral Frank Akers Admiral Alfred M. Pride Vice Admiral Fred P. Kirtland Rear Adm ral Jackson D. Arnold* Admiral James 0. Richardson Vice Admiral Willard A. Kitts Rear Adm ral Frederick L. Ashworth* Admiral Horacio Rivero, Jr.* Vice Admiral Harold 0. Larson Rear Adm ral Edgar H. Batcheller* Admiral Samuel M. Robinson Vice Admiral Ruthven E. Libby Rear Adm ral Richard W. Bates

Admiral James S. Russell Vice Admiral Frank L. Lowe Rear Adm ral Frederick J. Becton* Admiral Ulysses S. G. Sharp, Jr.* Vice Admiral Vernon L. Lowrance* Rear Adm ral David B. Bell* Admiral John H. Sides Vice Admiral James E. Maher Rear Adm ral Fred G. Bennett* General Holland M. Smith Vice Admiral William J. Marshall Rear Adm ral Rawson Bennett, II Admiral Felix B. Stump Vice Admiral Charles B. Martell* Rear Adm ral Philip A. Beshany* General Merrill B. Twining Vice Admiral Kleber S. Masterson* Rear Adm ral Abel T. Bidwell Admiral Alfred G. Ward* Vice Admiral John L. McCrea Major Ger eral Arthur F. Binney Admiral John M. Will Vice Admiral Ralph E. McShane Rear Adm ral Calvin M. Bolster Vice Admiral Walter S. Anderson Vice Admiral Charles L. Melson* Rear Adm ral Harold G. Bowen, Jr.* Vice Admiral Harold D. Baker Vice Admiral Arthur C. Miles Rear Adm ral Frank A. Braisted Vice Admiral Wallace M. Beakley Vice Admiral Milton E. Miles Rear Adm ral Harold M. Briggs Vice Admiral George F. Beardsley Vice Admiral Earle W. Mills Rear Adm ral WilliamA. Brockett* Vice Admiral Donald B. Beary Vice Admiral Marion E. Murphy Rear Adm ral Charles B. Brooks, Jr. Vice Admiral Frank E. Beatty Vice Admiral Lloyd M. Mustin* Rear Adm ral James A. Brown* Vice Admiral Robert E. Blick, Jr. Vice Admiral Frank O'Beirne Rear Adm ral Henry C. Bruton Vice Admiral Charles T. Booth, II* Vice Admiral Francis P. Old Rear Adm ral Louis A. Bryan* Vice Admiral Harold G. Bowen Vice Admiral Howard E. Orem Rear Adm ral Charles A. Buchanan Vice Admiral Roland M. Brainard Vice Admiral Harvey E. Overesch Rear Adm ral Thomas Burrowes Vice Admiral Carleton F. Bryant Vice Admiral Edward N. Parker Rear Adm ral Robert L. Campbell Vice Admiral Edmund W. Burrough Vice Admiral Frederick W. Pennoyer, Jr. Rear Adm ral Milton 0. Carlson Vice Admiral William M. Callaghan Vice Admiral Charles A. Pownall Rear Adm ral Worrall R. Carter Vice Admiral John H. Carson Vice Admiral Thomas C. Ragan Rear Adm ral Robert W. Cavenagh* Vice Admiral Ralph W. Christie Vice Admiral Lawson P. Ramage* Rear Adm ral Lester S. Chambers* Vice Admiral Edward W. Clexton Vice Admiral William L. Rees Rear Adm ral John L. Chew* Vice Admiral Oswald S. Colclough Vice Admiral Robert H. Rice Rear Adm ral Ernest E. Christensen* Vice Admiral John B. Colwell* Vice Admiral Hyman G. Rickover* Rear Adm ral David H. Clark Vice Admiral Thomas S. Combs Vice Admiral Rufus E. Rose Rear Adm ral Henry G. Clark, CEC Vice Admiral Thomas F. Connolly* Vice Admiral Richard W. Ruble Rear Adm ral Sherman R. Clark Vice Admiral George R. Cooper Vice Admiral Theodore D. Ruddock, Jr. Rear Adm ral Leonidas D. Coates, Jr. Vice Admiral William G. Cooper Vice Admiral Lorenzo S. Sabin, Jr. Rear Adm ral Howard L. Collins Vice Admiral John C. Daniel Vice Admiral Harry Sanders Rear Adm ral Joshua W. Cooper Vice Admiral Glenn B. Davis Vice Admiral Walter G. Schindler Rear Adm ral Roy T. Cowdrey Vice Admiral Harold T. Deutermann Vice Admiral William A. Schoech Rear Adm ral Ormond L. Cox Vice Admiral Glynn R. Donaho* Vice Admiral Harry E. Sears Rear Adm ral Richard S. Craighill* Vice Admiral James H. Doyle Vice Admiral Thomas G. W. Settle Rear Adm ral Frederick G. Crisp Vice Admiral Irving T. Duke Vice Admiral William B. Smedberg, III Rear Adm ral Robert E. Cronin Vice Admiral Calvin T. Durgin Vice Admiral Allan E. Smith Rear Adm ral Charles A. Curtze Vice Admiral Ralph Earle, Jr. Vice Admiral Chester C. Smith Rear Adm ral John E. Dacey* Vice Admiral Clarence E. Ekstrom Vice Admiral Roland N. Smoot Rear Adm ral Lawrence R. Daspit* Vice Admiral Emmet P. Forrestel Lieutenant General Edward W. Snedeker Rear Adm ral James R. Davis, CEC* Vice Admiral Roy A. Gano Vice Admiral Selden B. Spangler Rear Adm ral James W. Davis Vice Admiral William E. Gentner, Jr.* Vice Admiral Thomas M. Stokes Rear Adm ral James C. Dempsey* Vice Admiral Elton W. Grenfell Vice Admiral Paul D. Stroop Rear Adm ral Vincent P. de Poix* Lieutenant General Field Harris Lieutenant General James A. Stuart Rear Adm ral Joseph E. Dodson

11 DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Rear Admiral William A. Dolan, Jr. Rear Admiral Sydney M. Kraus Rear Admiral Dennis L. Ryan Rear Admiral Marshall E. Dornin* Rear Admiral Thomas R. Kurtz, Jr. Rear Admiral Ben W. Sarver* Rear Admiral Jack S. Dorsey* Rear Admiral David Lambert* Rear Admiral Malcolm F. Schoeffel Rear Admiral Jennings B. Dow Major General Frank H. Lamson-Scribner Rear Admiral Floyd B. Schultz* Rear Admiral Wallace R. Dowd Rear Admiral Martin J. Lawrence Rear Admiral John N. Shaffer* Rear Admiral Louis Dreller Rear Admiral William H. Leahy Rear Admiral William B. Sieglaff* Rear Admiral Norman J. Drustrup, CEC* Rear Admiral Joseph W. Leverton, Jr. Rear Admiral Harry Smith Rear Admiral Clifford H. Duerfeldt Rear Admiral John K. Leydon* Rear Admiral John V. Smith* Rear Admiral Charles A. Dunn Rear Admiral Theodore C. Lonnquest Rear Admiral Levering Smith* Rear Admiral Donald T. Eller Rear Admiral Almon E. Loomis Rear Admiral John A. Snackenberg Rear Admiral Robert B. Ellis Rear Admiral Wayne R. Loud Rear Admiral Philip W. Snyder Rear Admiral Edward J. Fahy* Rear Admiral Charles H. Lyman, III Rear Admiral Thorvald A. Solberg Rear Admiral James M. Farrin, Jr. Major General William G. Manley Rear Admiral Edward A. Solomons Rear Admiral Emerson E. Fawkes* Rear Admiral Charles F. Martin Rear Admiral Robert H. Speck*

Rear Admiral John J. Fee* Rear Admiral John B. McGovern Rear Admiral Frederick C. Stelter, Jr. Rear Admiral William E. Ferrall Rear Admiral Eugene B. McKinney Rear Admiral Edward C. Stephan Rear Admiral Charles W. Fisher Rear Admiral Kenmore M. McManes Rear Admiral Earl E. Stone Rear Admiral Henry C. Flanagan Rear Admiral Robert W. McNitt* Rear Admiral Charles W. Styer Rear Admiral Eugene B. Fluckey* Rear Admiral John H. McQuilken* Rear Admiral Robert L. Swart Rear Admiral Mason B. Freeman* Rear Admiral Wm. K. Mendenhall, Jr. Rear Admiral William E. Sweeney* Rear Admiral Laurence H. Frost Major General Lewie G. Merritt Rear Admiral Evander W. Sylvester Rear Admiral Robert B. Fulton, II* Rear Admiral William Miller Rear Admiral Frank R. Talbot Rear Admiral Julius A. Furer Rear Admiral Benjamin E. Moore* Rear Admiral Raymond D. Tarbuck Rear Admiral Daniel V. Gallery Rear Admiral Robert L. Moore, Jr. Rear Admiral Arthur H. Taylor Rear Admiral Fillmore B. Gilkeson* Rear Admiral Armand M. Morgan Rear Admiral John McN. Taylor* Rear Admiral Robert 0. Glover Rear Admiral Thomas H. Morton Rear Admiral Theodore A. Torgerson* Rear Admiral Willard K. Goodney Rear Admiral Albert G. Mumma Rear Admiral George C. Towner Rear Admiral Arthur R. Gralla* Rear Admiral Joseph N. Murphy Rear Admiral Robert L. Townsend* Rear Admiral Lucien McK. Grant Rear Admiral William T. Nelson Rear Admiral David M. Tyree Rear Admiral Edward E. Grimm* Rear Admiral Charles A. Nicholson, II Rear Admiral Alexander H. Van Keuren Rear Admiral Peter W. Haas, Jr. Rear Admiral Robert H. Northwood, SC* Rear Admiral Frank Virden Rear Admiral Ira F. Haddock, SC* Rear Admiral Ira H. Nunn Rear Admiral John R. Wadleigh* Rear Admiral Frederick E. Haeberle Rear Admiral Emmet O'Beirne Rear Admiral George H. Wales

Rear Admiral Wesley M. Hague Rear Admiral Edward J. O'Donnell* Rear Admiral Thomas J. Walker, III* Rear Admiral Grover B. H. Hall Rear Admiral Clarence E. Olsen Rear Admiral Frederick B. Warder Rear Admiral Lloyd Harrison Rear Admiral Ernest M. Pace Rear Admiral William W. Warlick Rear Admiral Hugh E. Haven Rear Admiral Charles J. Palmer Rear Admiral Odale D. Waters, Jr.* Rear Admiral Frederick V. H. Hilles Rear Admiral Lewis S. Parks Rear Admiral Hazlett P. Weatherwax Rear Admiral Wellington T. Hines Rear Admiral Goldsborough S. Patrick Rear Admiral Ralph Weymouth* Rear Admiral Morris A. Hirsch* Rear Admiral John B. Pearson, Jr. Rear Admiral Charles D. Wheelock Rear Admiral George A. Holderness. Jr. Rear Admiral Henry S. Persons* Rear Admiral Francis T. Williamson Rear Admiral Paul A. Holmberg* Rear Admiral William F. Petrovic* Rear Admiral Frederick S. Withington Rear Admiral Ralston S. Holmes Rear Admiral Carl J. Pfingstag Rear Admiral Edward A. Wright Rear Admiral Ernest C. Holtzworth Rear Admiral Richard H. Phillips Rear Admiral Howard A. Yeager* Rear Admiral Leroy V. Honsinger Rear Admiral Ben B. Pickett* Rear Admiral Elmer E. Yeomans Rear Admiral Edwin B. Hooper* Rear Admiral Paul E. Pihl Major General Keith B. McCutcheon* Rear Admiral Harold A. Houser Rear Admiral Frank L. Pinney, Jr.* Commodore Harry A. Badt Rear Admiral Herbert S. Howard Rear Admiral Walter H. Price Commodore Harold Dodd Rear Admiral Miles H. Hubbard Rear Admiral Schuyler N. Pyne Brigadier General Edward C. Dyer Rear Admiral Harry Hull* Rear Admiral John Quinn Commodore Stanley D. Jupp Rear Admiral James McC. Irish Rear Admiral Joseph R. Redman Commodore John H. Magruder, Jr. Rear Admiral William D. Irvin* Rear Admiral Harry L. Reiter, Jr.* Brigadier General Ivan W. Miller Rear Admiral Joseph A. Jaap* Rear Admiral Henry A. Renken* Commodore Robert E. Robinson, Jr. Major General Samuel S. Jack Rear Admiral Joseph E. Rice* Commodore Henry A. Schade Major General Arnold W. Jacobsen Rear Admiral Lawrence B. Richardson Commodore Oscar Smith Rear Admiral Ralph K. James Rear Admiral Basil N. Rittenhouse, Jr. Commodore Ralph S. Wentworth Rear Admiral Frank L. Johnson* Rear Admiral Walter F. Rodee Rear Admiral Selectees: Rear Admiral Horace B. Jones, CEC Rear Admiral William K. Romoser Capt Roy G. Anderson* Rear Admiral Timothy J. Keleher Rear Admiral Gordon Rowe Capt Ernest W. Dobie, Jr.* Rear Admiral Sherman S. Kennedy Rear Admiral Donald Royce Capt Alexander S. Goodfellow, Jr.* Rear Admiral Husband E. Kimmel Rear Admiral Edward A. Ruckner* Capt William E. Lemos*

Rear Admiral Grover C. Klein Rear Admiral Thomas J. Rudden, Jr.* Capt Frederick H. Michaelis* Rear Admiral Denys W. Knoll* Rear Admiral George L. Russell Capt Thomas R. Weschler*

12 GENERAL INFORMATION NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

HISTORY

The U. S. Naval Postgraduate School had a mod- even with this addition, the space requirements of est beginning at the Naval Academy at Annapolis the expanded school were not met. in 1909, at which time the first class of ten officers The post-war program called for still further ex- enrolled in a Marine Engineering curriculum. The pansion and the re-establishment of the General need for technically educated officers became evi- Line Curriculum with a greatly increased enroll- dent at the turn of the century. The idea of a naval ment. In 1946 the General Line School was estab- graduate school had its inception in a course of in- lished at Newport, Rhode Island, as an outlying struction in Marine Engineering which the Bureau element of the Postgraduate School and continued of Engineering instituted in 1904. The results of until disestablished in 1952; in 1948 an additional this course were so encouraging that in 1909 General Line School was established at Monterey, the Secretary of the Navy established a School California. The objective of the General Line School of Marine Engineering at the Naval Academy in program — that of providing an integrated course Annapolis. In 1912 the School was designated in naval science to broaden the professional knowl- the Postgraduate Department of the U. S. Naval edge of Academy. unrestricted line officers of the Regular Navy — continued in effect as it had since the incep- The operation of the school was temporarily sus- tion of this program. From 1946 until 1955 a cur- pended during World War I, but in 1919 classes riculum varying in length from six months to one were resumed in converted Marine Barracks on the year provided such a course for Reserve and ex-

Naval Academy grounds. At this time curricula in Temporary officers who had transferred to Regular Mechanical Engineering and Electrical Engineering status. From 1955 to 1962, the curriculum was of were added. With the passing years other curri- nine and one-half months duration. cula — Ordnance Engineering, Radio Engineering, Aerological Engineering and Aeronautical Engineer- The physical growth of the School and its increase in — were added as the Navy's need for officers with in scope and importance were recognized in technical knowledge in these fields became evident. Congressional action which resulted in legislation during the years of 1945 to 1951 emphasizing the In 1927 the General Line Curriculum was estab- academic stature of the School, and providing for lished within the Postgraduate School to provide continued growth in a new location with modern courses of instruction to acquaint junior line offi- buildings and equipment. This legislation author- cers returning from sea duty with modern develop- ized the Superintendent to confer Bachelor's, Mas- ments taking place in the Navy. The courses dealt ter's, and Doctor's degrees in engineering and re- with naval and military subjects for the most part. lated subjects; created the position of Academic

The General Line Curriculum remained as an in- Dean to insure continuity in academic policy; estab- tegral part of the Postgraduate Department until lished the School as a separate naval activity to be the declaration of the emergency prior to the out- known as the United States Naval Postgraduate break of World War II, at which time it was dis- School; authorized the establishment of the School continued because of the need for officers in the at Monterey, California; provided funds to initiate growing fleet. the construction of buildings to house modern laboratories and classrooms at that location. The enrollment in the Postgraduate School increased rapidly in the war years both in the several On 22 December 1951, by order of the Secretary engineering curricula and in the communications of the Navy, the United States Naval Postgraduate curriculum which was added to meet the need for School was officially disestablished at Annapolis, trained communication officers in the naval estab- Maryland, and established at Monterey, California. lishment. The School outgrew its quarters necessi- This completed the transfer of the School from the tating the building of an annex to house the addi- East to the West Coast, which had begun in 1948 tional classrooms and laboratories required, but when Aerology Department and Curricular office

13 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GENERAL INFORMATION

were moved to the new location. Concurrently with The success of the program through the early this relocation the U.S. Naval School (General classes led to the addition of an Arts program in

Line) at Monterey was disestablished as a separate August 1961 to provide for those officers whose pre-

military command and its functions and facilities vious education emphasized the humanities rather were assumed by the U. S. Naval Postgraduate than science and mathematics. School. At the same time, there was established the The continuing growth and projected expansion U. S. Naval Administrative Command, U. S. Naval of the School led the Superintendent to establish, Postgraduate School, Monterey, to provide logistic in the fall of 1961, a special group of staff and support, including supply, public works, medical faculty members to study internal organization. The and dental functions, for the Naval Postgraduate outgrowth of this study coupled with further delib- School and its components. erations of the Superintendent and other staff and faculty members was the decision to undergo major In June 1956, by direction of the Chief of Naval reorganization. In June 1962, the Administrative Personnel, the Navy Management School was estab- Command was disestablished as a separate com- lished as an additional component of the Postgrad- mand, its functions continuing to be performed by uate School. Its mission was to provide an educa- personnel reporting to a new Director of Adminis- tional program for officers in the application of trative and Logistic Services. In August 1962, the sound scientific management practice to the com- three component schools were disestablished and a plex organizational structure and operation of the completely new organization became effective. There Navy with a view to increasing efficiency and econ- is now but one School — the U. S. Naval Postgradu- omy of operation. The first class included only ate School — with unified policy, procedure, and Supply and Civil Engineering Corps officers and purpose. The position of Chief of Staff was replaced emphasis was placed on general management theory, by Deputy Superintendent and responsibility for the financial management, and inventory management. operation of the academic programs was placed In August 1957 this school was expanded to include under the dual control of a naval officer Director input from both Line and Staff Corps officers. Since of Programs and a civilian Dean of Programs. that time the curriculum has been under constant

revision to include new areas of import to, and changes of concept in, the field of management. In ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONS

August 1960, the school curriculum was lengthened The Superintendent of the Postgraduate School is a rear admiral of the line of the Navy. His principal assistants are from a five to a ten month course leading to a mas- a Deputy Superintendent who is a captain of the line, and ter's degree for those who can meet the require- an Academic Dean who is the senior member of the civilian ments for such a degree. Commencing in August faculty. 1964 the Management Curriculum was lengthened The academic programs and direct supporting functions from a four to a five term course, thus requiring are administered and operated through a unique organiza- 12 months for completion. tion composed of Curricular Offices and Academic Depart- ments. The former are staffed by naval officers whose primary Discussions commenced in mid-1957 resulted in fuctions are threefold: (1) academic and military super- the establishment in August 1958 of a Bachelor of vision and direction of officer students; (2) coordinating, Science curriculum in the General Line School and in conjunction with Academic Associates, the elements of each curriculum within their program areas; and (3) con- a change in the name of that school, effective 1 July ducting liaison with curricula sponsor representatives. Offi- 1958, to the General Line and Naval Science School. cer students are grouped into the following curricular pro- The new curriculum, with planned semi-annual grams areas: input of 50 officers, was to become a part of the Aeronautical Engineering Navy's Five-Term Program, with the long range Electronics and Communications Engineering prospect of having the entire program carried out Ordnance Engineering at Monterey. Naval Engineering The curriculum was to include subjects taught in Environmental Sciences the General Line curriculum plus new courses ade- Naval Management and Operations Analysis quate in number, level, and scope to support a de- Engineering Science gree of bachelor of science, no major designated. General Line and Baccalaureate

14 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GENERAL INFORMATION

Officer students in each curricula group pursue similar or Supplementing category a. above is a program entitled Engi' closely related curricula. With most of these areas a com- neering Science. The major portion of the officers selected

mon core program of study is followed for at least half the for this program undergo two terms of refresher and pre- period of residency. requisite study. Those who are so motivated and available for the requisite time may be selected by the Superintendent Objectives and details of curricula are contained else- for a two or three year engineering or science curriculum. where in this catalogue. Those not selected continue in a non-degree program with the primary objective of basic scientific education which The teaching functions of classroom and laboratory in- will better prepare them for advanced functional training struction and thesis supervision are accomplished by a fac- and/or general updating in technical areas. ulty which is organized into eleven academic departments: Logistic service support is rendered by conventional de- Aeronautics partments such as Supply and Disbursing, Public Works,

Business Administration and Economics Dental, Public Affairs and Visit Liaison, etc., grouped

Electrical Engineering organizationally under a Director of Administrative and Government and Humanities Logistic Services. Certain other offices such as those of the Comptroller and Plans are directly responsible to the Deputy Material Science and Chemistry Superintendent in a slightly modified but typical naval staff Mathematics organization. Mechanical Engineering FACILITIES Meteorology and Oceanography Naval Warfare The School is located about one mile east of downtown Monterey on the site of the former Del Monte Hotel. Operations Analysis Modern classroom and laboratory buildings have been con- Physics structed and are situated on a beautifully landscaped cam- Approximately two-thirds of the teaching staff are civilians pus. A group of buildings comprising new Aeronautical of varying professorial rank and the remainder naval offi- Propulsion Laboratories has recently been completed. cers. The latter are spread amongst most of the departments The Superintendent and central administrative officers are with the majority being in the Department of Naval War- located in the main building of the former hotel, now called fare which offers courses only in the naval professional area. Herrmann Hall. The East wing of the main building com-

Detailed listings of faculty members and course offerings plex has been converted into classroom and administrative are contained in later sections of the catalogue. spaces and a portion of the ground floor of the West wing has been similarly converted.

The Academic Program organization just described is tied Spanagel, Bullard, Halligan, and Root Halls are modern together at the top by a naval officer Director of Programs buildings which are devoted to classroom, laboratory and and a civilian Dean of Programs who collaborate to share faculty office spaces. About one-third of Root Hall houses jointly the responsibilities for planning, conduct and admin- the Library and Reference Center. A fifth new building istration of the several educational programs. An Executive of matching architectural style is King Hall — the main Assistant to the Director of Programs similarly shares cur- auditorium. ricular responsibilities with a Dean of Curricula in a position just above the Curricular Officers. Additional smaller buildings spread throughout the campus house specialized laboratory facilities as well as various The close tie between elements of this dual organization is support activities. further typified by the Academic Associates. These are individual civilian faculty members appointed by the Academic STUDENT AND DEPENDENT Dean to work closely with the Curricular Officers in the development and continuing monitoring of curricula — the INFORMATION

Navy's needs being the responsibility of the Curricular Offi- Monterey Peninsula and the cities of Monterey, Carmel, cer and academic soundness being the responsibility of the Pacific Grove, and Seaside, all within 5 miles of the School, Academic Associate. provide community support for the officers of the Post- graduate School. The educational programs conducted at Monterey fall into several general categories: La Mesa Village, located 3 miles from the School, consisting of former Wherry Housing and new Capehart Housing, a. Engineering and scientific education leading to desig- contains 608 units of public quarters for naval personnel. nated baccalaureate and /or advanced degrees. An elementary school is located within the housing area. b. Management education to the Master's level. The Naval Auxiliary Landing Field is located about one c. Undergraduate education leading to a first baccalau- mile from the School. Aircraft are available for maintaining reate degree, either B.S. or B.A. flight proficiency. Cross-country flights up to 1200 miles are

d. Navy professional type education designed to build now permitted. One half-day each week is scheduled for fly- upon and /or broaden the base of professional experience. ing as part of the student work-week.

15 GENERAL INFORMATION NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

On the main School grounds are 149 BOQ rooms, an Open neer's Council for Professional Development (ECPD), Mess, a Navy Exchange, 4 tennis courts, a large swimming originally in 1949, renewed in 1955 and again in 1959. pool and 6 lane bowling alley. An eighteen-tee nine-hole golf The term length at the School is 10 weeks. The School's course has been built and opened on 1 April 1963. It is term credit hours are equivalent to two-thirds semester located in the old polo ground area across the street from hours, as compared with schools using semesters of 15-16 the main campus. weeks.

Medical facilities include a Dispensary at the Naval Aux- Students' performance is evaluated on the basis of a iliary Landing Field, Monterey, supported by the U. S. Army quality point number assigned to the letter grade achieved Hospital, Ford Ord (7 miles away) and the U. S. Navy in a course as follows: Hospital at Oakland (120 miles away). A Dental Clinic is Performance Grade Quality Point Number located in Herrmann Hall. Excellent A 3.0 Good B 2.0 ADMISSIONS PROCEDURES Fair C 1.0 Barely Passing D 0.0 U. S. Navy officers interested in admission to one of the Failure —1.0 curricula offered at the Postgraduate School are referred to X

BuPers Notice 1520, Subject: Postgraduate and Undergrad- When the term hours value of a course is multiplied uate Education Programs, which is published annually by by the quality point number of the student's grade, a qual-

the Chief of Naval Personnel. This directive outlines the ity point value for the student's work in that course is

various educational programs available and indicates the obtained. The sum of the quality points for all courses

method of submitting requests for consideration for each divided by the sum of the term hour value of all courses program. gives a weighted numerical evaluation of the student's performance termed the Quality Point Rating (QPR). stu- A selection board is convened annually by the Chief of A dent achieving a of 2.0 has maintained average in Naval Personnel to select officers, based upon professional QPR a B all courses performance, academic background, and ability, within undertaken with a proper weight assigned for hours. Satisfactory quotas which reflect the Navy's requirements in the various course academic proficiency at the Naval Postgraduate fields of study available. Officers will be notified of selection School has been established at a QPR of 1.0 for all courses of curriculum. by a BuPers Notice at the earliest feasible date after the a

meeting of the selection board, or by official correspondence. Officer students have no major duties beyond applying themselves The curriculum numbers as assigned in the annual BuPers diligently to their studies. It is expected that students will maintain a high level of scholarship de- Notice 1520 are repeated in the title of each curriculum and and velop attributes which are associated a scholar are also included in the list of curricula at the Postgraduate with seeking knowledge and understanding. schedules such School on page 26 and the list of curricula conducted at Program are that the student anticipate civilian institutions on page 64. should spending several hours in evening study each weekday to supplement time available Officers on duty with other branches of service are eligible for this purpose between classes. to attend the Postgraduate School. They should apply in accordance with the directives promulgated by the Depart- Courses listed in this catalogue carry a letter designator ment of the Army, Department of the Air Force, Command- following the course number to indicate the kind of credit that course as ant U. S. Marine Corps, or the Commandant U. S. Coast received for the successful completion of Guard, as appropriate. follows: A Graduate Credit DEGREES, ACCREDITATIONS, AND B Graduate or Undergraduate Credit ACADEMIC STANDARDS C Upper Division Credit D Lower Division Credit

The Superintendent is authorized to confer Bachelor's, E No credit. Master's or Doctor's degrees in engineering or related fields The two numbers in parenthesis (separated by hyphens) upon qualified graduates of the School. This authority is following the course title indicate the hours of instruction subject to such regulations as the Secretary of the Navy per week in classroom and laboratory respectively. Labora- may prescribe, contingent upon due accreditation from time tory hours are assigned half the value shown in calculating to time by the appropriate professional authority of the term hours for the credit value of the course. Thus a (3-2) applicable curricula. Recipients of such degrees must be course (having three hours recitation and two hours lab- found qualified by the Academic Council in accordance with oratory) will be assigned a credit value of 4 term hours. prescribed academic standards. The Naval Postgraduate School was accredited in 1962 DIPLOMAS OF COMPLETION as a full member of the Western College Association completing (WCA). Initial accreditation as an associate member was Diplomas of Completion are issued to students establish eligi- given in 1955 and was renewed in 1959 and 1964. Specific programs which do not offer a degree. To obtain engineering curricula have been accredited by the Engi- bility for a Diploma of Completion, a student must

16 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GENERAL INFORMATION an over-all QPR of 1.0 or better. Where applicable, stu- REQUIREMENTS FOR THE dents obtaining a QPR of 2.75 or better will receive Diplo- MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE mas of Completion "With Distinction."

1. The Master's Degree may be awarded for successful REQUIREMENTS FOR THE completion of a curriculum which has the approval of the Academic Council as meriting the degree. Such curricula BACCALAUREATE DEGREE shall conform to current practice in accredited institutions and shall contain a well defined major. 1. A Bachelor's degree may be awarded for successful completion of a curriculum which has the approval of the 2. General Postgraduate School minimum requirements Academic Council as meriting the degree. Such curricula for the Master of Science Degree are as follows: shall conform to current practice in accredited institutions a. 48 term hours of graduate (A and B) level courses. and shall contain a well defined major. b. A thesis or its equivalent is required.

c. residence. 2. Admission with suitable advanced standing and a One academic year in minimum of two academic years of residence at the Naval d. Departmental requirements for the degree in a speci- Postgraduate School are normally required. With the ap- fied subject. proval of the Academic Council, this residence requirement 3. Admission to a program leading to the Master of may be reduced to not less than one academic year in the Science degree requires a baccalaureate degree with appro- prior case of particular students who have had sufficient priate undergraduate preparation for the curriculum to be preparation at other institutions. pursued. If a student enters the Postgraduate School with

3. The general requirements for the Bachelor of Science inadequate undergraduate preparation, he will be required Degree are as follows: to complete the undergraduate prerequisites in addition to the degree requirements. a. 200 term hours of which at least 80 term hours must

be at an upper division level. 4. To be eligible for the Master's Degree, the student

b. Mathematics through Calculus. must attain a minimum average quality point rating of

c. 16 term hours of general physios. 2.00 in all the A and B level courses in his curriculum and

d. 10 term hours of general chemistry. either 1.50 in the remaining courses or 1.75 in all courses

e. 25 term hours of upper division engineering and/or of the curriculum. In very exceptional cases, small defi- physics. ciences from these grade averages may be waived at the

f. 35 term hours of upper division work in a major field discretion of the Academic Council. of study. g. 36 term hours in Humanities and the Social Sciences. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 4. The general requirements for the Bachelor of Science DOCTOR'S DEGREE Degree in a specified field are as follows: 1. The Doctor's Degree in engineering and related fields a. 216 term hours. is awarded as a result of very meritorious and scholarly b. 36 term hours in Mathematics and the Physical achievement in a particular field of study which has been Sciences. approved by the Academic Council as within the purview of c. 36 term hours in Humanities and the Social Sciences. the Naval Postgraduate School. A candidate must exhibit d. Departmental requirements for award of degree in the faithful and scholarly application to all prescribed courses specified field. of study, achieve a high level of scientific advancement and 5. The general requirements for the Bachelor of Arts establish his ability for original investigation. He shall Degree are as follows: further meet the requirements described in the following a. 200 term hours of which at least 80 term hours must paragraphs. be at an upper division level. 2. Any program leading to the Doctor's degree shall b. 36 term hours in Mathematics and the Physical require the equivalent of at least three academic years of Sciences. study beyond the undergraduate level with at least one aca- c. 36 term hours in Humanities and the Social Sciences. demic year being spent at the Naval Postgraduate School. d. 35 term hours of upper division work in a major field of study. 3. A student seeking to become a candidate for the Doctorate shall hold a Bachelor's degree from a college or 6. To be elegible for the degree, the student attain must university, based on a curriculum that included the pre- a minimum average quality point rating of 1.0 in all courses requisite for full graduate status in the department of his of his curriculum. In very exceptional cases, small defi- major study, or he shall have pursued successfully an equiv- ciences from this figure may be waived at the discretion alent course of study. The student shall submit his previous of the Academic Council. record to the Chairman of the Department of his proposed major subject for determination of his acceptability as a 7. With due regard for the above requirement, the Aca- Doctoral student. demic Council will decide whether or not to recommend the candidate to the Superintendent of the Naval Post- 4. This Chairman will select two or more additional graduate School for the award of the Bachelor's Degree. departments and in consultation with the Chairman of these

17 GENERAL INFORMATION NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

departments will nominate a Doctoral Committee for the 8. The distinct requirement of the Doctorate is success- student. The Committee shall consist of five or more mem- ful completion of a scholarly investigation leading to an bers with at least one representative from each of the original and significant contribution to knowledge in the selected departments. The Chairman of the Department of candidate's major area of study. The subject of the investi- the major will submit the proposed Committee to the gation must be approved, in advance, by the Doctoral Com-

Academic Council for its approval. mittee. When the results of the investigation, in the form of a dissertation, are submitted, the Committee will appoint 5. The Doctoral Committee has full responsibility for two or more referees who will make individual written re- prescribing a program of study, which shall include one ports on the dissertation. The Committee will make the final or more minor fields, suitable to the needs of the student decision on the acceptance of the dissertation. and the requirements for award of the Doctorate.

6. When the program of study in his major and minor 9. After the approval of the dissertation, and not later fields is essentially complete, the student shall be given than two weeks prior to the award of the degree, the Com- qualifying examinations, including tests of his reading mittee will conduct a final oral examinaiton of the candi- knowledge of foreign languages. The selection of these date. The members of the Academic Council or their delegates will invited to attend the examination. this languages depends on the field of study. The minimum is be In a reading knowledge of German or Russian and a second final examination, the candidate will be asked to defend his language selected by his Committee. The language exami- Dissertation and in addition shall be questioned on any nations will be conducted by a committee especially ap- subject deemed important to the Committee. Upon comple- pointed by the Academic Council. The other qualifying tion of the final examination the Committee will nominate examinations will cover the major and minor fields of the successful candidate to the Academic Council for the study; they will be both written and oral and will be con- award of the Doctor's Degree. The Committee will supply ducted by the Doctoral Committee. The members of the to the Council such information concerning the candidate

Academic Council or their delegates will be invited to as may be requested by the Council Secretary. attend the oral examinations. 10. With due regard for all the requirements for award-

7. If the Doctoral Committee decides that the student ing the Doctorate and the recommendations of the Doctoral has successfully completed the qualifying examination, it Committee, the Academic Council will make the final deci- will report this fact to the Academic Council; the student sion to recommend the candidate to the Superintendent of will then be considered to be a candidate for the Doctorate. the Naval Postgraduate School for the award of the degree.

18 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL LIBRARIES

THE LIBRARIES

DESCRIPTION STAFF

The Library system serves the research and instructional George R. Luckett, Professor and Librarian (1950); B.S., needs of the community comprising students, faculty, and Johns Hopkins University, 1949; M.S., Catholic Univer- staff of all departments of the School. It embraces an active sity, 1951. collection of 114,500 books, 180,000 technical documents, over 2400 periodical works currently received, and 140,000 Paul Spinks, Associate Professor and Associate Librarian abstract cards and microcards. These materials parallel the (1959); B.A., University of Oklahoma, 1958; M.S., Uni- School's curricular fields of engineering, physical sciences, versity of Oklahoma, 1959. industrial engineering, management, naval sciences, government and the humanities. Edcar R. Larson, Assistant Professor and Reader Services

The Reference Library, located at the southeast end of Librarian (1959); B.A., University of Washington, 1939; Root Hall, provides the open literature sources such as B.S., University of Washington, 1950. books, periodicals and journals, indexes and abstracting services, pamphlet materials and newspapers. It also fur- Janusz I. Kodrebski, Assistant Professor and Head Cata-

nishes facilities for microfilming and microfilm reading, for loger (1956) ; Officer's Diploma, National War College, photographic and contact reproduction of printed matter, Warsaw, Poland, 1938; M.S., University of Southern and for borrowing, from other libraries, publications not California, 1955. held in its collections.

The Technical Reports and Classified Materials Section is Janusz Tyskziewicz-Lacki, Assistant Professor and Tech- nical Absolutorium, University the principal repository for technical research documents Reports Librarian (1961) ; of received by the School. It houses 180,000 documents. 65.000 of Poznan, Poland. 1924; M.S., University California, of which are classified, and exercises control over the micro- Berkeley, 1958. card collection. A machine information storage and retrieval

system that utilizes the School's computer facilities is now Georgia P. Lyke, Reference Librarian (1952); A. A., Hart available for literature searches of documents received since nell College, 1940. November, 1960. Van Vorhis, Librarian, Physical Sciences and Engi- The Christopher Buckley, Jr., Library is a branch of the Mabel

neering : B.A., University of California. Berkeley, Reference Library and is located on the first floor adjacent (1955) 1926. to the lobby. It is a collection of some 8,000 volumes pertaining principally to naval history and the sea. The establishment of this collection was made possible by the interest Robert Moran Tierney, Acquisitions Librarian (1957): and generosity of Mr. Christopher Buckley, Pebble Beach, B.A., Columbia University, 1937; M.A., San Jose State California, who has been donating books to the School for College, 1962. this Library since 1949.

Alice M. Stude, Cataloger (1957); B.S., University of Minnesota, 1930; M.S., University of California, Berkeley, 1961.

Elsa M. Kuswalt, Cataloger (1958) B.A., University of California, Berkeley, 1957.

Doris Baron, Librarian, Physical Sciences and Engineering (1961); B.A., University of California, Berkeley, 1946; M.S., University of Southern California, Los Angeles, 1960.

Arline Hall Hayden, Librarian (General) (1965); B.A., University of California, Berkeley, 1963; M.L.S., Univer-

sity of California, Berkeley, 1964.

Mary T. Britt, Librarian (1966); B.S., College of St. Catherine, 1947.

Beth Peterson, Cataloger (1958); A.A., Red Oak College, Library Facilities 1938.

LABORATORY FACILITIES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

LABORATORY FACILITIES

Extensive laboratory experimentation is carried on in con- The advanced facilities of the Cascade and Turbomachin- nection with the instructional and research programs of the ery Laboratories are distributed in three buildings, one of various departments. The experimental facilities have been which provides low speed tests with rectilinear, cylindrical greatly improved and expanded in recent years, and further and rotating cascades of large dimensions. The source of improvement is planned for the future. air is a 700 HP fan, used either to draw or to blow air through the test items. The fan delivers about 100,000 cfm The AERONAUTICAL LABORATORIES contain facili- of air at a pressure difference of about 40 inches of water. ties for experimentation and research in aerodynamics, The fan can be run at speeds of 50% and 75% of the structural and stress analysis, aerothermodynamics, rocket design speed. This source can be used also to perform and jet propulsion, and turbomachinery. model tests with flow channels, inlet and discharge casings,

The Subsonic Aerodynamics Laboratory consists of two scrolls and diffusors. The special rectilinear cascade test rig subsonic wind tunnels, one with a 32x45 inch test section is equipped with semi-automatic instrumentation; data are and a speed range up to 185 knots, and the other with a obtained with an electronic logging system for data reduc- 42x60 inch test section and a speed range up to 200 knots. tion on digital computers. A second building houses a Force and moment beam balances measure aerodynamic centrifugal compressor test rig, instrumented for conven- reactions. A small classroom wind tunnel, 7x10 inches in tional performance measurements and for special investiga- cross-section, and a small two-dimensional smoke tunnel tions of three-dimensional flows about both the stationary are also in use. Equipment for operating powered propeller and the rotating vanes. The third building is devoted to

aircraft models is available. Experiments in boundary layers, high speed tests, in three tests cells, monitored from a cen- pressure distribution, component aerodynamics, performance tral control room. A 1250 HP variable-speed axial-flow and dynamics can be performed. compressor, which is instrumented also for interstage measurements, produces high pressure air either for turbine The Structural Test Laboratory contains testing machines testing, or to drive test compressors, pumps, and other test with varying capacities up to 600,000 pounds for demon- items. The compressor is capable of delivering 10,000 cfm stration and analysis of relatively small structures. Large of air at sea-level conditions. The design pressure ratio is aircraft components such as a P2V wing, a F8U-3 wing, three, and speed control is possible between 40% and 100% and an A3D tail are accommodated on the loading floor of of design speed by means of a hydraulic drive. A surge- the laboratory where static vibration tests are carried out. suppressing device makes it possible to operate test items The Dynamics Test Laboratory uses a 20 amplifier analog with greatly varying flow rates. Data acquisition is carried computer, two electromagnetic shakers, associated elec- and out with an electronic logging system as well as with con- tronic instrumentation for demonstrations of the principles ventional instrumentation. Adjacent to the third building is of structural dynamics. a hotspin test unit, where disks and propellers can be rotated at speeds up to 50,000 rpm. Heating and cooling The facilities of the Compressibility Laboratory include elements make it possible to impose radial temperature a transonic wind tunnel having a 4"xl6" test section and gradients. Instrumentation is provided to conduct stress operating in the Mach number range from 0.4 to 1.4; a work, with strain gauges, up to 27,000 rpm and at maximum supersonic wind tunnel having a 4"x4" test section and a temperatures of 1800°F. vertical free-jet of l"xl" cross-section, both operating in the Mach number range from 1.4 to 4; and a 4"xl6" shock The CHEMICAL LABORATORIES provide facilities for tube. Instruments associated with these facilities include undergraduate and graduate study and research in chem- a 9" and 6" Mach-Zehnder interferometers and 9" and istry and chemical engineering. Included for these purposes 5" Schlieren systems for flow observations. are: a radio-chemistry ("hot") laboratory with Geiger and The Rocket and Jet Engine Laboratory facilities provide scintillation counters and special apparatus for handling and for full scale operation of current and future Naval aircraft testing radio-active materials; a molecular spectroscopy jet engines, and for small rocket engines of 2,000 pounds laboratory, including high resolution infra-red and ultra- thrust or less. Two separate and complete test cells are violet spectrophotometers, an electron paramagnetic res- provided in one building for the operations of a J57 engine onance spectrometer, and associated high vacuum mani- with afterburner and for the future installation of a T56 folds; a chemical instruments laboratory for instruction in turboprop engine. A separate engine maintenance shop is the use and theory behind obtaining data with infra-red located adjacent to these test cells. A separately located and ultraviolet spectrophotometers, vapor fractometers, re- external pad and control house are also in use for the fractometers, vapor pressure osmometers, polarographs, and operation of a J34 jet engine and a Boeing XT-50 turbo- other instruments commonly used for chemical determina- prop engine. Rocket engine tests can be run from a com- tions. A plastics laboratory is available where plastics are mon control room in three test cells housed in the rocket synthesized, molded in compression or injection presses, and engine building, which also contains a propellant chemistry their mechanical, physical, and chemical properties are de- laboratory. The three test cells provide for operation of solid termined. The department has a well-equipped fuel and rocket engines, liquid rocket engines, and hybrid or experi- lubricant laboratory, and an explosives laboratory with im- mental engines. pact tester, ballistics mortar, chronograph and other appa-

21 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL LABORATORY FACILITIES

ratus for evaluating explosives. In the rocket propellent facilities are available for intensive study of transmission laboratory, small batches of solid propellents can be pro- and radiation properties of electromagnetic energy, includ- duced and many of the ballistic parameters and mechanical ing a micro-wave anechoic chamber and an antenna model properties measured. Facilities are available for burning rate range. studies. Thrust stands in the adjoining facility provide for The Digital Control Laboratory provides special compu- static firing of solid and liquid propellent motors. tational facilities, including a satellite digital processor, a hybrid The COMPUTER FACILITY provides a variety of serv- linkage system and versatile computer accessing displays. facilities ices to the school. Its primary function is to support the These support studies in signal process- academic programs, serving as a laboratory adjunct to ing, digital communications, surveillance and tracking, con- courses on computer programming, logical design and the trol theory, computer programming, time-sharing systems, use of computers in solving scientific and engineering prob- tactical simulation and war gaming. those of interest specifically to the Navy. lems as well as The Servomechanisms Laboratory is equipped with an- The Facility has a small permanent staff of programmer/ alyzers, recorders and the basic units required to synthesize mathematicians who provide a consulting service to students and test a wide variety of systems. Analog computers serve and faculty in programming and problem formulation. In an important role in the synthesis and analysis of control addition, their efforts are concentrated toward developing systems. and maintaining a good library of programs and subrou- A Standards and Calibration Laboratory is used for pre- tines, improving programming systems and, generally, creat- cision measurements and to calibrate the laboratory instru- ing a suitable environment for class and research use of ments. Excellent standard frequency sources and standard- computers. Current Facility activity includes work in the izing equipment are available. areas of scientific and engineering computing systems programming, information retrieval, simulation and student The MATERIALS LABORATORIES are well equipped administration. for both materials science and materials engineering studies and research. For these purposes standard universal testing The School owns the following digital computers: a machines, hardness testers, etc. are available for mechanical Control Data Corporation (CDC) 1604, 2 CDC 160's and an property determinations. For metallurgical studies the lab- IBM 1401. Both CDC 160 Computers are connected to the oratory is equipped with heat-treating furnaces, metal- CDC 1604 in a satellite mode, thus providing a moderately lographs, and microscopes. A plastics laboratory is avail- complex computer system with which to study and develop able for evaluation of the mechanical, physical and chemical experience in machine-machine interactions such as those properties of plastics. Facilities for basic materials science encountered in operational units in the Navy. studies include: several x-ray diffraction units; precision '67, the plans to replace or all During FY School some heating and powder cameras; Weissenberg x-ray unit; pre- of the above equipment with a large multi-processor system cision goniometers; recording photo-densitometer, etc. Metal accessible simultaneously to users at remote terminals on fabricating equipment includes welding facilities, a swag- the campus. The configuration will provide a general-pur- ing machine, rolling mill, induction and vacuum melting pose time-sharing service of an advanced nature for direct furnaces and a die-casting machine, and provides facilities on-line programming and control of laboratory experiments. for materials processing studies. A laboratory for high and The equipment in the remote stations will range from type- low temperature studies of materials, including creep test- writers in academic departments to small independent a ing machines, afford additional modern equipment for ma- computer in the Digital Control Laboratory. terials research. The ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORIES Laboratory equipment for MATHEMATICS now avail- have ample facilities for comprehensive instructional and able includes an electronic and analogue computer and a research programs in all phases of present-day electrical digital differential analyzer both of which are used to find engineering, including electrical circuits, machinery and the solutions of differential equations; a specially modified measurements, electronic devices, circuits and systems, feed- accounting machine used in fine differences computations, back control mechanisms and systems, and computer tech- a variety of planimeter type instruments including a large nology. precision moment integrator, a Stieltjes integrator and a

The extensive conventional facilities in the Electrical harmonic analyzer. A large number of modern electric desk Circuits and Machinery Laboratories are supplemented by calculators are available in the laboratory for numerical special bridges and other measuring equipment, data-re- methods and statistics. Many special models and demon-

cording devices and generalized machine sets. Analog com- strators, including the only two automatic relay controlled puters are available for simulation and analysis of circuits Wald Sequential Sampling Machines ever made, and other and machines. devices and visual aids in mathematics, probability and mechanics are used in support of courses in these subjects. In the Electronics Laboratories, facilities are provided An 85 foot Foucault Pendulum with an 184 lb. bob is kept for investigating the characteristics of modern electronic in constant operation and display. devices, circuits and equipments at frequencies ranging from d-c to the optical region. Available systems include The MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORIES representative communications, radar, telemetry, sonar and provide facilities for instruction and research in heat-power, countermeasures systems, and navigational aids. Special heat transfer, fluids mechanics, deformable body mechanics,

22 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL LABORATORY FACILITIES

and dynamics. Noteworthy equipment in the heat-power lab- well as teletype and facsimile communications equipment oratories includes a gas fired boiler, 200 psi, and 8000 lb/hr, for the rapid reception and dissemination of weather data

full automatic cpntrols; a 175 HP gas turbine installation, in coded and analyzed form for the entire northern hem- dynamometer loaded; a two dimensional supersonic air isphere. nozzle with Schlieren equipment for analysis of shock-wise The instruments for gathering weather data include flows; a two-stage axial flow test compressor; an experi- rawinsonde equipment, which provides a continuous record- mental single cylinder diesel engine; a multistage cen- ing of temperature, pressure, humidity and wind direction

trifugal blower; an air flow metering bench: hydraulic test and velocities at designated levels above the surface; radio- equipment including a two-stage centrifugal pump, a deep sonde equipment whereby pressure, temperature and hu- well pump, an impulse turbine and a torque converter, a midity information is transmitted to ground via radio single-blow transient testing facility for compact heat ex- signals from heights that may extend above 100,000 feet; changer surfaces; a steam to air facility for testing heat a wiresonde that measures air temperature and humidity exchangers; and a small cryogenic facility for evaluating conditions in the lower strata of the atmosphere, and in- cryopumping surfaces. version meter designed for remote recordings of free air Facilities in the mechanics laboratory include equipment temperature at designated heights in the boundary layer. for static, fatigue, and impact testing. Stress analysis equip- The school has recently installed an automatic picture ment includes instrumentation for multi-channel recording transmission (APT) receiving apparatus for the reception of static and dynamic strains, a photoelastic laboratory, and of pictures from the NIMBUS and TOS weather satellites. facilities for brittle lacquer studies. Dynamics equipment Rectification grid templates are used in the laboratories for includes electrodynamic exciters, force and motion trans- direct correlation of current satellite pictures with conven- ducers and associated instrumentation. An analog computer tional synoptic analyses and nephanalyses. laboratory provides for electronic simulation of linear and The proximity of the Fleet Numerical Weather Facility nonlinear engineering systems. on the school grounds provides introduction to the latest METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY FACILITI- environmental computer products and the high speed data TIES include all instruments in present-day use for meas- links utilized to provide transmission and automatic repro- uring the physical and dynamic state of the atmosphere, as duction through a world-wide network.

Chemical Fuel Analysis by Gas Chromatography

23 LABORATORY FACILITIES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

The school operates a 63-foot boat converted for use in state plasma source with magnetic fields up to 10,000 gauss oceanographic instruction and research. It is utilized for will soon be available for plasma research. The spectros- actual field oceanographic studies by Environmental Sciences copy equipment includes a large grating spectrograph, a students. Included in its installed equipment are deep and large prism spectrograph, and an infrared spectrophotom- shallow echo sounders, a bathythermograph winch, and a eter. deep sea hydrographic winch using 20,000 feet of wire. The acoustics laboratory equipment includes a large Oceanographic equipment installed in the area near the anechoic chamber, a small reverberation chamber, and a school include a wave gauge and a tide gauge for recording multiple-unit acoustics laboratory for student experimen- nearshore wave action and local tide fluctuations. tation in airborne acoustics. Sonar equipment, test tanks, and instrumentation for investigation in underwater sound The PHYSICS LABORATORIES are equipped to carry comprise the sonar laboratory. on instructional and research work in nuclear physics, low temperature and solid state physics, plasma physics, spec- The REACTOR LABORATORY features an AGN-201 troscopy, and acoustics. reactor which has been recently modified to operate at powers up to 1000 watts. The Laboratory provides facilities The laboratory facilities include a nuclear physics lab- and equipment for teaching and research in nuclear physics, oratory centering around a two million volt Van de Graaff radio-chemistry, and reactor physics. accelerator, an Aerojet Nucleonics nuclear reactor operating at power levels up to 1000 watts, and an electron linear accelerator with a maximum energy of 100 million electron SUPERINTENDENT'S GUEST LECTURE SERIES volts, and 20 micro ampere beam intensity. During the third and fourth terms, the eighth period on In low temperature and solid state physics the equip- Wednesdays is scheduled for presentation of a lecture series ment includes nitrogen liquifiers, a Collins helium liquifier, 3 in King Hall for all students, administered by the Director He refrigeration equipment to reach temperatures below of Programs. 1° K, a 12 inch uniform field electromagnet, microwave

gear for spin resonance and maser studies, and high fre- It is the purpose of this series to present eminently qual-

frequency pulse acoustic equipment for phonon studies. ified speakers to talk on international affairs and naval The plasma physics equipment includes a number of professional and technical subjects, to inform as well as to small vacuum systems, a large plasma system, and diag- challenge the thinking of the officer students in areas out- nostic equipment for studies of plasma dynamics. A steady side of their immediate academic pursuits.

Computer Facility

24 CURRKULAR OFFICES and PROGRAMS

ft CURRICULAR OFFICES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

CURRICULA AT THE POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Curriculum Convening Curriculum Number Length Dates

Advanced Science 380 3yrs. January, August

Chemistry _ 380 3yrs. January, August Hydrodynamics 380 3yrs. January, August Mathematics (Applied) 380 3yrs. January, August Material Science _ 380 3yrs. January, August

Physics ( General ) _ 380 3yrs. January, August Physics (Nuclear)

Aeronautical Engineering 610 2yrs. January, August

General _ _ _... 610 3yrs. January, August

Advanced* . „

Electronics and Communications Engineering Communications Engineering 600 2yrs. January, August Basic _ _ 600 3yrs. January, August Advanced _ _ „ Engineering Electronics 590 2yrs. January, August Basic _ 590 3yrs. January, August Advanced _ 590 3yrs. January, August Information and Control _ 472 12-18 mos. January, August Special (CEC) 620 lyr. August Staff Communications 460 lyr. January, August

Engineering Science

Environmental Sciences Advanced Meteorology 372 2yrs. January, August General Meteorology „ 372 2yrs. January, August Oceanography _ _ 440 2yrs. August

General Line and Baccalaureate General Line lyr. August Bachelor of Science „ _ 461 2yrs. January, August Bachelor of Arts _ _ 461 2yrs. January, August

Naval Engineering Naval Engineering (Mechanical) 570 2yrs. August Naval Engineering (Electrical) „ _ 570 2yrs. August Mechanical Engineering (Advanced) 570 3yrs. August Electrical Engineering (Advanced) _ 570 3yrs. August

Navy Management and Operations Analysis Naval Management _ 817 lyr. January, August Management (Data Processing) _ _ 367 lyr. January, August Operations Research /Systems Analysis 360 2yrs. January, August

Ordnance Engineering

Nuclear Engineering (Effects) . 521 2yrs. August

Underwater Physics Systems _ „

Basic . _ „ 535 2yrs. August Advanced _ 535 3yrs. August

Weapons Systems Engineering General _ 530 2yrs. January, August Special _ 530 2yrs. January, August Advanced „ Air/ Space Physics _ 530 3yrs. January, August Chemistry _ _ _ 530 3yrs. January, August Electronics _ 530 3yrs. January, August

'Usually the third year is taken at a civilian university.

26 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ADVANCED SCIENCE

ADVANCED SCIENCE PROGRAMS cle dynamics; also the application of these sciences to flight CURRICULUM NUMBER 380 vehicles and to space technology. Description — The entrance requirement to the Aeronau-

Chemistry tical Engineering curricula, General and Graduate, is a

Hydrodynamics Bachelor of Science degree, Naval Academy or its equiv- Material Science alent. The Naval Academy coverage in the basic prerequi- General Physics site sciences in semester hours in Mathematics (20), Basic Nuclear Physics Engineering (30), Electrical Engineering (14), Physics Applied Mathematics (10) and Chemistry (8).

Objective —To prepare selected officer personnel to deal First year courses of study are listed below in a sequence with the problem of fundamental and applied research in of academic terms following entrance, and include the re- the fields of general physics, nuclear physics, hydrodynam- fresher material usually required, commensurate with the ics, chemistry, material science, and applied mathematics. time elapsed from previous academic experience for the majority of officer students. Since students may enter school Description — Officers nominated for Advanced Science either in August or in January, the same course sequences Curricula are selected from among those first-year students are usually offered beginning twice a year and running enrolled in technical curricula at the Postgraduate School two calendar terms apart. Considerable flexibility in cur- who apply for the Advanced Science Program. Applicants ricular programming is thereby provided, since one or more are carefully screened and only those having a very good of the several course sequences can be delayed or accel- academic background and who appear to have an excellent erated to four terms according to the needs or the validated chance of succeeding in their chosen field are nominated to advanced standing of each student. the Chief of Naval Personnel. When the first-year curriculum has been essentially com- Officers selected for Advanced Science Curricula completed, students may be nominated for candidacy in one first at the S. Naval Postgraduate School, plete their year U. of the graduate curricular options: aerospace dynamics, and spend their second and third years of study at a may flight structures, propulsion, or avionics. Courses to suit university. curriculum at the civilian selected civilian The the option are tabulated below. Students who continue high university for each officer is arranged from courses selected scholastic achievement may be admitted to a third year to suit the needs of the Navy, to develop the capabilities of either at this School or at one of the civilian institutions the individual student, and to meet the ultimate objective listed. Either the Master or the Engineering Degree may- of his specialty. be earned in these curricula.

The Advanced Science Curricula normally lead to the Students who do not enter candidacy for a graduate cur- Master of Science degree for those officers meeting the re- riculum may continue in one of the second-year options quirements for that degree. listed, including the flight performance option, leading to the B.S. (A.E.) Degree.

FIRST YEAR AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING PROGRAM August Input CURRICULUM NUMBER 610 First five terms are common to all curricula. First Term Robert Stanley Hutches, Commander, U.S. Navy; Cur- Ae 101C Aero-Statics 3- 2 ricular Officer; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1945; B.S., Ae 102C Aeromechanics _ 3- 2 Aeronautical Engineering, U. S. Naval Postgraduate Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices School, 1953; M.S., Univ. of Minnesota, 1954; Naval with Geometric Applications 3- 1 War College, 1962. Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4- 13- 5 Charles Horace Kahr, Jr., Academic Associate (1947); B.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1944; M.S., 1945. Second Term Ae 211C Solid Mechanics 3- 2 Lawrence Cleveland Chambers, Lieutenant Commander, Ae 301 C Technical Aerodynamics 3- 2 U.S. Navy; Assistant Curricular Officer; B.S., U.S. Naval Ae 381C Subsonic Laboratory 0- 3 Academy, 1952 ; B.S. Aeronautical Engineering, U. S. Ae 401C Aerothermodynamic Fundamentals 3- 2 Naval Postgraduate School, 1959; M.S. Aeronautical En- Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- gineering, Stanford Univ., 1960. 14- 9

Objective — To provide officers with advanced aeronau- Third Term 3- tical education to meet Navy technical requirements in Ae 212C Structural Analysis ...„ 2 3- 2 flight vehicles and their environmental fields. Curricula are Ae 302C Airfoil and Wing Theory _ Flow.... 3- edited to suit the field of the major, choosing fundamental Ae 501B Thermodynamics of Compressible 2 or advanced material from mathematics, mechanics, physics, Ae 581B Gas Dynamics Laboratory „ 0- 3 chemistry, metallurgy, structural analysis, aerodynamics, Ma 262B Vector Mechanics _ _ 4- propulsion, electricity, electronics, environmental and vehi- 13- 9

27 AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL.

Fourth Term SECOND YEAR Ae 213B Structural Components 1 3- 2 August Input Ae 303C Flight Vehicle Performance _ 3- 3 AERODYNAMICS (GENERAL)-2 Year B.S. (A.E.) Ae 402B Aircraft Propulsion 3- 2 Ae 481B Propulsion Laboratory 0- 3 (Group AG) EE 105C Basic Electrical Phenomena 3- 2 First Term 12-12 Ae 111B Fundamentals of Dynamics 3- 2 Ae 181B Fundamental Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3 Fifth Term Ae 321C Flight Stability and Control 1 3- 3 Ae 281B Structures Laboratory 0- 3 Ae 420B Elements of Combustion EE 106C Basic Circuit Analysis 1 3- 2 and Heat Transfer 3- 2 Ma 416C Numerical Methods and PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 FORTRAN Programming 4- 1 13-12 MS 208B Properties of Materials 3- 2

If). 8 Second Term Ae 241B Elements of Aeroelasticity 3- 2

Ae 322C Flight Stability and Control II... 3- 3 Ae 414B Fundamentals of Rockets. 3- 2 FIRST YEAR Ae 482B Thermodynamics Laboratory 0- 3 January Input MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- COMMON CURRICULA 13-10

Third First Term (Term III) Term Ae 314B Adanced Flight Vehicle Performance 3- 2 Ae 101C Aero-Statics 3- 2 Ae 502B Flow Dynamics 4- Ae 102C Aeromechanics 3- 2 Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices OA 131B Methods of Operations Research and Systems Analysis 4- with Geometric Applications 3- 1 Ae 214B Structural Components II... 3- 2 Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables..... 4- Ae 283B Structural Performance I- 2 13- 5 15- 6 Second Term (Term IV) Fourth Term Ae 21 1C Solid Mechanics 3- 2 Ae 271B Fundamentals of Flight Vehicle Design.... 3- Ae 301C Technical Aerodynamics 3- 2 3 Ae 340B Fundamentals of Automatic Control. 3- 2 Ae 381C Subsonic Laboratory 0- 3 Ae 503B Boundary Layers 4- Ae 401C Aerothermodynamic Fundamentals 3- 2 OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- 14- 5 14- 9

Third Term (Term V) Ae 501B Thermodynamics of Compressible Flow.... 3- 2 Ae 581B Gas Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3 SECOND YEAR

EE 105C Basic Electrical Phenomena 3- 2 August Input Ma 416C Numerical Methods and FLIGHT PERFORMANCE-2 Year B.S. (A.E.) FORTRAN Programming 4- 1 (Group AF) 10- 8 First Term Fourth Term (Term I) Ae 111B Fundamentals of Dynamics 3-2 Ae 212C Structural Analysis 3- 2 Ae 181B Fundamental Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3

Ae 302C Airfoil and Wing Theory 3- 2 Ae 321C Flight Stability and Control 1 3- 3 Ae 402B Aircraft Propulsion 3- 2 Ae 420B Elements of Combustion Ae 481B Propulsion Laboratory 0- 3 and Heat Transfer 3- 2

EE 106C Basic Circuit Analysis 1 3- 2 PS 351 B Probability and Statistics ...„ 4- 2 12-11 13-12

Fifth Term (Term II) Second Term

Ae 213B Structural Components 1 3- 2 Ae 241B Elements of Aeroelasticity 3- 2 Ae 281B Structures Laboratory _ 0- 3 Ae 322C Flight Stability and Control II 3- 3 Ae 303C Flight Vehicle Performance 3- 3 Ae 414B Fundamentals of Rockets 3- 2 Ma 262B Vector Mechanics ; 4- Ae 482B Thermodynamics Laboratory _ 0- 3 MS 208B Properties of Materials..... „. 3- 2 MN 310C Engineering Economics _ 4- 13-10 13-10

28 ) )

N WAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

Third Term. SECOND YEAR Ae 214R Structural Components II 3- 2 January Input Ae 283R Structural Performance 1- 2 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE-2 Year B.S. (A.E.) Ae 31 tR Advanced Flight Vehicle Performance 3- 2 (Group AF) Ae 332C Flight Test Evaluation 1 2-

Ae 382C Flight Test Evaluation Laboratory 1 0- 4 First Term (Term III) OA 131B Methods of Operations Research Ae 111B Fundamentals of Dynamics 3- 2 and Systems Analysis 4- Ae 181R Fundamental Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3

13-10 Ae 321 C Flight Stability and Control 1 3- 3 Ae 420R Elements of Combustion

and Heat Transfer 3- 2 Fourth Term PS 351R Probability and Statistics 4- 2

Ae 271R Fundamentals of Flight Vehicle Design.... 3- 3 13-12 Ae 333R Flight Test Evaluation II 2-

Second ( • Ae 383R Flight Test Evaluation Laboratory II 0- 4 Term Term IV

Ae 340B Fundamentals of Automatic Control 3- 2 Ae 241R Elements of Aeroelasticity 3- 1? OA 510R Systems Analysis 4- Ae 322C Flight Stability and Control II 3- 3 Ae 414B Fundamentals of Rockets 3- 2 12- 9 Ae 482R Thermodynamics Laboratory 0- 3 MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- SECOND YEAR 13-10 January Input Third Term (Term V) Ae 214R Structural Components II 3- 2 AERODYNAMICS (GENERAD-2 Year B.S. (A.E.) Ae 283R Structural Performance 1- 2 (Group AG) Ae 314R Advanced Flight Vehicle Performance 3- 2 Ae 332C Flight Test Evaluation I 2- First Term (Term III) Ae 382C Flight Test Evaluation Laboratory I....:...... 0- 4

.-.. 3- 2 Ae 111B Fundamentals of Dynamics 9-10 Ae 181B Fundamental Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3 Ae 321C Flight Stability and Control 1 3- 3 Fourth Term (Term I) Ae 420R Elements of Combustion Ae 271R Fundamentals of Flight Vehicle Design.... 3- 3 and Heat Transfer 3- 2 Ae 333R Flight Test Evaluation II 2- Ae 383R Flight Test Evaluation II 0- 4 PS 351 R Probability and Statistics . 4- 2 Laboratory

13-12 Ae 340R Fundamentals of Automatic Control 3- 2 OA 131R Methods of Operations Research and Systems Analysis 4- Second Term (Term TV) 12- 9 Ae 241R Elements of Aeroelasticity 3- 2 Ae 322C Flight Stability and Control II 3- 3 SECOND YEAR Ae 414R Fundamentals of Rockets 3- 2 Ae 482R Thermodynamics Laboratory 0- 3 FLIGHT DYNAMICS-3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- (Group AA) 13-10 First Term (August Input, Term I; January Input, Term III)

Th ird Term ( Term V Ae 325B Flight Dynamics I 3- 3

Ae 214B Structural Components II 3- 2 Ae 521A Fundamentals of Flow Dynamics 4-

Ae 283R Structural Performance 1- 2 Ma 272C Complex Variables 4- Ae 314R Advanced Flight Vehicle Performance.... 3- 2 Ma 246R Partial Differential Equations 4- Ae 502R Flow Dynamics 4- 15- 3 11- 6 Second Term (August Input, Term II; January Input, Term TV) Fourth Term (Term I) Ae 121B Potential Flows and Roundary Ae 271B Fundamentals of Flight Vehicle Design.... 3- 3 Value Problems 3- 2 Ae 340R Fundamentals of Automatic Control 3- 2 Ae 326R Flight Dynamics II - 3- 3 Ae 503R Roundary Layers 4- Ae 522A Boundary Layer Flows 4- OA 131R Methods of Operations Research Ma 248R Differential Equations for

and Systems Analysis.. _ 4- Optimum Control _ „ _... 3-

14- 5 13- 5

29 ) ;

AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Third Term (August Input, Term III; SECOND YEAR January Input, Term I) FLIGHT STRUCTURES-3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. Dynamics 3- 2 Ae 327B Space Vehicle (Group AS) Ae 431A Principles of Turbomachines 4- Ae 483A Turbomachinery Laboratory 0- 3 First Term (August Input, Term I; Ae 523A Fundamentals of Compressible Flow 4- January Input, Term III)

Ae Elective 4- Ae 115A Engineering Dynamics I 4-

15- 5 Ae 131A Continuum Mechanics I 4 Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; Ae 214B Structural Components II 3- January Input, Term II) Ae 283B Structural Performance 1 Ae 341A Automatic Control I 3 Ae 325B Flight Dynamics I 3 Ae 432A Advanced Theory of Turbomachines 4 15 3 Ae 524A Supersonic Aerodynamics Second Term ( August Input, Term II Ae 583A Gas Dynamics Laboratory January Input, Term TV)

Ae Elective 4 Ae 116A Engineering Dynamics II 4-

It Ae 132A Continuum Mechanics II 4- Term V (Summer) both August and January Inputs Ae 182A Engineering Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3 Industrial Tour at assigned aerospace industry. Ae 326B Flight Dynamics II 3- 3 Ma 245B Partial Differential Equations 3- 14- 6 SECOND YEAR Third Term (August Input, Term III; January Input, Term I) GAS DYNAMICS-3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. Ae 133A Solid Mechanics I 4- (Group AD) Ae 244A Matrix Structural Analysis 3- 2

First Term (August Input, Term I; Ae 327B Space Vehicle Dynamics 3- 2 January Input, Term III) Ae 521A Fundamentals of Flow Dynamics 4-

Ae 115A Engineering Dynamics I 4- 14- 4 Ae 521A Fundamentals of Flow Dynamics 4- Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; Ma 272C Complex Variables 4- January Input, Term II) Ma 246B Partial Differential Equations 4- Ae 134A Solid Mechanics II 4-

16- Ae 245A Plates and Shells 4-

Second Term (August Input, Term II; Ae 275A Flight Vehicle Design 3- 3 January Input, Term IV Ae 522A Boundary Layer Flows 4- Ae 116A Engineering Dynamics II 4- 15- 3 Ae 121B Potential Flows and Term V (Summer) both August and January Inputs Boundary Value Problems 3- 2 Industrial Tour at assigned aerospace activity. K ». 182A Engineering Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3

Ae 522A Boundary Layer Flows 4- Ma 248B Differential Equations for SECOND YEAR Optimum Control 3- FLIGHT PROPULSION (ROTATING MACHINERY) 14- 5 3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. Third Term (August Input, Term III; (Group AT) January Input, Term I)

Ae 244A Matrix Structural Analysis 3- 2 First Term (August Input, Term I; Ae 431A Principles of Turbomachines 4- January Input, Term III)

Ae 483A Turbomachinery Laboratory 0- 3 Ae 115A Engineering Dynamics I 4-

Ae 523A Fundamentals of Compressible Flow 4- Ae 131A Continuum Mechanics I 4- Ae Elective 4- Ae 521A Fundamentals of Flow Dynamics 4-

15- 5 Ma 272C Complex Variables 4- Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; 16-

January Input, Term II) Second Term (August Input, Term II; Ae 245A Plates and Shells 4 January Input, Term IV) Ae 432A Advanced Theory of Turbomachines 4 Ae 116A Engineering Dynamics II 4- Ae 583A Gas Dynamics Laboratory Ae 121B Potential Flows and Boundary Ae 524A Supersonic Aerodynamics 3 Value Problems 3- 2 Ae Elective 4 Ae 182A Engineering Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3

15 Ae 132A Continuum Mechanics II 4- Term V (Summer) both August and January Inputs Ae 522A Boundary Layer Flows _ 4- Industrial Tour at assigned aerospace industry. 15- 5

30 ;

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

Third Term (August Input, Term III; SECOND YEAR January Input, Term I) AEROELECTRONICS-3 Year M.S. Ae 133A Solid Mechanics I 4- (Group AX) Ae 431A Principles of Turbomachines 4- First Term ( August Input, Term I Ae 483A Turbomachinery Laboratory 0- 3 January Input, Term III) Ae 523A Fundamentals of Compressible Flow 4- Ae 325B Flight Dynamics 1 3- 3 Ma 246B Partial Differential Equations 4- EE 107C Basic Circuit Analysis II 3- 2 16- 3 EE 231C Electronics I 4- 3 Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; Ma 272C Complex Variables 4- January Input. Term II) 14- 8 Ae 134A Solid Mechanics II 4- Second Term (August Input, Term II; Ae 432A Advanced Theory of Turbomachines 4- January Input, Term IV) Ae 583A Gas Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3 Ae 115A Engineering Dynamics I 4- Ae 524A Supersonic Aerodynamics 3- 2 Ae 326B Flight Dynamics II 3- 3 Ma 248B Differential Equations for EE 113B Linear Systems Analysis 4- 3 Optimum Control 3- EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 14- 5 15- 9 Term V (Summer) both August and January Inputs Third Term (August Input, Term III; Industrial Tour at assigned aerospace industry. January Input, Term I) Ae 327B Space Vehicle Dynamics 3- 2 SECOND YEAR EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 FLIGHT PROPULSION (ROCKETS) EE 621B Electromagnetics I 3- 2 Ma 245B Partial Differential Equations 3- 3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. 12- 8 (Group AR) Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV;

First Term (August Input, Term I; January Input, Term II) 3- 2 January Input, Term III) Ae 341A Automatic Control I 41 Control Systems I _... 3- 3 Ae 115A Engineering Dynamics I 4- EE IB Feedback 4- Ae 410A Statistical Thermodynamics 3- 2 EE 622B Electromagnetics II 4- 2 Ae 521A Fundamentals of Flow Dynamics 4- PS 351 B Probability and Statistics Ma 246B Partial Differential Equations 4- 14- 7

15- 2 Term V (Summer) both August and January Inputs at assigned aerospace activity. Second Term (August Input, Term II; Industrial Tour January Input, Term IV)

Ae 116A Engineering Dynamics II 4- THIRD YEAR Ae 182A Engineering Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3 FLIGHT DYNAMICS-3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. Ae 465A Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics.. 4- (Group AA) Ae 522A Boundary Layer Flows 4- First Term (August Input, Term I; Ma 248B Differential Equations for January Input, Term III) Optimum Control 3- Ae 115A Engineering Dynamics I 4- 15- 3 Ae 131A Continuum Mechanics I 4- Third Term (August Input, Term III; Ae 484A Turbomachinery Laboratory II 0- 3 January Input, Term I) PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2

Ae 421A Heat Transfer I 4- 12- 5 Ae 461A Combustion Thermodynamics 3- 2 Second Term (August Input, Term II; Ae 523A Fundamentals of Compressible Flow 4- January Input, Term IV) Ae Elective _ 4- Ae 116A Engineering Dynamics II 4- 15- 2 Ae 132A Continuum Mechanics II 4- Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; Ae 182A Engineering Dynamics Laboratory 0- 3 January Input, Term II) MN 310C Engineering Economics — 4- Ae 422A Heat Transfer II 4- 12- 3 Ae 462A Aerothermochemistry 3- 2 Third Term (August Input, Term III; Ae 524A Supersonic Aerodynamics 3- 2 January Input, Term V) Ae 583A Gas Dynamics Laboratory _. 0- 3 Ae 244A Matrix Structural Analysis 3- 2 Ae Elective _ 4- Ae 251A Structural Dynamics 4- 14- 7 OA 131B Methods of Operations Research Term V (Summer) both August and January Inputs and Systems Analysis 4- Industrial Tour at assigned aerospace industry. 11- 2

31 ;

AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; Third Term (August Input, Term III; January Input, Term I) January Input, Term V) Ae 245A Plates and Shells 4- Ae 251A Structural Dynamics 4- Ae 242A Principles of Aeroelasticity 3- 2 Ae 243A Thermo-Structural Analysis 3- 2 OA 510B Systems Analysis _ 4- OA 131B Methods of Operations Research

11- 2 and Systems Analysis 4- 11- 2 Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; THIRD YEAR January Input, Term I)

GAS DYNAMICS-3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. Ae 242A Principles of Aeroelasticity 3- 2 Ae 252A Plasticity, Visco-Elasticity and Fatigue.... 4- (Group AD) OA 510B Systems Analysis 4-

11- 2 First Term (August Input, Term I January Input, Term III) THIRD YEAR Ae 131A Continuum Mechanics I 4- Ae 484A Turbomachinery Laboratory 0- 3 FLIGHT PROPULSION (ROTATING MACHINERY) Ae 525A Hypersonic Aerodynamics 3- 2 3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 (Group AT) 11- 7 First Term (August Input, Term I; Second Term (August Input, Term II; January Input, Term III) January Input, Term IV) Ae 433A Advanced Propulsion Systems 4- Ae 132A Continuum Mechanics II 4- Ae 484A Propulsion Laboratory 0- 3

Ae 541A Viscous Hypersonic Flow 4- Ae Elective _ _... 4- MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2

12- 12- 5

Third Term (August Input, Term III; Second Term (August Input, Term II; January Input, Term V) January Input, Term IV) 475A Turbopropulsion Design _ 4- 2 Ae 133A Solid Mechanics I 4- Ae 485A Advanced Propulsion Laboratory 0- 3 Ae 542A Hypersonic Techniques 3- 2 Ae OA 131B Methods of Operations Research Ae Elective 4- 4- and Systems Analysis 4- MN 310C Engineering Economics 12- 11- 2 5 Third Term (August Input, Term III; Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; January Input, Term V) January Input, Term I) Ae 260A Structural Problems in Propulsion 2- 3 Ae 134A Solid Mechanics II 4- Ae 434A Space Power Plants 3- Ae 543A Magnetohydrodynamics 4- Ae 492A Power Plants Seminar 1- 4 OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- OA 131B Methods of Operations Research 12- and Systems Analysis 4-

10- 7 THIRD YEAR Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; January Input, Term I) FLIGHT STRUCTURES-3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. Ae 491A Selected Problems in Turbopropulsion.... 3- 3 (Group AS) Ae 496A Advanced Power Generation 0- 4 OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- First Term (August Input, Term I; 7- 7 January Input, Term III) Ae 410A Statistical Thermodynamics 3- 2 THIRD YEAR Ma 272C Complex Variables 4- FLIGHT PROPULSION (ROCKETS) PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 3 Year M.S. (A.E.) or Ae.E. 11- 4 (Group AR)

Second Term (August Input, Term II; First Term (August Input, Term I; January Input, Term IV) January Input, Term III)

Ae 121B Potential Flows and Boundary Ae 131A Continuum Mechanics I 4- Value Problems 3- 2 Ae 493A Advanced Problems in Combustion Ae 465A Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics.. 4- and Aerophysics I 3- 2 MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2

11- 2 11- 4

32 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING

Second Term (August Input, Term II; Civilian universities currently used in third year work January Input, Term IV) and the fields in which they provide the strongest compe- Ae 132A Continuum Mechanics II 4- tence for advanced study are as follows: Ae 494A Advanced Problems in Combustion CALIFORNIA INST. OF TECHNOLOGY, PASADENA, and Aerophysics II 3- 2 CALIF. MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- Aerodynamics 11- 2 Structures Propulsion Third Term (August Input, Term III; Jet January Input, Term V) MASSACHUSETTS INST. OF TECHNOLOGY, Ae 133A Solid Mechanics I 4- CAMBRIDGE, MASS. Ae 434A Space Power Plants 3- Astronautics Ae 492A Power Plants Seminar 1- 4 Airborne Weapons Systems OA 131B Methods of Operations Research UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN, ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN and Systems Analysis 4- Aerodynamics 12- 4 Aero-instrumentation

Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; Propulsion January Input, Term I) Structures Nuclear Engineering Ae 134A Solid Mechanics II 4- Ae 496A Advanced Power Generation 0- 4 PRINCETON UNIVERSITY, PRINCETON, N.J. OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- Aerodynamics (flight mechanics) 8- 4 Propulsion COLLEGE OF AERONAUTICS, CRANFIELD, ENGLAND Aerodynamics THIRD YEAR Aircraft Design Propulsion AEROELECTRONICS Aircraft Electronics 3 Year M.S. STANFORD UNIVERSITY, PALO ALTO, CALIF. (Group AX) Aero- and Gasdynamics Structures

First Term (August Input, Term I; Guidance and Control January Input, Term III) EE 234C Pulse Techniques and High Frequency Tubes 3- 3 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS EE 433A Radar Systems 4- 2 MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- ENGINEERING PROGRAMS

11- 5 CURRICULA NUMBERS 590, 600, 472, Second Term (August Input, Term II; and 620 January Input, Term TV) Robert Edward Sheldon, Commander, U.S. Navy; Cur- Ae 551A Fundamental Concepts of Fluid Mechanics 4- 2 ricular Officer: B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1952; B.S., EE 114B Communication Theory I 4- Engineering Electronics, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, EE 419B Non-linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 1959. 11- 6 John Robert Ward, Academic Associate; B.Sc, Univ. of Third Term (August Input, Term III; Sydney, 1949; B.E., 1952; Ph.D., 1958. January Input, Term V) John Richard King, Lieutenant, U. S. Navy; Assistant Cur- Ae 552A Flow of Compressible Fluids 4- ricular Officer; B.S., Communications Engineering, U.S. EE 233B Communications Circuits and Systems.... 4- 3 Naval Postgraduate School, 1965. OA 131B Methods of Operations Research and Systems Analysis 4- Roy Elwood Lawton, Lieutenant, U.S., Navy; Assistant Curricular Officer; BSEE, Univ. of Washington, 1961. 12- 3 ENGINEERING ELECTRONICS (590) and Fourth Term (August Input, Term IV; COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING (600) January Input, Term I) Objective — The objective of the Bachelor of Science

Ae 553A Viscosity, Turbulence and Boundary program is to educate officers in the basic scientific and Layer Effects in Fluid Flow 3- engineering fields related to electronics and communications EE 571A Statistical Communication Theory. 4- and their application to the art of naval warfare. OA 510B Systems Analysis _ _.. 4- The objective of the Master of Science program is to edu- 10- 2 cate a selected group of academically qualified officers to

33 B

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL develop a particular competence and ability in directing the Second Year Common Curriculum development, evaluation and operation of electronic and (for BS Programs) communications systems, as required by the Navy. First Term EE 214C Electronic Communication Circuits 4- 3 Description — Officers ordered for instruction in Elec- EE 215C Pulse and Waveforming Circuits 4- 3 tronics or Communications Engineering normally enter a EE 611C Electromagnetic Fields _ 4- basic core curriculum for the first four terms. However, PH 604C Structure of Atoms and Solids 4- officers with recent and appropriate academic backgrounds may be placed in a correspondingly advanced program. At 16- 6 the end of the first four terms, officers will be selected Second Term either for an advanced 3-year curriculum or for a 2-year EE 116B Communications Theory II 3- 2 curriculum. This selection is based upon the Superintend- EE 216C Special Electronic Devices 4- 2 ent's appraisal of the individual's academic ability and is EE 612C Transmission of Electromagnetic Energy 3- 2 subject to final approval by the Chief of Naval Personnel. PS 311C Introduction to Probability & Statistics.... 4- 1

For properly qualified entering students, successful comple- 14- 7 tion of one of the two 2-year curricula leads to the award of a Bachelor of Science degree in either Engineering Elec- Second Year Common Curriculum tronics or Communications Engineering, while successful (for MS Programs) completion of one of the 3-year curricula leads to the award of a Master of Science degree in one of these same two First Term fields. EE 214C Electronic Communication Circuits 4- 3 EE 621B Electromagnetics I 3- 2 PS 321B Probability 4- 2 First Year Curriculum (for BS and MS Programs) PH 605B Atomic Physics 4- First Term 15- 7 EE 111C Fields and Circuits 4- 4 Second Term Ma 150C Vectors and Matrices with EE 215C Pulse and Waveforming Circuits. 4- 3 Geometric Appl 4- 1 EE 571A Statistical Communication Theory 3- 2 Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4- EE 622B Electromagnetics II 4- Ph 105D Mechanics and Thermodynamics 4- PH 705B Electronic Processes in Materials 4- 2 16- 5 15- 7 Second Term Third Term EE 112C Circuit Analysis 4- 3 EE 217B Advanced Electron Devices 4- 2 EE 211C Electron Devices and Circuits 4- 2 EE 321 C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 Ma 241 C Elementary Differential Equations 3- PS 322A Decision Theory and Classical Statistics 3- 2 Ma 251C Elementary Infinite Series 3- *EE 433A Radar Systems 4- 2

14- 5 14-10 •Communications Engineering students will substitute EE 631 Third Term Antenna Engineering (3-3) EE 113B Linear Systems Analysis 4- 3 EE 212C Electronic Circuits I 4- 3 Ma 271C Complex Variables 4- ENGINEERING ELECTRONICS PH 205C Waves and Particles 4- CURRICULUM NUMBER 590 16- 6 BS PROGRAM Fourth Term

EE 114B Communication Theory I 4- For the last two terms of the second year, students in

EE 213C Electronic Circuits II 4- 3 the 2-year BS program are permitted to elect a number of EE 731C Electronic Measurements _ 3- 4 courses to further their individual interests and Naval ex- MN 301C Basic Management I 4- perience. Four courses not exceeding 24 total hours or 3 labs per week are required for each term. The choice of 15- 7 elective courses is subject to the approval of the Curricular Fifth Term (includes leave period) Officer and Academic Associate. EE 811C Introduction to Digital Computers 3- 3 fEE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 Third Term JMa 245B Partial Differential Equations 3- *EE 254B Transistor and Solid State Devices tMa 260C Vector Analysis 3- and Circuits _ 3- 3

(BS) 6- 7 EE 41 IB Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 (MS) 9- 3 MN 302C Basic Management II _..- _ 4- {Required course for BS program PH 450C Underwater Acoustics 3- 2

^Required course for MS program 13- 8

34 E

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING

Fourth Term Fourth Term

*EE 419B Non-Linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 EE 122A Network Synthesis I 4- EE 432B Pulse Radar 3- 3 *EE 481B Electronic Countermeasures 3- 3 *EE 455B Sonar Systems 3- 3 OA 151B Reliability Engineering and OA 101C Elements of Operations Research/ Systems Analysis 3- 951 Thesis Seminar 0- Systems Anal 4- 1 EE E 1 Thesis 0- 13-11 3

*Typical Electives. 10- 7 *Typicol Electives. MS PROGRAM

Students selected for an MS program in Engineering OPTION ll-INFORMATION AND CONTROL Electronics will continue their studies in one of two options (Group El) listed below. These options are designated to develop a Second Year particular competence in Advanced Electronics or Informa- Fourth Term tion and Control Systems. The final six terms of these pro- EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 grams are a combination of required and elective courses. EE 541A Signal Processing 4- selection must Where elective courses are permitted, the EE 812B Logical Design and Circuitry 4- meet the approval of the Curricula! Officer and Academic Ma 423B Advanced Digital Computer Programming 4- Associate as being consistent with the option major. 15- 3 The third term of the third year may be spent in an in- Fifth Term (includes leave period) dustrial electronics laboratory. During this period, the stu- Field trip and/or supervised project work, and/or appro- dent works as a junior engineer on a selected project. priate courses.

Third Year OPTION l-ADVANCED ELECTRONICS First Term (Group EA) EE 419B Non-Linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 Second Year EE 551A Information Networks 3- 2 OA 121A Principles of Operations Analysis 4- 1 Fourth Term EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 Thesis 0- 3

EE 541A Signal Processing 4- 10-11 EE 652A Microwave Circuits and Measurements .... 3- 2 Second Term 152B Mechanics II 4- PH *EE 417A Modern Control Theory 3- 1 14- 5 EE 462A Automation and System Control 3- 3 MN 302C Basic Management II 4- Fifth Term (includes leave period) EE 951 Thesis Seminar 0- 1

Field trip, and/or supervised project work, and/or ap- Thesis 0- 3 propriate elective courses. 10- 8 Third Term Industrial tour or supervised project work. Third Year Fourth Term First Term EE 122A Network Synthesis I 4- *EE 256B Theory of Semiconductor Devices 4- Ma 116B Matrices and Numerical Methods 3- 2 EE 419B Non-Linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 *OA 151R Reliability Engineering and Operations Analysis 4- 1 OA 121A Principles of Systems Analysis 3- EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 0- 3 Thesis Thesis 0- 3 11- 9 10- 6

Second Term 'Typical Electives.

*EE 473A Missile Guidance Systems 3- *EE 623A Advanced Electromagnetic Theory 3- COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING MN 302C Basic Management II 4- CURRICULUM NUMBER 600 EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 (Group CE) Thesis - 0- 3 BS PROGRAM

10- 4 For the last two terms of the second year, students in the Third Term 2-year BS program are permitted to elect a number of Industrial tour or supervised project work. courses. Four courses not exceeding 24 total hours or 3

35 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

labs per week are required for each term. The choice of Third Term elective courses is subject to the approval of the Curricular Industrial tour or supervised project work. Officer and Academic Associate. Fourth Term

Third Term EE 122A Network Synthesis I 4- 821B Computer Systems 3- *EE 254B Transistor and Solid State Devices *EE Technology 3 and Circuits 3- 3 OA 151B Reliability Engineering & Systems Analysis 3- EE 411B Feedback Control Systems 1 3- 3 EE 631B Antenna Engineering 3- 3 EE 951E Thesis Seminar „ 0- 1 Thesis 0- MN 302C Basic Management II 4- 3 13- 9 10- 7 *Typical Electives. Fourth Term EE 422B Modern Communications 3- 3 SPECIAL ELECTRONICS EE 671B Theory of Propagation 4- CURRICULUM FOR SELECTED CEC OFFICERS *EE 821B Computer Systems Technology 3- 3 OA 101C Elements of Operations Research/ CURRICULUM NUMBER 472 (Group EY) Systems Analysis 4- 1

14- 7 Objective — To prepare selected CEC officers for special *Typical Electives. duties requiring a technical capability for planning elec-

tronic facilities and accomplishing the engineering studies MS PROGRAM required in the development of plans and specifications for their construction. Communications Engineering students selected for an MS Prerequisite — Recent BSEE degree from an accredited program will follow the curriculum outlined below. institution with an overall grade average of at least B.

Whera elective courses are permitted, the selection must Description — For properly qualified entering students, meet the approval of the Curricular Officer and Academic successful completion of this curriculum affords the oppor- Associate as being consistent with the major field of study. tunity to earn a Master of Science degree in Engineering

The third term of the third year may be spent in an in- Electronics. The curriculum can be modified both as to dustrial laboratory. During this period, the student works length and content depending upon the individual student's as a junior engineer on a selected project. background. A typical curriculum is outlined below:

Second Year First Year Fourth Term First Term EE 411B Feedback Control Systems 1 3- 3 EE 113B Linear Systems Analysis 4- 3 422B 3- EE Modern Communications 3 EE 621B Electromagnetics I 3- 2 Signal EE 541A Processing 4- PH 205C Waves and Particles 4- EE 671B Theory of Propagation 4- 11- 5 14- 6 Math review course to suit student's needs. Fifth Term (includes leave period) Second Term Field trip and/or supervised project work, and/or appro- EE 114B Communication Theory I 4- priate elective courses. EE 213C Electronic Circuits II 4- 3 EE 622B Electromagnetics II 4- Third Year EE 81 1C Introduction to Digital Computers 3- 3 First Term 15- 6 *EE 256B Theory of Semiconductor Devices 4- Third Term *EE 581A Information Theory 4- EE 214C Electronic Communication Circuits 4- 3 OA 111B Principles of Operations Research/ MN 302C Basic Management II 4- Systems Analysis 4- 2 PH 604C Structure of Atoms and Solids 4- EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 PS 321B Probability 4- 2 Thesis 0- 3 16- 5 12- 6 Fourth Term

Second Term EE 41 IB Feedback Control Systems 1 3- 3 *EE 542A Advanced Signal Processing 3- EE 422B Modern Communications 3- 3 MN 302C Basic Management II 4- EE 571A Statistical Communication Theory 3- 2

OA 112A Advanced Methods in Operations Analysis 4- MN 301C Basic Management I 4-

I I 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 Thesis _ 0- 3 Thesis „ 0- 2

11- 4 13-11

36 ;

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ENGINEERING SCIENCES

Fifth Term (includes leave period) Fourth Term Student will work on thesis and participate in CEC EE 243C Communication Electronics II 4- 3 workshop seminar. EE 821B Computer Systems Technology 3- 3 Second Year NW 167C Communication Equip. & Syst. First Term Application II _._ _ 3- 2 NW 168C Special Communications EE 122A Network Synthesis 1 4- Topics EE 217B Advanced Electron Devices _ 4- 2 (Classified) _ „ _ _ 5- EE 433A Radar Systems 4- 2 15- 8 PS 322A Decision Theory & Classical Statistics.... 3- 2 EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 Thesis _ 0- 2 ENGINEERING SCIENCE PROGRAMS 15- 9 CURRICULUM NUMBER 460 Second Term EE 541A Signal Processing 4- Martin Fuller Combs, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy EE 631B Antenna Engineering 3- 3 Curricular Officer; B.S., Vanderbilt Univ., 1950; M.S., OA 121A Principles of Operations Analysis 4- 1 Physics, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1965. EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 Thesis _ 0- 3 Leonard Oliver Olsen, Academic Associate; B.A., Iowa

11- 8 State Teachers College, 1932; M.S., State Univ. of Iowa, 1934; Ph.D., 1937.

STAFF COMMUNICATIONS PROGRAM Objective — To provide post-commissioning education in CURRICULUM NUMBER 620 the fields of Mathematics, Physics and Engineering, designed (Group CO) to update and build on undergraduate education and to prepare students for advanced functional training such as Objective — To prepare officers to become qualified for Naval Tactical Data Systems; Polaris and other missiles; major staff and operational afloat and ashore communica- instructor duty on school staffs; test pilot schools. tions billets with a firm knowledge of U. S. Department of The High and Average Academic Background Curricula Defense and Naval Communications organization and poli- may serve as a review to qualify selected officer-students for cies, operational communications planning and direction, transfer to other technical curricula. Such transfers nor- communication equipment and procedures, and an under- mally will be made upon completion of the second term of standing of basic electronics, computer techniques and mil- these curricula and will be based upon length of availability itary material management. of student for duty under instruction, academic performance Description — Officers ordered for instruction in the and quota limitations in the technical curricula. and non-technical courses. Officers successfully completing the curriculum will be awarded a Diploma of Completion. Staff Communications Program will matriculate in a four- HIGH ACADEMIC BACKGROUND term curriculum consisting of a combination of technical First Term (Group SA)

EE 101D Electrical Fundamentals 3- 2 First Term Ma 232D Calculus Review 5- Ma 071D Calculus I 5- MN 163C Material Management 4- PH 021D Mechanics 4- NW 162C Communications Organization 5- CH 106C Principles of Chemistry 1 3- 2 Introduction to Oceanography 3- 17- 2 OC HOC "15^1 Second Term EE 241C Electronic Fundamentals 3- 2 Second Term NW 163C Operational & Communication Planning 4- Ma 072D Calculus II _ 5- NW 164C Communications Administration PH 022D Fluid Mechanics, Wave Motion and & Procedures 1 5- Thermodynamics 4- PS 315C Introduction to Probability & Statistics.... 4- 2 PH 023D Electricity and Magnetism 4- 16- 4 CH 107C Principles of Chemistry II 3- 2 Third Term 16- 2 EE 242C Communication Electronics I 4- 3 EE 81 1C Introduction to Digital Computers 3- 3 Third Term NW 165C Communications Administration Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- & Procedures II _ 3- PS 315C Introduction to Probability and Statistics 4- 2 NW 166C Communication Equipment PH 024D Electromagnetic Radiation and Optics 4-

& System Application 1 4- EE 271C Electronic Devices and Circuits 1 4- 2

14- 6 17- 4

37 ENGINEERING SCIENCES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Fourth Term Second Term

Ma 051D Calculus and Analytic Geometry 1 5- Ma 416C Numerical Methods and Fortran PS 311C Introduction to Probability and Statistics 4- 1 Programming 4- 1 PH 003D General Physics III— Electricity and PH 025C Modern Physics 4- Magnetism „ 4- OA 141B Fundamentals of Operations Research/ 002D Introductory General Chemistry II 3- 3 Systems Analysis 4- 1 CH EE 272C Electronic Devices and Circuits II 4- 2 16- 4

16- 4 Third Term

Ma 052D Calculus and Analytic Geometry II.. 5- AVERAGE ACADEMIC BACKGROUND PH 002D General Physics II — Harmonic Motion, Sound and Heat 4- (Group SB) OA 101C Elements of Operations Research/

Systems Analysis 4- 1 First Term EE 271C Electronic Devices and Circuits 1 4- 2 Ma 051D Calculus and Analytic Geometry 1 5- 17- 3 PH 016D General Physics — Mechanics 4- CH 106C Principles of Chemistry 1 3- 2 Fourth Term Introduction to Oceanography 3- OC HOC Ma 053D Calculus and Analytic Geometry III 5- 15- 2 Ma 411C Digital Computers and Military

Applications 4- Second Term PH 004D General Physics IV — Light and Modern Physics 4- Ma 052D Calculus and Analytic Geometry II 5- EE 272C Electronics Devices and Circuits II 4- 2 PH 017D General Physics — Thermodynamics, 17- 2 Sound and Light 4- PH 018D General Physics — Electricity and Magnetism 4- FAIR ACADEMIC BACKGROUND (LOWER) CH 107C Principles of Chemistry II 3- 2 (Group SD) 16- 2 First Term

Ma 025D Elementary Sets with Applications 3- Third Term Ma 030D Intermediate Algebra 5-

Ma 053D Calculus and Analytic Geometry III 5- PH 001D General Physics I — Mechanics 4- PS 315C Introduction to Probability and Statistics 4- 2 CH 001D Introductory General Chemistry 1 4- 3 PH 019C Modern Physics 4- 16- 3 EE 271C Electronic Devices and Circuits 1 4- 2 Second Term 17- 4 Ma 031D College Algebra and Trigonometry 5- PH 003D General Physics III — Electricity and Fourth Term Magnetism „ 4-

Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- CH 002D Introductory General Chemistry II 3- 3 Ma 416C Numerical Methods and Fortran OC HOC Introduction to Oceanography 3-

Programming 4. 1 15- 3 OA 141B Fundamentals of Operations Research/ Third Term Systems Analysis 4- 1 EE 272C Electronic Devices and Circuits II 4- 2 Ma 051D Calculus and Analytic Geometry 1 5- PS 311C Introduction to Probability and Statistics 4- 1 17- 4 PH 002D General Physics II — Harmonic Motion, Sound and Heat _ 4- EE 271 C Electronic Devices and Circuits I 4- 2 FAIR ACADEMIC BACKGROUND (UPPER) "TT~3

(Group SC) Fourth Term

Ma 052D Calculus and Analytic Geometry II 5- First Term Ma 411C Digital Computers and Military Ma 031D College Algebra and Trigonometry 5- Applications „ 4- PH 001D General Physics I — Mechanics 4- OA 101C Elements of Operations Research/ CH 001D Introductory General Chemistry 1 4- 3 Systems Analysis „ 4 1 OC HOC Introduction to Oceanography _ 3- EE 272C Electronic Devices and Circuits II 4- 2

16- 3 17- 3

38 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBERS 372 and 440 Richard Sherry Downey, Commander, U.S. Navy; Cur- ricular Officer; B.S., Meteorology, U.S. Naval Postgrad- uate School.

Charles Luther Taylor, Academic Associate; B.S., Penn- sylvania State Univ., 1942; M.S., 1947. John David Ploetz, Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Cur- ricular Officer; B.A.S., Univ. of California at Los Angeles, 1946. ADVANCED METEOROLOGY CURRICULUM CURRICULUM NUMBER 372 (MM) (Group MMZ) (Entering in August)

Objective —-To provide advanced education in meteorology, to prepare officers to become qualified operational meteorologists with a working knowledge of oceanography, t and to enable them to conduct independent research. Naval applications of this curriculum include forecasting weather

and oceanographic conditions for air, surface, and submarine operations. First Year First Term Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices 3- 1 Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4-

Mr 200C Introduction to Meteorology _... 3- Oc HOC Introduction to Oceanography 3- Ph 196D Review of General Physics 4- 2 Mr 001D Weather Codes and Elementary Analysis _ 0- 3

17- 6 Second Term Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- Mr 201C Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 0- 9 Mr 211C Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 3- Mr 410C Meteorological Instruments 2- 2 Mr 413B Thermodynamics of Meteorology 3- 2

13-13 Third Term Ma 261B Vector Mechanics 5- PS 332B Statistics I 3- Mr 202C Weather-Map Analysis 0- 6 Mr 212C Introduction to Weather Elements 3- Mr 321A Dynamic Meteorology I _ 3- Oc 220B Descriptive Oceanography 3- LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1

17- 7 Fourth Term Ma 125B Numerical Methods for Digital Computers 2- 2 PS 333B Statistics II 2- 2 Mr 203C Analysis and Forecasting of Operational Weather Elements 0- 6 Mr 213B Analysis and Forecasting of Operational Weather Elements 3- Mr 322A Dynamic Meteorology II „ 3- Oc 260B Sound in the Ocean 3- LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 Meteorology Studies 13-11

39 B

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAM NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Fifth Term Third Term Ma 421C Introduction to Digital Computers 4- 1 Ma 421C Introduction to Digital Computers 4- 1 Oc 201B Ocean Waves and Tides _ 3- 1 Oc 201 Ocean Waves and Tides _ 3- 1 Oc 601B Ocean Wave Forecasting 3- 6 Oc 601 Ocean Wave Forecasting 3- 6 10- 8 10- 8 Second Year Fourth Term First Term Ma 261B Vector Mechanics 5- Ma 128B Numerical Methods in Partial PS 332B Statistics I 3- Differential Equations 3- 1 Mr 202C Weather-Map Analysis 0- 6 Mr 204B The Middle Atmosphere 0- 6 Mr 212C Introduction to Weather Elements 3- Mr 214B The Middle Atmosphere 3- Mr 321A Dynamic Meteorology I 3- Mr 323A Dynamic Meteorology III 3- Oc 220B Descriptive Oceanography 3- 412A Physical Meteorology 3- Mr 17- 6 Mr 521B Synoptic Climatology 2- 2 Fifth Term 14- 9 Ma 125B Numerical Methods for Digital Computers 2- 2 Second Term PS 333B Statistics II 2- 2 Mr 205B Upper-Air Surface Prognosis 0- 6 and Mr 203C Analysis and Forecasting of 215B Upper-Air Surface Prognosis 4- Mr and Operational Weather Elements 0- 6 228B Tropical Mr and Southern Hemisphere Mr 213B Analysis and Forecasting of Meteorology 3- Operational Weather Elements 3- Mr 324A Dynamical Prediction 3- 3 Mr 322A Dynamic Meteorology II 3- Mr 325A Energetics of General Circulation 2- Oc 260B Sound in the Ocean 3- 12- 9 13-10 Third Term Mr 208B Tropical and Southern Second Year Hemisphere Meteorology 1- 5 First Term Mr 422A The Upper Atmosphere 4- Ma 128B Numerical Methods in Partial Oc 619B Oceanographic Forecasting 3- 4 Differential Equations 3- 1 LP 101 E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Mr 204B The Middle Atmosphere 0- 6 Thesis I 0- 8 Mr 214B The Middle Atmosphere 3- 8-18 Mr 323A Dynamic Meteorology III 3- Fourth Term Mr 412A Physical Meteorology 3- Mr 206C Naval Weather Service Mr 521B Synoptic Climatology .. 2- 2 Operational Procedures 1-12 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Mr 810B Seminar in Meteorology and 14-10 Oceanography 2- Second Term LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 Mr 205B Upper-Air and Surface Prognosis 0- 6 Thesis II ..._ _ 0- 8 Mr 215B Upper-Air and Surface Prognosis 4- 3-21 Mr 228B Tropical and Southern (Grouo MMA) Hemisphere Meteorology 3- (Entering in January) Mr 324A Dynamical Prediction 3- 3 First Year Mr 325A Energetics of General Circulation 2- First Term LP 102E Lecture Program II _ 0- 1 Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices 3- 1 12-10 Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables _ 4-

Mr 200C Introduction to Meteorology „.. 3- Third Term

Oc HOC Introduction to Oceanography 3- Mr 208B Tropical and Southern Ph 196D Review of General Physics 4- 2 Hemisphere Meteorology 1- 5 Mr 001D Weather Codes and Elementary Analysis 0- 3 Oc 619B Oceanographic Forecasting 3- 4

LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Thesis I 0- 8

17- 7 4-17 Second Term Fourth Term Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- Mr 206C Naval Weather Service Mr 201C Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 0- 9 Operational Procedures 1-12 Mr 211C Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 3- Mr 422A The Upper Atmosphere 4- Mr 410C Meteorological Instruments 2- 2 Mr 810B Seminar in Meteorology and

Mr 413B Thermodynamics of Meteorology 3- 2 Oceanography ..._ 2- LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 Thesis II 0- 8

13-14 7-20

40 DC

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAM

For properly qualified entering students, this curriculum Second Year affords the opportunity to qualify for the Master of Science First Term degree in Meteorology. Mr 204B The Middle Atmosphere 0- 6 Mr 214B The Middle Atmosphere 3- Mr 302B Elementary Dynamic Meteorology II 4- GENERAL METEOROLOGY CURRICULUM Mr 521B Synoptic Climatology 2- 2 Oc 720B Field Experience in Oceanography 0- 4 CURRICULUM NUMBER 372 (MA) 9-12 (Group MAZ) Second Term (Entering in August) Mr 205B Upper-Air and Surface Prognosis 0- 6

Objective — To provide general education in meteorology Mr 215B Upper-Air and Surface Prognosis 4- Tropical Southern and to prepare officers to become qualified operational Mr 228B and meteorologists with a working knowledge of oceanography. Hemisphere Meteorology 3- 403B to 4- Naval applications of this curriculum include forecasting Mr Introduction Micrometeorology in the 3- weather and oceanographic conditions for air, surface, and Oc 260B Sound Ocean submarine operations. 14- 6 Third Term Mr 208B Tropical and Southern First Year Hemisphere Meteorology 1- 5 First Term Oc 241B Elementary Dynamic Oceanography 3- Ma 051D Calculus and Analytic Geometry 1 5- Oc 615B Oceanographic Forecasting I 3- 4 Mr 200C Introduction to Meteorology 3- LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Oc HOC Introduction to Oceanography 3- Research Problem 0- 6 Ph 001D General Physics I 4- Mr 001D Weather Codes and Elementary Analysis 0- 3 7-16 15- 3 Fourth Term Mr 206C Naval Weather Service Second Term Operational Procedures 1-12 Ma 052D Calculus and Analytic Geometry II 5- Mr 810B Seminar in Meteorology and Mr 201C Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 0- 9 Oceanography _ 2- Mr 211 C Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 3- Oc 612B Arctic Oceanography 3- Mr 410C Meteorological Instruments 2- 2 Oc 617B Oceanographic Forecasting II 3- 4 Ph 002D General Physics II 4- LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 14-11 9-17 Third Term Ma 053D Calculus and Analytic Geometry III 5- (Group MAA) Mr 202C Weather-Map Analysis 0- 6 (Entering in January) Mr 212C Introduction to Weather Elements 3- First Year Mr 402C Introduction to Meteorological First Term Thermodynamics 3- 2 Ma 051D Calculus and Analytic Geometry I 5- Oc 220B Descriptive Oceanography 3- Mr 200C Introduction to Meteorology 3- LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Oc HOC Introduction to Oceanography 3- 14- 9 Ph 001 General Physics I _... 4- Fourth Term Mr 001D Weather Codes and Elementary Analysis 0- 3

PS 381C Elementary Probability and Statistics 4- 2 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1

Mr 203C Analysis and Forecasting of 15- 4 Operational Weather Elements 0- 6 Second Term Mr 213B Analysis and Forecasting of Ma 052D Calculus and Analytic Geometry II 5- Operational Weather Elements 3- Mr 201 Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 0- 9 Mr 301B Elementary Dynamic Meteorology 1 4- Mr 211C Elementary Weather-Map Analysis 3- Oc 700B Oceanographic Instruments and Mr 410C Meteorological Instruments 2- 2 Observations 2- 2 Ph 002D General Physics II 4- LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 13-11 14-12 Fifth Term Third Term

Ma 421C Introduction to Digital Computers 4- 1 Ma 053D Calculus and Analytic Geometry III 5-

Oc 201B Ocean Waves and Tides 3- 1 Oc 201B Ocean Waves and Tides 3- 1 Oc 601B Ocean Wave Forecasting 3- 6 Oc 601B Ocean Wave Forecasting 3- 6

10- 8

41 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAM NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Fourth Term OCEANOGRAPHY CURRICULUM

PS 381 C Elementary Probability and Statistics .... 4- 2 CURRICULUM NUMBER 440 (MO) Mr 202C Weather-Map Analysis 0- 6 (Group MOZ) Mr 212C Introduction to Weather Elements 3- (Entering in August) Mr 402C Introduction to Meteorological Objective — To provide officers with an education in Thermodynamics _ 3- 2 physical oceanography with particular emphasis on naval Oc 220B Descriptive Oceanography „ _ 3- operations, and to enable them through advanced study to 13-10 conduct independent research.

Fifth Term

Ma 421C Introduction to Digital Computers 4- 1 First Year Mr 203C Analysis and Forecasting of First Term Operational Weather Elements 0- 6 Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices ..._ 3- 1 Mr 213B Analysis and Forecasting of Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4- Operational Weather Elements 3- Mr 200C Introduction to Meteorology _ 3- Introduction to Oceanography 3- Mr 301B Elementary Dynamic Meteorology I 4- Oc HOC Oc 260B Sound in the Ocean 3- Ph 196D Review of General Physics _ 4- 2

14- 7 17- 3 Second Term Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- Second Year PS 332B Statistics I _ 3- Mr 600C Introductory Synoptic Meteorology 2- 4 First Term Oc 420B Introduction to Biological Oceanography 3- 3 Mr 204B The Middle Atmosphere 0- 6 Mr 214B The Middle Atmosphere _ 3- 13- 7 Mr 302B Elementary Dynamic Meteorology II 4- Third Term Mr 521B Synoptic Climatology 2- 2 Ma 261B Vector Mechanics _ 5- Oc 615B Oceanographic Forecasting I 3- 4 Oc 220B Descriptive Oceanography 3- 3- LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Oc 250B Environmental Thermodynamics Oc 320B Introduction to Geological Oceanography 3- 2 12-13 PS 333B Statistics II 2- 2

Second Term LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1

Mr 205B Upper-Air and Surface Prognosis 0- 6 16- 5 Mr 215B Upper-Air and Surface Prognosis 4- Fourth Term Mr 228B Tropical and Southern Ma 125B Numerical Methods for Digital Computers 2- 2 Hemisphere „... 3- Meteorology _ Ma 421C Introduction to Digital Computers 4- 1 Mr 403B Introduction to Micrometeorology 4- Oc 211 A Ocean Waves 3-

Oc 617B Oceanographic Forecasting . 3- II 4 Oc 251A Dynamic Oceanography I 3- 0- LP 102E Lecture Program II 1 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1

14-11 12- 4

Third Term Fifth Term Mr 208B Tropical and Southern Ma 128B Numerical Methods in Partial Differential Equations 3- 1 Hemisphere Meteorology _ 1- 5 Oc 700B Oceanographic Instruments and Oc 710B Oceanographic & Meteorological Instruments _... 4- 2 Observations 2- 2 720B Field Experience in Oceanography 0- 4 Oc 720B Field Experience in Oceanography 0- 4 Oc Research Problem _ _ 0- 6 7- 7 3-17 Second Year First Term Fourth Term Oc 212A Tides and Tidal Currents 3- Mr 206C Naval Weather Service Oc 252A Dynamic Oceanography II 3- Operation Procedures 1-12 Oc 260B Sound in the Ocean 3- Mr 810B Seminar in Meteorology and Oc 611A Ocean Wave Forecasting 3- 6 Oceanography _ 2- 12- 6 Oc 241B Elementary Dynamic Oceanography _. 3- Second Term Oc 612B Arctic Oceanography _ 3- Oc 213A Shallow Water Oceanography 3- 1 9-12 Oc 253A Dynamic Oceanography III 3-

For properly qualified entering students, this curriculum Oc 520B Introduction to Chemical Oceanography.. 3- 2 affords an opportunity to qualify for a Bachelor of Science Oc 613B Arctic Oceanography „ 3- 4 degree in Meteorology. 12- 7

42 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GENERAL LINE AND BACCALAUREATE

Third Term GENERAL LINE CURRICULUM Oc 340A Marine Geophysics _ 2- (Group GL) Oc 615B Oceanographic Forecasting I 3- 4 Oc 820A Special Topics in Oceanography 3- Required Courses

Lecture Program I 0- 1 LP 101E First Term Thesis I - - 0- 8 SP 001D Basic Speech _ _ - 2- 8-13 GV 012D American Life and Institutions I ..._ 2- Fourth Term Ma- 010D Basic Algebra and Trigonometry I 4- 617B Oceanographic Forecasting II 3- 4 Oc NW 191D Tactics and Combat Information Center 5- 810B Seminar in Oceanography 2- Oc NW 292D Amphibious Operations „ 4- LP 102E Lecture Program II „ _... 0- 1 17- Thesis II >.- _ -... 0- 8 5-13 Second Term PH 006D Survey of Physics 5- A similar program will be offered if students are ordered GV 013D American Life and Institutions II — 2- to this Curriculum in January. NW 393D Missiles and Space Operations. 3- This curriculum affords the opportunity to qualify for NW 395D Mine Warfare 3- the degree of Master of Science in Oceanography, with a NW 408C Seamanship and Marine Piloting 3- 2 particular capability in physical oceanography. Students 16- 2 entering the curriculum with the baccalaureate in geology, biology, or chemistry may follow a modified curriculum, Third Term including preparation of a thesis in geological, biological, EE 101D Electrical Fundamentals 3- 2 or chemical oceanography, which will qualify them for the NW 201C Operational Planning 2- same degree but with a capability in one of those three NW 591D Marine Engineering 4- fields. NW 391D Ordnance-Weapons Systems — 3- NW 193D Anti-Submarine Warfare 3- 15- 2 GENERAL LINE AND BACCALAUREATE Fourth Term PROGRAMS EE 205D Electronics Fundamentals 3- 2 Harold Edward Collins, Commander, U.S. Navy, Curricu- PH 600D Nucleonics Fundamentals - 3- lar Officer; B.S., Naval Academy, 1952; B.S. in Engineer- NW 293D Aviation Survey 3- ing Electronics, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1958. NW 502C Damage Control & ABC Warfare Defense 4- NW 404C Logistics & Naval Supply 3- Raymond Kenneth Houston, Academic Associate; B.S., 16- 2 Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1933; M.S., 1939.

David Luther Tobias, Lieutenant Commander, U. S. Navy, Assistant Curricular Officer; B.A., U.S. Naval Postgradu- ELECTIVE COURSES ate School, 1965. Naval Warfare Subjects Elaine Lieutenant, S. Navy, Admin- Nonna Cheatham, U. NW 403C Celestial Navigation 3- istrative Officer. OBJECTIVES: Engineering Subjects 3- Baccalaureate Curricula: To raise the educational level, Mr 010D Meteorology „ broaden the mental outlook, and increase the professional Courses in Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and Elec- taken with the permission of the Curricular and scientific knowledge of naval officers who do not have a tricity may be baccalaureate degree. Officer and the Chairman of the Department involved.

The Baccalaureate curricula provide specialized study to Government/Humanities Subjects meet the professional needs of the commissioned officer. The GV 010D U.S. Government _... 4- different educational backgrounds and personal needs of the GC 102C International Relations - 4- students are accommodated by providing two baccalaureate GV 122C International Law _ 4- curricula. The Bachelor of Science program gives emphasis GV 142C International Communism 4- to the physical environment, without neglecting the social. HI 101 C U.S. History I _ 4- The Bachelor of Arts program emphasizes the social envi- HI 102C U.S. History II _ 4- ronment without neglecting the physical. HI 103C European History I 4- General Line Curriculum: To provide instruction of HI 104C European History II 4- about nine and one-half months duration which will prepare those foreign officers enrolled for more responsible duties in Courses in Literature and other Government and Humani- their respective operating forces, as well a9 with combined ties courses may be taken with the permission of the in- staffs of allied forces. structor.

43 D D

GENERAL LINE AND BACCALAUREATE NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

BACCALAUREATE CURRICULUM Fifth Term (8 week term) CURRICULUM NUMBER 461 PH 013D General Physics III 3- 3 NW 408C Seamanship and Marine Piloting 3- 2 The Baccalaureate Curricula include the Naval Profes- NW 404C Logistics and Naval Supply 3- ~~ sional courses of the General Line Curriculum and, in addi- 9T5 coverage in the Humanities and Science- tion, sufficient Sixth Term Engineering areas to adequately support Bachelor of Science PH 014C General Physics IV 4- 2 and Bachelor of Arts degrees. From one to two calendar ME 561C Mechanics I 4- years are allowed for those enrolled to complete the pro- EE 111C Fields and Circuits 4- 4 gram. Students pursuing these curricula carry a minimum NW 201C Operational Planning 2- load of 16 credit hours. 14- 6 To be eligible for enrollment an officer must have accept- Seventh Term able advanced standing of 45 semester hours which can be ME 562C Mechanics II 4- applied toward completion of the prescribed course of study. EE 112C Circuit Analysis 4- 3 of college- This must include a minimum of five term hours GV 120C Military Law I 3- level mathematics, including a course in College Algebra. NW 303C Missiles and Space Operations 4-

The Baccalaureate Curricula meet the general degree re- 15- 3 quirements of the Postgraduate School. The BS Curriculum Eighth Term consists of 200 term hours distributed in the following aca- EE 221C General Electronics I 3- 3 demic areas: 110 (55%) in Science-Engineering; 40 (20%) GV 121 C Military Law II 3- in Naval Professional; 40 (20%) in Government and Hu- MN 010D Introduction to Macro-Economics 4- manities; and 10 (5%) electives. The BA Curriculum con- NW 101C Tactics and Combat Information Center 5- sists of 200 term hours distributed as follows: 110 (55%) 15- 3 in Government and Humanities; 40 (20%) in Naval Pro- Ninth Term fessional; in Science-Engineering; and 10 40 (20%) (5%) EE 222C General Electronics II _ 3- 3 electives. NW 208C Aviation Accident Prevention and The Baccalaureate Curricula schedules are shown below. Crash Investigation 5- Students are required to complete the courses listed there, NW 209C Aero Engineering and Safety 5- 2 or equivalents, either before admission to the curriculum OC HOC Introduction to Oceanography 3- or as part of it. Tenth Term (8 week term) 502C Damage Control & ABC Warfare Defense 4- "BACHELOR OF SCIENCE NW NW 103C Anti-Submarine Warfare 5- (Group BS) NW 105C Anti-Air Warfare 4- First Term 13- CH 001 Introductory General Chemistry I 4- 3 EN 101C Advanced Writing for Officers 3- Naval 2 * BACHELOR OF ARTS Ma 031D College Algebra and Trigonometry 5- NW 401C Leadership and Administration 3- (Group BA) First Term 15- 5 Ma 030D Intermediate Algebra 5- Second Term GV 010D U.S. Government 4- CH 002D Introductory General Chemistry II 3- 3 HI 101C U.S. History I 4- HI 102C U.S. History II 4- EN 101C Advanced Writing for Naval Officers 3- 2 Ma 051D Calculus and Analytic Geometry I 5-

PY 010D Introduction to Psychology 4- Second Term 16- 3 SP 010D Public Speaking 3- Third Term Ma 031 College Algebra and Trigonometry 5- Ma 052D Calculus and Analytic Geometry II 5- GV 102C International Relations 4- PH 011D General Physics I 4- 3 HI 102C U.S. History II 4- GV 010D U.S. Government _ 4- NW 201C Operational Planning 2- SP 010D Public Speaking 3- 18- 16- 3 Third Term Fourth Term SP 011D Conference Procedures 3- Ma 053D Calculus and Analytic Geometry III 5- PS 310C Elementary Probability and Statistics 3- 1 PH 012D General Physics II 4- 3 GV 103C Strategy for National Security 4- GV 142C International Communism 4- EN 102C Reasoning and Research Reporting 4- SP 011D Conference Procedures 3- MN 010D Introduction to Macro-Economics 4-

16- 3 18- 1

44 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL NAVAL ENGINEERING

Fourth Term Note 3: NW 208 and NW 209 comprise the Aviation HI 103C European History I 4- Safety Program which was implemented in August 1964. GV 140C Development of Western Political These courses are required for aviators only. Thought 4- LT 010D Appreciation of Literature 3- NAVAL ENGINEERING PROGRAMS PY 010D Introduction to Psychology 4- PH 007D General Physics I 3- 2 CURRICULUM NUMBER 570

18- 2 Eugene Marion Henry, Commander, U.S. Navy, Curricular Fifth Term (8 week term) Officer; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1946; M.S., U.S. GV 142C International Communism 4- Naval Postgraduate School, 1960. HI 104C European History II 4- Paul Francis Pucci, Academic Associate; B.S. in M.E., GV Major Elective 4- Purdue Univ., 1949; M.S. in M.E., 1950; Ph.D., Stan- 12- ford Univ., 1955.

Sixth Term Antonio Nevarez, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy, As- GV 120C Military Law I 3- sistant Curricular Officer; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, MN 111C Introduction to Micro-Economics 4- 1953; B.S., Electrical Engineering, U.S. Naval Postgrad- PH 008D General Physics II 3- 2 uate School, 1959. NW 401C Leadership and Administration 3- Objective — To provide selected officers with advanced GV Major Elective 4- education in ship engineering, primarily in mechanical and 17- 2 electrical engineering, to meet the requirements of the Navy Seventh Term for officers with technical and administrative competence GV 121C Military Law II 3- related to shipboard engineering plants, including machinery GV 122C International Law 4- systems, and structures. The specific areas of study are de- GV 141C American Traditions and Ideals 3- signed to include, within the various curricula, the funda- GV Literature Elective 3- mental and advanced theories of mathematics, thermody- PH 009D General Physics III 3- 2 namics, statics, dynamics, electrical power, circuits and feed-

16- 2 back control, engineering materials, structures, atomic and nuclear physics, and nuclear power. Eighth Term Description All students initially enter a eommon PH 010D Physics IV _.._ _... 3- 2 — NW 101C Tactics and Combat Information Center 5- Naval Engineering (General) Curriculum. After completion of NW 303C Missiles and Space Operations 4- two terms, students are selected to pursue studies in a spe- NW 408C Seamanship and Marine Piloting 3- 2 cialty of either Mechanical or Electrical Engineering. Upon completion of the first year of study, a limited number of 15- 4 students in each specialty are further selected to follow an Ninth Term advanced three year curriculum in their specialty (Mechan- NW 103C Anti-Submarine Warfare 5- ical or Electrical Engineering). NW 208C Aviation Accident Prevention and The criteria for selection are academic performance, as- Crash Investigation 5- signed quotas, tour availability, and student preference. NW 404C Logistics and Naval Supply 3- NW 209C Aero Engineering and Safety 5- 2 The Curricula are: Naval Engineering (Mechanical) 2 year curriculum 18- 2 Naval Engineering (Electrical) 2 year curriculum Tenth Term (8 week term) Mechanical Engineering NW 105C Anti-Air Warfare 4- ( Advanced ) 3 year curriculum NW 502C Damage Control & ABC Warfare Electrical Engineering Defense 4- ( Advanced ) 3 year curriculum GV Major Elective 4- For properly qualified students, the two year curricula 12- lead to the award of a designated Bachelor of Science degree and the three year curricula lead to the award of a *Electives may be substituted for courses for which exemptions designated Master of Science degree. are granted.

Note 1: The above are for an August input; for a Jan- NAVAL ENGINEERING (GENERAL) uary input, leave will occur during the students' 3rd and (Group NG) 8th terms instead of the 5th term with a slight modification Objective — This is a two-term, common-core program in the schedule. followed by all officer students entering the Naval Engineer-

Note 2: 200 term hours are required for graduation. The ing Curricula. The objective is to educate officers in the difference between the number of hours listed above and the basic sciences and engineering principles as a foundation total required for graduation is made up by advanced cred- for more advanced studies in either aji electrical or mechan- its and electives. ical engineering specialty.

45 NAVAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

First Year Third Term First Term CH 403B Corrosion and Corrosion Protection 3- 2 EE 111C Fields and Circuits 4- 4 ME 722B Mechanical Vibrations 3- 2 Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4- MN 301 C Basic Management I 4- Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices 3- 1 PH 621C Elementary Nuclear Physics _ 4- ME 501C Mechanics I 4- LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 15- 5 14- 5 Second Term Fourth Term EE 112C Circuit Analysis 4- 3 ME 240B Nuclear Power Plants 4- Ma 073C Differential Equations 5- ME 622B Experimental Mechanics 2- 2 ME 502C Mechanics II 4- ME 820C Machine Design 2- 4 CH 103C General Chemistry 4- 2 MN 302C Basic Management II 4-

17- 5 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 12- 7 NAVAL ENGINEERING (MECHANICAL) MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (ADVANCED) (Group NH) (Group NA) Objective — To support the aim of the basic objective to Objective — To further the aim of the basic objective by the extent practicable within a two year period by providing providing officer students with a broad background of officer students with a sound science-engineering basis for science-engineering studies in a three-year program designed assuming increased technical and administrative responsi- to prepare them for assuming increased technical and ad- bilities related to naval machinery, with primary emphasis ministrative responsibilities related to naval machinery, with on Mechanical Engineering aspects. primary emphasis on Mechanical Engineering aspects.

First Year First Year First and Second Terms Same as Naval Engineering (Mechanical) Same as Naval Engineering (General) Third Term Second Year Ma 416C Numerical Methods & Fortran First Term Programming 4- 1 Ma 113B Vector Analysis and Partial Differential EE 331C Electric Machinery _ 3- 4 Equations _ _ 4- Mechanics of Solids I 4- ME 510C 2 Ma 270C Complex Variables 3- Engineering 5- ME 111C Thermodynamics I ME 211B Thermodynamics of Compressible Flow.... 3- Lecture I 0- 1 LP 101E Program ME 222C Thermodynamics Lab 1- 4 16- 8 Me 511A Mechanics of Solids II 5- Fourth Term 16- 4 MS 201C Engineering Materials I 3- 2 Second Term Mechanics of 3- ME 721C Machinery 2 ME 412A Advanced Mechanics of Fluids 4- 2 41 1C Mechanics of Fluids 4- 2 ME ME 512A Mechanics of Solids III 4- Engineering Thermodynamics II 5- ME 112C ME 712A Theory of Vibrations 3- 2 LP 102E Lecture II 0- 1 Program EE 113B Linear Systems Analysis 4- 3 15- 7 ~liT7 Fifth Term Third Term MS 202C Engineering Materials II 3- 2 EE 41 IB Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 EE 281C General Electronics 4- 2 ME 310B Heat Transfer 4- 2 7- 4 ME 215B Marine Propulsion Systems I 2- 4 Second Year PH 620C Elementary Atomic Physics 4- First Term LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1

ME 221C Gas Dynamics and Heat Transfer 4- 2 13-10 504B 4- ME Advanced Dynamics Galley 35 NAVY ME 521C Mechanics of Solids II 4- Fourth Term PS 311C Introduction to Probability and Statistics 4- 1 ME 216B Marine Propulsion Systems II 2- 4 16- 3 ME 503A Advanced Mechanics 4- Second Term ME 811B Machine Design I 3- 2 ME 222C Thermodynamics Laboratory 1- 4 PH 621C Elementary Nuclear Physics 4-

ME 522B Mechanics of Solids III 4- LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 ME 223B Marine Power Plant Analysis 2- 4 13- 7 PH 620C Elementary Atomic Physios 4- Intersessional Period — A four to six weeks tour at 11- 8 selected industrial or research activities.

46 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL NAVAL ENGINEERING

Third Year Second Year first Term First Term ME 612A Experimental Mechanics 3- 2 EE 311C Electric Machinery I 3- 4 ME 812B Machine Design II - 3- 4 EE 611C Electromagnetic Fields 4- MN 301C Basic Management I 4- EE 223B Electronic Control and Measurement 3- 3 ME 241A Nuclear Propulsion Systems I 4- PH 620C Elementary Atomic Physics 4- 14- 6 14- 7 Second Term Second Term ME 212A Advanced Thermodynamics 3- EE 312C Electric Machinery II 3- 4 ME 242A Nuclear Propulsion Systems II 3- 3

EE 41 IB Feedback Control Systems I . 3- 3 PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 612C Transmission of Electromagnetic Energy 3- 2 Thesis _ 0- 8 EE ME 111'"' Engineering Thermodynamics I 5- 10-13 Third Term 14- 9

PS 362B Applied Statistics 3- 1 Third Term Thesis ...„ _ _ 0-12 EE 419B Nonlinear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 ME 132C Engineering Thermodynamics II 4- 2 3-14 MN 301C Basic Management I 4- Fourth Term PS 311C Introduction to Probability and Statistics 4- 1 MN 302C Basic Management II _ 4- LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 CH 403B Corrosion and Corrosion Protection 3- 2 15- 8 OA 151B Reliability Engineering and

Systems Analysis . 3- Fourth Term Thesis _ 0- 8 EE 114B Communication Theory I 4- 0- LP 102E Lecture Program II 1 EE 233B Communication Circuits and Systems 4- 3 10-11 ME 246B Nuclear Power Plants 4- MN 302C Basic Management II 4- NAVAL ENGINEERING (ELECTRICAL) LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 (Group NL) 16- 4

Objective — To support the aim of the basic objective to the extent practicable within a two year period by provid- ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING (ADVANCED) ing officer students with a sound science-engineering basis (Group NE) for assuming increased technical and administrative responsibilities related to naval machinery, with primary emphasis Objective — To further the aim of the basic objective by on Electrical Engineering aspects. providing officer students with a broad background of science-engineering studies in a three-year program designed First Year to prepare them for assuming increased technical and ad- First and Second Terms ministrative responsibilities related to naval machinery, with Same as Naval Engineering (General) primary emphasis on Electrical Engineering aspects. Third Term

EE 231C Electronics I 4- 3 Ma 271 C Complex Variables 4- First Year Ma 416C Numerical Methods and Same as Naval Engineering (Electrical) Fortran Programming 4- 1 ME 510C Mechanics of Solids I 4- 2 Second Year LP 101 E Lecture Program I 0- 1 First Term 16- 7 EE 223B Electronic Control and Measurement .... 3- 3 Fourth Term EE 31 1C Electric Machinery I 3- 4 EE 131C Polyphase Circuits 3- 2 EE 121A Advanced Network Analysis 3- 2 EE 232C Electronics II _ 4- 3 PH 620C Elementary Atomic Physics 4- EE 711C Electrical Measurements 2- 3 13- 9 MS 201C Engineering Materials I ..._ 3- 2 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 Second Term 12-11 EE 312C Electric Machinery II 3- 4 Fifth Term EE 41 IB Feedback Control Systems I _ 3- 3 EE 113B Linear Systems Analysis 4- 3 ME 111C Engineering Thermodynamics I 5- MS 202C Engineering Materials II 3- 2 PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 15- 9

47 NAVAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Third Term Second Term

EE 122A Network Synthesis I _ 3- 2 EE 621B Electromagnetics I 3- 2 EE 419B Nonlinear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 EE 951E Seminar 0- 1 ME 132C Engineering Thermodynamics II 4- 2 Thesis _ 0-12 PS 362B Applied Statistics 3- 1 3-15 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 13-10 Third Term Fourth Term EE 315B Marine Electrical Design I 2- 4 EE 114B Communication Theory I 4- EE 622B Electromagnetics II 4- EE 233B Communications Circuits and Systems .... 4- 3 951E Seminar _ 0- 1 ME 210C Applied Thermodynamics 3- 2 EE 301 C Basic Management I 4- ME 246B Nuclear Power Plants 4- MN Thesis - 0- 8 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 LP 101 E Lecture Program I 0- 1 15- 6 10-14 Intersessional Period — A four to six weeks tour at selected industrial or research activities. Fourth Term Third Year EE 316A Marine Electrical Design II 2- 4 First Term EE 951 E Seminar 0- 1 Ma 113B Vector Analysis and Partial MN 302C Basic Management II 4- Differential Equations 4- Thesis 0- 8 OA 151B Reliability Engineering and LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 Systems Analysis 3- •Elective „ 4- EE 951 E Seminar „ 0- 1 10-14 •Elective _ 4-

11- 1 Elective course must be from approved list in curricular office.

Coordinating Studies with Foreign Officer Student

48 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL NAVAL MANAGEMENT AND OPERATIONS ANALYSIS

NAVAL MANAGEMENT AND Third Term OPERATIONS ANALYSIS PROGRAMS MN 423A Planning Programming and Budgeting.. 4- PS 372B Management Statistics II 4- 1 CURRICULA NUMBERS 817, 367, and 360 / MN 460A Material Management 3- 5- , MN 490A Group and Organizational Behavior Fletcher Harris Burnham, Captain, U.S. Navy; Curricu- lar Officer; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1944; B.S., Oper- 16- 1 ations Analysis, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1954; Fourth Term M.S., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1954. \y MN 453A Personnel Administration & Douglas Associate for George Williams, Academic Data Industrial Relations 4- Processing; M.A. of 1954. (honors), Univ. Edinburgh, OA 471B Operations Analysis for Navy

Clair Alton Peterson, Academic Associate for Manage- Management 4- 1 ment; B.B.A., Univ. of Minnesota, 1951; Ph.D., Massa- Elective Sequence 6- to 7-0

chusetts Institute of Technology, 1961. 14- ltol5- 1

William Peyton Cunningham, Academic Associate for Fifth Term Operations Analysis; B.S., Yale Univ., 1928; Ph.D., 1932. MN 491A Management Policy 4- Clell Stewart, Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Curricu- Elective Sequence 10- 0tol2-

lar Officer. 14- to 16-

Richard Herbert Rallies, Commander, U.S. Navy; Assist- ant Curricular Officer, Ph.B., Univ. of Wisconsin, 1943. ELECTIVE SEQUENCES

1 — Economics and Systems Analysis NAVAL MANAGEMENT CURRICULUM Term CURRICULUM NUMBER 817 IV MN 413A Intermediate Micro-Economic Theory 4- (Group MN) IV MN 473A Quantitative Decision Making 3- Objective — To provide officers with increased education V MN 426A Cost Estimating and Analysis 3- in management which will improve their capabilities for V MN 432A Systems Analysis 4- organizing, planning, directing, coordinating and controlling V Required Elective 4- activities in which the resources of men, money, and mate- 3- Oto 5-0

rials are combined to accomplish Navy objectives. 2 — Financial Management

Description — The curriculum is of twelve months' dura- IV MN 412A Managerial Economics tion at the graduate level. All officers, regardless of desig- or nator, are required to participate in the "core" courses. MN 413A Intermediate Micro-Economic Theory 4- These courses provide the foundation and tools of manage- IV MN 424A Internal Control and Auditing 3- ment and lead into the electives, which permit limited spe- V MN 425A Comptrollership Seminar 4- cialization in fields of interest to sponsoring bureaus and V MN 426A Cost Estimating and Analysis 3- agencies. V Required Elective 3- Oto 5-0

Classroom instruction is supplemented by a guest lec- 3 — Personnel Management turer series which affords the officer an opportunity to hear IV MN 412A Managerial Economics 4- discussions of management topics by senior military officers, IV MN 495A Organization & Management Seminar 3- business executives, and prominent educators. V MN 455A Behavioral Science Seminar 3- Successful completion of this program leads to the award V MN 456A Labor Relations 4- of a Master of Science degree. V Required Elective 3- Oto 5-0

First Term 4 — Material Logistics Management

' MN 210C Macro-Economics 4- IV MN 412A Managerial Economics 4- MN 221C Financial Accounting 3- or Ma 032C Mathematics for Management 4- MN 413A Intermediate Micro-Economic Theory 4- /MN 252C Individual Behavior 4- IV MN 480A Facilities Management 3-

15- V MN 461A Procurement and Contract Administration 4- Second Term V MN 462A Modern Inventory Management 3- MN 411B Micro-Economics 4- V Required Elective 3- to 5-0 / MN 422A Managerial Accounting 3- Other elective courses in the Management subject area

PS 371B Management Statistics I 4- 1 are:

,/ MN 481A Computers and Data Processing 4- V MN 381A Data Processing Management 4- EN 105C Thesis Writing 2- V MN 419A Economics Seminar 4- 17- 1 V MN 492A Government and Business 4-

49 NAVAL MANAGEMENT AND OPERATIONS ANALYSIS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

MANAGEMENT (DATA PROCESSING) ELECTIVE COURSES CURRICULUM Sequence A (Recommended for Supply Corps CURRICULUM NUMBER 367 Officer Students) Term (Group PM) II MN 460A Material Management 3-

Objective — To provide officers with a comprehensive III MN 423A Planning, Programming & Budgeting 4- education in computer theory and practice by which they IV MN 453A Personnel Administration and will gain an appreciation of the capabilities and limitations Industrial Relations 4- of digital computers in a variety of applications, and de- MN 432A Systems Analysis 4- velop their ability to analyze data processing systems and MN 462A Modern Inventory Management 3- effectively manage computer-based installations. Plus one other course from: MN 426A Cost Estimating and Analysis 3- Description — The curriculum is of twelve months' dura- MN 461A Procurement and Contract tion at the graduate level. Classroom instruction is supple- Administration 3- mented by guest lecturer and seminar series which afford MN 492A Government and Business 4- the officer an opportunity to participate in discussions of management topics with senior military officers, business Sequence B (For Regular Line executives, and prominent educators. Officer Students) Successful completion of this program leads to the award Term of a Master of Science degree. II MA 241C Elementary Differential Equations.... 3- III MA 146B Numerical Analysis and Digital First Term Computers 3- IV One course from: MN 210C Macro-Economics 4- 214A Graph Theory 3- MN 490A Group and Organizational Behavior 5- OA 234A Queueing Theory 3- MA 427C Programming I — Introduction 3- 1 OA Reliability and Life Testing 3- MA 141D Review of Analytic Geometry PS 355A Systems 812B Logical Design Circuitry 4- and Calculus 5- EE and Choice of three courses from: 17- 1 OA 393B Introduction to War Gaming 2- 2 Second Term PS 305A Design of Experiments 3- 1 PS 306A Selected Topics in Advanced Statistics 3- 1 MN 322A Managerial Accounting _ 3- Plus courses under Sequence A PS 315C Introduction to Probability & Statistics.... 4- 2 MA MOB Linear Algebra and Matrix Theory 4-

MA 428B Programming Ila 3- 1 OPERATIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS

Elective: Sequence A or B 3- ANALYSIS CURRICULUM CURRICULUM NUMBER 360 Third Term (Group RO) PS 316B Applied Statistics I 3- 2 MA 429A Programming lib _ _ 4- Objective — To develop the analytical ability of officers OA 111B Principles of Operations Research/ by providing a sound background and education in scientific con- Systems Analysis 4- 2 and analytical methods so that they may formulate new Elective: Sequence A or B 3- Oto 4-0 cepts and programs in operations research/systems analysis, apply the result of operations research/systems analysis with 14- 4 to 15- 4 greater effectiveness, and solve operations analysis problems Fourth Term which arise both in the fleet and ashore.

PS 317B Applied Statistics II 3- Description — The curriculum is normally of two years' OA 112A Advanced Methods in duration at the graduate level, with new students enrolled

Operations Analysis „ 4- in January and August of each year. Classroom work is aug-

MN 381A Data Processing Management 4- mented by guest lecturer-seminar series which permit offi- MN 411B Micro-Economics 4- cers to gain first-hand information as to practical applica- Elective: Sequence A or B 3- Oto 4-0 tions of operations research/systems analysis principles and

18- to 19- techniques. Between the first and second year of the program students are assigned individually as working members Fifth Term of various industrial or military organizations which are en-

MN 382A Computer Applications 4- gaged in operations analysis of military problems. Suc- Elective: Sequence A or B 4- Oto 3-1 cessful completion of the two year curriculum leads to the Elective: Sequence A or B 3- Oto 2-2 award of a Master of Science degree. Elective: Sequence or 3- 3-1 A B Oto A third year of study may be offered to particularly well

14- to 12- 4 qualified officers. Selection is based upon the expressed de-

50 EE

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL NAVAL MANAGEMENT ANQ OPERATIONS ANALYSIS sires of the individual, the Superintendent's appraisal of Third Term his academic ability and prospects, and his availability for OA 501A Introduction to System Analysis 4- the additional year of duty ashore. OA 893E Lecture/Seminar 0- 2

Core Sequence II-3 3- 1 to 4-0 First Year Elective Sequence First Term (Required) (1) 3- Oto 5-0

Elective Sequence (Optional) .... 3- Oto 5-0 Ma 180C Vector, Matrices, and Vector Spaces 3> Thesis 0- Ma 181D Partial Derivatives and Multiple Integrals 4 8 PS 310C Basic Probability and Set Theory 4 13-11 to 18-10 OA 421C Introduction to Digital Computers 5 Fourth Term

891 Lecture/Seminar () OA OA 502A System Analysis 4- OA 894E Lecture/Seminar 0- 2 Second Term Core Sequence II-4 3- Oto 4-0 Elective Sequence Ma 182C Differential Equations & Vector Analysis 5- (Required) (1) 3- Oto 5- PS 302B Second Course in Probability 3- 2 Elective Sequence (Optional) .... 3- Oto 5-0 OA 291C Introduction to Operations Research 4- Thesis 0- 4 OA 892E Lecture/Seminar 0- 2 Ph 242C Radiation 3- 13- 6 to 18- 6 MN 311C Macro-Economics 3- Core Course Sequences A and B 18- 4 Core Sequence A is designed to meet the general "Navy

Third Term need" and is required of all students except Supply Corps

Ma 196B Matrix Theory 3- officers, who may elect to take Core Sequence B instead.

PS 303B Theory and Technique in Statistics 1 3- 2 Core Sequence B is designed primarily to meet the needs

OA 292B Methods of Operations Research/ of the Supply Corps, and is adaptable to the needs of Marine

Systems Analysis 4- Corps and U. S. Army officers. OA 393B Introduction to War Gaming 2~ 2 OA 893E Lecture/Seminar 0- 2 CORE SEQUENCE A MN 312B Micro-Economics _ _ 3- (General

15- 6 1-4 PH 141B Analytical Mechanics 4- Fourth Term II-l PH 424B Fundamental Acoustics 4-

Ma 193C Set Theory and Integration 2- II-2 PH 425B Underwater Acoustics 3- 2 Electricity Magnetism 4- PS 304B Theory and Techniques in Statistics II.... 3- II-3 PH 360B and OA 293B Search Theory 4- II-4 PH 610C Modern Physics 4-

OA 391B Games of Strategy 3- 2 OA 894E Lecture/Seminar 0- 2 CORE SEQUENCE B

Core Sequence 1-4 4- (Supply Corps, Marine Corps and Army Officers) 16- 4 1-4 MN 381A Data Processing Management 4- II-l PS 307A Stochastic Process I 3- Second Year II-2 PS 305A Design of Experiments 3- 1 First Term (Supply Corps Officers) Ma 183B Fourier Series and Complex Variables.... 4- II-3 OA 213B Inventory Systems 3-

OA 211A Linear Programming 4- 1 I -4 OA 218A Seminar in Supply Systems 3- OA 236A Utility Theory 3- (Marine Corps and Army Officers) OA 891 Lecture/Seminar 0- 2 11-3 OA 491B Methods for Combat Development.. 4- Core Sequence II-l 3- to 4-0 II-4 OA 297A Selected Topics in

Elective Sequence Operations Research 3- 1

(Required) (1) 3- to 5-0 Required Elective Sequences

Elective Sequence (Optional) .... 3- to 5-0 Each student must select one of the following Sequences.

20- 3 to 25- 3 In addition, optional electives may be selected from this list. All optional electives selected must, however, be ap- Second Term proved by the Chairman, Department of Operations Analysis. OA 234A Queueing Theory 3- MN 426A Cost Estimating 3- and Analysis SEQUENCE I (Statistics) OA 892E Lecture/Seminar 0- 2 Term Core Sequence II-2 3- 1 to 4-0 _ I PS 307A Stochastic Process I 3- Elective Sequence II PS 305A Design of Experiments 3- 1 (Required) 3- 5-0 (1) Oto III PS 306A Advanced Statistics ..._ _ 3- 15- 3 to 20- 2 IV PS 308A Stochastic Process H - _ _ 3-

51 ORDNANCE ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

SEQUENCE II (Simulation) NUCLEAR ENGINEERING (EFFECTS)

I OA 396A Advanced Projects in CURRICULUM NUMBER 521 Operations Research 1- 4 (Group RZ) II PS 305A Design of Experiments 3- 1

III OA 225A Air Warfare 3- Objective — To educate selected officers in such portions IV OA 394A Advanced War Gaming 3- of the fundamental sciences as will furnish an advanced technical understanding of the phenomenology of the blast and of the thermal, nuclear, and biological aspects of nu- SEQUENCE III (Logistics) clear weapons effects, including their employment and de- I PS 307A Stochastic Process 1 3- fensive situations. II OA 217A Theory of Pattern Recognition 3- Description — Class convenes in August. This curriculum III OA 213B Inventory Systems 3- is sponsored by the Defense Atomic Support Agency as a IV OA 218A Seminar in Supply Systems 3- joint-service course for selected officers of the Army, Navy, Mr Force, Marine Corps, and Coast Guard. Upon comple- SEQUENCE IV (Computers) tion of their first four terms students are separated (depend- in I OA 3%A Adanced Projects ing on demonstrated academic potential) into either the 3-0 Operations Research 2-year curriculum leading to the degree B.S. in Physics, or 3- II Ma 428B Programming Ila 1 the 2-year curriculum leading to the degree M.S. in Physics. III Ma 146B Numerical Analysis & Digital Satisfactory completion of the M.S. curriculum requires the Computers 3- 1 writing of a thesis. V OA 394A Advanced War Gaming 3-1 For a limited number of exceptionally well-qualified students a third year of instruction may be granted. These SEQUENCE V (Economics) students are selected at the end of the first year. The sec- I MN 313A Intermediate Micro-Economic ond- and third-year curricula are then tailored to individual Theory 3- needs, consistent with the requirements of DASA and the II OA 202A Econometrics 3- parent service. III MN 316A Advanced Economic Analysis 3- IV 214A Graph Theory 3- OA First Year or OA 235A Decision Criteria 3- (First 4 terms of first year are common to both the B.S. and M.S. curricula) SEQUENCE VI (Advanced Operations Analysis) I OA 216A Cybernetics 3- First Term (Term I of Academic Year) II PS 396A Decision Theory 3- CH 106C Principles of Chemistry I 3- 2 III OA 214A Graph Theory 3- Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices with Geometric IV PS 355A Systems Reliability & Life Testing.... 3- Applications 3- 1 or Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4- OA 235A Decision Criteria 3- PH 061D Review of Mechanics and SEQUENCE VII (Modern Optimization Techniques) Electromagnetism 4- 2 I OA 396A Advanced Projects in Operations 14- 5

Research 1- 4 III PS 306A Advanced Statistics 3- Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) III Ma 248B Differential Equations for CH 109C General and Organic Chemistry 3- 2 Optimum Control 3- Ma 254C Taylor and Fourier Series 3- IV OA 297A Selected Topics in Operations Ma 255C Differential Equations and Series Research 3- Solutions 3-

PH 151 C Mechanics I 4- 1 PH 530C Thermodynamics 3-

16- 3 ORDNANCE ENGINEERING PROGRAMS Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) CURRICULA NUMBERS 521, 530, and 535 PH 152B Mechanics II 4- Mark Hopkins, Jr., Commander, Navy, U.S. Curricular PH 265C Physical Optics 4- 2 Oflicer; B.S., U.S. Merchant Marine Academy, 1950; PH 701 C Introduction to the Methods of M.S., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1958. Theoretical Physics 4-

Oscah BitYAN Wilson, Jr., Academic Associate; B.S., Univ. PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 as, 1944; M.A., Univ. of California at Los Angeles, LP 101E Lecture Program I _ 0- 1 1948; Ph.D., 1951. 16- 5

52 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ORDNANCE ENGINEERING

Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) This curriculum affords the opportunity to qualify for PH 153A Mechanics III 4- the degree Bachelor of Science in Physics. 365C Electricity and Magnetism 4- 1 PH Upon completion of their second year of studies, officer- PH 541B Introductory Statistical Physics 4- students will take a field trip to Field Command, Defense Atomic Physics I 5- PH 635B Atomic Support Agency, Sandia Base, Albuquerque, New 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 LP Mexico, for a specially tailored National Atomic Capabili- Thesis 0- 1 ties Course given by the Atomic Weapons Training Group.

17- 3 This field trip will be taken as temporary duty under instruction en route to their duty stations under perma- Upon completion of Term IV students will be separated new nent change of station orders issued by their parent services. into either the 2-year Curriculum leading to the degree B.S. in Physics, or the 2-year Curriculum leading to the degree M.S. in Physics; but all students (both B.S. and M.S.) will Second Year have an 8-week accelerated Term V to study the courses (M.S. Curriculum) listed below, followed by a 2-week leave period. First Term (Term I of Academic Year) Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) —B.S. EE 291C Electronics I (Nuclear) 3- 3 PH 366B Electromagnetism 4- PH 367A Advanced Electromagnetism I 4- PH 636B Atomic Physics II 4- 3 PH 441B Shock Waves in Fluids 4- 8- 3 PH 637B Nuclear Physics I 3- Fifth Term (Term V Academic Year)—M.S. of PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 PH 366B Electromagnetism 4- Thesis _ 0- 6 PH 636B Atomic Physics II 4- 3 14-10 Thesis* _ 0- 2

~~tTs Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) •Unsupervised study in preparation for subsequent thesis BI 800C Fundamentals of Biology _ 6- work. EE 292C Electronics II (Nuclear) 3- 3 PH 639A Nuclear Physics II 4- 3 Second Year PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 (B.S. Curriculum) Thesis 0- 6 First Term (Term I of Academic Year) 13-13 EE 291C Electronics I (Nuclear) 3- 3 PH 350B Special Topics in Electromagnetism 4- Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) PH 441B Shock Waves in Fluids 4- BI 801B Animal Physiology 6- PH 637B Nuclear Physics I 3- CH 551A Radiochemistry I 2- 4 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 ME 547C Statics and Strength of Materials 5- 14- 4 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 BI 800C Fundamentals of Biology 6- Thesis 0- 6 EE 292C Electronics II (Nuclear) 3- 3 13-12 PH 638B Nuclear Physics II 3- 3 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) Elective 4- BI 802A Radiation Biology 6- 16- 7 CH 591B Blast and Shock Effects 3-

Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) ME 548B Structural Theory 5- BI 801B Animal Physiology 6- PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 CH 591B Blast and Shock Effects 3- LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 ME 547C Statics and Strength of Materials 5- Thesis - 0- 6 ~14-~8 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 for Elective 4- This curriculum affords the opportunity to qualify of Science in Physics. 18- 2 the degree Master

Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) Upon completion of their second year of studies, officer- BI 802A Radiation Biology 6- students will take a field trip to Field Command, Defense CH 551 A Radiochemistry I 2- 4 Atomic Support Agency, Sandia Base, Albuquerque, New ME 548B Structural Theory 5- Mexico, for a specially tailored National Atomic Capabili-

PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 ties Course given by the Atomic Weapons Training Group.

LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 This field trip will be taken as temporary duty under in- Elective ~-~ 4- struction en route to their new duty stations under perma- 17- 6 nent change of station orders issued by their parent services.

53 ORDNANCE ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

UNDERWATER PHYSICS SYSTEMS Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year)—M.S. CURRICULUM NUMBER 535 EN 104C Technical Writing _ 2- 1 PH 530C Thermodynamics _. 3- Objective — To provide selected officers, by means of an PS 321B Probability _ 4- 2 advanced technical education: (a) A thorough understand- 9- 3 ing of the problems of underwater physics and their interrelationships with the anti-submarine warfare system and Second Year (b) an introduction to technical management. (2-Year B.S. Curriculum) Description — Class convenes in August. Upon comple- First Term (Term I of Academic Year) tion of their first four terms, officer students are separated EE 114B Communication Theory I 4- (depending on expressed choice of the individual, demon- EE 233B Communication Circuits and Systems 4- 3 strated academic potential, and length of availability for PH 431B Fundamental Acoustics 4- postgraduate instruction) into either the 2-year curriculum PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 leading to the degree B.S. in Physics, or the 3-year cur- 16- 5 riculum leading to the degree M.S. in Physics. Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) EE 116B Communication Theory II 3- 2 First Year EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3

(First 4 terms of first year are common to PH 432B Underwater Acoustics 4- 3 both the 2- year B.S. and 3-year M.S. curricula) PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics 2- 2

First Term (Term I of Academic Year) 12-10 EE 111C Fields and Circuits 4- 4 Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) Ma 150C Vectors and Matrices 4- 1 EE 419B Non-linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4- MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- Oc HOC Introduction to Oceanography 3- PH 463B Special Topics in Underwater Acoustics 3- 2 15- 5 PH 670B Atomic Physics I 3-

Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) 13- 6 EE 112C Circuit Analysis 4- 3 Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) EE 231C Electronics I 4- 3 EE 431C Introduction to Radar 3- 3 Ma 244C Differential Equations and EE 455B Sonar Systems _ 3- 3 Infinite Series 4- OA 131B Methods of Operations Research and PH 265C Physical Optics 4- 2 Systems Analysis 4-

16- 8 PH 671B Atomic Physics II 3- 3

Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) 13- 9 EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 This curriculum affords the opportunity to qualify for the Ma 271C Complex Variables 4- degree Bachelor of Science in Physics. PH 151C Mechanics I 4- 1 PH 701C Introduction to The Second Year Methods of Theoretical Physics 4- (3-Year M.S. Curriculum) 16- 4

Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) First Term (Term I of Academic Year) EE 113B Linear Systems Analysis 4- 3 EE 233B Communication Circuits and Systems 4- 3 EE 811 C Introduction to Digital Computers 3- 3 PH 366B Electromagnetism 4- PH 152B Mechanics II 4- PH 431B Fundamental Acoustics 4- PH 365C Electricity and Magnetism 4- 1 PS 322A Decision Theory and Classical Statistics 3- 2

15- 7 15- 5

Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) Upon completion of Term IV students will be separated PH 367A Advanced Electromagnetism I 4- into either the 2-year curriculum leading to the degree B.S. PH 432B Underwater Acoustics 4- 3 in Physics, or the 3-year curriculum leading to the degree PH 670B Atomic Physics I 3- M.S. in Physics; but all students (both B.S. and M.S.) will PS 355A System Reliability and Life Testing 3- have an 8-week accelerated Term V to study the courses listed below, followed by a 2-week leave period. 14- 3

Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year)—B.S. EE 114B Communication Theory I , 4- MN 320C Managerial Accounting 4- PH 433A Propagation of Waves in Fluids 3- PH 366B Electromagnetism „ 4- PH 461A Transducer Theory and Design 3- 3 PH 530C Thermodynamics 3- PH 671B Atomic Physics H .^_ _ 3- 3 11- 13- 6

54 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ORDNANCE ENGINEERING

Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) quent growth as may be required for the operation, mainte- EE 571A Statistical Communication Theory 3- 2 nance, design, development, or production of advanced weap- MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- ons systems. Finite Amplitude Waves in Fluids 3- PH 442A Description — Classes convene in August and January. 471A Acoustics Research 0- 3 PH All officers ordered for instruction in Weapons Systems En- 480E Acoustics Colloquium _ 0- 1 PH gineering initially matriculate in the 2-year General Cur- PH 541B Introductory Statistical Physics _.. 4- riculum. At the end of their first three terms, officer students 14- 6 will be nominated for the 3-year Advanced Weapons Sys-

Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) tems Engineering Curricula (Air/Space Physics, Chemistry, Students will have an 8-week accelerated term to study or Electronics) to fill the quotas assigned by the Chief of the courses listed below, followed by a 2-week leave period. Naval Personnel. This nomination is based on the expressed MN 320C Managerial Accounting 4- choice of the individual and the Superintendent's appraisal OA 131B Methods of Operations Research and of his academic ability. For an appropriately qualified en- Systems Analysis 4- tering student, the 2-year General Curriculum leads to the PH 621C Elementary Nuclear Physics 4- award of a bachelor's degree and any of the 3-year curricula to of a degree in scientific 12- leads the award master's a or engineering field. A 2-year Weapons Systems Engineering THIRD YEAR (Special) Curriculum is offered to selected officer students (3-Year M.S. Curriculum) of allied countries.

First Term (Term I of Academic Year) EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 August Input EE 451A Sonar Systems Engineering 4- 3 WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (GENERAL) OA 293B Search Theory 4- PH 161A Fluid Mechanics 3- CURRICULUM PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 (Group WG) Thesis _ 0- 1 Objective — To support the aims of the basic objective 14- 8 to the maximum extent practicable within the 2-year period Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) with emphasis on the fundamentals of Weapons Systems EE 419B Non-linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 Engineering. PH 162A Advanced Hydrodynamics 3- PH 462B Vibration and Noise Control 3- August Input— First Year PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 First Term (Term I of Academic Year) Thesis 0- 6 CH 106C Principles of Chemistry 1 3- 2 9-11 *EE 102D Introduction to Electricity and Magnetism 2- 2 Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices with Field assignment to an industrial or government labora- Geometric Applications 3- 1 tory or remain at TJSNPGS to do thesis work. Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables 4- *PH 051D Review of Elementary Mechanics 2- 2 Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) 14- 7 EE 433A Radar Systems 4- 2 *PH 051 D and EE 102D ore each 5-week courses and are se- OA 510B Systems Analysis . 4-

is prerequisite to EE 102D. PH 480E Acoustics Colloquium 0- 1 quential, not concurrent; PH 051D PH 481A Seminar in Applications of Underwater Sound 3- Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) Thesis 0- 6 CH 107C Principles of Chemistry II 3- 2 11- 9 EE 103C Network Analysis I _ 4- 4 Series 3- This curriculum affords the opportunity to qualify for the Ma 254C Taylor and Fourier and Series degree Master of Science in Physics. Ma 255C Differential Equations Solutions - - 3- Ma 260C Vector Analysis 3- WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 16- 6 CURRICULUM NUMBER 530 Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) Basic Objective — To provide selected officers with an Electronics I 4- 3 advanced technical education on a broad foundation which EE 231C Variables _ 4- encompasses the basic scientific and engineering principles Ma 271C Complex Mechanics I 4- 1 underlying the field of weapons and an introduction to tech- PH 151C Physical Optics - 4- 2 nical management. The specific areas of study and the level PH 265C Lecture I 0- 1 to be attained are formulated for each curriculum to insure LP 101E Program a sound basis for technical competence and for such subse-

55 ORDNANCE ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) August Input—First Year CH 61 1C General Thermodynamics - 3- 2 First Term (Term I of Academic Year) EE 104C Network Analysis II 4- 3 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 Input. PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2

LP 102E Lecture Program II _ 0- 1 Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) 15-11 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) Input. (Accelerated 8-week courses) Numerical Methods and Fortran Ma 416C Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) Programming 4- 1 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August MN 320C Managerial Accounting 4- Input. PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics 2- 2

10- 3 Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) CH 611C General Thermodynamics 3- 2 August Input—Second Year EE 104C Network Analysis II 4- 3 First Term (Term I Academic Year) of EE 232C Electronics II - 4- 3 CH 407B Physical Chemistry 3- 2 PH 152B Mechanics II 4- EE 115B Signals, Systems, and Communication 4- 1 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 15- 9 EE 611C Electromagnetic Fields 4- Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) 14- 7 (Accelerated 8-week courses) Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) CH 407B Physical Chemistry 3- 2 EE 234C Pulse Techniques and High EN 104C Technical Writing 2- 1 Frequency Tubes 3- 3 Ma 416C Numerical Methods and Fortran EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 Programming „ 4- 1 EE 612C Transmission of Electromagnetic Energy 3- 2 9- 4 PH 630C Elementary Atomic Physics 4- 13 August Input—Second Year Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) First Term (Term I of Academic Year) EE 419B Non-Linear and Sampled Systems 3 EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 EE 431C Introduction to Radar 3 PH 153A Mechanics III 4- MN 310C Engineering Economics 4 PH 365C Electricity and Magnetism 4- 1 PH 621C Elementary Nuclear Physics 4 PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 LP 101E Lecture Program I 15- 7 14 Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) EE 234C Pulse Techniques and High CH 542B Reaction Motors 3 Frequency Tubes 3- 3 CH 571B Explosives Chemistry 3 PH 366B Electromagnetism 4- OA 131B Methods of Operations Research PH 670B Atomic Physics I 3- & Systems Analysis 4 PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics 2- 2 PH 450C Underwater Acoustics _ 3 PH 622C Nuclear Physics Laboratory 12- 5

LP 102E Lecture Program II 0> Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) 13 10 EE 41 IB Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3

Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the PH 367A Advanced Electromagnetism I 4- degree Bachelor of Science in Electrical Engineering. PH 541B Introductory Statistical Physics 4- PH 671B Atomic Physics II 3- 3

LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 August Input 14- 7 ADVANCED WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (AIR SPACE PHYSICS) CURRICULUM Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) EE 419B Non-Linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 (Group WP) Mc 406A Introductory Control and Guidance 4-

Objective — To further the aims of the basic objective PH 637B Nuclear Physics I 3- by providing officer students with a broad background of PH 725A Physics of Solids I _ 4- selected science-engineering studies underlying air and space LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 weapons systems, with Physics as the major field of study Thesis 0- 1 and Electrical Engineering as the principal minor field. 14- 6

56 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ORDNANCE ENGINEERING

Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) August Input— First Year (Accelerated 8-week courses) First Term (Term I of Academic Year) MN 320C Managerial Accounting 4- Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August PH 726A Physics of Solids II 4- 2 Input. •Thesis 0- 2

8- 4 Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) Same as (General) 'Unsupervised time for reading in area of research. Weapons Systems Engineering August Input.

August Input—Third Year Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August First Term (Term I of Academic Year) Input. MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) PH 639A Nuclear Physics II 4- 3 CH 611C General Thermodynamics 3- 2 PH 654A Plasma Physics I 4- EE 104C Network Analysis II 4- 3 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 Thesis 0- 6 PH 152B Mechanics II 4- 12-10 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) ^nr~9 Ae 551A Fundamental Concepts of Fluid Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) Mechanics 4- 2 (Accelerated 8-week courses) OA 131B Methods of Operations Research and CH 231C Quantitative Analysis 2- 4 Systems Analysis 4- Ma 416C Numerical Methods and Fortran PH 655A Plasma Physics II 4- Programming 4- 1 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 EN 104C Technical Writing 2- 1 Thesis 0- 6 8- 6 12- 9 August Input—Second Year Third Term (Term III of Academic Year)

Ae 552A Flow of Compressible Fluids 4- First Term (Term I of Academic Year) MN 315B Management Planning and CH 108C Inorganic Chemistry 3- 4 Decision Making 4- CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 PH 360B Electricity and Magnetism 4- Elective 4- PS 351 B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 Thesis 0- 6 14-11

12- 8 Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) CH 443B Physical Chemistry I 4- 3 Ae 553A Viscosity, Turbulence and Boundary CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 Layer Effects in Fluid Flow 4- EE 234C Pulse Techniques and High Frequency CH 542B Reaction Motors 3- 2 Tubes 3- 3 OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- PH 670B Atomic Physics I 3- PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics 2- 2 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 12- 9 Thesis 0- 6 Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) 11-10 CH 150A Inorganic Chemistry, Advanced 4- 3 Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the CH 311C Organic Chemistry I 3- 2 degree Master of Science in Physics. CH 444B Physical Chemistry II 3- 3 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 August Input PH 671B Atomic Physics II 3- 3 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 ADVANCED WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 13-13 (CHEMISTRY) CURRICULUM Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) (Group WC) CH 312C Organic Chemistry II 3- 2

Objective — To further the aims of the basic objective CH 454B Instrumental Methods of Analysis 3- 3 by providing officer students with a broad background of CH 470A Chemical Thermodynamics 3- selected science-engineering studies oriented toward those CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 weapons systems dependent upon chemical energy for pro- PH 621C Elementary Nuclear Physics 4- pulsion or explosive applications, with Chemistry as the LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 major field of study and Electrical Engineering as the prin- Thesis 0- 1 cipal minor field. 13- 8

57 ORDNANCE ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) (Accelerated 8-week courses) Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August CH 313B Organic Chemistry III _ 3- 2 Input. MN 320C Managerial Accounting _ 4- Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) •Thesis - - 0- 2 ~T~4 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August Input. 'Unsupervised time for reading in area of research.

Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) August Input—Third Year CH 61 1C General Thermodynamics 3- 2 EE 104C Network Analysis II _ 4- 3 First Term (Term I of Academic Year) EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 CH 328A Physical Organic Chemistry I 4- PH 152B Mechanics II 4- CH 467A Quantum Chemistry I 3- LP 102E Lecture Program II .... 0- 1 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 15- 9 MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- Thesis „ 0- 6 Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year)

11- 7 (Accelerated 8-week courses) EE 125B Operational Methods for Linear Systems 3- 1 Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) Elementary Atomic Physics _ 4- CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 PH 630C Writing 2- 1 OA 131B Methods of Operations Research and EN 104C Technical Systems Analysis _ 4- CH Elective 4- CH Elective 4- August Input—Second Year Thesis 0- 6 First Term (Term I of Academic Year) 12- 7 EE 114B Communication Theory I _ 4- Third Term (Term III Academic Year) of EE 233B Communication Circuits and Systems 4- 3 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 EE 621B Electromagnetics I 3- 2 CH 770A Process Control 3- 2 PH 723B Theory of Solid State and MN 315B Management Planning and Quantum Devices _ 4- Decision Making _ 4- 15- 5 LP 101 E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Second Term (Term II Academic Year) Elective 4- of EE 213C Electronic Circuits II _ 4- 3 Thesis _ 0- 6 EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 11-10 EE 622B Electromagnetics II „ 4- Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) PS 351 B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 "15^9 CH 542B Reaction Motors _ 3- 2 CH 771 A Process Control „ 3- 2 Third Term (Term III of Academic Year)

OA 51 0B Systems Analysis 4- EE 217B Advanced Electron Devices 4- 2

LP 102E Lecture Program II _ 0- 1 EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 Thesis _ 0- 6 EE 81 1C Introduction to Digital Computers 3- 3

PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics . 2- 2 10-12 LP 101 E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the degree Master of Science in Chemistry. 12-11

Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) August Input CH 542B Reaction Motors _ 3- 2 EE 412A Feedback Control Systems II „ 3- 4 ADVANCED WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING EE 433A Radar Systems _ 4- 2 (ELECTRONICS) CURRICULUM EE 812B Logical Design and Circuitry 4- (Group WX) LP 102E Lecture Program II ..._ „ _ 0- 1 Objective — To provide students with a broad back- Thesis _ - 0- 1 ground of science-engineering studies underlying modern 14-10 weapons control systems with primary emphasis elec- on Fifth Term (Term V of Academic Year) tronics control systems and methods of digital computation. (Accelerated 8-week courses) EE 413A Sampled Data Control Systems 2- 2 August Input—First Year MN 320C Managerial Accounting _ 4- First Term (Term I of Academic Year) •Thesis _ 0- 2 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) August 6- 4 Input. 'Unsupervised time for reading in area of research.

58 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ORDNANCE ENGINEERING

August Input—Third Year January Input— First Year First Term (Term I of Academic Year) First Term (Term III of Academic Year) EE 414A Statistical Design of Control Systems 2- 2 CH 106C Principles of Chemistry I 3- 2 EE 551A Information Networks _... 3- 2 *EE 102D Introduction to Electricity and Magnetism 2- 2 Seminar 0- 1 EE 951 E Thesis Ma 120C Vectors and Matrices with 310C Engineering Economics 4- MN Geometric Applications 3- 1 Thesis 0- 6 Ma 230D Calculus of Several Variables .'. 4- 9-11 *PH 051 D Review of Elementary Mechanics 2- 2

Second Term (Term II of Academic Year) LP 101 E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Network Synthesis 3- 2 EE 122A 14- 8 EE 951E Thesis Seminar _ 0- 1 OA 131B Methods of Operations Research and *PH 051D and EE 102D are each 5-week courses and are se- Systems Analysis 4- quential, not concurrent; PH 05 ID is prerequisite to EE 102D. Elective _ _ 4- Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) Thesis _ 0- 6 CH 107C Principles of Chemistry II ..._ _. 3- 2

Network Analysis I _... 4- 4 11- 9 EE 103C Ma 254C Taylor and Fourier Series 3- Third Term (Term III of Academic Year) Ma 255C Differential Equations and EE 462A Automation and System Control 3- 3 Series Solutions _ 3- EE 473A Missile Guidance Systems 3- Ma 260C Vector Analysis _ 3- EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 MN 315B Management Planning and

Decision Making ..._ _ 4- 16- 7 LP 101E Lecture Program I „ 0- 1 Third Term (Term V of Academic Year)

Thesis . 0- 6 (Accelerated 8-week courses) 3- 2 10-11 CH 611C General Thermodynamics Ma 271C Complex Variables ..._ 4- Fourth Term (Term IV of Academic Year) Ma 416C Numerical Methods and EE 461A Systems Engineering _ 3- 2 Fortran Programming 4- 1 EE 821B Computer Systems Technology 3- 3 EE 951E Thesis Seminar _ 0- 1 11- 3 OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 EE 104C Network Analysis II „ 4- 3 Thesis 0- 6 EE 231 C Electronics I 4- 3

10-13 PH 151C Mechanics I _ 4- 1 265C Physical Optics _ 4- 2 Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the PH degree Master of Science in Engineering Electronics. 16- 9 Fifth Term (Term II of Academic Year) August Input EE 115B Signals, Systems, and Communication 4- 1 EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (SPECIAL) CURRICULUM EE 321 C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 (Group WS) PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 15-10 Objective — To provide selected foreign officers with a technical education in the principal science-engineering January Input—Second Year fields of Electrical Engineering, Physics, and Chemistry First Term (Term III Academic Year) underlying weapons systems. of 407B Physical Chemistry - 3- 2 Both the first and second year of this 2-year program are CH 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 the same as the Weapons Systems Engineering (General) EE 320C Managerial Accounting 4- Curriculum except for minor modifications to fit the needs MN Elementary Atomic Physics 4- of individual students. PH 630C Engineering Statistics 2- 2 This curriculum affords the opportunity to qualify for PS 352B Applied Lecture Program I _ - 0- 1 the degree Bachelor of Science in Electrical Engineering. LP 101E 16- 8 January Input Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (GENERAL) EE 234C Pulse Techniques and High CURRICULUM Frequency Tubes 3- 3 (Group WG) EE 419B Non-Linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4

Electromagnetic Fields . _ 4- Objective — To support the aims of the basic objective EE 61 1C — Engineering Economics - 4- to the maximum extent practicable within the 2-year period MN 310C Lecture 0- 1 with emphasis on the fundamentals of Weapons Systems LP 102E Program U Engineering. 14- 8

59 ORDNANCE ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) (Accelerated 8-week courses) EE 234C Pulse Techniques and High EE 612C Transmission of Electromagnetic Energy 3- 2 Frequency Tubes 3- 3 PH 621C Elementary Nuclear Physics 4- Mc 406A Introductory Control and Guidance 4- PH 622C Nuclear Physics Laboratory 0- 3 PH 367A Advanced Electromagnetism I 4-

7- 5 PH 671B Atomic Physics II 3- 3 102E Lecture Program II _ 0- 1 Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) LP *CH 542B Reaction Motors 3- 2 14- 7 *CH 571B Explosives Chemistry 3- 2 Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) EE 431C Introduction to Radar 3- 3 (Accelerated 8-week courses) OA 131B Methods of Operations Research MN 320C Managerial Accounting 4- and Systems Analysis 4- PH 541B Introductory Statistical Physics 4- *PH 450C Underwater Acoustics 3- 2 PH 637B Nuclear Physics I 3-

13- 7 11- *Students take two of these three courses. Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 degree Bachelor of Science in Electrical Engineering. PH 639A Nuclear Physics II 4- 3

PH 654A Plasma Physics I 4- January Input PH 725A Physics of Solids I 4- ADVANCED WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 AIR/SPACE PHYSICS) CURRICULUM Thesis 0- 1 (Group WP) 15- 9 Fifth Term (Term II Academic Year) Objective — To further the aims of the basic objective of Ae 551 A Fundamental Concepts of Fluid by providing officer students with a broad background of Mechanics 4- 2 selected science-engineering studies underlying air and space PH 655A Plasma Physics II 4- weapons systems, with Physics as the maim field of study PH 726A Physics of Solids II 4- 2 and Electrical Engineering as the principal minor field PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 Thesis „ 0- 6 January Input— First Year 12-11 First Term (Term 111 of Academic Year) Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- January Input—Third Year uary Input.

First Term (Term III of Academic Year) Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) Ae 552A Flow of Compressible Fluids 4- Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I 3- 3 uary Input. MN 310C Engineering Economics 4-

Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1

Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 uary Input. Thesis 0- 6

11-11 Fourth Term (Term 1 of Academic Year) Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- Ae 553A Viscosity, Turbulence and Boundary uary Input. Layer Effects in Fluid Flow 4- Fifth Term (Term 11 of Academic Year) EE 419B Non-Linear and Sampled Systems 3- 4 EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 OA 131 B Methods of Operations Research PH 152B Mechanics II 4- and Systems Analysis 4- PH 365C Electricity and Magnetism 4- 1 PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 16- 6 Thesis 0- 6 11-12 January Input—Second Year Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) First Term (Term 111 of Academic Year) (Accelerated 8-week courses) PH 153A Mechanics III 4- CH 407B Physical Chemistry 3- 2 PH 366B Electromagnetism 4- MN 315B Management Planning and Decision PH 670B Atomic Physics I _ 3- Making _ _ 4- PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics 2- 2 •Thesis 0- 2 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 7- 4

13- 3 Unsupervised time for organization of rough draft of thesis.

60 \ WAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ORDNANCE ENGINEERING

Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) CH 542B Reaction Motors 3- 2 CH 231C Quantitative Analysis 2- 4 OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- CH 312C Organic Chemistry II 3- 2

PH 750E Physics Colloquium 0- 1 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 Elective 4- EE 234C Pulse Techniques and High Thesis 0- 6 Frequency Tubes 3- 3

11- 9 PH 635B Atomic Physics I 5-

Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the LP 102E Lecture Program II „ 0- 1 degree Master of Science in Physics. 13-11

Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) January Input (Accelerated 8-week courses) CH 313B Organic Chemistry III 3- ADVANCED WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 2 MN 320C Managerial Accounting 4- (CHEMISTRY) CURRICULUM PH 636B Atomic Physics II 4- (Group WC) 3 11- 5 Objective — To further the aims of the basic objective Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) by providing officer students with a broad background of CH 328A Physical Organic Chemistry I 4- selected science-engineering studies oriented toward those CH 467A Quantum Chemistry I 3- weapons systems dependent upon chemical energy for pro- CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 pulsion or explosive applications, with Chemistry as the EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 major field of study and Electrical Engineering as the prin- PH 621C Elementary Nuclear Physics 4- cipal minor field. Thesis 0- 1

January Input— First Year 14- 6 Fifth Term (Term II of Academic Year) First Term (Term III of Academic Year) CH 454B Instrumental Methods of Analysis 3- 3 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 uary Input. CH Elective 4- Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) CH Elective 4- Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- Thesis 0- 6 uary Input. 11-10 Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) (Accelerated 8-week courses) Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- January Input—Third Year uary Input.

Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) First Term (Term III of Academic Year) CH 108C Inorganic Chemistry 3- 4 CH 150A Inorganic Chemistry, Advanced „ 4- 3 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 EE 104C Network Analysis II 4- 3 CH 770A Process Control 3- 2 EE 231C Electronics I 4- 3 MN 310C Engineering Economics 4- PH 151C Mechanics I 4- 1 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 Thesis 0- 15-12 6

Fifth Term (Term II of Academic Year) 11-13 CH 443B Physical Chemistry I 4- 3 Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 CH 470A Chemical Thermodynamics 3- EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 PH 152B Mechanics II 4- CH 771A Process Control 3- 2 PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 OA 131B Methods of Operations Research

16- 9 and Systems Analysis 4- LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 January Input—Second Year Thesis 0- 6

First Term (Term III of Academic Year) 10-10 CH 311C Organic Chemistry I 3- 2 Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) CH 444B Physical Chemistry II _ 3- 3 (Accelerated 8-week courses) CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 MN 315B Management Planning and Decision PH 265C Physical Optics 4- 2 Making 4- PH 360B Electricity and Magnetism 4- Elective 4- PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics 2- 2 •Thesis _ 0- 2

LP 101E Lecture Program I ...._ _ 0- 1 8- 2

16-11 Unsupervised time for organization of rough draft of thesis.

61 ORDNANCE ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) CH 800E Chemistry Seminar 0- 1 EE 114B Communication Theory I _... 4- CH 542B Reaction Motors 3- 2 EE 411B Feedback Control Systems I „ 3- 3 OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- EE 621B Electromagnetics I „ _ 3- 2 Elective - 4- EE 812B Logical Design and Circuitry 4- Thesis ~ 0- 6 LP 102E Lecture Program II 0- 1 11- 9

Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the degree Master of Science in Chemistry. Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) (Accelerated 8-week courses) January Input EE 622B Electromagnetics II 4- ADVANCED WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING MN 320C Managerial Accounting 4- (ELECTRONICS) CURRICULUM PH 630C Elementary Atomic Physics 4- (Group WX) 12-

Objective — To provide students with a broad back- Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) ground of science-engineering studies underlying modern weapons control systems with primary emphasis on elec- EE 217B Advanced Electron Devices _... 4- 2 tronic control systems and methods of digital computation. EE 412A Feedback Control Systems II 3- 4 EE 551A Information Networks 3- 2 EE 951E Thesis Seminar „ 0- 1 January Input—First Year PH 723B Theory of Solid State and

Quantum Devices ..._ 4- First Term (Term III of Academic Year) Thesis _ _ 0- 1 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- "1440 uary Input.

Fifth Term (Term II of Academic Year) Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- EE 122A Network Synthesis I 3- 2 uary Input. EE 413A Sampled Data Control Systems 2- 2 EE 433A Radar Systems 4- 2 EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 Third Term (Term V of Academic Year) Thesis 0- 6 (Accelerated 8-week courses) 9-13 Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- uary Input.

January Input—Third Year Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year)

Same as Weapons Systems Engineering (General) Jan- First Term (Term III of Academic Year) uary Input.

EE 414A Statistical Design of Control Systems 2- 2 3- Fifth Term (Term II of Academic Year) EE 473A Missile Guidance Systems EE 951 E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 EE 232C Electronics II 4- 3 MN 310C Engineering Economics ...„ 4- EE 321C Electromechanical Devices 3- 4 LP 101E Lecture Program I 0- 1 PH 152B Mechanics II _ 4- Thesis „ 0- 6 PS 351B Probability and Statistics 4- 2 9-10 15- 9

Second Term (Term IV of Academic Year) January Input—Second Year EE 461A Systems Engineering 3- 2 First (Term III Term of Academic Year) EE 821B Computer Systems Technology _ 3- 3

EE 125B Operational Methods for Linear Systems 3- 1 EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 EE 213C Electronic Grcuits II 4- 3 OA 13 IB Methods of Operations Research

EE 233B Communication Circuits and Systems .... 4- 3 and Systems Analysis 4- PS 352B Applied Engineering Statistics 2- 2 LP 102E Lecture Program II _ 0- 1 LP 101E Lecture Program _ 0- 1

13-10 10-13

62 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ORDNANCE ENGINEERING

Thiid Term (Term V of Academic Year) January Input (Accelerated 8-week courses) WEAPONS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (SPECIAL) MN 315B Management Planning and Decision Making _ 4- CURRICULUM Elective _ 4- (Group WS) •Thesis _ 0- 2

~1T2 Objective — To provide selected foreign officers with a •Unsupervised time for organization of rough draft of thesis. technical education in the principal science-engineering Fourth Term (Term I of Academic Year) fields of Electrical Engineering, Physics, and Chemistry CH 542B Reaction Motors _ 3- 2 underlying weapons systems. EE 462A Automation and System Control 3- 3 Both the first and second year of this 2-year program are EE 951E Thesis Seminar 0- 1 the same as the Weapons Systems Engineering (General) OA 510B Systems Analysis 4- Curriculum except for minor modifications to fit the needs Thesis _ _ 0- 6 of individual students.

Successful completion of this curriculum leads to the This curriculum affords the opportunity to qualify for degree Master of Science in Engineering Electronics. the degree Bachelor of Science in Electrical Engineering.

Electrical Engineering Laboratories

63 CURRICULA AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

CURRICULA CONDUCTED AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES

Curricular

Liaison ISupervisory

Curriculum Number Length Institution Official Control Authority

Business Administration 810 2-yrs. Harvard CO, NROTC BUSANDA Stanford CO, NROTC BUWEPS Civil Engineering (Advanced) 470 1-2 yrs. Georgia Tech. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Typical Options: M.I.T. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Princeton CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Structures Purdue CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Soil Mechanics R.P.I. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Sanitary Engineering Stanford CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Waterfront Facilities Texas A.&M. Senior Officer Student BUDOCKS Facilities Planning Tulane CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Construction Engineering Cal. (Berkeley) CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Civil Engineering Administration U. of Colo. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS

Deep Ocean Construction Engineering U. of 111. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS U. of Mich. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS U. of Minn. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS U. of Wash. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Electrical Engineering (CEC) 471 15-24 mos. U. of Mich. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Engineering Electronics (CEC) 472 12-18 mos. U. of Mich. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Financial Management 812 lyr. Geo. Wash. U. Senior Officer Student NAVCOMP Hydrographic Engineering (Geodesy) 475 2 yrs. Ohio St. U. CO, NROTC OPNAV(Op-09B2) International Relations 671 lyr. American U. Senior Officer Stu dent BUPERS Harvard CO, NROTC USNPGS Law (Army Judge Advocate Officers Advanced Course) 881 9 mos. U. of Virginia CO, NROTC JAG

Management and Industrial Engineering 540 1 yr. R.P.I. CO, NROTC BUWEPS Mechanical Engineering (CEC) 473 lyr. R.P.I. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS Metallurgical Engineering 640 9 mos. Carnegie Tech. Senior Officer Stu

Naval Construction and Engineering 510 3 yrs. M.I.T. CO. NROTC BUSHIPS Webb Inst. Senior Officer Student BUSHIPS Nuclear Engineering (Advanced) 520 14 mos. M.I.T. CO, NROTC BUSHIPS Nuclear Power Engineering (CEC) 572 15-20 mos. Penn. State U. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS U. of Mich. CO, NROTC BUDOCKS

Oceanography 440 2 yrs. U. of Miami

(Florida) Senior Officer Stuilent USNPGS U. of Washington CO, NROTC USNPGS Texas A.&M. Senior Officer Student USNPGS U. of Cal. (San Diego) Senior Officer Stuilent USNPGS M.I.T. CO, NROTC USNPGS Petroleum Administration and Management 880 lyr. S.M.U. Senior Officer Student JAG Petroleum Engineering (CEC) 630 1 yr. U. of Texas CO, NROTC BUDOCKS lyr. Industry Petroleum Management 811 16 mos. U. of Kansas CO, NROTC BUSANDA Political Science 680 2 yrs. Fletcher School of Law

and Diplomacy, Tuft s CO, NROTC OPNAV(Op-61) Univ. of Washington Procurement Management 815 lyr. U. of Mich. CO, NROTC BUSANDA Public Relations 920 lyr. U. of Wise. CO. NROTC CHINFO Religion 970 9 mos. Various Chief of Chaplains Retailing 830 lyr. Michigan State Senior Officer Stu

64 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL CURRICULA AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES

CURRICULA Courses in Advanced/International Economics AT OTHER UNIVERSITIES Courses in Personnel Administration/ Human Relations The curricula listed in this section are conducted entirely Courses in Marketing/Sales/Merchandising

at civilian educational institutions. Quotas for enrollment Courses in Transportation must be approved by the Chief of Naval .Personnel. The Courses in Military Management table indicates the duration of each curriculum, the loca- Courses in Taxation

tion, and the curricular supervisory control authority as Courses in Foreign Operations

set forth in BUPERS INSTRUCTION 1520.50B. Admin- Courses in Probability and Statistics istration of officer students in connection with educational for Business Decisions

matters is exercised by the Superintendent, U. S. Naval Courses in Industrial Procurement Postgraduate School, through the Commanding Officer, At Stanford University NROTC Unit, or through the Senior Officer Student at those institutions where no NROTC Unit is established. Objective — To give the student a foundation in the

The information on courses is taken from college cata- following areas: (1) the external environment of the com-

logues, but is subject to change from year to year. Changes mercial firm, (2) the internal and organizational environ-

depend on scheduling problems at the educational institu- ment of the firm, (3) quantitative methods and tools of tions and on the academic backgrounds of students. Further control, and (4) the management of major functions; to detailed information can be obtained from the catalogue give the student an opportunity to apply the knowledge, of the institution concerned, or by writing to the institution. skills, and attitudes acquired to the solution of action- oriented problems involving the entire commercial enter- BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION prise. CURRICULUM NO 810 Course length: Two years At Harvard University Degree attainable: Master of Business Administration Typical Curriculum: Objective — To give emphasis to the following areas of — study: (1) recognition of problems, (2) realistic adminis- Required First Year trative follow-through on decisions, (3) an understanding Organization Behavior and realistic handling of human relations, (4) administra- Marketing Management I & II

tive powers in general, (5) the relationship of business to Quantitative Methods I, II & III

the government and to the public welfare, (6) the integra- Business Economics I & II

tion of business functions, and (7) the point of view of the Management Accounting I & II Chief Executive and the directors responsible for over-all Business Finance I & II operations so as to give the student an effective start in Manufacturing I & II the development of his managerial skills and an apprecia- Employment Relationships tion of the responsibilities of a business administrator. Second Year Course length: Two years Courses in Industrial and Financial Accounting, Audit, Degree attainable: Master of Business Administration Comptrollership

Typical Curriculum: Courses in Production/Manufacturing Courses in Finance/Investment/Banking First Year (All courses required) Courses in Personnel Administration/Industrial Elements of Administration: Relations Finance Courses in Marketing/Sales Human Behavior in Organizations I and II Courses in Transportation Organizational Problems Courses in Insurance/Risk Management Managerial Economics, Reporting, Courses in Advanced Economics/International Trade and Control I and II Courses in Research/Small Business Management Managerial Economics, Reporting, Courses in Business Information Systems Data and Control III and IV Processing Marketing Courses in Purchasing Planning and the Business Environment Production Written Analysis of Cases CIVIL ENGINEERING (ADVANCED) CURRICULUM NUMBER 470 Second Year (10 half-year courses required) Business Policy (Required) At: Georgia Institute of Technology Courses in General Business Management Massachusetts Institute of Technology Courses in Industrial and Financial Accounting Princeton University Courses in Production/Manufacturing Purdue University Courses in Finance/Investment Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute

65 CURRICULA AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Stanford University ENGINEERING ELECTRONICS (CEC) Texas A&M CURRICULUM NUMBER 472 Tulane University At University of Michigan University of California (Berkeley) University of Colorado Objective — To provide advanced education for selected

University of Illinois CEC officers in the field of electronics with options in com- University of Michigan munication engineering, computer engineering, engineering

University of Minnesota systems and design, electromagnetic field theory, and micro- University of Washington wave engineering.

Objective — To educate officers for civil engineering Course length: 12 to 18 months duties. Options are available in all major fields of civil Degree attainable: Master of Science in Engineering engineering. Typical options are: construction engineering, Electronics structures, soil mechanics, sanitary engineering, waterfront facilities, facilities planning, and civil engineering administration. Officers without previous civil engineering educa- FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT tion would undertake a two-year curriculum; officers hold- CURRICULUM NUMBER 812 ing a Bachelor of Civil Engineering degree would under- At George Washington University take a one-year curriculum. This program is to qualify line Objective officers (1100) for civil engineering duties and to provide — To develop in officers of mature judgment and a broad advanced education for Civil Engineering Corps officers background of professional experience the (5100). ability to interpret and analyze operational statistics for the

Course length: One to two years purpose of developing standards of performance; to pro- Degree attainable: Master of Science in Civil vide a periodic review of operations in order to denote Engineering areas of management which are not meeting standards; to Typical Curriculum: (For two-year Structures Option) review budget estimates; and to plan programs for the improvement of management economy and efficiency through First Year: better organization, administration and procedures and bet- Contracts and Specifications ter utilization of manpower, materials, facilities, funds and Structural Analysis I and II time. The course is designed to give graduates a working Reinforced Concrete I and II knowledge of managerial controls adequate for assignment Hydraulics to financial management duties as a normal preparation Mechanical Behavior of Materials I for command and executive billets in the shore establish- Mathematics ment and leads to degree Master of Business Administra- Highway and Airport Engineering tion. Digital Computation Methods Building Construction Course length: One year Structural Design Degree attainable: Master of Science in Business Structural Mechanics Administration Typical Curriculum: Second Year:

Advanced Mathematics Required Undergraduate Courses: Water Supply and Sewerage Survey of Accounting Indeterminate Structures Introduction to Econometrics Prestressed Concrete Industrial and Governmental Economics Analytical Solution of Structural Problems Bases of Statistical Decision Making Long Span Structures Construction Methods and Estimates Required Graduate Courses: Limit Design of Steel Structures Decision Systems and Accounting Structural Analysis for Terminal Loadings Managerial Accounting Advanced Indeterminate Structures Advanced Administrative Management Thesis Business Research I & II Human Relations in Administration ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING (CEC) Readings and Conferences in Comptrollership CURRICULUM NUMBER 471 Governmental Budgeting At University of Michigan Survey of Data Processing

Objective — To provide advanced education for selected Choice of three from graduate courses in: CEC officers in electrical engineering with emphasis on Accounting power plants and electrical utility distribution. Business Administration Course length: 15-24 months Business and Public Administration Degree attainable: Master of Science in Electrical Public Administration Engineering Statistics

66 :

N WAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL CURRICULA AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES

HYDROGRAPHIC ENGINEERING (GEODESY) Fall: CURRICULUM NUMBER 475 Cost Finding and Control New Product Problems or At Ohio State University Organization and Management of Marketing Objective — To prepare officers for assignment to duties Organization Planning & Development at the Oceanographic Office, on geodetic survey expeditions, Industrial Relations and on fleet staffs. The curriculum presents a fundamental Production Management I geodesy, cartography, and photo- theoretical knowledge of Spring: grammetry, particularly as applied to hydrographic survey- Administrative Practice and Behavior ing and the compilation and production of charts and maps. Financial Planning and Control Course length: Two years Seminar in Management Degree attainable: Master of Science in Geodesy Production Management II Analytical Methods in Management INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS CURRICULUM NUMBER 671 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (CEC) At: American University CURRICULUM NUMBER 473 Harvard University At Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute

Objective — To provide a broad understanding of tiie Objective — To provide advanced education for selected forces and factors in international relations to equip officers CEC officers in mechanical engineering with emphasis on to meet responsibilities involving knowledge of the inter- power plants, heating and ventilation. national situation, including awareness of the role of sea Course length: power in world affairs. One year Course length: One year Degree attainable: Master of Science in Mechanical Degree attainable: Master of Arts Engineering

LAW METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING CURRICULUM NUMBER 881 CURRICULUM NUMBER 640 At Carnegie Institute of Technology (Army Judge Advocate Officers Advanced Course ) At University of Virginia Objective — To obtain the maximum possible metallurgical background in a short program designed specifically for Objective—To prepare more experienced Law Specialists the graduate of the Naval Construction and Engineering (1620) for advanced staff responsibilities in the various Curriculum. legal fields. The course encompasses all branches of military length: Nine months law with emphasis on the administration of the Uniform Course Degree attainable: Bachelor of Science in Metallurgy Code of Military Justice, military affairs, civil affairs arising out of the operation of or litigation of military law, military reservations, international law including the laws of war. NAVAL CONSTRUCTION AND ENGINEERING procurement and contract law. and legal assistance to mili- CURRICULUM NUMBER 510 tary personnel. At: Massachusetts Institute of Technology Course length: Nine months Webb Institute of Naval Architecture

Objective — To qualify selected officers for duty assign- MANAGEMENT AND INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING ments in the fields of naval construction and marine engi- CURRICULUM NUMBER 540 neering. The curricula are arranged to provide a broad At Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute capability in naval architecture and an exceptional capability in one option or specialty. Options are available in the Objective — To prepare selected officers for managerial following areas: hull design and construction, marine elec- and industrial engineering billets in the Navy's industrial trical engineering, electronics engineering and ship propul- organization. The curriculum majors in industrial engineer- sion engineering. Selection of options is made after comple- ing and its application to managerial problems. tion of the first summer term. Exceptional students are Course length: One year encouraged to pursue advanced work at the doctoral level. Degree attainable: Master of Science in Management Successful completion of this curriculum leads to "Engi- Engineering neering Duty" designation (1400). Typical Curriculum: Course length: Three years Summer: Degree attainable: Master of Science in Naval Archi- Review of Quantitative Methods tecture and Marine Engineering and the Degree of Statistical Methods Naval Engineer Law in Management and Engineering Typical Curriculum at M.I.T. Data Processing (Hull Design and Construction Option)

67 CURRICULA AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

First Summer: NUCLEAR POWER ENGINEERING (CEC) Strength of Materials and Dynamics CURRICULUM NUMBER 572 Applied Hydrostatics Review of Mathematics At: The Pennsylvania State University University of Michigan First Year: Structural Mechanics Objective — To provide education for selected CEC offi- Fluid Mechanics cers in nuclear power engineering. Graduates of this cur- Thermodynamics riculum will normally be assigned duties in the shore nu- History of Naval Ships clear power program under the technical direction of the Advanced Calculus for Engineers Bureau of Yards and Docks. Naval Structural Engineering

Course length : 15 to 20 months Heat Transfer Introduction to Nuclear Physics Degree attainable: Master of Science Principles of Naval Architecture

Naval Ship General Arrangements I Introduction to Probability and Random Variables OCEANOGRAPHY Second Summer: CURRICULUM NUMBER 440 Digital Computer Program Systems At: University of Washington Advanced Calculus for Engineers Texas A&M College Second Year: University of Miami (Florida)

Advanced Hydromechanics I and II University of California (San Diego) Properties of Metals Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Naval Structural Theory I and II officers billets Naval Ship Propulsion I Objective — To prepare for assignment to Mechanical Vibration requiring comprehensive theoretical and practical founda- Naval Ship General Arrangements II tion in the various aspects of oceanography. Students may Naval Structural Analysis specialize in physical, biological, chemical, or geological Advanced Mechanics oceanography. Entering students are expected to have a Properties of Metals baccalaureate degree in physics, mathematics, meteorology, Electives: Experimental Hydrodynamics geophysics, or engineering, including the following undergraduate differential equations Naval Structural Design I work: mathematics through Naval Electrical Engineering (about 20 semester hours), physics (about 25 semester hours), chemistry through quantitative analysis, and intro- Third Summer: ductory courses in biology, oceanography, geology, and Industrial Tour meteorology.

Third Year: Course length: Two years Advanced Structural Mechanics Degree attainable: Master of Science in Oceanography Experimental Stress Analysis Principles of Ship Design Principles of Naval Ship Design Hydroacoustics PETROLEUM ADMINISTRATION AND

Naval Ship Propulsion II MANAGEMENT

Electives: Naval Structural Design II (Gas, Oil and Water Rights) Buckling of Structures CURRICULUM NUMBER 880 Plasticity Thesis At Southern Methodist University

Objective — To provide Law Specialists (1620) with a NUCLEAR ENGINEERING (ADVANCED) study of government regulations in oil and gas law taxation CURRICULUM NUMBER 520 problems, and special research and study of the evolution of At Massachusetts Institute of Technology law concerning water rights, current law affecting these rights, and technical problems attendant thereto so as to Objective — To qualify officers for the technical direction prepare them for assignment to billets concerned with the of nuclear power development in the Navy. Graduates of administration and management of the Naval Petroleum and this program can normally expect to be assigned duties Oil Shale Reserves and with the special problems in the within the nuclear power development program under the field of water rights. direction of the Bureau of Ships.

Course length: 14 months Course length: One year Degree attainable: Master of Science Degree attainable: Master of Laws in Oil and Gas

68 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL CURRICULA AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING (CEC) (1) The theory of international politics, economics, law, CURRICULUM NUMBER 630 and U.S. diplomatic history. (2) The politics, geography and history of one of the At University of Texas following regions of the world: Europe, Asia, Africa, West- and in the petroleum industry ern Hemisphere. (3) The history, role and importance of world-wide and Objective — To prepare selected CEC officers for assign- regional international organizations. ments to duty involving the administration and operations (4) Development and execution of U.S. political, military of Naval Petroleum and Oil Shale Reserves. The curriculum and economic policy as it pertains to U.S. foreign relations. provides the student with a knowledge of petroleum development and production procedures, geology, petroleum eco- Course length: Two years nomics and reservoir engineering. Degree attainable: Master of Arts Course length: One year of academic work followed by PROCUREMENT MANAGEMENT up to one year in the field with a major oil company CURRICULUM NUMBER 815 Degree attainable: Master of Science in Petroleum At University of Michigan Engineering Objective — To provide officers of the Supply Corps with PETROLEUM MANAGEMENT graduate level education in the field of military and commercial procurement: CURRICULUM NUMBER 811 Course length: One year At University of Kansas Degree attainable: Master of Business Administration

Objective — To provide officers of the Supply Corps with PUBLIC RELATIONS graduate level education in the functional proficiency field CURRICULUM NUMBER 920 of petroleum management and adminstration. At University of Wisconsin Course length: Sixteen months provide qualifications of officers Degree attainable: Master of Science Objective — To advanced Typical Curriculum: in the field of public relations. Officers selected for this program must have previous education or experience in public Fall: information and public relations. The curriculum will be Quantitative Analysis I made up from regular course offerings of the university and

Material and Energy will be based on an officer student's background and partic- Development of Oil and Gas Lands ular interest within the curricular area. Theoretical Principles of Petroleum Production Course length: One year Degree attainable: Master of Arts in Public Relations Spring: Quantitative Analysis II RELIGION Field Practice in Natural Gas CURRICULUM NO. 970 Appraisal of Oil and Gas Properties At: Harvard University Research Yale University Summer: Catholic University Personnel Management University of Chicago Legal Aspects of Business Research University of Notre Dame Fordham University Fall: Union Theological Seminary Petroleum Management Research Objective — To broaden the education of officer students

in such fields as psychology, theology, homiletics, and coun- POLITICAL SCIENCE seling, hospital ministry and education. CURRICULUM NUMBER 680 Course length: 9 months At: The Fletcher School of Law and Diplomacy, RETAILING Tufts University CURRICULUM NUMBER 830 Graduate School of Public Affairs, University of Washington At Michigan State University

Objective — To equip a limited number of intellectually Objective — To provide officers of the Supply Corps with education in the functional proficiency field mature officers with a broad professional background in graduate level sales international relations in order that they may provide proof retailing. Emphasis is placed on consumer markets, fessional advice and assistance in the formulation and exe- promotion, merchandise and merchandising, and the man- cution of national policy. Studies should be specifically di- agement functions associated therewith. rected toward obtaining sound knowledge and understand- Course length: One year ing in: Degree attainable: Master of Business Administration NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL CURRICULA AT CIVILIAN UNIVERSITIES

SUBSISTENCE TECHNOLOGY TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY CURRICULUM NUMBER 860 CURRICULUM NUMBER 580

At Michigan State University At North Carolina State College

Objective — To provide officers of the Supply Corps with Objective — To provide officers of the Supply Corps with graduate level education in the field of food management. graduate level education in the functional proficiency field Course length: One year of textile management. Degree attainable: Master of Business Administration Course length: 18 months

Degree attainable: Master of Textile Technology SYSTEMS INVENTORY MANAGEMENT CURRICULUM NUMBER 819 Typical Curriculum: Technology Seminar At Harvard University Textile Testing II

Objective — To provide officers of the Supply Corps with Textile Quality Control a well-grounded education at the graduate level in the Complex Woven Structures scientific methods of inventory management. Fabric Analytics and Characteristics Course length: Two years Yarn Manufacture Degree attainable: Master of Business Administration Synthetics IV Typical Curriculum: Fabric Development and Construction Principles of Accounting First Year: (Required) Introduction to Production Costs Elements of Administration: Management Policy and Decision Making Finance Management of Industrial Relations Human Behavior in Organizations I and II Organizational Problems TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Managerial Economics, Report, and Control I and IV CURRICULUM NUMBER 813 Managerial Economics, Reporting, and Control II and III At Michigan State University Marketing Objective — To provide officers of the Supply Corps with Planning and the Business Environment graduate level education in the functional proficiency field Production of transportation management. Written Analysis of Cases Course length: One year Second Year: (Required) Management Information Systems Degree attainable: Master of Business Administration Business Logistics Typical Curriculum:

Financial Accounting I and II Basic Accounting II Seminar in Military Marketing and Project Financial Management Management Basic Marketing

Basic Statistics I Second Year: (Electives) (Four to be selected) Accounting for Financial and Profit Cost Administration Management II Industrial Procurement Problems in Business Economics Managing Technological Change Basic Statistics II Planning and Controlling Production Transportation Policy •Analysis of Quantitative Data I and II Accounting for Financial and Profit •Probability and Statistics for Business Management III Decisions I and II Human Problems in Administration •Topics in Operations Analysis I and II •Management Economics Social Problems in Administration Marketing Management •Prerequisite — Mathematics through Differential Calculus Transportation Seminar

V4W^f:

Chapel ACADEMIC DEPARTMENTS and COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

ft ; ;

AERONAUTICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

DEPARTMENT OF AERONAUTICS Michael Hans Vavra, Professor of Aeronautics (1947) Dipl. Ing., Swiss Federal Institute of Technology, 1934; Ph.D., Univ. of Vienna, 1958. Richard William Bell, Professor of Aeronautics; Chair-

man (1951),* A.B., Oberlin College, 1939; Ae.E., Cali- Robert Diefendorf Zucker, Associate Professor of Aero- fornia Institute of Technology, 1941; Ph.D., 1958. nautics (1965); B.S. in M.E., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1946; M.M.E., Univ. of Louisville, 1958; Eric John Andrews, Professor of Aeronautics (1959); Ph.D., Univ. of Arizona, 1966. Honors B.S., Aero. Eng., Univ. of London, 1936.

Daniel Peter Bencze, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREES

Naval Reserve; Instructor in Aeronautics (1965) ; B.S., IN AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING Univ. of Notre Dame, 1964; M.S., Massachusetts Insti-

tute of Technology, 1965. The following is a summary of the minimum academic requirements for the award of these degrees as determined by Larry Trumbull Clark, Instructor in Aeronautics (1965) the Aeronautics Department. Any curriculum toward these B.S., Univ. of California, 1961; M.S., 1963. degrees must also be consistent with the general minimum Wendell Marios Coates, Fellow, Professor of Aeronautics requirements as determined by the Academic Council. (1931); A.B., Williams College, 1919; M.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1923; D.Sc, 1929. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN AERONAUTICAL

Theodore Henry Gawain, Professor of Aeronautics (1951) ENGINEERING Massachusetts B.S., Univ. of Pennsylvania, 1940; D.Sc, This degree normally requires a minimum of 96 term Institute of Technology, 1944. hours of upper division courses in residence at the Post- graduate School (unless reduced by validated advanced Ulrich Haupt, Associate Professor of Aeronautics (1954) : credit) of which at least 70 term hours are in aeronautic* Dipl. Ing., Institute of Technology, Darmstadt, 1934. courses. The following requirements must be met:

George Judson Hiccins, Professor of Aeronautics (1942) ; Approximate B.S., in Eng. (AeE), Univ. of Michigan, 1923; AeE., Subject: Term Hours 1934. Aerodynamics and aircraft dynamics 21 Charles Horace Kahr, Jr., Professor of Aeronautics Solid mechanics and structural design 21 (1947); B.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1944; M.S., 1945. Thermodynamics and propulsion 18 Methods for digital and analog computers 4 Henry Lebrecht Kohler, Professor of Aeronautics (1943) ; Basic electric fields and circuits 8 B.S. in M.E., Univ. of Illinois 1929: M.S. in M.E., Yale Univ., 1930; M.E., 1931. Every candidate's undergraduate record, at the Naval Postgraduate School or as validated from other institutions, Donald Merrill Layton, Commander, U.S. Navy; Assist- must include:

ant Professor of Aeronautics (1965) ; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1945; B.S. A.E., U.S. Naval Postgraduate a. Basic mathematics through differential equations, in- School, 1953; M.S. in A.E., Princeton Univ., 1954. cluding adequate preparatory coverage.

b. Basic coverage in physics and chemistry to at least 12 Gerald Herbert Lindsey, Associate Professor of Aeronau- term hours or the equivalent in each field. tics (1965) ; B.E.S. in M.E., Brigham Young Univ., 1960; M.S., 1962; Ph.D., California Institute of Technology, 1966. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING James Avery Miller, Associate Professor of Aeronautics

(1963); B.S. in M.E., Stanford Univ., 1955; M.S. in This degree requires a minimum of 56 graduate level

M.E., Stanford Univ., 1957: Ph.D., Illinois Institute of term hours in residence at the Postgraduate School (unless Technology, 1963. reduced by validated advanced credit) of which at least

Roy Earl Reichenbach, Associate Professor of Aeronautics 36 graduate level hours are to be in aeronautics courses. (1962); B.M.E., Ohio State Univ., 1956; M.S., 1956; These requirements include term hours allotted to research. Ph.D., California Institute of Technology, 1960. No less than one-half of the remainder of the stated numbers required must be taken in A level courses. The follow- I.ouis Vincent Schmidt, Associate Professor of Aeronautics ing specific requirements will be met: (1964); B.S.. California Institute of Technology, 1946: M.S., 1948: Ae.E., 1950; Ph.D., 1963. a. Propulsion: at least one graduate lecture course and pertinent laboratory course in the Ae 400 series. Cameron MacPherson Smith, Professor of Aeronautics (1965): B.S. in C.E., Univ. of Washington, 1940; M.S. b. Gas dynamics: at least a two-term A-level sequence in C.E., 1940; M.E., Yale Univ., 1942: D. Eng., 1947. in the Ae 500 series.

*The c. Structures: at least two A-level courses in solid year of joining the Postgraduate faculty is indicated in parenthesis. mechanics.

74 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL AERONAUTICS

d. Systems Engineering: at least one course to be ap- Ae 111B FUNDAMENTALS OF DYNAMICS (3-2). Dy- proved by the Department Chairman. namics of rigid bodies, constraints and degrees of freedom, oscillating systems, vibration modes for small motion, ap- e. Computers: unless previously satisfied, one course plication of matrix algebra to eigenvalue problems. Re- in the use of digital/computers. sponse traits of free and forced vibrations. TEXTS: Hous- f. Options: specialization in one of the available op- ner and Hudson, Applied Mechanics, Dynamics; Pipes, tions such as 1) Aerospace dynamics; 2) Propulsion; 3) Matrix Methods for Engineering. PREREQUISITES: Ae Structures; 4) Flight test evaluation; 5) Gas dynamics: 102C; Ae 181B concurrently. or 6) Other recognized specialty in aeronautics. Ae 115A ENGINEERING DYNAMICS I (4-0). Single thesis: at least 10. but not than g. Research and more degree of freedom systems including solutions to impulse, 15, graduate term hours in Ae 000 (Research), plus an step and harmonic forcing functions. Duhamel superposi- acceptable thesis (this requirement may be waived upon i i< m integral. Formulation of eigenvalue problems for Aeronautics Depart- recommendation of the Chairman. lumped and continuous systems. Matrix and integral meth- ment). ods of solution. TEXTS: Greenwood, Principles of Dynam- AERONAUTICAL ENGINEER ics, Karman and Biot. Mathematical Methods in Engineer- ing. PREREQUISITE: Ae 102C. This degree requires a minimum of 115 graduate level Ae 116A ENGINEERING DYNAMICS II (4-0). Dynam- term hours in residence at the Postgraduate School (unless ics of rigid bodies, generalized coordinates. Lagrange's reduced by validated advanced credit) of which at least 65 equations for a particle and a system of particles, Lagrange graduate level hours are to be in aeronautics courses. These multipliers used to find constraint forces. Orbital motion. requirements include term hours allotted to research. Not Variational methods, Hamilton's principle and canonical less than one-half of the remainder of the stated number transforms. TEXTS: Greenwood, Principles of Dynamics; required must be taken in A level courses. Specific require- Karman and Biot, Mathematical Methods in Engineering. ments to be met are the same as outlined in items a. PREREQUISITES: Ae 115A and Ae 182A concurrently. through f. of the M.S. program. Additional requirements are: Ae 121B POTENTIAL FLOWS AND BOUNDARY VAL- UE PROBLEMS (3-2). Review of Gauss' and Stokes' equa- a. Major: at least 3 additional graduate aeronautics tions. Irrotational and Solenoidal fields; velocity potential lecture courses of the major option, and 2 additional gradu- and stream function. Elementary flow fields: source, vortex ate aeronautics lecture courses in support of that option: and doublet. Superposition: closed body with circulation. final coverage in the option to be approved by the Chair- Laplace's equation. Complex potential and conformal map- man, Aeronautics Department. ping. The general boundary value problem; first (Diri- b. Research and thesis: at least 15 but not more than chlet), second (Neumann) and third boundary value prob- 20 graduate term hours in Ae 000 (Research), plus an lems of potential theory. TEXT: Under study. PREREQUI- acceptable thesis. SITES: Ma 244C; Ma 262C; Ma 272C (may be taken concurrently).

AERONAUTICS Ae 131 A CONTINUUM MECHANICS I (4-0). A review elasticity prototypes and applications, description of ten- Ae 001 E AERONAUTICAL LECTURE SERIES (0-1). of including geometric interpretations, stress ten- Lectures on general aeronautical engineering subjects by sor analysis sor, strain tensor. Application to elastic solids and viscous prominent authorities from the Navy Department, research fluids: Navier-Stokes equations. TEXT: Fung, Foundations laboratories and the industry. of Solid Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: Ae 213B. Ae 010E AERONAUTICAL SEMINAR (0-1). Discussion MECHANICS II (4-0). A study of aeronautical development and reports in research by Ae 132A CONTINUUM conservation laws, elastic behavior of materials, linear faculty and students. of elasticity, solutions by potentials, and two-dimensional prob- Ae 101C AERO-STATICS (3-2). Statics of force fields; lems in elasticity. TEXT: Fung, Foundations of Solid Me- equilibrium of particles, distributed systems, rigid bodies: chanics. PREREQUISITE: Ae 131 A. scalar, vector, matrix methods: trusses, frames, mecha- 133 SOLID MECHANICS I (4-0). Variational meth- nisms; shear and bending moment diagrams in beams. Ae A by means of energy principles; applications to Flight vehicle application. TEXT: Beer and Johnston, Vec- ods applied beams, membranes, and plates. TEXT: Fung, Foundations tor Mechanics for Engineers. Statics. PREREQUISITE: of Solid Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: Ae 132A. Engineering mechanics and statics. Ae 134A SOLID MECHANICS II (4-0). Elasticity and Ae 102C AEROMECHANICS (3-2). Dynamics of the ve- thermodynamics, basic relations for thermoelasticity, applied hicle in space; flight kinematics; scalar, vector, matrix examples. Irreversible thermodynamics and introduction to forms; rectilinear and curvilinear motion, Kepler's Laws: viscoelasticity. TEXT: Fung, Foundations of Solid Me- work and energy, potential fields: impulse and momentum, chanics. PREREQUISITE: Ae 133A. impact; applications to plane motion. TEXT: Beer and Johnston. Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Dynamics. PRE- Ae 151A COMPUTER METHODS IN AERONAUTICS REQUISITE: AE 101C (may be taken concurrently). CVS). Analog and digital computer formulations of prob-

75 AERONAUTICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

lems in aerodynamics, aero-structures, missile and satellite mechanism of flutter. Non-stationary wing theory, with ap- trajectories, dynamics. Equilibrium, eigenvalue, propagation plications to two- and three-dimensional lifting surfaces.

problems. TEXTS: Crandall, Engineering Analysis; Salva- TEXTS: Fung, The Theory of Aeroelasticity ; Bisplinghoff, dori and Baron, Numerical Methods in Engineering. PRE- Ashley, and Halfman, Aeroelasticity. PREREQUISITE: REQUISITES: Ma 416C or Ma 125B and Ma 421C. Ae 111B.

Ae 180E ENGINEERING ORIENTATION (0-3). Review Ae 242A PRINCIPLES OF AEROELASTICITY (3-2). engineering fundamental concepts: notation and symbols, Static aeroelastic problems, wing divergence, control re- units and standards, dimensional analysis, graphs; physical versal, and airframe stability. Vibration of structures, aero- laws; mathematical techniques, limit processes, indeterm- dynamic forcing functions, mechanism of flutter, non-sta- inacies, singularities. Approximations in the formulation and tionary airfoil theory. Transient loads, gusts, buffet, and solution of engineering problems; fields; coordinate sys- stall flutter. TEXTS: Fung, The Theory of Aeroelasticity; tems. Aeronautical phenomena illustrated by movies. TEXT: Bisplinghoff, Ashley, and Halfman, Aeroelasticity. PRE- Eshbach, Handbook of Engineering Fundamentals. REQUISITES: Ae 115A, Ae 121B, and Ae 131A.

Ae 181B FUNDAMENTAL DYNAMICS LABORATORY Ae 243A THERMO-STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS (3-2). (0-3). Conduct experiments in the fundamentals of dynam- Thermoelastic equations; stress, strain, equilibrium, bound-

ics; use of the shaker table. Measure displacements and ary conditions. Basic problems in thermoelasticity ; applica- accelerations; solve systems of equations by analog com- tions to beams, plates, built-up structures. Thermoelastic puter means. TEXT: Under study. PREREQUISITE: Ae stability and related problems. TEXTS: Boley and Weiner, 111B concurrently. Theory of Thermal Stresses; Gatewood, Thermal Stresses. Ae 182A ENGINEERING DYNAMICS LABORATORY PREREQUISITE: Ae 131 A. (0-3). Conduct introductory experiments in the fundamen- Ae 244A MATRIX STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS (3-2). In- tals of dynamics using analog computer and the shaker fluence coefficients and energy theorems. Force (flexibility) table. Set up a dynamics experiment; instrument, conduct, and displacement (stiffness) methods applied to beams, and evaluate results. TEXT: Under study. PREREQUI- frames, plates, box beams. Structural idealizations for wings, SITE: Ae 116 concurrently. A fuselages. Digital computer solutions. TEXTS: McMinn,

Ae 211C SOLID MECHANICS (3-2). Stiff elastic bodies; Matrices for Structural Analysis; Bruhn and Schmidt, An- normal stress and strain in ties, struts or beams; analytical alysis and Design of Aircraft Structures. PREREQUISITE: and mechanical analogies on beams under redundant re- Ae 213B. straints, displacement calculation; shear of beams, torsion Ae 245A PLATES AND SHELLS (4-0). Applications to of circular shafts; linear elastic continua, general expres- flight vehicles. Flat plates: axially and laterally loaded; sions for stress, strain, displacement; principal stresses, ap- bending, twisting moments, shearing forces; stresses, equil- plications to two dimensional state in beams. TEXTS: Timo- ibrium equations; stability. Axially symmetric shells: geom- shenko, Strength Materials, Vol. I; of Shanley, Strength etry, equilibrium, buckling under various loadings; com- of Materials. PREREQUISITE: Ae 101C. pression, bending, pressure. Applied engineering methods

Ae 212C STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS (3-2). Energy prin- using NASA and industry analyses formulated for numeri- ciples, deflections, statically indeterminate systems such as cal solutions. TEXTS: Timoshenko, Theory of Plates and beams, frames and trusses. TEXTS: Peery, Aircraft Struc- Shells; NASA publications. PREREQUISITES: Ae 131 A, tures; Timoshenko, Strength of Materials, Vol. I; Shanley Ae 213B. Strength of Materials. PREREQUISITE: Ae 211C. Ae 251A STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS (4-0). Structural

Ae 213B STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS I (3-2). Analy- response to free, forced, and self-excited oscillations; ground sis of thin-sheet structures typical of flight vehicles. Un- shock, ground wind, and silo firing problems. Testing tech- symmetrical bending, shear flow in open and closed sec- niques, design criteria, and methods of analysis and calcu- tions, diagonal tension field webs. Curved beams. TEXTS: lation. Wave propagation in solids, with applications; dis- Peery, Aircraft Structures; Timoshenko, Strength of Ma- persion of waves in bounded solids. TEXT: Under study. terials, Vols. I and II; Shanley, Strength of Materials. PREREQUISITES: Ae 115A, Ae 131A. PREREQUISITES: Ae 212C; Ae 281B concurrently. Ae 252A PLASTICITY, VISCO-ELASTICITY AND FA-

Ae 214B STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS II (3-2). Col- TIGUE (4-0). Fundamental stress-strain relations for in- umns; beam columns; lateral and torsional buckling of elastic continuous media. Non-Newtonian fluids. One di- beams. Introduction to plate theory; moments, stresses, mensional creep and relaxation phenomena. Mathematical curvatures, equilibrium equations. Introduction to numeri- models and methods. Combined static and dynamic loading cal methods in structures. TEXTS: Sechler, Elasticity in theories of plastic and fatique failure. Inelastic bending and Engineering: Timoshenko, Strength of Materials, Vol. II; buckling. Visco-elastic behavior of rocket propellants. Wang, Applied Elasticity. PREREQUISITE: Ae 213B. TEXT: Under study. PREREQUISITE: Ae 131 A. Ae 241B ELEMENTS OF AEROELASTICITY (3-2). Ae 260A STRUCTURAL PROBLEMS IN PROPULSION Static aeroelastic phenomena; divergence and control re- (2-3). A seminar-type course in structural aspects of pro- versal; finite wing examples; effects on complete airframe. pulsion. Problem sessions devoted to a limited number of Vibration of structures, aerodynamic forcing functions, problems selected in consultation with the instructor, with

76 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL AERONAUTICS supporting lecture, reading and discussion material from NASA Reports; Technical Journals. PREREQUISITE: among the following topics: centrifugal and thermal stress- Ae 214B or equivalent. es in rotors and blades; vibration and critical speeds of Ae 301C TECHNICAL AERODYNAMICS (3-2). The at- shafts, discs, and blades; thermal stresses; experimental mosphere. Equations of motion: steady and unsteady flow methods; unsolved problems. TEXTS: Instructor's notes fields. One-dimensional flows; the venturi. Pitot-static, tem- and assigned technical literature. PREREQUISITES: Ae perature and velocity measurement. Compressible flow re- 115A; Ae 213B. gimes. Boundary layers; separation. Coefficients, and simi- Ae 271B FUNDAMENTALS OF ELIGHT VEHICLE DE- larity. Vortices, lift and the Kutta-Joukowsky relations. SIGN (3-3). A terminal course in methods of airplane or Pressure distributions; aerodynamic center. Airfoil and missile design and analysis. Preliminary layout; three view propeller characteristics. Profile and parasite drag estima- drawing; weight and balance; aerodynamic characteristics tion. TEXT: Under study. PREREQUISITES: Ae 102C; and basic performance; design criteria; inertia loads, shear Ae 381C concurrently. and moment curves; detailed structural design and stress Ae 302C AIRFOIL AND WING THEORY (3-2). Airfoil analysis of major component. TEXTS: Peery, Aircraft construction and notation. The thin airfoil problem; Glau- Structures; Bonney, Principles of Guided Missile Design; ert's integral. Properties of camber; "ideal" angle of at- Chin, Missile Configuration Design; Bruhn, Analysis and tack; synthesis of thickness. Airfoil design data; high lift Design of Flight Vehicle Structures; Merrill, Operation Re- and auxiliary devices. The finite wing; elliptic and general search, Armament and Launching. PREREQUISITES: Ae planforms, twist. Induced drag and downwash. Aspect ratio 2HB, Ae 322C. and planform effects. Basic and additional spanwise lift. Ae 275A FLIGHT VEHICLE DESIGN (3-3). Detailed Wing design data. TEXT: Kuethe and Schetzer, Founda- design and analysis of a flight vehicle. Basic aerodynamic tion of Aerodynamics. 2nd ed. PREREQUISITE: Ae 301C. characteristics and performance; strength and rigidity re- Ae 303C FLIGHT VEHICLE PERFORMANCE (3-3). quirements. Structural design considerations from the view- The aerodynamic characteristics of the flight vehicle and its points of strength, fatigue, production and optimization. components: lift, drag, and mutual interferences. Wing Consideration of typical structures and structural trends in stall; auxiliary lift devices. The drag polar at high Mach airplanes, missiles, launchers and spacecraft. TEXTS: Spe- number. Propulsion systems. Steady flight performance in cifications MIL-A-8860 to 8870 (ASG) ; MIL-HDBK-5; level flight and climb. Ceilings, range, and endurance. High Peery, Aircraft Structures; Corning, Supersonic and Sub- vertical acceleration performance. TEXT: Under study. sonic Airplane Design; Bruhn, Analysis and Design of PREREQUISITE: Ae 302C. Flight Vehicle Structures; Merrill, Operations Research. Armament and Launching; Chin. Missile Configuration De- Ae 314B ADVANCED FLIGHT VEHICLE PERFORM- sign. PREREQUISITES: Ae 213B, Ae 326B. ANCE (3-2). Aerodynamic characteristics of swept and delta wing flight vehicles; lifting surface theories. Flow Ae 281B STRUCTURES LABORATORY (0-3). Funda- patterns. Advanced propulsion systems and methods of per- mentals of measuring techniques for structural testing. Ex- formance analysis. Variable weight, dynamic performance. periments with various types of strain gages and data eval- Tactical range and endurance; other special performance uation. Full-scale test of aircraft wing with determination problems. TEXT: Under study. PREREQUISITE: Ae 303C. of stress distribution around a cut-out. TEXTS: Perry and (3-3). Lissner, Strain Gage Primer; Lee, An Introduction to Ex- Ae 321C FLIGHT STABILITY AND CONTROL I perimental Stress Analysis. PREREQUISITE: Ae 213B Longitudinal static stability and controllability; control concurrently. surface design and performance; stick-fixed and stick-free stability and margins; neutral and maneuver points; e.g. Ae 282B STRUCTURES PERFORMANCE (2-3). Tests limits; stick force and displacement characteristics. Lateral of aircraft and missile components. Correlation between static stability, control and maneuverability. Dihedral ef- theoretical and experimental results for stress distribution fects; steady turns; rudder lock; adverse yaw. TEXTS: in various structures. Photoelastic coatings. Individual lab- Perkins and Hage, Aircraft Performance, Stability and oratory projects. TEXT: Various references. PREREQUI- Control; Higgins, USNAVPGSCOL Notes; NACA Report SITE: Ae 214B. 927. PREREQUISITE: Ae 303C.

Ae 283B STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE (1-2). Course Ae 322C FLIGHT STABILITY AND CONTROL II (3-3). concerned with recent developments in the field of flight The dynamic stability problem: Euler's equation of motion; vehicle structures. Laboratory experiments, including photo- longitudinal dynamics: stability derivatives, nature of the elastic methods and large-scale components. Students give general or transient solutions. Controllability. Lateral dy- seminar-type presentation on topical structural develop- namics; lateral stability derivatives; nature of transient ments. TEXT: Various references. PREREQUISITE: Ae motions. Effect of changes of variables. Cross-coupling with 214B (may be taken concurrently). large perturbations. TEXTS: Perkins and Hage, Aircraft Performance, Stability and Control; Babister, Aircraft Sta- Ae 291A SELECTED PROBLEMS IN FLIGHT STRUC- bility and Control; Higgins, USNAVPGSCOL Notes. PRE- TURES (3-2). Advanced design criteria. Structures opti- REQUISITE: Ae 321C. mization principles. Composite construction; filament wound shells. Special problems of VTOL, STOL vehicles. TEXTS: Ae 325B FLIGHT DYNAMICS I (3-3). Flight vehicle

77 A

AERONAUTICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Airplane Performance, static longitudinal stability and trim; effect of components. systems. TEXTS: Perkins and Hage, Vehicle control and maneuverability; control surface char- Stability and Control; Etkin, Dynamics of Flight; Raven, acteristics. Static margins, neutral points, maneuver points, Automatic Control Engineering. PREREQUISITE: Ae both stick fixed and stick free. Control surface displace- 322C or Ae 326B.

ment and stick forces for trim and in maneuvering flight. Ae 341A AUTOMATIC CONTROL I (3-2). Power con- Lateral static stability and controllability. Dihedral effects, trols and stability augmentation. Derivation of component adverse yaw, steady turns, asymmetric power. TEXTS: Per- transfer functions and block diagram concept. Linear servo kins and Hage, Aircraft Performance, Stability and Con- theory. Frequency response techniques, root locus methods,

trol; Higgins, USNAVPGSCOL Notes; NACA Report 927. and transient effects. Basic references for automation; sin- PREREQUISITE: Ae 303C. gle axis and multi-axis autocontrols; cross axis coupling. Performance specifications, response shaping, and applica- Ae 326B FLIGHT DYNAMICS II (3-3). The dynamics tion to vehicles and their sub-systems. TEXTS: Perkins and of flight vehicles; Euler's equations of motion; longitudinal Hage, Airplane Performance, Stability and Control; Etkin, dynamics; longitudinal stability derivatives; nature of gen- Dynamics of Flight; Raven, Automatic Control Engineer- eral or transient solutions. Effect of forcing functions and ing. PREREQUISITE: Ae 326B. their response; steady state solutions. Lateral dynamics,

lateral stability derivatives; nature of transient solutions, Ae 342A AUTOMATIC CONTROL II (3-2). Aeroelastic effect of free controls, friction. Cross-coupling with large effects on stability and control, vehicle dynamics and inter perturbations. Spins. TEXTS: Perkins and Hage, Aircraft action with augmentation devices and automatic controls, Performance, Stability and Control; Higgins, USNAVPG- Automatic power control for deck recovery. Time modu SCOL Notes; Babister, Aircraft Stability and Control. lated aerodynamic controls, applications to small missiles PREREQUISITE: Ae 325B. and overall system analysis. Analog simulation techniques Sta Ae 327B SPACE VEHICLE DYNAMICS (3-2). Orbital TEXTS: Perkins and Hage, Airplane Performance, bility and Control; Etkin, Dynamics Flight; Raven flight mechanics, launching trajectories, space trajectories, of Automatic Control Engineering. PREREQUISITE: Ae 341 orbital perturbations. Multi-stage rocket performance. Re- entry mechanics for lifting and non-lifting type bodies. Ae 343A AUTOMATIC CONTROL III (3-2). Random Special topics in wing theory, lifting surface theory. TEXT: processes, autocorrelation functions, Fourier transforms and Under study. PREREQUISITES: Ae 115A, Ae 303C. power spectral densities. Theory of non-linear systems and applications. Optimum design including self-adaptation. Ae 332C FLIGHT TEST EVALUATION I (2-0). Rela- TEXTS: Tsien, Engineering Cybernetics; Stoker, Non-Lin- tive to flight test methods and procedures, a lecture program ear Vibrations; Minorsky, Non-Linear Oscillations. PRE- encompassing instrument calibrations, measurement of flight REQUISITE: Ae 342A. speed, cruising performance, stall tests, etc. Definition of requirements in flight test report writing. TEXTS: Dom- Ae 381C SUBSONIC LABORATORY (0-3). An introduc- masch, Sherby and Connolly, Airplane Aerodynamics; tion to aerodynamic investigations in a wind tunnel, in- NATC Patuxent. Flight Test Manual; NAV AERO Publi- cluding selected experiments to illustrate various funda- cations. PREREQUISITE: Ae 303C; Ae 382C concurrently. mental principles. TEXTS: Pope, Wind-Tunnel Testing; Kuethe and Schetzer, Foundations Aerodynamics. PRE- Ae 333B FLIGHT TEST EVALUATION II (2-0). Rela- of concurrently. tive to flight test methods and procedures, a lecture pro- REQUISITE: Ae 301C gram encompassing climb performance, energy height con- Ae 382C FLIGHT TEST EVALUATION LABORATORY cept, drag measurement, static and maneuvering longtitudi- I (0-4). Flight program accompanying Ae 332C. Test flying nal stability. TEXTS: Dommasch, Sherby and Connolly, in Naval aircraft by aviator students primarily for level

Airplane Aerodynamics; NATC Patuxent, Flight Test Man- flight evaluation. ual; NAV AERO Publications. PREREQUISITES: Ae Ae 383B. FLIGHT TEST EVALUATION LABORATORY

321C, AE 332C; Ae 383B concurrently. II (0-4). Flight program accompanying Ae 333B. Test fly-

Ae 334B FLIGHT TEST EVALUATION III (2-0). Rela- ing in Naval aircraft by aviator students primarily for climb tive to flight test methods and procedures, a lecture program performance and static and maneuvering longitudinal sta- encompassing longitudinal and lateral/directional dynamic bility. stability; time vector determination of derivatives. TEXTS: Ae 384B FLIGHT TEST EVALUATION LABORATORY Dommasch, Sherby and Connolly, Airplane Aerodynamics; III (0-4). Flight program accompanying Ae 334B. Test NATC Patuxent; Flight Test Manual; NAV AERO Publi- flying in Naval aircraft by aviator students primarily for cations. PREREQUISITES: Ae 322C, Ae 333B; Ae 384B dynamic stability and derivative measurement. concurrently. Ae 391A SELECTED PROBLEMS IN FLIGHT SYS- Ae 340B FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMATIC CON- TEMS (3-2). A course in the application of aeronautical TROL (3-2). A terminal course encompassing power con- engineering technology to recent developments in flight trols and stability augmentation. Derivation of component vehicle design. Such vehicles might include V/STOL types transfer functions and block diagram concept. Basic linear with semi-conventional configurations; rotating-wing con- servo theory. Frequency response techniques, root locus figurations; hovercraft; and reaction supported vehicles of methods, and transient effects. Performance specifications, lunar landing type. TEXTS: Under study. PREREQUI- response shaping, and application to vehicles and their sub- SITES: Ae 275A, Ae 342A.

78 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL AERONAUTICS

Ae 401C AEROTHERMODYNAMIC FUNDAMENTALS radiation. TEXTS: Eckert and Drake, Heat and Mass (3-2). Fundamentals of thermodynamics edited especially Transfer; Schlichting, Boundary Layer Theory; Jakob, for application to aerothermodynamics. Topics include fun- Heat Transfer, Vols. I and II. PREREQUISITE: Ae 421 A. damental laws, energy concepts, properties of ideal and Ae 431 A PRINCIPLES OF TURBOMACHINES (4-0). gases, vapors, equations of state, and theoretical cycles. real Dimensional analysis of turbomachines. Basic momentum, TEXTS: Lee and Sears, Thermodynamics; Reynolds, Ther- energy and continuity relations for rotors and stators. Ab- modynamics; Keenan and Kaye, Gas Tables: Keenan and solute and relative motions. Internal aero-thermodynamics. Keys, Thermodynamic Properties of Steam. PREREQUI- Performance of compressors and turbines. TEXTS: Csan- SITE: Ma 230D. ady, Theory of Turbomachines ; Vavra, Aerothermodynamics Ae 402B AIRCRAFT PROPULSION (3-2). Basic me- and Flow in Turbomachines. PREREQUISITES: Ae 402B: chanics of thrust or lift production by jets, propellers or Ae 522A ; Ae 483A concurrently. theories. Thermody- rotors. Momentum and blade element Ae 432A ADVANCED THEORY OF TURBOMACHINES namic and performance characteristics of air breathing (4-0). Fundamental relations for absolute and relative fluid engines and major components. Analysis of reciprocating motions. Compressible flow phenomena in members of tur- engines, turbojet and turboprop engines and principal var- bomachines. Potential flow in cascades. Three-dimensional iants, and ramjets. Relation of propulsion characteristics flows in arbitrary rotors. Design criteria for compressors and to vehicle performance. TEXT: Hesse, Jet Propulsion, 2nd turbines of axial and radial type. TEXT: Vavra, Aerother- ed. PREREQUISITES: Ae 501B; Ae 481B concurrently. modynamics and Flow in Turbomachines. PREREQUI- Ae 410A STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS (3-2). SITES: Ae 121B, Ae 431 A; Ae 523A. Fundamentals of statistical thermodynamics. Topics include Ae 433A ADVANCED PROPULSION SYSTEMS (4-0). kinetic theory of an ideal gas, distribution of molecular Application of fluid dynamics, thermodynamics and stress velocities, transport phenomena, Maxwell-Boltzman statis- analysis to propulsion systems for different flight vehicles tics, partition functions, and thermodynamic properties. using conventional and exotic fluids. Heat transfer elements, TEXT: Lee, Sears and Turcotte, Statistical Thermodynam- effects of temperature. Off-design performance, matching ics. Ae 401 C. PREREQUISITE: and control. TEXT: Vavra, Aerothermodynamics and Flow Ae 414B FUNDAMENTALS OF ROCKETS (3-2). Re- in Turbomachines. PREREQUISITE: Ae 432A. view of nozzle theory and heat transfer as applied to rock- Ae 434A SPACE POWER PLANTS (3-0). Power plants ets, liquid and solid propellants and systems; flight per- for propulsion and generation of electrical energy for space formance. Sutton, Rocket Propulsion Fundamen- TEXT: vehicles with chemical, nuclear, and solar heat sources and tals, Ae 402B; Ae 486B con- 3rd ed. PREREQUISITES: radiative heat sinks. TEXT: Vavra, Aerothermodynamics currently. and Flow in Turbomachines. PREREQUISITE: Ae 492A Ae 420B ELEMENTS OF COMBUSTION AND HEAT concurrently. (3-2). Chemical reactions, energy release, TRANSFER Ae 461 A COMBUSTION THERMODYNAMICS (3-2). chemical equilibrium and flame stabilization as applicable Thermodynamics of combustion, quantitative evaluation of to engines. Radiation, convection and conduc- combustion rocket propellants, phenomenological chemical kinetics. tion heat transfer. Under study. PREREQUISITES: TEXT: Ionization and dissociation in gases, and relaxation phe- 402B: 482B concurrently. Ae Ae nomena. TEXTS: Penner, Chemistry Problems in Jet Pro-

Ae 421A HEAT TRANSFER I (4-0). Introduction, multi- pulsion; Williams, Combustion Theory. PREREQUISITE: dimensional and non-steady conductive heat transfer, appli- Ae 410A. of thermal stress analysis, numerical and cation to problems Ae 462A AEROTHERMOCHEMISTRY (3-2). Chemical analogue methods of solution. Laws of similarity, boundary reactions in flow systems, with emphasis on the interplay layer solutions, experimental solutions, free and forced con- between aerodynamics, physics, and chemistry. Topics in- vection, exchangers and gas turbine regener- compact heat clude reactions during nozzle flow, diffusion flames, detona- ators, transfer, evaporation and condensation. Prob- mass tion, flame propagation, burning mechanism of solid pro- convection conduction. TEXTS: lems of combined and pellants, heterogeneous combustion, and scaling of com- in Solids; Schneider, Con- Carslaw and Jaeger, Conduction bustion devices. TEXTS: Penner, Chemistry Problems in duction Heat Transfer; Jakob, Heat Transfer, Vols. I and Jet Propulsion; Williams, Combustion Theory. PRERE- II; Eckert and Drake, Heat and Mass Transfer; Schlichting, QUISITE: Ae 461A. Boundary Layer Theory. PREREQUISITES: Ma 244C; Ae Ae 465A ADVANCED ENGINEERING THERMODY- 522A. NAMICS I (4-0). Review of first and second laws. Corol- Ae II (4-0). Continuation of 422A HEAT TRANSFER laries of the second law. Relations among the thermodynamic convective heat transfer to include effects of compressibility properties, Maxwell relations. Review of gas mixtures. of high speed flight and re-entry; recovery and problems Thermodynamics of chemical reactions; equilibrium and factor, non-steady flow, and blunt body stagnation point criteria of equilibrium. TEXTS: Lee and Sears, Thermo- rotating machin- heat transfer. Transpiration, ablation, and dynamics; Hatsopoulos and Keenan, Principles of General ery. Fundamental laws of radiation, geometrical properties, Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITE: Ae 410A. the shape factor, hemispherical variation of emissivities and gas body radiation. Problems of combined convection and Ae 466A ADVANCED ENGINEERING THERMODY-

79 AERONAUTICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

NAMICS II (4-0). Equilibrium constant for chemical and individual test assigments to supplement Ae 434A. TEXT: electric reactions in gases. Dissociated and ionized gases. Vavra, Aerothermodynamics and Flow in Turbomachines. Irreversible flow, entropy production, Onsager relations. Dif- PREREQUISITE: Ae 434A concurrently. fusion, thermoelectricity, thermionics. TEXTS: Lee and Ae 493A ADVANCED PROBLEMS IN COMBUSTION Sears, Thermodynamics; Hatsopoulos and Keenan, Prin- AND AEROPHYSICS I (3-2). Selected modern topics ciples of General Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITE: Ae chosen by the professor after consultation with interested 465A. students. Possible topics include rarefied gas flows, mag- Ae 475A TURBOPROPULSION DESIGN (4-2). Analysis netohydrodynamics, combustion of liquid fuel droplets, and design of bladings and elements of turbomachines. combustion of metals, combustion of solid propellants, su- Centrifugal and thermal stresses, vibrations, critical speeds, personic combustion, and hybrid combustion. TEXT: To and stress analysis of supporting members. Influence of off- be specified. PREREQUISITE: Ae 462A. design conditions. Design concepts for different applica- Ae 494A ADVANCED PROBLEMS IN COMBUSTION tions. TEXT: Instructor's notes. PREREQUISITE: Ae AND AEROPHYSICS II (3-2). Continuation of Ae 493 A. 433A. TEXT: To be specified. PREREQUISITE: Ae 493A. Ae 476A ROCKET PROPULSION DESIGN (3-2). Rock- Ae 496A ADVANCED POWER GENERATION (0-4). et motor and auxiliary equipment design, capacity and ar- Application of advanced thermodynamic concepts to jet rangement to accomplish specified missions. Thrust varia- propulsion, thermoelectricity, and other systems. Term prob- tion and thrust vector control systems. TEXT: Under study. lem. TEXTS: Lee and Sears, Thermodynamics; Hatsopou- PREREQUISITE: Ae 414B. los and Keenan, Principles of General Thermodynamics. Ae 481B PROPULSION LABORATORY (0-3). Measure- PREREQUISITE: Approval of Instructor. ment of component and overall performance of full scale Ae 501B THERMODYNAMICS OF COMPRESSIBLE turboprop and turbojet engines. TEXT: USNAVPGSCOL FLOW (3-2). Application of first and second laws of ther- Notes. PREREQUISITE: Ae 402B concurrently. modynamics and the equation of state of a perfect gas to Ae 482B THERMODYNAMICS LABORATORY (0-3). compressible flows. Velocity of sound. Physical differences Laboratory experiments illustrating principles of thermo- between subsonic and supersonic flows. One-dimensional dynamics. TEXT: USNAVPGSCOL Notes. PREREQUI- isentropic flows. Normal Shockwaves. Adiabatic flow in con- SITE: Ae 420B concurrently. stant area ducts with friction. The Fanno Line process. Adiabatic flow in constant area ducts. The Rayleigh Line. Ae 483A TURBOMACHINERY LABORATORY (0-3). Generalized one-dimensional flow. Oblique shocks. TEXT: Laboratory work designed to accompany Ae 431A. Meas- Shapiro, The Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compres- urements and analysis of flows in compressors and turbines, sible Fluid Flows, Vol. I. PREREQUISITES: Ma 244C, cascades and channels. Performance of jet engines and Ae 401C; Ae 581B concurrently. rocket motors. Emphasis on correlation of test results with (4-0). Subject material of theory. TEXTS: Applicable laboratory manuals. PRERE- Ae 502B FLOW DYNAMICS QUISITE: Ae 431 A concurrently. Ae 121B and Ae 521B edited for undergraduate presentation. TEXTS: Schlichting, Boundary Layer Theory; Milne- Ae 484A ADVANCED TURBOMACHINERY LABORA- Thompson, Theoretical Aerodynamics; Keuthe and Schet- TORY (0-3). Laboratory work designed to augment Ae zer, Foundations of Aerodynamics. 2nd ed. PREREQUI- 432A; three dimensional flow phenomena. Emphasis on off- SITES: Ma 262C, Ae 501B. design performance. TEXTS: Applicable laboratory manuals. PREREQUISITE: Ae 432A. Ae 503B BOUNDARY LAYERS (4-0). Subject material of Ae 522A edited for undergraduate presentation. TEXTS: Ae 485A ADVANCED PROPULSION LABORATORY Schlichting, Boundary Layer Theory; Kuethe and Schetzer, (0-3). Laboratory work designed to augment AE 433A with Foundations of Aerodynamics, 2nd ed. PREREQUISITE: advanced methods and instrumentation. Data reduction Ae 502B. with electronic computer. Heat transfer and control tests. TEXTS: Applicable laboratory manuals. PREREQUISITE: Ae 521A FUNDAMENTALS OF FLOW DYNAMICS Ae 433A. (4-0). The dynamics of real fluids, including viscous and compressible effects. Stokes Law. Rotational; incompres- Ae 486B ROCKET LABORATORY (0-3). Instrumenta- sible; inviscid flows. General properties and some exact tion and measurement of rocket motor performance. Time solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations, including channel rate of pressure rise; thrust: strand burning rates. TEXT: and stagnation flows. The continuity and energy equations; USNAVPGSCOL Notes. PREREQUISITE: Ae 4I4B con- the equation of state. TEXT: Schlichting, Boundary Layer currently. Theory. PREREQUISITES: Ae 131 A (may be taken con- Ae 491A SELECTED PROBLEMS IN TURBOPROPUL- currently), Ae 501B. SION (3-3). Special application of turbomachinery to pro- Ae 522 A BOUNDARY LAYER FLOWS (4-0). General pulsion and pumping. VTOL, helicopter, high supersonic, properties of the Prandtl boundary layer equations for two and space vehicle problems. TEXT: Under study. PRE- and three dimensional flows. The Blasius solution. Similar- REQUISITE: Ae 433 A. ity and the Falkner-Skan wedge flow problem. Non-steady Ae 492A POWER PLANTS SEMINAR (1-4). Advanced boundary layers; approximate analysis. Transition, and the

80 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL AERONAUTICS fundamentals of turbulent boundary layers; approximate of the Ordnance Curriculum. Basic vector and tensor me- analysis. Turbulent skin friction. Boundary layer control. chanics of real fluids, including viscous and compressible TEXT: Schlichting, Boundary Layer Theory. PREREQUI- effects. Flow kinematics. Equations of continuity, motion, SITE: Ae 521 A. momentum and energy. Fundamental theorems of Stokes, Gauss, Kelvin, Crocco and Biot-Savart. Velocity potential Ae523A FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPRESSIBLE FLOW and stream function. Simple potential flows in two and three

(4-OL Review: generalized one-dimensional flows, oblique dimensions. Introduction to complex potential and con- shocks and Prandtl-Meyer flow. General equations of mo- formal mapping. Stress and strain in viscous fluids. Devel- tion. Subsonic flow solutions by hodography, linearization opment of Navier-Stokes equations. Selected laboratory ex- and series expansion. Methods in supersonic flow: charac- ercises and demonstrations. TEXT: Instructor's Notes. Also teristics in two dimensions; small perturbations. Similarity Kaufmann, Fluid Mechanics. PREREQUISITES: At least laws. Transonic flow. Unsteady motion: shock tubes. Real one term each of thermodynamics, vector analysis, and com- pas effects: viscosity and heat conductivity. Boundary lay- plex variables. ers. TEXTS: Shapiro. The Dynamics and Thermodynamics Ae 552A FLOW OF COMPRESSIBLE FLUIDS (4-0). A of Compressible Fluid Flow. Vols. I and 11. PREREQUI- combined and accelerated version of Ae 501 and Ae 523, SITE: Ae 522A. edited to the needs of the Ordnance Curriculum. One dimensional compressible flows with combined area change, Ae 524A SUPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS (3-2). Ex- friction and transfer. shocks. tension of two-dimensional characteristics theory to rota- heat Normal and oblique Prandtl-Meyer flow. dimensional subsonic flow tional flows. Supersonic profiles and flow fields, theory and Two and similarity laws. Introduction to supersonic flow and experiment. Effusors and diffusors. Source and doublet dis- method tributions, small disturbance methods, conical flows, char- of characteristics. TEXT: Shapiro. The Dynamics and Ther-

modynamics 1. acteristics method in three dimensions. Lift, pressure drag, of Compressible Fluid Flow. Vol. PREREQ- induced drag and pitching moment of supersonic wings. QUISITE: Ae 551. TEXT: Ferri, Elements of Aerodynamics of Supersonic Ae 553A VISCOSITY, TURBULENCE AND BOUNDARY Flows. PREREQUISITE: Ae 523A. LAYER EFFECTS IN FLUID FLOW (4-0). A version of Ae 522. edited to the needs of the Ordnance Curriculum. Ae 525A HYPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS (3-2). Gen- Concept of the boundary layer and associated phenomena eral hypersonic flow fields in two and three dimensions. of skin friction, flow separation, stall and drag. General Small disturbances and hypersonic similitude. Newtonian, properties of the boundary layer equations. Some classical constant-density, thin shock layer, and other theories. Real solutions of Blasuis, Falkner-Skan and others. Transition gas effects; viscous, free molecule and rarefied gas flows. from laminar to turbulent flow. Fundamentals of fluid tur- Minimum drag bodies; slender and blunt bodies. Complete bulence. Integral methods and applications to laminar and configurations; stability and control. TEXTS: Hayes and turbulent boundary layers. Boundary layer control. TEXT: Probstein, Hypersonic Flow Theory; Truitt, Hypersonic Schlichting. Boundary Layer Theory. PREREQUISITE: Aerodynamics. PREREQUISITE: Ae 523A. Ae 551.

Ae 541A VISCOUS HYPERSONIC FLOW (4-0). One Ae 581B GAS DYNAMICS LABORATORY (0-3). Lab- dimensional equilibrium flow of dissociated and ionized oratory demonstration of analyses in Ae 501B. One dimen- gases. One dimensional flow with finite reaction rates. sional flows. Normal and oblique shocks. TEXT: Shapiro,

Boundary layers in hypersonic flow with finite reaction The Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible Fluid rates for dissociated and ionized flow. Stagnation point heat Flows, Vol. I. PREREQUISITE: Ae 501B concurrently. transfer. TEXT: Dorrance, Viscous Hypersonic Flow. PRE- Ae 582B EXPERIMENTAL METHODS IN AERODY- REQUISITES: Ae 465A, Ae 525A. NAMICS (2-3). A course of experimentation involving the following topics: smoke tunnel, hot-wire anemometer, effect Ae 542A HYPERSONIC TECHNIQUES (3-2). Shock of turbulence on drag, control surface hinge-moments, tubes and tunnels; arc heated tunnels; MHD; term prob- and lem. TEXT: USNAVPGSCOL Notes. PREREQUISITE: q-ball calibration; auto-rotation and flutter, strain gage bal- Ae 541A. ances; Schlieren techniques and shock tube techniques; hovercraft. TEXTS: Pope, Wind Tunnel Testing; Instruc- Ae 543A MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMICS (4-0). Dynamic tor's Notes. PREREQUISITES: Ae 301C; Ae 501B. equations for continuous media, and classical equations for Ae 583A ADVANCED GAS DYNAMICS LABORATORY eleetromagnectic fields, as applied to ionized gases moving (0-3). Selected experiments in internal and external com- in a magnetic field; propagation of small disturbances. Alf- pressible flows. TEXT: Instructor's Notes. PREREQUI- ven waves, fast and slow waves, shock waves; particular SITE: Ae 523A. solutions of the magnetoaerodynamic equations; motion of IN charged particles, drift, anisotropic Ohm's Law, applica- Ae 591A SELECTED PROBLEMS FLUID DYNAM- tions. TEXTS: Instructor's Notes; Sutton and Sherman, ICS (3-3). Advanced topics in fluid mechanics including Magnetohydrodynamics. PREREQUISITE: Ae 523A. both analysis and experimental methods. Techniques of measurement and the design of experiments. For students Ae 551A FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS OF FLUID ME- doing thesis research in fluid dynamics. TEXT: To be se- CHANICS (4-2). A version of Ae 521, edited to the needs lected. PREREQUISITE: Approval of Instructor.

81 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS Paul Edward Roberts, Jr., Assistant Professor of Econom- ics (1966); A.B., Southern Illinois Univ., 1961; M.A., ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 1962; Ph.D., Univ. of Iowa, 1966.

William Richards Baker, Commander, SC, U.S. Navy; John David Senger, Associate Professor of Management

; B.S., U.S. Acad- Instructor in Management (1965) Naval (1957); B.S., Univ. of Illinois, 1945; M.S., 1948; Ph.D., emy, 1945; Management, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1965. 1958.

Mei.vin John Steckler, Associate Professor of Manage- Barry Professor of Castro, Associate Management (1966) ; ment (1966); B.S.M.E., Univ. of Washington. 1949; B.A., Hunter College, 1955; M.B.A., New York Univ., M.B.A., 1957; D.B.A., Harvard Univ., 1966. 1956; Ph.D., 1966.

William Howard Church, Professor of Management DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREES (1956); B.A., Whittier College, 1933; M.S.P.A., Univer- IN MANAGEMENT sity of Southern California, 1941. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

James Barrie Cowie, Associate Professor of Management 1. In addition to satisfying the Postgraduate School's (1963); B.Sc. (honors) Glasgow University, 1958; C.I.A., general requirements for a baccalaureate degree, the degree Glasgow University, 1959. Bachelor of Science with major in Business Administration requires a minimum of 40 term hours in general and functional Management courses at or above the C level. Jerry Lee Dake, Lieutenant, U.S. Naval Reserve; Assistant

Professor of Management (1965) ; B.S., Purdue Univer- 2. The following requirements must be met: sity, 1961; M.S., 1962. Subject area Term Hours

Behavioral Science 11 Leslie Darbyshire, Professor of Management (1962) ; B.A., University of Bristol, 1950; D.B.A., University of Wash- Quantitative Methods 11 ington, 1957. Financial Management 11 Economics 4 Material Logistics Management 3 Roger Nils Folsom, Ensign, U.S. Naval Reserve; Assistant

Professor of Economics (1965) ; A.B., Stanford Univer- 40 sity, 1959; M.A., Claremont Graduate School, 1964.

3. The student must achieve a grade point average of at least 1.0 in subjects of the major. James Morgan Fremgen, Associate Professor of Manage-

ment (1965) ; B.S.C., Univ. of Notre Dame, 1954; M.B.A., Indiana Univ., 1955; D.B.A., 1961; C.P.A., State of In- diana, 1964. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MANAGEMENT

1. The degree of Master of Science in Management re- Timothy Phelps Haidinger, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. quires the completion of either (a) a minimum of 54 term Naval Reserve; Instructor in Management B.S., (1965) ; hours of graduate level courses (A and B level) and an University of Notre 1963: Dame, M.BA.. Stanford Uni- acceptable thesis or (b) a minimum of 60 hours of grad- versity, 1965. uate level course work without a thesis.

2. Core course requirements in A and B level courses Fenn Clark Horton, Associate Professor of Management must be successfully completed or validated by advance (1964) ; B.A., State Univ. of Iowa, 1950. credit. These requirements are as follows:

H. Arthur Hoverland, Associate Professor of Management Discipline Term Hours

(1963); B.S., Miami Univ. (Ohio), 1951; M.S., Univ. of Behavioral Science 13 Illinois, 1954; Ph.D., Univ. of Michigan, 1963. Economics 4 Financial Management 7 Sigmund Krauthamer, Associate Professor of Economics Material Management 3 (1965); B.S., Ohio State Univ., 1949; Ph.D., Univ. of Quantitative Methods 17 Minnesota, 1963. 44

Clair Alton Peterson, Associate Professor of Manage- 3. In addition to the core course requirements, students ment (1962); B.B.A., Univ. of Minnesota, 1951; Ph.D., will choose elective sequences pertinent to their back- Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1961. grounds and anticipated future assignments. A minimum

82 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS

of 10 hours with a thesis or 16 hours without a thesis MN 120C PRINCIPLES OF ACCOUNTING (4-0). An beyond the core requirements must he selected from the introduction to the basic concepts and principles of finan- following elective sequences: cial accounting. Covers the accounting cycle; accounting

for assets, liabilities, revenue, and expenses; financial state- Economics and Systems Analysis ment content and analysis. Financial Management Personnel Management MN 121C PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNT- Material Logistics Management ING (4-0). Develops the internal uses of accounting as a management tool. Covers cost accounting and control, including standard costs. Discusses the relationships between MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MANAGEMENT costs and volume and the relevance of cost data to decision (DATA PROCESSING) making. PREREQUISITE: MN 120C.

1. The degree of Master of Science in Management MN 122C BUDGETING AND COMPTBOLLERSHIP requires the completion of either (a) a (Data Processing) (4-0). Introduces modern techniques of capital budgeting. level courses and minimum of 54 term hours of A and B Discusses the Federal budgetary process, with special em- of 60 hours of an acceptable thesis or (b) a minimum phasis on budgeting in the Department of Defense and without a thesis. graduate level course work the program budget approach. Considers appropriation ac- Indus- 2. Core course requirements in A and B level work counting and the accounting practices of the Navy must be successfully completed or validated by advance trial Fund. Includes a brief survey of the audit function credit in the following areas: in industry and government. PREREQUISITE: MN 121C.

Discipline Term Hours MN HOC INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT (4-0). This Management 12 course stresses the economic consequences of combining Data Processing 15 men, machines and money for production purposes. Mod- Mathematics 4 ern tools of decision making are introduced. Construction Probability and Statistics 7 of simple models as an aid in determining alternatives and Operations Analysis 9 choosing "the best" course of action is required. Subject matter includes production planning and control, facilities 47 layout, wage incentives and measurement of labor effort. An presented. 3. In addition to the core courses, students will pursue introduction to modern production methods is an approved sequence of elective courses pertinent to their MN 152C HUMAN RELATIONS (4-0). The historical future assignments. Such sequences must involve a mini- background of the American worker and the growth of the mum of 13 hours of A and B level work or 7 hours if modern human relations movement are examined. Such a thesis is prepared. topics as individual differences among workers, communication, motivation, interpersonal relationships and the role MANAGEMENT of the manager as a leader are investigated. Emphasis is placed on the implications of human relations for the MN 01D INTRODUCTION TO MACRO-ECONOMICS naval officer. (4-0). A study of the determination of the level of national output and its relationship to the economics of de- MN 153C PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION (4-0). The fense. Analysis of the roles of savings, investment, mone- broad area of personnel management is covered, with par- tary policy, fiscal policy, and their relationships to the ticular emphasis on recruitment and selection, training, pro- national goal of full employment without inflation. motion, performance evaluation, and the role of the labor union in both industry and the Federal Government. MN 101C INDIVIDUAL STUDY (3-0). Designed to give undergraduate students majoring in business administra- MN 163C MATERIAL MANAGEMENT (4-0). This tion opportunities to perform advanced or special studies course consists of a broad overview of major and item in various aspects of management. Consent of the proposed material management and support functions as performed

study advisor must be secured prior to enrollment. in the Department of Defense, the Defense Supply Agency, and the military departments, as well as an analysis of MN 111C INTRODUCTION TO MICRO-ECONOMICS selected techniques employed in requirements determina- (4-0). allocation of A study of the resources among com- tion, procurement, and inventory management of secondary peting ends as determined by a price system. Topics cov- items in support of the operating forces and military ered the include supply, demand, consumer choice, and industrial activities. theory of the firm. MN 191C ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT (4-0). MN 114C INTERNATIONAL TRADE (4-0). A study of An introduction to the principles and practices of man- the comparative advantages and gains from trade, exchange agement. The formal aspects of organizational structure,

rates, balance of payments, equilibrium, adjustment mech- (e.g., hierarchy and control and control spans) are analyzed

anisms, tariffs, and international trade organizations. PRE- together with alternative ways of accomplishing objectives. REQUISITES: MN 010D and MN 111C. The role of the planning and control functions is studied

83 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

in addition to the tools of analysis available to managers. without inflation. For students in the Operations Analysis Curriculum. MN 210C MACRO-ECONOMICS (4-0). A study of the determination of the level of national output and its relation- MN 312B MICRO-ECONOMICS (3-0). A study of the ship to the economics of defense. Analysis of the roles of allocation of resources among competing ends as deter- savings, investment, monetary policy, fiscal policy, and their mined by a price system. Topics covered include supply, relationships to the national goal of full employment with- demand, consumer choice, and the theory of the firm. For out inflation. students in the Operations Analysis Curriculum.

FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (3-0). An intro- MN 221C MN 313A INTERMEDIATE MICRO-ECONOMIC THE- duction to the basic concepts, terminology, and principles ORY (3-0). More intensive study of the resource allocation of financial accounting. Covers the accounting cycle; ac- problems introduced in MN 312B. Additional topics cov- counting for assets, liabilities, revenue, and expenses; fi- ered include general equilibrium, welfare economics, and nancial statements and statement analysis. Discusses the capital theory. For students in the Operations Analysis Cur- implications of alternative accounting principles. riculum. PREREQUISITE: MN 312B. MN 252C INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR (4-0). The aspects MN 315B MANAGEMENT PLANNING AND DECISION of individual behavior which relate particularly to the MAKING (4-0). Introduces the basic concepts of optimal effectiveness of the Naval officer are discussed. Topics in- investment decisions. The primary emphasis will be placed clude personality structure, motivation, psychological test- on problem formulation and methods of analysis for deci- ing, learning, and behavioral conditioning. sion making, including data necessary and criteria for MN 253C MANAGEMENT PSYCHOLOGY (3-0). Basic choice. For students in engineering curricula. PREREQUI- psychological concepts are examined with particular em- SITES: PS 351B, MN 310C, MN 320C. phasis given those aspects of major importance to the manager. Current theories applicable to such topics as com- MN 316A ADVANCED ECONOMIC ANALYSIS (3-0). of theoretical of munication, authority, motivation, and leadership are dis- A study the foundations current economic covered statics, cussed. Attention is given to aiding the manager in devel- analysis. Topics include comparative dy- oping sound interpersonal relationships both in the mili- namics, model building, stability conditions, and optimal tary and Civil Service. For students in the Management paths of capital accumulation. For students in the Opera- (Data Processing) curriculum. tions Analysis Curriculum. PREREQUISITES: MN 311C and MN 313A. MN 301C BASIC MANAGEMENT I (4-0). A survey course covering financial and material management. Topics MN 319A ECONOMICS SEMINAR (3-0). Topics cov- in financial management include accounting principles, ered will be selected on the basis of student interest and budgeting and control, and appropriation accounting. Top- consent of the instructor. Examples of economic problems ics in material management include the resources available that might be considered are international trade, intermedi- for defense, material management practices in the Depart- ate macro-economics, and economic development. For stu- ment of Defense, procurement, inventory control, and dis- dents in the Operations Analysis Curriculum. PREREQUI- tribution in support of operating forces and industrial ac- SITES: MN 311C and MN 313A. tivities. For students in engineering curricula. MN 320C MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING (4-0). Intro- MN 302C BASIC MANAGEMENT II (4-0). A survey duces the basic concepts of accounting as used in industry course in personnel management, organization theory, and and government. Develops the uses of accounting data by their applications in industrial management. Topics cov- managers in planning, control and decision making. Appli- ered include individual and group behavior, principles of cations of automatic data processing to accounting systems effective organization to achieve managerial goals, and man- are illustrated. For students in engineering curricula. agement control of industrial operations. For students in engineering curricula. MN 322A MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING (3-0). Intro- duces the basic concepts of accounting as used in industry MN 310C ENGINEERING ECONOMICS (4-0). Intro- and government. Develops the uses of accounting data by duces the basic concepts of microeconomics necessary for managers in planning, control, and decision making. Appli- decision making. Develops consumer and producer choice cations of automatic data processing to accounting systems theory with emphasis on producer choice, concentrating on are illustrated. For students in the Management (Data Pro- technological considerations, production and cost, and sup- cessing) Curriculum. ply curves. Market models will also be presented. For students in engineering curricula. PREREQUISITE: PS 351B. MN 381A DATA PROCESSING MANAGEMENT (4-0). This course is intended to provide a knowledge of alterna- MN 311C MACRO-ECONOMICS (3-0). A study of the tive data processing systems from unit record equipment determination of the level of national output and its rela- to complex computer systems. Consideration is given to tionships to the economics of defense. Analysis of the roles the effective installation and utilization of the most suitable of savings, investment, monetary policy, fiscal policy, and system for representative Data Processing tasks. The role their relationships to the national goal of full employment of the manager of such a system is emphasized.

84 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS

MN 382A COMPUTER APPLICATIONS (4-0). This military services, including detailed analysis of placement

course discusses the application of computer systems to in the organization, operating tasks, staff role and antici-

data processing and scientific problems. This is a continua- pated future trends. Discussion of a broad range of cases tion of MN 381A. to illustrate current practice and problems. PREREQUI- SITES: MN 423A, PS 372B, and MN 481A, or permission MN 401A INDIVIDUAL STUDY (3-0). Designed to give of instructor. the student an opportunity to continue advanced study in

some aspect of management. Consent of advisor must be MN 426A COST ESTIMATING AND ANALYSIS (3-0). secured. Develops the concepts of cost estimation, cost behavior, cost allocation, and variance analysis. Introduces the military MN 411B MICRO-ECONOMICS (4-0). A study of the al- application of cost estimation and analysis for weapons location of resources among competing ends as determined procurement decision-making and control. PREREQUI- by a price system. Topics covered include supply, demand, SITES: MN 422A and PS 372B (or equivalent). consumer choice, and the theory of the firm.

MN 432A SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). This course cov- MN 412A MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS (4-0). A study ers the application of economic concepts, probability theory, of economic principles applied to managerial decision mak- and statistics to problems of choice among various weap- ing. Practical tools which can be used to improve the ons systems. Approximately half of the course is devoted to allocation of a firm's resources are discussed. Specific top- the theoretical problems involved in optimum resource allo- ics include forecasting demand, cost analysis, and optimal cation; the remaining time is devoted to study of current capital allocation. PREREQUISITES: MN 411B and weapons choice problems. PREREQUISITE: MN 413A. MN 423A. MN 453A PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION AND IN- MN 413A INTERMEDIATE MICRO-ECONOMIC THE- DUSTRIAL RELATIONS (4-0). Current personnel prac- ORY (4-0). More intensive study of the resource allocation tices in industry are examined. The background, philosophy, problems introduced in MN 411B. Additional topics cov- and regulations of Civil Service are discussed, with em- ered include general equilibrium, welfare economics, and phasis given industrial relations aspects of administration. capital theory. PREREQUISITE: MN 411B. Throughout the course comparisons are made between the MN 419A ECONOMIC SEMINAR (4-0). Topics covered personnel management techniques of the Federal Govern- will be selected on the basis of student interest and con- ment and of civilian industrial organization. PREREQUI- sent of the instructor. Examples of economic subjects that SITE: MN 252C. might be considered are international trade, intermediate MN 455A BEHAVIORAL SCIENCE SEMINAR (3-0). A macro-economics, and economic development. PREREQUI- combination of directed reading and individual students' SITE: MN 210C and MN 413A. presentations in specialized areas is employed. The student MN 422A MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING (3-0). Devel- is given the opportunity to pursue an area of interest, pre- ops the managerial uses of accounting data for planning, pare a paper on the selected topic, and make a presenta-

control, and decision making. Specific topics covered in- tion to the class and the instructor for their critical com- clude cost accounting, flexible budgets, standard costs, ments. PREQUISITE: MN 453A. cost-volume analysis, and the relevance of cost data to MN 456A LABOR RELATIONS (4-0). The nature of decisions. PREREQUISITE: MN 221C. labor problems is defined; union history and government MN 423A PLANNING, PROGRAMMING AND BUDG- studied; the processes of collective bargaining, the eco- ETING (4-0). Introduces modern techniques of capital nomics of the labor market, and governmental regulation budgeting. Discusses the Federal budgetary process, with of wages and unions examined. Particular emphasis is special emphasis on budgeting in the Department of De- placed on employee-management relations in the Federal fense and the program budget approach. Considers the im- Service in view of the changing status of collective bar- plications of the planning-programming-budgeting cycle gaining in this area. PREREQUISITE: MN 453A. for defense decision making. Considers, briefly, appropria- MN460A MATERIAL MANAGEMENT (3-0). This course tion accounting and the accounting practices of the Navy presents the functions of material planning, requirements Industrial Fund. PREREQUISITE: MN 422A. determination, procurement, distribution, and control ap- MN 424A INTERNAL CONTROL AND AUDITING plied to the introduction, development, and supply support

(4-0). Develops the fundamental objectives and principles of major military programs. A broad overview is given of of internal control in industry and government. Discusses the various organizations of the Department of Defense in the audit function, auditing standards, audit procedures, the material management field. PREREQUISITE: MN 210C. sampling techniques, and audit reports. The auditing of MN 461A PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT ADMIN- accounting systems maintained by computer is studied. ISTRATION (4-0). The elements of the procurement cycle PREREQUISITES: MN 422A, MN 481 A, and PS 372B are discussed, including the requirements determination, (or equivalent). legal, fiscal, technical, production, facilities, inspection, and MN 425A COMPTROLLERSHIP SEMINAR (4-0). De- termination factors involved. The various military procure- velops the comptrollership function in industry and in the ment laws and regulations are reviewed and analyzed to

85 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

determine their effect upon the Navy material logistics sys- MN 490A GROUP AND ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAV- tems. PREREQUISITE: MN 460A. IOR (5-0). The impact of group structure, member interaction, role behavior, and group pressure on small group MN 462A MODERN INVENTORY MANAGEMENT effectiveness is examined. Current leadership theories and (3-0). The basic concepts and formulae used to develop empirical findings are studied. The organization as a sys- material demand forecasting systems and variable inven- tem of formally structured, task-oriented groups is exam- tory levels are reviewed and discussed. The scientific ap- ined. Organizational concepts pertinent to the military and proach to basic inventory decisions is stressed. Opportuni- the Civil Service — such as power, authority, and bureauc- ties are provided to study and analyze several approaches racy — are studied. Methods of effecting coordinated effort which introduce mathematical inventory theory as applied toward organizational goals by means of planning, direction to the Navy Supply System. PREREQUISITES: MN 460A and control techniques are investigated. PREREQUISITE: and PS 372B. MN 252C.

MN 473A QUANTITATIVE DECISION MAKING (3-0). The course explores the application of science to decision MN 491A MANAGEMENT POLICY (4-0). An attempt is making involving a survey of applicable tools of quantita- made to synthesize the various functional areas of manage- tive analysis. The instruction treats management decision ment into a composite whole. Stress is placed on the oper- making problems from over-all system point of view with ation of top management rather than on component parts primary emphasis on interaction of separate elements of an in the processes of analysis, decision-making, action and control in achieving various goals. PREREQUISITES: enterprise ; examining flows of information, money, materials, manpower and capital equipment. The course stress- MN 411B, MN 490A, MN 423A, and OA 471B. es practical applications of mathematical and statistical tools. PREREQUISITES: PS 372B and OA 471B. MN 492A GOVERNMENT AND BUSINESS (4-0). Pub-

lic policies of national government affecting the economic, MN 480A FACILITIES MANAGEMENT (3-0). The political and social order; role of government in our so- course includes analysis of the problems involved in devel- ciety; responsiveness of national government to various opment of requirements and programming and procurement interest groups; defense policy, its effect upon the Navy; of long lead-time support facilities. The complexity of the the budgetary process in the formulation of the National process brought about by technological change, modification Strategy; interaction of regulatory agencies with Defense. of strategic and tactical concepts, limited budgets and the PREQUISITE: MN 210C. executive-legislative relationship, are examined. PREREQ- UISITE: MN 460A. MN 495A ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT SEM- MN 481A COMPUTERS AND DATA PROCESSING INAR (3-0). A research and discussion approach to the (4-0). An introduction to digital computers, the main problem areas of the theory of organization, their structure emphasis on the principles involved in effective implementa- and behavior. Particular attention is given to consequences tion of computer systems. Specific programming problems of changes in organizational environments and internal tech- from the managerial area. nologies. PREREQUISITE: MN 490A.

86 ;;

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL Gerald Dean Ewinc, Associate Professor of Electrical En- gineering (1963) ; A.A., College of Marin, 1955; B.S.E.E., ENGINEERING Univ. of California, 1957; M.S.E.E.. 1959; E.E., Oregon State Univ., 1962: Ph.D., 1964. Charles Harry Rothauge, Professor of Electrical Engi- neering: Chairman (1949)*: B.E., Johns Hopkins Univ., Howard Markiiam Gardner, Professor of Electrical Engi- 1940; D. Eng., 1949. neering (1948) ; B.S., Univ. of London, 1923; M.S., Cali- Allen Edcar Vivell, Professor of Electrical Engineering fornia Institute of Technology, 1938. (1945); B.E., Johns Hopkins Univ., 1927; D.Eng., 1937. Alex Gerba, Jr., Associate Professor of Electrical Engi-

Stanley Glasgow, Dean Emeritus (1949) ; B.S., Wash- Roy neering (1959); B.E.E., Univ. of Louisville, 1947; M.S., ington Univ., 1918; M.S., Harvard, 1922; E.E., Washing- Univ. of Illinois, 1957. ton Univ.. 1925: D.Sc. (Hon.), Washington Univ., 1961.

Glenn Alvia Gray, Associate Professor of Electronics George Robert Giet, Professor Emeritus and Fellow (1960); B.S., Univ. of California, Berkeley, 1954: M.S.. (1925); A.B., Columbia Univ., 1921; E.E., 1923. 1955; Ph.D., 1958. Richard Carvel Hensen Wheeler, Professor Emeritus

(1929); B.E., Johns Hopkins Univ., 1923: D.Eng., Rens- David Boysen Hoisincton, Professor of Electronics (1947) : selaer Polytechnic Institute, 1926. B.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1940; M.S., Univ. of Pennsylvania, 1941. William Malcolm Bauer, Professor of Electronics (1946) B.S., Northwestern Univ., 1927: E.E.. 1928; M.S., Har- Raymond Kenneth Houston, Professor of Electrical En- vard Univ., 1929; D.Sc, 1940. gineering (1946); B.S.. Worcester Polytechnic Institute. 1938; M.S., 1939. Bruce Allan Black, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. Naval

Reserve, Instructor of Electrical Engineering (1965) ; Roy Martin Johnson, Jr., Assistant Professor of Electron- B.S., Columbia Univ., 1964; S.M., Massachusetts Insti- ics (1959); B.S., Univ. of California, 1954; M.S., 1959. tute of Technology, 1966. Donald Evan Kirk, Assistant Professor of Electrical Engi- John Miller Bouldry, Associate Professor of Electrical neering (1965); B.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute, Engineering (1946); B.S., Northeastern Univ., 1941; 1959; M.S., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1961; Ph.D., M.S., Brown Univ., 1956. University of Illinois, 1964.

Stephen Breida, Associate Professor of Electronics (1958) : Clarence Frederick Klamm, Jr., Professor of Electronics B.S.E.E., Drexel Institute of Technology. 1952; M.S.E.E.. B.S., Washington Univ., 1943; M.S., 1948. Purdue Univ., 1954. (1951);

William John Brenner, Assistant Professor of Electrical Jeffrey Bruce Knorr, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. Naval Electrical Engineering (1964) Engineering (1964); B.S., Merrimack College. 1962; Reserve, Instructor of ; M.S.. Stanford Univ., 1964. B.S., Pennsylvania State Univ., 1963; M.S., 1964.

Shu-Gar Chan. Associate Professor of Electrical Engineer- Georce Heinemann Marmont. Professor of Electronics ing (1964); B.S., Univ. of Washington, 1952: M.S., Co- (1959); B.S., California Institute of Technology, 1934; lumbia Univ., 1954; Ph.D., Kansas Univ., 1964. Ph.D., 1940.

Jesse Gerald Chaney, Professor of Electronics (1944); Carl Ernest Menneken, Professor of Electronics (1942); A.B., Southwestern Univ., 1924; A.M., Univ. of Texas, B.S., Univ. of Florida, 1932; M.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1930. 1936.

Richard Henry Chesarek, Ensign, U.S. Naval Reserve, Robert Lee Miller, Professor of Electronics (1946) ; B.Ed., Instructor of Electrical Engineering (1965); B.S., Stan- Illinois State Normal Univ., 1936; M.S., Univ. of Illinois, ford University, 1964; M.S., 1965. 1941.

Paul Eugene Cooper, Professor of Electronics (1946) Raymond Patrick Murray, Associate Professor of Elec- B.S., Univ. of Texas, 1937: M.S.. 1939. tronics (1947); B.S., Kansas State College, 1937; M.S., Mitchell Lavette Cotton, Associate Professor of Elec- Brown Univ., 1953.

tronics (1953) ; B.S.. California Institute of Technology, Myers, Associate Professor of Electrical En- 1948; M.S., Washington Univ., 1952: E.E., Univ. of Cali- Glen Allen

; B.S.E.E., Univ. of North Dakota, 1955; fornia, 1954. gineering (1965) M.S.E.E., Stanford Univ., 1956; Ph.D., 1965. James Steve Demetry, Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering (1960); B.S., Worcester Polytechnic Insti- Herbert Leroy Myers, Assistant Professor of Electrical of California, tute, 1958; M.S., I960: Ph.D., U.S. Naval Postgraduate Engineering ( 1951 ) ; B.S., Univ. Southern School, 1964. 1951.

87 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Robert Samuel Norin, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. John Robert Ward, Associate Professor of Electrical Engi-

Naval Reserve, Instructor of Electrical Engineering neering (1962) ; B.Sc, Univ. of Sydney, 1949; B.E., 1952; (1964); B.A., Columbia Univ., 1962; B.S., 1963; M.S., Ph.D., 1958. Stanford Univ., 1964. Milton Ludell Wilcox, Associate Professor of Electrical Charles Benjamin Oler, Professor of Electrical Engineer- Engineering (1958); B.S., Michigan State Univ., 1938; ing (1946); B.S., Univ. of Pennsylvania, 1927; M.S., M.S., Univ. of Notre Dame, 1956. 1930; D.Eng., Johns Hopkins Univ., 1950. *The year of joining the Postgraduate School Faculty has Rudolf Panholzer, Associate Professor of Electrical Engi- been indicated in parentheses.

neering (1964) ; Dipl. Ing., Technische Hochschule Graz, Austria, 1953; M.S.E.E., Stanford Univ., 1955; D.E., Stanford Univ., 1956; D.Sc, Technische Hochschule Graz, DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREES Austria, 1961. IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Orval Harold Polk, Professor of Electrical Engineering In addition to meeting the minimum specific academic re- (1945); B.S., Univ. of Colorado, 1927; M.S., Univ. of quirements for these degrees given below, candidates Arizona, 1933; E.E., Univ. of Colorado, 1940. as must also satisfy the general degree requirements as deter- Georce Anthony Rahe, Associate Professor of Electrical mined by the Academic Council. Engineering (1965); B.S., U.C.L.A., 1957; M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1965.

Michael Aloysius Reilly, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ELECTRICAL Naval Reserve, Instructor of Electrical Engineering ENGINEERING (1964); B.S.E.E., Univ. of Santa Clara, 1961; M.S.E.E., 1964. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING ELECTRONICS Georce Lawrence Sackman, Associate Professor of Elec- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMMUNICATIONS trical Engineering (1964) ; B.M.E., Univ. of Florida, ENGINEERING 1954; B.E.E., 1957; M.S.E., 1959; Ph.D., Stanford Univ.,

1964. It is required that candidates for these degrees satisfy the following requirements while in residence at the Naval Post- Maurice L. Schiller, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. Naval graduate School except in the case of candidates entering Reserve, Instructor of Electrical Engineering (1965); the school with advanced standing, when due allowance will B.S., Texas A&M Univ., 1964; M.Eng., 1965. be made for advanced transfer credits.

Abraham Sheincold, Professor of Electronics (1946); Approximate B.S., College of the City of New York, 1936; M.S., 1937. Discipline Subjects Term Hrs.

William Conley Smith, Professor of Electrical Engineer- Electrical Fields and Circuits 17 ing (1946); B.S., Ohio Univ., 1935; M.S., 1939. Engineering Electron Devices and Circuits 16 Electromagnetic Theory 4 Donald Alan Stentz, Associate Professor of Electronics Communication Theory 4 (1949); B.S., Duke Univ., 1949; M.S., U.S. Naval Post- Electromechanical Devices 5 graduate School, 1958. Feedback Control Theory 4 Robert Denney Strum, Associate Professor of Electrical Electronic Computers 4 Engineering (1958); B.S., Rose Polytechnic Institute. 1946, M.S., Univ. of Santa Clara, 1964. 54 Mathematics Vector Algebra 4 Frederick Walcutt Terman, Assistant Professor of Elec- Calculus 4 trical Engineering (1964); B.S.. Stanford Univ., 1949; Differential Equations and Series 4 M.S., 1950. Complex Variables 3

George Julius Thaler, Professor of Electrical Engineering (1951); B.E. Johns Hopkins Univ., 1940; D.Eng., 1947. 15 Phvsics Properties of Matter 8 Harold Arthur Titus, Associate Professor of Electronics (1962); B.S., Kansas Univ., 1952; M.S.. Stanford Univ.. In addition to the above 77 term hours, approximately 28 1957; Ph.D., 1962. elective term hours will be required in upper division courses. At least 15 of those term hours will normally be John Benjamin Turner, Jr., Associate Professor of Elec- elected in the candidate's degree option (Electrical Engi- tronics (1955); B.S.. Univ. of Arkansas, 1941; M.S., neering, Engineering Electronics or Communications Engi- Univ. of California. 1U 18. neering).

88 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ELECTRICAL EE 102D INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM (2-2). introductory course that ENGINEERING An requires no knowledge of mathematics beyond simple differentiation MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING and integration. Topics studied include charge and matter, ELECTRONICS the electric field. Gauss's law, electrical potential, capaci- tors and dielectrics, current and resistance, the magnetic- MASTER OF SCIENCE IN field, Ampere's law and Faraday's law. inductance, and COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING magnetic circuits. PREREQUISITE: PH 051D.

Each student's program must include a total of at least EE 103C NETWORK ANALYSIS I (4-4). An introduction 45 term hours in A or B level courses beyond the require- to electric circuit analysis with attention given to both time ments for the B.S. degree. At least 20 of these credits shall domain and frequency domain topics. Differential equations be in A level courses. are written for multi-loop and multi-node networks and are

Of the above 45 credits at least 20 must be directed solved by Laplace transform methods. Special case of sinu- toward a specialty within the candidate's degree option, and soidal steady-state analysis, frequency response plots, im- in addition at least 22 non-specialty credits must be dis- pedance and admittance functions, and network theorems tributed as follows: are studied. PREREQUISITE: EE 102D or EE 105C.

Advanced Circuits 4 term hours Advanced Devices 4 term hours EE 104C NETWORK ANALYSIS II (4-3). A continua- Advanced Mathematics 6 term hours tion of EE 103C. Topics include: transforms of truncated Electives other than Electrical waveforms, real convolution, network functions, poles and Engineering or Mathematics 8 term hours zeros, two-port network parameters, flowgraphs, formulation In addition candidates must present an acceptable thesis. of problems in state variable notation, Fourier series and signal spectra, an introduction to the Fourier integral and

continuous spectra. The analog computer is used to study BIOLOGY linear systems in the laboratory. PREREQUISITE: EE 103C. BI 800C FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOLOGY (6-0). The fundamental principles of the living cell covered from a bio- EE 105C BASIC ELECTRICAL PHENOMENA (3-2). chemical and biophysical standpoint. Specialization of cell The first of a series of three courses designed to present function, as exemplified in certain animal and plant tissues the fundamentals of fields and circuits. An introduction to and organs systems. Genetics and its relation to properties the theory of electric and magnetic fields presented in a of cell nucleus. Related topics, including the evolutionary unified manner which satisfies the prerequisites for circuits, progress. electronics, and machinery. PREREQUISITE: Ordinary- Differential Equations. BI 801B ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY (6-01. A general course in animal physiology, emphasizing human functional as- EE 106C BASIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS I (3-2). The cir- pects. PREREQUISITE: BI 800C. cuit concept is developed by the complete analysis of simple circuits. Sinusoidal steady-state solution by phasor methods BI 802A RADIATION BIOLOGY (6-0). Fundamental is introduced. Matrix methods are used in the analysis of processes of energy transfer from radiation to living matter. multi-loop and multi-node circuits. PREREQUISITE: EE Biochemical, physiological and genetic effects of radiation. 105C. Methods of experimental radiation biology. PREREQUI- SITES: PH 637B, PH 638A, BI 800C, BI 801 B. EE 107C BASIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS II (3-2). A con- BI 822A SPECIAL TOPICS IN RADIATION BIOLOGY tinuation of EE 106C. Poles and zeros are defined. Driving (2-0). Study of important current topics in radiation biol- point, transfer, and hybrid parameters of 2-port networks: ogy. PREREQUISITE: Appropriate biological background. polar, logarithmic, and rectangular plots; network theorems: Fourier series; and balanced polyphase circuits are BI 823A SPECIAL TOPICS IN RADIATION BIOLOGY studied. PREREQUISITE: EE 106C. II (2-0). A continuation of BI 822A. A study of important current topics in radiation biology. EE 111C FIELDS AND CIRCUITS (4-4). An introduc-

tion to the theory of electric and magnetic fields is presented a foundation for the study of circuits, electronics, ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING as and machinery. The basic circuit elements are defined by EE 101D ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS (3-2). A pre- the application of this theory. Response of simple circuits sentation of basic electrical phenomena. Topics include: and power and energy relations are considered. Sinusoidal

DC circuits and components, magnetism, electromagnetism, steady-state solution by phasor methods is introduced. PRE- instruments, AC circuits and components, resonance, trans- REQUISITE: Differential and Integral Calculus (may be formers, batteries, and power sources. concurrent).

89 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

EE 112C CIRCUIT ANALYSIS (4-3). A continuation of EE 122A NETWORK SYNTHESIS I (4-0). Basic prin- EE 111C. Sinusoidal analysis is continued. Poles and zeros ciples of system synthesis as exemplified in the synthesis are defined. Matrix methods are introduced. Driving point, of passive electric networks. Energy relations in such net- transfer, and hybrid parameters of 2-port networks; polar, works and the fundamental properties of physically realiz- logarithmic and rectangular plots; network theorems and able driving point immittances are studied. Synthesis of Fourier series are studied. PREREQUISITE: EE 111C. one-port networks, in various forms, is illustrated, as is the ladder development of 2-port networks. PREREQUISITE: 113B LINEAR SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-3). The EE EE 113B. basic theory of circuit analysis is continued with a thorough study of transient phenomena in linear systems. Laplace EE 123A NETWORK SYNTHESIS II (3-0). Two-port transform methods are studied with illustrations in electri- synthesis is continued from EE 122A, with emphasis on cal, mechanical, and electromechanical systems. Fourier in- series and parallel realizations, lattice networks, and resis- tegral methods for solutions of system response and spectral tively terminated networks. N-port synthesis, synthesis analysis are considered. Real convolution and its applica- through matrix methods, and linear graph theory methods tion to inversion techniques in both Laplace and Fourier of synthesis are introduced. Other advanced topics in mod- solutions is illustrated. Methods of analysis in both the time ern active and passive synthesis will be discussed. PRE- and frequency domain are compared. The analog computer REQUISITE: EE 122A. is used to simulate linear systems in the laboratory. PRE- Complex Variable REQUISITES: EE 112C or EE 107C. EE 125B OPERATIONAL METHODS FOR LINEAR (may be concurrent). Theory SYSTEMS (3-1). A study of the mathematical methods employed in the design and analysis of linear systems. Topics 114B COMMUNICATION THEORY I (4-0). In this EE include: basic concepts of systems analysis, the Fourier introductory course the following concepts and their math- integral and Fourier transform, applications to linear sys- ematical formulations are presented: Information measure: tems (low- and band-pass filters, spectrum analyzers), the sampling; pulse encoding methods; frequency and time bi-lateral Laplace transform, integral theorems, correlation multiplexing; amplitude, frequency and phase modulation. and power spectra. PREREQUISITES: EE 104C or EE In addition, a comparison of modulation methods is pre- 113B, and MA 271C. sented. PREREQUISITE: EE 113B.

EE 131C POLYPHASE CIRCUITS (3-2). Analysis of EE 115B SIGNALS, SYSTEMS, AND COMMUNICA- polyphase circuits with balanced and unbalanced loading. TION (4-1). A review of the time and frequency domain Power and energy measurements in polyphase circuits. An- representation of signals, as well as the characterization of alysis of polyphase circuits with unbalanced voltages using electric networks by their impulse response. The principles symmetrical components. Fault currents and voltages deter- and mathematical formulation of continuous-wave ampli- mined by the application of sequence networks. PREREQ- tude and angle modulation and of pulse modulation are UISITE: EE 112C or EE 107C. presented. The relative merits of each type of modulation are considered, and basic modulation and demodulation EE 205D ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS (3-2). A techniques are studied. In the development of these topics, qualitative approach to the fundamentals of electronics. the following concepts are used: Fourier series, Fourier in- Topics include: physical processes and operational charac- tegral, convolution, delta functions, transfer functions of teristics of basic vacuum and solid-state devices; rectifiers, linear circuits, voltage and power spectra, signal-to-noise amplifiers, oscillators and elementary communication cir- ratio, sampling theorem. PREREQUISITE: EE 104C or cuits. PREREQUISITE: EE 101D. EE 113B. EE 211C ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS (4-2). EE 116B COMMUNICATION THEORY II (3-2). A con- An introduction to electronic devices, circuits and systems tinuation of EE 114B. Noise sources and methods of meas- is followed by the consideration of charge-carrier motion in urement are treated. Statistical methods for handling noise vacuum, the electrical properties of solids and conduction and random signals are presented, followed by a study of processes in gases. Physical processes and operational char- detection problems in radar and pulse transmission systems. acteristics associated with various diodes and control de- Correlation functions and their application to communica- vices are considered and the basic techniques of signal tion systems are introduced. PREREQUISITE: EE 114B. amplification with active devices and the graphical analysis of amplifier circuits are studied. PREREQUISITES: EE EE 121A ADVANCED NETWORK ANALYSIS (3-2). 111C or EE 106C. Network topology, signal flow graphs, sensitivity, and general linear, scattering, and immittance descriptions are con- EE 212C ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS I (4-3). The topics sidered. Additional topics are chosen from the following studied include the equivalent-circuit analysis of linear partial list: Potential analog, time varying linear system amplifiers, general analysis of untuned small-signal ampli- analysis, response of linear systems to random signals, ana- fiers, feedback in amplifiers, operational and DC amplifiers lytic properties of network functions. PREREQUISITE: and small-signal tuned amplifiers. PREREQUISITE: EE EE 113B. 211C.

90 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

EE 232C ELECTRONICS II (4-3). Topics included are: EE 213C ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS II (4-3). The topics tuned, feedback and power amplifiers; amplifier frequency studied include broad-band small-signal amplifiers, elec- response; oscillators; power supplies; large-signal ampli- tronic power supplies, untuned power amplifiers, audio sys- fiers. PREREQUISITE: EE 231C. tems, tuned power amplifiers and sine-wave oscillators. PREREQUISITE: EE 212C. EE 233B COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS AND SI S TEMS (4-3). The following topics are studied: amplitude EE 214C ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS and frequency modulation and detection, pulse modulation (4-3). The topics studied include the superheterodyne re- methods, frequency conversion and synthesis, transmitting ceiver, frequency conversion, band-pass amplifiers, detectors, and receiving systems, multiplexing techniques. PREREQ- automatic gain control, production of FM signals, noise lim- UISITE: EE 232C. bers, the AM transmitter, the single-sideband transmitter EE 234C PULSE TECHNIQUES AND HIGH FREQUEN- and the FM transmitter. PREREQUISITE : FF 213C or EE 232C. CY TUBES (3-3). A study of clipping, differentiating, in- tegrating, clamping, and coupling circuits, relaxation oscil- EE 215C PULSE AND WAVEFORMING CIRCUITS lators, and pulse amplifiers, using both tubes and trans- (4-3). The topics studied include linear waveshaping cir- sistors. Following this is a study of microwave tubes most cuits, device switching characteristics, clipping, clamping commonly employed in radar systems. PREREQUISITE: and logic circuits, multivibrators and trigger circuits, elec- EE 232C. tronic counters, gating circuits and sweep generators. PRE- EE 241C ELECTRONIC FUNDAMENTALS (3-2). An REQUISITE: EE 213C or EE 232C. introduction to electronic devices, circuits and communication EE 216C SPECIAL ELECTRONIC DEVICES (4-2). The systems followed by the study of electronic processes topics studied include particle dynamics, microwave devices, in vacuum, gas and solid media, diodes and diode circuits, electronic negative-resistance and variable reactance devices, and a power supplies, amplifier devices and basic amplifier brief survey of quantum electronics and microelectronics. techniques. PREREQUISITE: EE 101D. PREREQUISITES: EE 214C and PH 604C or equivalent. EE 242C COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS I (4-3). The topics studied include linear amplifier analysis and EE 217B ADVANCED ELECTRON DEVICES (4-2). The frequency response, untuned power amplifiers, tuned voltage topics studied include particle dynamics, electronic beam and power amplifiers, frequency multipliers and sine-wave techniques and devices, microwave tubes, negative-resist- oscillators, with emphasis on frequency-stability consider- ance and variable reactance devices, microelectronics and ation. PREREQUISITE: EE 241 C. quantum-electronic devices. PREREQUISITES: EE 214C and PH 705B or equivalent. EE 243C COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS II (4-3). The topics studied include basic modulation techniques for EE 221C GENERAL ELECTRONICS I (3-3). The first information transmission, production of AM signals, the of a two-term terminal course. Topics include: electronic AM transmitter, AM detectors, frequency conversion, FM- processes in vacuum, gas and solid media ; diodes and diode signal generation and detection, communication receivers, circuits: amplifier devices and basic amplifier techniques. single-sideband systems and multiplex systems. PREREQ- PREREQUISITE: EE 112C. UISITE: EE 242C.

EE 222C GENERAL ELECTRONICS II (3-3). A con- EE 253A MICROWAVE TUBES (3-2). A study of the tinuation of EE 221C. Included topics are: linear amplifier theory and operating principles of various microwave tubes, analysis and frequency response; large-signal, tuned and such as traveling-wave tubes, klystrons, plasma devices, feedback amplifiers; oscillators; power supplies; communi- crossed-field devices. Topics to be studied will include: for- cation circuits and systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 221C. mation and control of electron beams, slow-wave structures, interaction between beams and waves, and coupled mode EE 223B ELECTRONIC CONTROL AND MEASURE- theory. PREREQUISITES: EE 622B, EE 217B. MENT (3-3). Analysis and design of electronic circuits of control, measurement, data transmission and processing. EE 254B TRANSISTOR AND SOLID STATE DEVICES Topics included are: vacuum-tube voltmeters. DC amplifiers, AND CIRCUITS (3-3). Design and analysis of 2-stage di- pulse-shaping and switching circuits, oscillators and time- rect-coupled transistor amplifiers—biasing and AC perform- base generators, counting and time-interval measuring cir- ance; DC amplifiers; wideband amplifiers; tuned IF, RF cuits, frequency measurement and control circuits, motor- small signal and power amplifiers: oscillators; FET circuits; speed and generator-voltage control systems. PREREQUI- Triac devices and circuits for power control; integrated SITES: EE 232C and EE 113B (may be concurrent ). circuits. PREREQUISITE: EE 214C or EE 232C.

EE 231C ELECTRONICS I (4-3). The topics studied in- EE 256B THEORY OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES clude: Charge motion in a vacuum and in solids; diodes (4-0). The application of solid state physics to the analysis and diode circuits; transistors and multielectrode vacuum and characterization of semiconductor diodes, transistors, tubes, with application to simple amplifier circuits: gaseous and inlegrated circuits will be studied. Attention will be tubes. PREREQUISITE: EE 112C, EE 107C, or EE 103C. given to the relationship between the internal physical proc-

91 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

esses in these devices and their responses to large, high- steady state modes. Transfer functions of control type ma- frequency and transient signals. PREREQUISITES: EE chines are obtained. PREREQUISITES: EE 113B and EE 215C and PH 705B. 131 C or equivalent.

EE 261B NONLINEAR MAGNETIC DEVICES (3-3). EE 312C ELECTRIC MACHINERY II (3-4). This is a An introduction to the use of the saturable reactors as a continuation of EE 311C. The rotating machines studied nonlinear circuit element. Pulse, storage, counting circuits are DC motors, generators and control machines and AC as used in data processing and digital computer technology, induction and synchronous motors and generators includ- as well as power modulation applications are considered. ing the single-, two-phase and polyphase induction motors. Piecewise linear analysis techniques are used to develop PREREQUISITE: EE 311C. the theory of magnetic amplifiers. The transfer function of EE 315B MARINE ELECTRICAL DESIGN I (2-4). The the amplifier with and without feedback is derived. PRE- first of two courses concerned analysis REQUISITES: EE 113B and EE 212C or EE 232C. with the of shipboard electric power systems and the design of machinery. EE 271C ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS I The design of a transformer, DC machine or AC machine in- (4-2). The topics include DC and AC circuit theory, is carried through by use of the digital computer. The study circuits, troductory principles of electronic devices and of distribution systems and their protection is started. PRE- physical processes in vacuum, gaseous and semiconductor REQUISITE: EE 312C. and tube devices. PREREQUISITES: Basic calculus and physics. EE 316A MARINE ELECTRICAL DESIGN II (2-4).

This is a continuation of EE 315B. The design project is EE 272C ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS II carried through to completion. The study of the protection (4-2). The study of electronic circuits. Included topics are of distribution systems is continued with fault analysis and electronic devices as circuit elements, analysis of linear am- selection of circuit breakers. A computer study is made plifiers, large-signal amplifiers and basic applications of of a static excitation and voltage regulator system. PRE- electronic circuits. PREREQUISITE: EE 271C. REQUISITE: EE 315B.

EE 281C GENERAL ELECTRONICS (4-2). A one-term EE 321C ELECTROMECHANICAL DEVICES (3-4). The survey course, for non-electrical engineering curricula, with basic theory and operating characteristics of control ma- emphasis on the general operational characteristics of rep- chines under steady state and transient conditions is pre- resentative electronic devices. Topics included are: physical sented. Transformers, synchros, induction motors, DC mo- processes in common devices; current-voltage relations of tors and generators and rotary amplifiers are covered in diodes and active devices; basic electronic circuits. PRE- sufficient detail, including the derivation of transfer func- REQUISITE: EE 112C or EE 107C. tions, to develop the concepts required in control systems analysis. EE 113B or the equivalent. EE 291C ELECTRONICS I (NUCLEAR) (3-3). This is PREREQUISITE: the first of two courses designed to give the Nuclear Engi- EE 331C ELECTRIC MACHINERY (3-4). This course is neering student an appreciation of electronic equipment intended for use in the Mechanical Engineering Curriculum. used in this science. Topics are: Steady state circuit analy- Basic electromechanical energy conversion principles are sis, transient concepts, and the basic theory of vacuum and covered in sufficient depth to provide understanding of the semiconductor diodes, control type tubes, and transistors. electric machines characteristics. AC and DC motors and PREREQUISITES: Mathematics through calculus. generators are covered with emphasis on the steady state

EE 292C ELECTRONICS II (NUCLEAR) (3-3). This performance. Applications are presented as time permits. course considers vacuum tube and transistor circuits, such PREREQUISITE: EE 112C or EE 107C or the equivalent. as power supplies, voltage amplifiers, feedback circuits, EE 411B FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEMS I (3-3). The pulse amplifiers, and pulse shaping circuits. Basic concepts mathematical theory of linear feedback control systems is are then applied to a variety of special circuits, including: considered. Topics include: writing system equations; rela- integral and differential discriminators; coincidence and tionship between time and frequency domain character- anti-coincidence circuits, count-rate meters, and scalers. istics; analysis using root locus concepts and using polar PREREQUISITE: EE 291C. and logarithmic plots; formulation of the state space equa-

EE 301D ELECTROMAGNETIC MACHINES (3-2). The tions; stability using Nyquist's criterion, Routh's criterion, fundamentals and applications of electric machinery. Top- and root locus; performance criteria and sensitivity. Lab- ics include the characteristics of DC machines, induction oratory work includes simulation of control systems on the and synchronous AC machines and parallel operation of analog computer, and testing and evaluation of physical generators. PREREQUISITE: EE 101D. systems. PREREQUISITES: EE 113B, EE 321C, EE 212C or EE 232C, EE 811 or MA 421 or equivalent. EE 311C ELECTRIC MACHINERY I (3-4). The principles common to translational and rotational electromechani- EE 412A FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEMS II (3-4). cal energy conversion devices are presented. The general Elements of design of control systems are considered, using approach to the analysis of rotating electric machines is both frequency response and s-plane methods. The funda- utilized to obtain the characteristics in the dynamic and mental methods of analysis of nonlinear control systems are

92 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

presented. The phase plane and describing function meth- systems, receiver (r-f amplifier characteristics, mixers, afc, ods are studied. The relay servo is introduced. PREREQ- if amplifier-filters). Delay-line MTI, automatic tracking UISITE: EE 411B. radars, and the basic radar range equation are discussed briefly. PREREQUISITES: EE 116B, EE 216C and EE EE 413A SAMPLED DATA CONTROL SYSTEMS (2-2). 612C. A study of the response of control systems to discontinuous information. The basic theory of sampling, quantizing and EE 433 A RADAR SYSTEMS (4-2). The radar range data reconstruction is studied. The Z-transformation and equation is extended to include probability concepts, cross- the z-plane are presented. State space methods are used. section fluctuations, and signal integration. Pulse compres- The system transient performance and the design of com- sion techniques, CW and pulse doppler techniques, doppler pensation are studied. PREREQUISITE: EE 411R. navigation, and problems of obtaining MTI operation from a moving platform are discussed. Advanced antenna con- EE 414A STATISTICAL DESIGN OF CONTROL SYS- cepts including the multiple-element steerable array, Lune- TEMS (2-2). Statistical concepts and random signals are bnrg-lens systems, and single-horn monopulse antennas are studied. Problems in optimal estimation (filtering), pre- developed. PREREQUISITES: EE 622B, PS 321B, Secret diction identification and control are developed. PREREQ- Clearance. UISITE: EE 411B. EE 451A SONAR SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (4-3). A EE 415A LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEM SYNTHESIS study of the theory and engineering practices of active and (3-0). The synthesis of linear control systems is studied. passive sonar systems. Emphasis is placed on the new devel- Performance criteria, advanced root locus methods and Mi- opments in modern underwater sound systems including trovic's method are presented. The analysis and synthesis communications, instrumentation, and the tactical use of of multiloop systems are studied, using determinantal and these systems. PREREQUISITE: Ph 432A, Secret Clear- signal flow methods. PREREQUISITE: EE 411B. ance. EE 416A NON-LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS (3-D. EE 455B SONAR SYSTEMS (3-3). A study of sonar Phase space and state-space concepts are studied. Quasi- theory including the active and passive systems, transducers, optimum, dual-mode and relay-control systems are presented. and characteristics of the transmission medium. PREREQ- Optimum control methods are presented. Lyapunov's method UISITES: Ph 450B and EE 214C, Secret Clearance. is studied. PREREQUISITE: EE 412A. EE 461A SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (3-2). An introduc- EE 417A MODERN CONTROL THEORY (3-1). Topics tion to the engineering of large scale systems. The primary are chosen from the following: the calculus of variations aim of this course is to increase the student's awareness applied to the optimal control problems; Pontryagin's Max- of the complex interactions of various disciplines and the imum principle; dynamic programming; self-adaptive sys- main recurring problems in systems engineering. Examples tems. Additional topics of current interest may also be from large scale military weapons systems will be studied. included. PREREQUISITE: EE 411B. PREREQUISITE: EE 571 A. EE 419B NONLINEAR AND SAMPLED SYSTEMS EE 462A AUTOMATION AND SYSTEM CONTROL (3-4). Phase plane methods, relay control systems, and sam- (3-3). A study of basic techniques and problems encoun- pled data systems are studied. Laboratory work includes tered in large computer-centered information and control analog and digital simulation, analysis of a relay servo- systems. Typical functional requirements for tactical data mechanism, and application of digital control to a system. systems. Analysis of data input functions, data processing PREREQUISITE: EE 411B. functions and data utilization functions. Laboratory work is EE 422B MODERN COMMUNICATIONS (3-3). A study devoted to solution of problems arising from the integration of modern communications trends, with emphasis on theo- of electronic computers and radar displays. Interaction be- retical study of current and proposed systems. The topics tween engineering design, programming and system analysis covered include multiplex systems, coding, and pseudo-ran- is stressed. PREREQUISITES: EE 811C, EE 433A and Ma dom noise modulation systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 116B 116B or equivalent. or EE 571A. EE 471B GUIDANCE AND NAVIGATION (3-0). A EE 431C INTRODUCTION TO RADAR (3-3). A one- study of the principles underlying systems of guidance and term course designed for students not majoring in electron- navigation. The principal topics are: radio, radar, infra-red ics. The course includes a study of search, fire-control, and inertial and celestial techniques. PREREQUISITES: PH radar-guidance systems with particular emphasis on pulse. 105C, EE 214C, and EE 411B. FM, doppler, and mono-pulse systems. PREREQUISITES: EE 234C and EE 612C. EE 473A MISSILE GUIDANCE SYSTEMS (3-0). Funda- mentals of missile guidance systems: radio, radar, infra- EE 432B PULSE RADAR (3-3). The basic special cir- red, inertial and celestial techniques. PREREQUISITES: cuits used in pulse radar are discussed and integrated into EE 411B, EE 433A and PH 152B. a complete radar system. These circuits include pulse mod- ulators, display systems, transmitter characteristics (mag- EE 481B ELECTRONIC COUNTERMEASURES (3-3). netron and oscillator-amplifier arrangements), duplexing A study of radio-frequency radiation, and the characteristics

93 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

of devices used for detecting and interfering with these radi- linear and non-linear networks is analyzed. Statistical deci- ations. The course includes active and passive systems, sion theory applications to signal detection and interpreta- spectrum analyzers, noise problems, antennas, direction- tion are illustrated by selected problems. PREREQUI- finding systems, frequency scanning and memory systems, SITES: EE 114B and PS 321B. and data processing and display. PREREQUISITES: Secret EE 581 A INFORMATION THEORY (4-0). Concepts of Clearance, EE 116B and EE 214C. information measure for discrete and continuous signals. EE 491B NUCLEAR REACTOR INSTRUMENTATION Fundamental theorems relating to channel capacity and AND CONTROL (3-3). The basic principles and methods coding; coding methods. Effects of noise on information of nuclear reactor control are presented. The treatment of transmission. Selected applications of the theory to systems. the elementary reactor with temperature and poisoning PREREQUISITE: EE 571A. feedback is given using linear feedback control system EE 611C ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS (4-0). An in- analysis. The requirements for stable operation and accuracy troduction to electromagnetic field theory. Following a re- of automatic neutron flux control are analyzed and demon- view of static electric and magnetic fields, Maxwell's equa- strated, using a reactor kinetics simulator. PREREQUI- tions are presented for time-varying fields. Additional topics SITE: EE 498B or equivalent. are skin effect, plane wave propagation, and reflection of EE 492A NUCLEAR REACTOR POWER PLANT CON- waves. PREREQUISITE: EE 112C or EE 107C. TROL (3-4). The elementary thermodynamics of the plant EE 612C TRANSMISSION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC control loop is established and the transfer functions ob- ENERGY (3-2). A study of radio-frequency transmission tained. The dynamic performance of the basic plant is an- lines, waveguides, and related components. Classical trans- alyzed under various load conditions. Automatic plant con- mission line theory is developed and applied to practical trol stability and performance using external reactor control problems. The principles of rectangular and cylindrical systems are investigated. PREREQUISITE: EE 491B. waveguides, cavity resonators, and various microwave de- EE 498B DYNAMICS OF LINEAR SYSTEMS (3-4). This vices are covered. PREREQUISITES: EE 611C and EE

course is intended for non-EE majors. The differential equa- 113B. tions of some typical physical systems will be derived, and EE 621B ELECTROMAGNETICS I (3-2). Classical trans- Laplace transform and pole-zero concepts will be used for mission line theory is developed and illustrated in labora- their solution. Both time and frequency domains will be tory exercises. The theory of static electric and magnetic covered. The transfer function concept will be introduced, fields is presented, and solutions of boundary value prob- and the discussion will be extended to feedback systems. lems are obtained by means of scalar and vector potentials. PREREQUISITE: EE 107C or EE 112C. PREREQUISITES: Ma 113B and EE 112C or EE 107C. EE 541A SIGNAL PROCESSING (4-0). Applications of (4-0). time- statistical decision theory to the detection of signals in EE 622B ELECTROMAGNETICS II The conditions noise. Ambiguity diagrams for signals and also transducer varying Maxwell equations and general boundary in unbounded arrays. Signal processing in detection and tracking systems. are presented. Solutions to the wave equation PREREQUISITES: EE 411B, EE 571A, and EE 811C. regions are studied. Maxwell's equations are applied to systems of guided waves and cavity resonators. PREREQUI- EE 542A ADVANCED SIGNAL PROCESSING (3-0). SITES: EE 621B and EE 113B. Provides an opportunity for directed study and/or creative development of signal processing techniques according to EE 623A ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY the needs of the group. Emphasis will be placed on radar, (3-0). Solution of boundary value problems using series sonar, and aerospace tracking and communications appli- solutions, transform theory, and variational techniques. cations. PREREQUISITES: EE 541 A or graduate standing Some of the topics include the dalembertian, generalized and consent of the instructor. circuit theory, driving point impedance of antennas, non- uniform transmission line, and propagation within a ho- EE 551A INFORMATION NETWORKS (3-2). Adapta- mogenous anisotropic medium. PREREQUISITE: EE 622B. tions of symbolic logic for the analysis of binary information networks using relay, vacuum tubes, transistors, or EE 631B ANTENNA ENGINEERING (3-3). This course

magnetic cores. Abstract models for switching networks. is intended to make the student familiar with the more Combinational and sequential circuits. Logical design of common types of antennas and feed systems. The attack is arithmetic and control elements. Dynamic simulation. Trans- essentially an engineering approach, applying to practical fer function synthesis. Frequency domain treatment of an- systems the mathematics and field theory presented in ear-

alog and digital computer programs. PREREQUISITES EE lier courses. The laboratory is directed to the measurement

113B, and EE 212C or EE 232C. and EE 812B. of field intensities, antenna patterns, input impedance and feed systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 612C or EE 622B. EE 571A STATISTICAL COMMUNICATION THEORY (3-2). This course is a more advanced sequel to EE 114B EE 652A MICROWAVE CIRCUITS AND MEASURE- than EE 116B. It includes a study of noise sources and a MENTS (3-2). A study of microwave components as circuit mathematical treatment of noise and random signals based elements. Topics to be studied will include: waveguides as on statistical methods. Transmission of such signals through transmission lines, waveguide impedance concepts, matrix

94 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

formulation for obstacles in waveguides, and resonant cavi- EE 812B LOGICAL DESIGN AND CIRCUITRY (4-0).

ties as microwave circuit elements. PREREQUISITE: EE Introduction to Boolean algebra. Symbolic logic and the 622B. analysis of basic logical circuits; qualitative description of basic electronic and semiconductor devices; construction of (4-0). Proper- EE 671B THEORY OF PROPAGATION computer circuits using tubes, transistors, etc. Models for its effect on the propagation of ties of the atmosphere and switching networks, synthesis of combinational and sequen- Mirface, space, and sky waves. Additional topics include: ti.il switching circuits. Logical design of arithmetic and prediction, frequency selection, noise, and tropo- coverage control elements. Memory devices, conventional and exotic. spheric and ionospheric scatter. PREREQUISITE: EE Machine-aided logical design. PREREQUISITE: EE 811C. 61 2C or EE 622B. EE 821B COMPUTER SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY (3-3). EE 711C ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS (2-3). An A course, primarily for the student not specializing in data introduction to the measurement of the fundamental quan- processing, in the fundamental methods, concepts, and tech-

tities: current, voltage, capacitance, inductance and mag- niques underlying modern naval computer-oriented systems, netic properties of materials. Alternating current bridges, such as NTDS and the OPCONCEN. Formulation of opera- their components and accessories; measurement of circuit tional requirements. Evaluation of engineering techniques.

components at various frequencies; theory of errors and Programming methods for large-scale command-control sys- treatment of data. PREREQUISITE: EE 112C. tems. Differing requirements of tactical versus strategic problems. The laboratory work provides the opportunity for EE 731C ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS (3-4). A the student to gain familiarity with methods for implement- of electronic study of the theory and techniques measure- ing user and command functions in a typical system envi- ment of voltage, current, power, impedance, phase and fre- ronment. PREREQUISITE: EE 811C. quency. Accuracy and precision are stressed. Laboratory- work stresses fundamental character of measurement prin- EE 911 A INFORMATION PROCESSING SEMINAh ciples and techniques. PREREQUISITE: EE 212C. (0-2). Discussion and reports on related topics of current interest in the field of information processing. PREREQUI- EE 811C INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL COMPUTERS SITE: EE 462A or EE 551 A. Logical organization of general-purpose, stored-pro- (3-3). EE 921A SPECIAL TOPICS IN CONTROL THEORY gram, digital machines. Number systems. Order codes. Pro- (0-2). An analysis of current developments in control sys- cedure flow charting. Assembly language programming of tems, as disclosed by papers in current technical journals. basic machine processes. Subroutines, linkage, and loaders. PREREQUISITE: EE 412A. The FORTRAN compiler language. Practical programming technique, organization, and checkout methods. Elements EE 951E THESIS SEMINAR (0-1). In these seminar of error analysis and numerical methods. Selected applica- sessions, advanced students will present papers on their tions in engineering and tactical data processing. PRE- thesis work, which will then be discussed by other students REQUISITES: EE 112C or EE 107C, and Ordinary Dif- and faculty. Some topics may be presented by faculty ferential Equations. members.

95 GOVERNMENT AND HUMANITIES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

DEPARTMENT OF GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BACHELOR AND HUMANITIES OF ARTS DEGREE WITH MAJOR IN POLITICAL SCIENCE (INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS) Emmett Francis O'Neil, Professor of Government and Humanities; Chairman (1958)*; A.B., Harvard Univ., 1. The following courses, while not part of the major 1931; M.A., Univ. of Michigan, 1932; Ph.D., 1941. proper, supply foundation and background for many of the upper-division courses that constitute the major. As Kenneth Lee Abernathy, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. soon as permitted by the schedule of the B.A. Program, B.A., Navy; Assistant Professor of Military Law; Wash- candidates for the departmental major are required to ington and Lee Univ., 1955; LL.B., Yale Univ., 1958. complete:

Course Term Hours Loftur L. Bjarnason, Professor of Literature (1958)*;

A.B., Univ. of Utah, 1934; M.A., 1936; A.M., Harvard United States Government 4 Univ., 1939; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1951. United States History 8

Introduction to Economics 4 William Clayton Boggess, Associate Professor of Speech (1956); B.S., Univ. of Southern California, 1953; M.S., 16 1954. 2. The major in Political Science (International Rela- tions) consists of a specified core of uppper-division courses, Russell Branson Bomberger, Associate Professor of Eng- plus an election of at least one upper-division course in each lish (1958); B.S., Temple Univ., 1955; M.A., Univ. of of three sub-disciplines or "Groups." Iowa, 1956; M.S., Univ. of Southern California, 1960: M.A., Univ. of Iowa, 1961; Ph.D., 1962. a. The specified core to be taken by all students pursuing the major: Lloyd William Garrison, Commander, U.S. Navy; Assist- Course Term Hours ant Professor of Political Science; B.A., Santa Barbara State College, 1941; M.A., Univ. of Hawaii, 1965. International Relations 4 Strategy for National Security 4 International 4 Boyd Francis Huff, Professor of Government and History Principles of Law Political Thought 4 (1958); B.A., Univ. of Washington, 1938; M.A., Brown Development of Western 4 Univ., 1941: Ph.D.. Univ. of California, 1955. International Communism American Traditions and Ideals 3 European History. 1871-1919 4 Robert Leonard Jacobs, Ensign, U.S. Naval Reserve; In- European History, 1919 to present 4 structor in Political Science; A.B., North Texas State Institutions and Practices of International Univ., 1962; M.A., Pennsylvania State Univ., 1964. Economics 4

Richard Michael Lindenauer, Lieutenant, U.S. Naval Re- 35 serve; Instructor in Political Science; B.A., Stanford Univ., 1962; M.A., 1963. b. All students pursuing the major will also elect at least one course from each of the following groups: Richard Varly Montac, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Na- val Reserve; Associate Professor of Political Science; GROUP I — AMERICAN GOVERNMENT A.B., College of St. Charles Borromeo, 1949; M.A., Ohio State Univ., 1952. Course Term Hours American Diplomacy 4 American Parties and Politics 4 Arnold Brian Myers, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. Naval Institutional Processes of U.S. Government 4 Reserve; Instructor in English; B.A., Utica College of American Constitutional Development 4 Syracuse Univ., 1961; M.A., Duke Univ., 1963. American Political Thought 4

Carl Ernest Pohlhammer, Lieutenant, U.S. Naval Re- serve; Assistant Professor of History; B.A., San Jose GROUP II — WESTERN COMPARATIVE GOVERN- State, 1954; M.A., Univ. of California, 1957. MENT AND FOREIGN POLICIES Course Term Hours

Burton MacLynn Smith, Associate Professor of Speech Latin America 4 (1955); B.A., Univ. of Wisconsin, 1936; M.A., 1937. Atlantic Community 4

*The year of |oining Africa South of the Sahara 4 the Postgraduate faculty is indicated in parenthesis, Government and Politics of the Soviet Bloc

96 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GOVERNMENT AND HUMANITIES

GROUP III — EASTERN COMPARATIVE GOVERN- GOVERNMENT MENT AND FOREIGN POLICIES GV 010D U.S. (4-0). study of Amer- Course Term Hours GOVERNMENT A ican political institutions and processes, the principles of Government and Politics of Major U.S. Constitutional Government, and the U.S. political sys- Asian States 4 tem (parties, interest groups, elections, and voting behavior ) Government and Politics of Southeast Asia 4 with special emphasis on current issues and problems. The Middle East 4 The Government and Politics of the GV 012D AMERICAN LIFE AND INSTITUTIONS I Chinese Bloc 4 (2-0). A study of American political institutions and politi- c. The total hours of course work in the major is 47. It cal, social and economic aspects of American life. Open if courses, specified or elective, can be less required only to Allied officers. were taken before their credits were raised from three GV 013D AMERICAN LIFE AND INSTITUTIONS II to four hours. (2-0). A continuation of GV 012D.

3. A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with GV 102C INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS (4-0). An an- Major in Political Science (International Relations) must alytical study of the basic concepts, factors and problems of also satisfy the general requirements for the degree of international politics focused on the nature and power of Bachelor of Arts as determined by the Academic Council. the modern sovereign state and its political and economic Many of the courses required for this major are included in modes of acting in its relations with other states. (Military the B.A. curriculum. The foregoing requirements should be factors in relation to foreign policy are studied in the re- used by the student planning the remainder of his B.A. lated course 103C.) program. GV

GV 103C STRATEGY FOR NATIONAL SECURITY ENGLISH (4-0). An extension of the study of international politics EN 101C ADVANCED WRITING FOR NAVAL OFFI- special emphasis on the study of international conflict and CERS (3-2). Extensive practice in development of effective the U.S. organization for conflict management. The course writing techniques and individual writing style; study of includes a study of strategy: the nature of war; the re- language with emphasis on its usage and application to quirements of military security: and the U.S. security effective writing; practice in criticism of writing examples; organization. especially adapted to the educational needs of naval offi- GV 104C AMERICAN DIPLOMACY (4-0). An analysis cers. PREREQUISITE: Freshman English or permission of of the major problems of the United States foreign rela- Chairman of Department. tions in Europe. Latin America, and the Far East from 1900 EN 102C REASONING AND RESEARCH REPORTING to the Korean conflict. PREREQUISITES: HI 102 and (4-0). A study of the principles of inductive and deductive HI 104. logic as they are applied in the preparation of research reports. GV 106C COMPARATIVE GOVERNMENT (4-0). An analytical and comparative study of the form and function- EN 103C SEMINAR IN RESEARCH TECHNIQUES ing of the major types of contemporary government with (1-0). A study of the principles and techniques of research emphasis on the policy-making process. PREREQUISITE: writing. GV 010D.

EN 104C TECHNICAL WRITING (2-1). A study of prin- GV 108C THEORY AND PRINCIPLES OF INTERNA- ciples and practices of research writing in science and tech- TIONAL RELATIONS (4-0). A seminar in the scope and nology, applied to the preparation of abstracts of scientific theories of International Relations and techniques of re- papers, laboratory reports, and theses in the technical cur- search in the field; the analysis of problems. ricula.

EN 105C THESIS WRITING (2-0). A study of princi- GV HOC GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS OF MAJOR (4-0). international, internal, ples and practices of research writing applied to the prepa- ASIAN STATES The and states, exclusive of ration and analysis of theses and reports in the Manage- military problems of the major Asian ment Curricula. Communist China.

EN 120C THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE (3-0). Lectures GV 111C GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS OF SOUTH-

and exercises on the English language; its history, vocabu- EAST ASIA (4-0). The international, internal, and military lary, and usage. problems of the southeast Asian states and of Australia and New Zealand. GEOGRAPHY GV 112C LATIN AMERICA (4-0). A study of contem- GY 101C POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY (4-0). A study of porary Latin America with emphasis on the problems and world areas, regions, and countries, with emphasis on the objectives of the constituent states, their regional and inter- location and political significance of terrain features. national relationships.

97 GOVERNMENT AND HUMANITIES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

GV 113C THE ATLANTIC COMMUNITY (4-0). A study such as federalism, civil-military relations, public v. private of the states in the Atlantic Community; their political, interests, and civil rights will be discussed. PREREQUI- economic, military, ideological, and sociological relations, SITE: GV 010D. both regional and international. PREREQUISITE: HI 104. GV 140C OF POLITICAL GV 114C THE MIDDLE EAST (4-0). A study of politi- DEVELOPMENT WESTERN THOUGHT (4-0). An historical and analytical study of cal, economic, social, cultural and strategic aspects of the major Western political thought from Plato to Rousseau contemporary Middle East and its role in international rela- with emphasis on the antecedents of modern democratic and tions. totalitarian philosophies. Readings from original sources. GV 116C AFRICA SOUTH OF THE SAHARA (4-0). A study of contemporary Africa south of the Sahara with em- GV 141C AMERICAN TRADITIONS AND IDEALS (3-0). phasis on emerging political institutions and analysis of The traditions, ideals and values of our civilization and major developing economic, social and cultural patterns. the role of the military in implementing the image of Amer- ica in the world. PREREQUISITES: HI 101C or HI 102C, GV 118C GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS OF THE SO- GV 140C. VIET RLOC (4-0). An analysis of the contemporary government, economy, military doctrine, and international rela- GV 142C INTERNATIONAL COMMUNISM (4-0). An tions of the Soviet Union and its satellites. PREREQUI- introductory course in the theory and practice of Com- SITE: HI 104. munism. Topics include the philosophical background of Marxism; the basic writings of Marx, Lenin, and subse- GV 119C GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS OF THE quent revisers; the evolution of ideology in the Soviet Union CHINESE COMMUNIST BLOC (4-0). An analysis of the and Communist China; the origins and nature of the diver- government, economy, institutions, military doctrine, and sity and disagreements among contemporary Communist international relations of Communist China and its satel- systems. lites.

GV 120C MILITARY LAW I (3-0). The principles of GV 143C THE DEVELOPMENT OF AMERICAN PO- Military Law as included in the Uniform Code of Military LITICAL THOUGHT (4-0). A study of American political Justice, the Manual for Courts-Martial and the Manual of thought from the colonial period to the present. PREREQ- the Judge Advocate General. Topics include: jurisdiction; UISITES: GV 140C, HI 101C, HI 102C. charges and specifications; substantive law: and the law GV 150C GREAT ISSUES (3-0). Seminar on the issues of evidence. confronting the United States correlating the knowledge GV 121C MILITARY LAW II (3-0). Procedural aspects gained in previous courses in order to develop responses to of Military Law and relations with civil authorities in legal the challenges facing the United States. PREREQUISITE: matters. Topics include: non-judicial punishment; courts of Permission of Chairman of Department. inquiry; investigations; summary and special courts-martial;

trial techniques; civil and criminal process. PREREQUI- GV 199C DIRECTED STUDIES (2-0 to 4-0). Independ- SITE: GV 120C. ent study in government in subjects in which formal course work is not offered. PREREQUISITE: Permission of Chair- GV 122C INTERNATIONAL LAW (4-0). A survey of the man of Department. basic principles of international law with emphasis on jurisdiction and the rules of warfare. Case and problem discus- GV 640C AVIATION LAW (1-0). A study of Federal and sions. State laws and regulations relating to military aviation, designed especially for the Aviation Safety Officer Program. GV 130C AMERICAN PARTY POLITICS (3-2). The nature and function of political parties; origin, development, structure, internal management and control; relation HISTORY of parties and pressure groups to legislation and administration; analysis of voting behavior and participation in HI 101C U.S. HISTORY (1763-1865) (4-0). The devel- politics. PREREQUISITE: GV 010D. opment of the Federal Union from the American Revolu- tion to the end of the Civil War. GV 131C POLICY MAKING PROCESSES OF U.S. GOV- (3-2). seminar in ERNMENT A the structure and func- HI 102C U.S. HISTORY (1865-present) (4-0). The devel- tioning of American political institutions with particular opment of the American nation from the reconstruction emphasis upon the forces which shape and condition the crisis to the present. decision-making processes in Congress, the Executive branch and the Judicial system. PREREQUISITE: GV 010D. HI 103C EUROPEAN HISTORY (1871-1919) (4-0). The international, internal and military development of the GV 132C AMERICAN CONSTITUTIONAL DEVELOP- major European states in the period before World War I. MENT (4-0). An examination of the United States Consti- tution and its development through the years as interpreted HI 104C EUROPEAN HISTORY (1919-present) (4-0). by Supreme Court decisions and by Congressional and The international, internal, and military development of the

Presidential traditions and practices. Constitutional issues major European states since World War I.

98 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GOVERNMENT AND HUMANITIES

HI 105C THE AGE OF REVOLUTION AND REACTION LT 111C THE AMERICAN NOVEL (2-0). A study of the IN EUROPE (4-0). The impact of revolution on European novel in the United States from Charles Brockden Brown power relationships. ITS') to 1870. lo William Faulkner.

HI 199C DIRECTED STUDIES (2-0 to 4-0). Independent IT 112C THE BRITISH NOVEL (3-0). A study of se- study in history in subjects in which formal course work is lected British novels together with consideration of their not offered. PREREQUISITE: Permission of Chairman of effects on the political, social and cultural life of the time. Department. LT 115C SHAKESPEARE (3-0). A sludy of selected Shakespearean sonnets and dramas. LITERATURE

LT 010D APPRECIATION OF LITERATURE (3-0). An introduction to the understanding and enjoyment of litera- PSYCHOLOGY ture expressing the enduring problems of mankind. Style (4-0). and structure will be considered as well as content. Some PY 010D INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOLOGY behavior with attention will be paid to genres and periods of literature. A survey of principles underlying human emphasis on the application of these principles to human rela- LT 101C MASTERPIECES OF AMERICAN LITERA- tions and problems of social adjustment. TURE (3-0). A study of those ideas which have shaped American cultural life and reflect American thinking. PRE- PY 101C APPLIED PSYCHOLOGY (3-0). A study of REQUISITE: LT 010D. group dynamics, rating procedures, criminology, and per-

sonality formation and adjustment : individual projects are LT 102C MASTERPIECES OF BRITISH LITERATURE ^signed. PREREQUISITE: PY 010D. (3-0). A study of the significant ideas of selected British thinkers as they pertain to social and cultural life. PRE- PY 650C PSYCHOLOGY IN ACCIDENT PREVENTION REQUISITE: LT 010D. AND INVESTIGATION (4-0). A study of logical and psychological principles and practices useful in developing LT 103C MASTERPIECES OF BRITISH LITERATURE mental efficiency and emotional strength, designed espe- (continued) (3-0). PREREQUISITE: LT 010D. cially for the Aviation Safety Officer Program. Prerequisites for all literature courses listed below: LT

010D and at least one course in American or British Lit- erature. SPEECH

LT 104C. 105C MASTERPIECES OF EUROPEAN LIT- OFFICERS ERATURE (3-0, 3-0). A study of the significant ideas of SP 001D RASIC SPEECH FOR FOREIGN presentation of European writers. Plays, novels, short stories, essays, and (2-0). Intensive work in preparation and in public criticisms will be read and discussed. 104 covers the period public speeches. Emphasis on special problems in English. from early times to the end of the Renaissance. 105 covers speaking for students with limited experience for foreign officers.) the period from the Renaissance to the present time. (SP 001 is a prerequisite for SP 010

LT 106C, LT 107C, LT 108C MASTERPIECES OF RUS- SP 010D PUBLIC SPEAKING (3-0). Intensive work in SIAN LITERATURE (3-0, 2-0, 2-0). A study of selected preparation and presentation of public speeches. Emphasis Russian and Soviet writers to demonstrate the role of litera- on study of methods of platform techniques and principles

ture in Russian and Soviet life and culture. 106, a survey of of oral style. Russian literature from the early period through the 19th century, exclusive of the novel (3-0). 107, a study of the SP 011D CONFERENCE PROCEDURES (3-0). Theory Russian novel of the 19th century (2-0). 108, a study of and practice in group dynamics applied to conferences, em- Soviet literature (2-0). phasizing completed staff work in group problem-solving.

LT 109C PHILOSOPHICAL TRENDS IN MODERN LIT- SP 012D SPEECH COMMUNICATION (2-0). A brief ERATURE (3-0). An examination of modern literature course in speech with emphasis on organization and tech- expressing social, psychological, and cultural problems in niques of communication. Offered only in Term V. order to show how literature reflects the aspirations and the frustrations of modern man. PREREQUISITE: Permission SP 101C ADVANCED SPEECH (2-0). A study of tech- of Chairman of Department. niques for obtaining desired audience responses. Oppor- tunities are offered to speak to community groups. PRE- LT HOC THE LITERATURE OF NORTHERN EUROPE REQUISITE: SP 010D. (2-0). A study of selected writers of Germany, Scandinavia, and the British Isles, with particular reference to the dram- SP 630C ART OF PRESENTATION (2-0). A study of atists such as Hauptmann, Ibsen, Strindberg, and Shaw to principles of speaking with visual aids, with practice in demonstrate their influence on the social and philosophical preparing presentations. The course is especially designed thinking of their times. for the Aviation Safety Officer Program.

99 ;: ;

MATERIAL SCIENCE AND CHEMISTRY NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

DEPARTMENT OF MATERIAL SCIENCE William Marshall Tolles, Assistant Professor of Chem- AND CHEMISTRY istry (1962); B.A., Univ. of Connecticut, 1958; Ph.D., Univ. of California, 1962. Gilbert Ford Kinney, Professor of Chemical Engineering; Chairman (1942)*; A.B., Arkansas College, 1928; M.S., James Woodrow Wilson, Professor of Chemical Engineer- Univ. of Tennessee, 1930; Ph.D., New York Univ., 1935. ing (1949); B.A., Stephen F. Austin State, 1935; B.S. in Ch.E., Univ. of Texas, 1939; M.S. in Ch.E., Texas A.&M. Newton Weber Buerger, Professor of Metallurgy (1942) College, 1941. B.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1933; M.S.,

*The year of joining the Postgraduate School is indi- 1934; Ph.D., 1939. faculty cated in parenthesis. Peter McLauchlin Burke, Assistant Professor of Metal- DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREES lurgy (1960); B.S., Stanford Univ., 1956; M.S., 1957. IN CHEMISTRY Carlos Guillermo Cardenas, Lieutenant Junior Grade, BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN CHEMISTRY U.S. Naval Reserve, Assistant Professor of Chemistry Univ. of Ph.D., (1965); B.S., Texas, 1962; 1965. 1. A specific curriculum should be consistent with the general minimum requirements for a Bachelor of Science John Robert Clark, Professor of Metallurgy (1947) ; B.S., degree as determined by the Academic Council. Union College, 1935; Sc.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1942. 2. A major in chemistry should include a minimum of John Henry Duffin, Associate Professor of Chemical Engi- 54 term hours in chemistry (of which 11 term hours are of (through neering (1962); B.S., Lehigh Univ., 1940; Ph.D., Univ. elective), 21 term hours physics general and of California, 1959. modern physics), 18 term hours of mathematics (through calculus), and 15 term hours of elective upper division William Wisner Hawes, Professor of Metallurgy and courses in engineering, mathematics, or science (including Chemistry (1952); B.S., ChE., Purdue Univ., 1924; chemistry). At least 108 of the term hours must be of upper Sc.M., Brown Univ., 1927; Ph.D., 1930. division level. Carl Adolf Hering, Professor of Chemical Engineering 3. The following specific requirements must be met. (1946); B.S., Oregon State College, 1941; M.S., Cornell Courses marked with an asterisk must include laboratory Univ., 1944. work. Benjamin Joseph Lazan, Visiting Professor of Materials Approximate Science B.S., Rutgers, 1938; M.S., Harvard, (1966); Discipline Subject Term Hours 1939; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State Univ., 1942. Chemistry General* 8 Joseph Marin, Visiting Professor of Materials Science Inorganic* 5 (1965); B.Sc, Univ. of British Columbia, 1928; M.S., Analytical* 4 Univ. of Illinois, 1930; Ph.D., Univ. of Michigan, 1935. Organic* 12 Physical* 14 George Daniel Marshall, Jr., Professor of Metallurgy (1946); B.S., Yale Univ., 1930; M.S., 1932. 43 George Harold McFarlin, Professor of Chemistry (1948) Physics General* 16 B.A., Indiana Univ., 1925; M.A., 1926. Modern (Atomic) 5

Richard Alan Reinhardt, Associate Professor of Chem- istry (1954); B.S., Univ. of California, 1943; Ph.D., 1947. 21 Mathematics College Algebra and Melvin Ferguson Reynolds, Professor of Chemistry (1946) Trigonometry 5 B.S., Franklin and Marshall College, 1932; M.S., New Analytical Geometry and York Univ., 1935; Ph.D., 1937. Calculus 13 Charles Frederick Rowell, Assistant Professor of Chem- istry (1962); B.S., Syracuse Univ., 1956; M.S., Iowa 18 State Univ., 1959; Ph.D., Oregon State Univ., 1964. 4. The 11 elective term hours in chemistry must be ful- John Wilfred Schultz, Associate Professor of Chemistry filled by taking at least upper division courses in chemistry (1958); B.S., Oregon State College, 1953: Ph.D., Brown or chemical engineering. Univ., 1957. 5. In addition to the general requirement of an overall James Edward Sinclair, Associate Professor of Chemistry 1.0 grade point average, an overall chemistry grade point (1946); B.S., Ch.Eng., Johns Hopkins Univ., 1945; M.S., average of 1.0 is required. USNPGS, 1956.

Glenn Howard Spencer, Associate Professor of Chemistry MASTER OF SCIENCE IN CHEMISTRY

(1962); B.S., Univ. of California, 1953; Ph.D., Univ. of 1. To obtain the degree, Master of Science in Chemistry, Washington, 1958. the student must have completed work equivalent to the

100 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MATERIAL SCIENCE AND CHEMISTRY

following: Two terms of General Chemistry, one term of chemical behavior of matter with sufficient descriptive chem- Intermediate Inorganic Chemistry or Inorganic Qualitative istry to illustrate these principles. Laboratory experiments Analysis, one term of Quantitative or Instrumental Analysis, will be related to the lecture material. TEXTS: Sienko and one term of Thermodynamics, two terms of Physical Chem- Plane, Chemistry; Ritter, An Introductory Laboratory

istry, three terms of Organic Chemistry, one term of Ele- Course in Chemistry. mentary Differential Equations and four terms of Physics. CH 002D INTRODUCTORY GENERAL CHEMISTRY II

2. In addition the student must successfully complete the (3-3). The second term of the sequence described under following: CH 001D. Particular emphasis on the properties of com-

a. One course at the A level in each of the following pounds as related to the periodic table is used to organize areas: Chemical Thermodynamics, Inorganic Chem- the study. PREREQUISITE: CH 001D. istry, Physical-Organic Chemistry, and Quantum CH 103C GENERAL CHEMISTRY (4-2). A survey of Chemistry. Minimum Total term hours -— 12. the principles governing the chemical behavior of matter. b. Two or more courses at the A level in the general Descriptive chemistry is limited almost entirely to the area chosen for specialization. These courses must compounds of carbon on the assumption that students will have a total of not less than six term hours of lec- have had college chemistry. TEXT: Pauling. General Chem- ture and must be approved by the Department of istry. PREREQUISITE: College Chemistry. Material Science and Chemistry. Minimum Total CH 105C AEROMATERIALS (3-2). Review of selected term hours — 6. principles in inorganic, organic and physical chemistry and c. A thesis demonstrating ability to perform independ- their application to problems in aero materials. TEXT: ent and original work. Popovich and Hering, Fuels and Lubricants. PREREQUI- d. Sufficient supporting courses in science, mathematics SITE: None. and engineering to meet school requirements.

CH 106C PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY I (3-2). The MASTER OF SCIENCE IN first course of a two-term sequence. A study of the funda- MATERIALS SCIENCE mental principles of chemistry governing the physical and

1. The following is a statement of department mini- chemical behavior of matter. Current theories of atomic mum requirements for the degree of Master of Science in structure and chemical bonding are particularly emphasized.

Materials Science. It is noted that the candidates for this Also studied are the states of matter, chemical kinetics, and degree must also satisfy the general degree requirements chemical equilibria. Elementary physical chemistry experi- determined by the Academic Council. A candidate shall ments are performed in the laboratory. TEXT: Mahan. previously have satisfied the requirements for a Bachelor's University Chemistry. PREREQUISITE: College Chemis- degree with a major in science or engineering. Credit re- try. quirements in succeeding paragraphs must be met by CH 107C PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY II (3-2). A courses in addition to those used to satisfy this requirement. continuation of CH 106D. The principles of chemistry are properties of 2. A minimum credit of 20 term hours in A level courses applied to the study of the chemical the ele- is given in Materials Science is required. These shall include at ments and their compounds. Special attention to least one course each in the areas of metals, of ceramics, the compounds of carbon. Laboratory experiments are used and of plastics. A minimum of 12 term hours of graduate to illustrate the chemical behavior of matter. TEXT: credit must be earned outside the major department. A Mahan, University Chemistry. PREREQUISITE: CH 106C. total of at least 24 term hours of A level courses must be CH 108C INORGANIC CHEMISTRY (3-4). An inten- included in the program. sive treatment at an intermediate level of the chemistry ions in aqueous solution. The course will 3. Completion of a thesis and its acceptance by the of the common department are required. A maximum of eight term hours supplement general chemistry and will emphasize facility kinetics, structure in corre- of graduate credit may be allowed towards satisfaction of in the use of equilibria, and the familiar elements. the School requirement for 48 term hours, but the thesis lating the chemistry of more TEXTS: oj Qualitative Analysis; King, credit may not be used to satisfy the requirements of para- Clifford, Inorganic Chemistry Electrolytic Solutions. PREREQ- graph 2. Qualitative Analysis and UISITE: CH 107C. 4. Any program leading to award of this degree must be approved by the Department of Material Science and CH 109C GENERAL AND ORGANIC CHEMISTRY providese a continuation of the chemical Chemistry at least three terms before completion. In general, (3-2). This course in and also provides the mini- approved programs will require more than minimum degree principles begun CH 106C organic chemistry for students who will requirements in order to conform to the needs and ob- mal coverage of Sienko and Plane, Chem- jectives of the United States Navy. take courses in biology. TEXTS: istry; Hart and Schuetz, A Short Course in Organic Chem-

CHEMISTRY AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING istry. PREREQUISITE: CH 106C.

CH 001D INTRODUCTORY GENERAL CHEMISTRY I CH 112A FUELS, COMBUSTION, HIGH TEMPERA- (4-3). The first term of a two-term course in elementary TURE THERMODYNAMICS (3-2). A brief survey of the chemistry for students who have not had college chemistry. organic and physical chemistry necessary for a study of A study of the principles which govern the physical and the problems associated with fuels. The nature of conven-

101 MATERIAL SCIENCE AND CHEMISTRY NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

tional fuels and of high-energy fuels, their limitations, and First term of a two-term sequence. In this term the tools possible future development. Also methods of reaction rate available for the study of organic mechanisms are discussed control. TEXTS: Popovich and Hering, Fuels and Lubri- and appropriate examples used. PREREQUISITE: CH cants, and Penner, Chemical Problems in Jet Propulsion. 313B. PREREQUISITES: Physical Chemistry and Thermody- CH 329A PHYSICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II (3-0). namics. The techniques discussed in CH 328A are used in the study CH 150A INORGANIC CHEMISTRY, ADVANCED (4-3). of organic reaction mechanisms as currently understood. Applications of thermodynamics, chemical kinetics, and PREREQUISITE: CH 328A. reaction mechanisms to inorganic systems. Structures of CH 403B CORROSION AND CORROSION PROTEC- inorganic species. Aqueous solution chemistry of selected TION (3-2). A course designed to give a knowledge of the elements. systematic approach to the chemistry of the A chemical and electrochemical mechanism of corrosion and halogens is studied in the laboratory. TEXT: Cotton and the environmental and stress factors that affect the rate of Wilkinson, Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. PREREQUI- corrosion. Methods of control such as cathodic protection, SITES: 231C; 444B (may be taken CH 108C; CH CH alloying, protective coatings, and inhibitors will be con- concurrently). sidered. TEXT: Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control. CH 231C QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS (2-4). A study of PREREQUISITE: General Chemistry. the principles and calculations of quantitative analysis, ac- CH 407B PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY (3-2). A one-term typical volumetric and gravimetric deter- companied by course in physical chemistry for students who have had the Pierce Haenisch, minations in laboratory. TEXT: and thermodynamics. Gases, liquids, solids, solutions, thermo- I07C. Quantitative Analysis. PREREQUISITE: CH chemistry, chemical equilibria and kinetics are studied.

CH 311C ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I (3-2). The first term TEXTS: Cole and Coles, Physical Principles of Chemistry; of a three-term study of the chemistry of organic compounds Daniels, et al., Experimental Physical Chemistry. PRE- with appropriate laboratory supplementation. TEXT: Cram REQUISITES: CH 107C or CH 103C; and one term of and Hammond, Organic Chemistry. PREREQUISITE: CH thermodynamics. 107C. CH 433B PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I (4-3). The first CH 312C ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II (3-2). A continua- term of a two-term sequence in physical chemistry. The tion of CH 311C. The study of organic chemistry is pur- sequence will include such topics as properties of matter, sued further with the emphasis in the laboratory on syn- thermochemistry, chemical thermodynamics, chemical equi- thetic techniques. TEXT: Cram and Hammond, Organic libria, kinetics, and electrochemistry. TEXTS: Sheehan,

Chemistry. PREREQUISITE: CH 311C. Physical Chemistry; Daniels, et al., Experimental Physical Chemistry. PREREQUISITES: CH 107C, CH 611C. CH 313B ORGANIC CHEMISTRY III (3-2). The final term in a three-term sequence. The discussion of organic CH 444B PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY II (3-3). The second chemistry is extended of current advances in to the areas term of the sequence begun by CH 443B. PREREQUISITE: both organic and biochemistry as applications of the mate- CH 443B. rial in the two earlier terms. PREREQUISITE: CH 312C CH 454B INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS or the permission of the instructor. (3-3). A course designed to familiarize the student with CH 320A ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I (3-2). modern instrumental techniques of chemical analysis. Em- First of a two-term sequence in which modern synthetic phasis is given to the theoretical basis of the various kinds techniques are discussed the application of kinetic and and of measurements made in the laboratory and the principles steric control considered. PREREQUISITE: CH 313B. involved in the design and construction of analytical instru- CH 323A THE CHEMISTRY OF HIGH POLYMERS ments. Laboratory experiments will deal with representa- (3-0). A treatment of the principal classes of natural and tive analytical problems. TEXT: Willard, Merritt and Dean, synthetic high polymers, including preparation, structure, Instrumental Methods of Analysis. PREREQUISITE: CH and properties. TEXT: Golding, Polymers and Resins. PRE- 444B. REQUISITE: CH 313B. CH 466A CHEMICAL KINETICS (3-0). Experimental CH 324A QUALITATIVE ORGANIC CHEMISTRY (2-4). methods and interpretation of data. Mechanisms of re- Identification of organic compounds on the basis of physi- actions. Collision theory and activated-complex theory. cal properties, solubility, classification reactions, and the TEXT: Frost and Pearson, Kinetics and Mechanism. PRE- preparation of derivatives. TEXT: Shriner, Fuson and Cur- REQUISITE: CH 444B. tin, Identification of Organic Compounds. PREREQUI- CH 467A QUANTUM CHEMISTRY I (3-0). A study of SITE: CH 313B. the fundamental principles governing the quantum behavior CH 327A NATURAL PRODUCTS (4-0). A limited intro- of matter. Topics will include the Heisenberg uncertainty duction to the chemistry of steroids, terpenes, and alkaloids, principle, the Pauli exclusion principle, and the use of with emphasis on the role of stereochemistry in the physio- quantum mechanics in describing the electronic structures logical and chemical properties of these systems. TEXT: of atoms and simple molecular systems. TEXT: Pauling Fieser and Fieser, Steroids. PREREQUISITE: CH 313B. and Wilson, Introduction to Quantum Mechanics. PRE-

CH 328A PHYSICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I (4-0). REQUISITE: CH 444B.

102 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MATERIAL SCIENCE AND CHEMISTRY

468A II (3-0). The appli- CH QUANTUM CHEMISTRY CH 551A RADIOCHEMISTRY I (2-4). Discussion of im- cation of quantum mechanics to polyatomic molecules. Use portant aspects of radioactivity from standpoint of the will of valence-bond and molecular-orbital meth- be made chemical transformations which accompany it and which along with group theory in constructing approximate ods it may induce; techniques for measurement and study of wave functions for describing typical molecular systems. ionizing radiation; methods of separation of unstable nu- The discussion will extend to current journal articles. PRE- clides, identification and assay. TEXT: Friedlander and REQUISITE: CH 467A. Kennedy, Nuclear and Radiochemistry. PREREQUISITES:

CH 469A QUANTUM CHEMISTRY III (3-0). The ap- CH 109C or CH 107C; and PH 638B. prediction of plication of quantum chemistry to molecular CH 554A RADIOCHEMISTRY, ADVANCED (2-3). An structure ; theoretical and experimental methods. Modern advanced course in radiochemical techniques and applica- electron uses of ultraviolet, visible, infrared, microwave, tions offered to well-qualified students only. Experiments paramagnetic resonance, and nuclear magnetic resonance in analysis of complex mixtures of active nuclides; activa- spectra. PREREQUISITE: CH 468A. tion analysis. Consent of the instructor required. PRE-

CH 470A CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS (3-0). Ap- REQUISITE: CH 551 A or CH 541 A.

plication of thermodynamics to real gases, non-electrolytes, CH 571B EXPLOSIVES CHEMISTRY (3-2). Chemical electrolytic solutions, multicomponent solutions. Calcula- and physical properties of explosives are related to modes of tions of equilibria, estimation of thermodynamic quantities behavior and physical principles of use. Basic principles of calculations of prop- and brief discussion of thermodynamic testing and evaluation of explosives. Trends in new devel- data. erties from spectroscopic and other molecular TEXT: opments are surveyed. Independent exploratory work in Lewis and Randall, Thermodynamics, 2nd Ed. PREREQ- the laboratory in such areas as manner of initiation, sen- UISITES: CH 611C and CH 444B. sitivity, brisance, power, heats of explosion and combustion. CH 480A STATISTICAL MECHANICS I (3-0). A gen- TEXT: Cook, Science of High Explosives. PREREQ- eral treatment of the basic principles of quantum and clas- UISITES: Thermodynamics and Physical Chemistry. sical statistical mechanics with applications to chemical CH 581A PROPERTIES OF CERAMIC MATERIALS systems. Topics to be covered: distribution laws and the (4-0). Occurrence, syntheses and properties of ceramic relationships of Fermi-Dirac, Bose-Einstein, and corrected raw materials. Kinetic and phase equilibrium principles Boltzmann statistics; statistical entropy and thermodynamic underlying the production of ceramics and glasses. Struc- functions for systems of corrected Boltzons; applications to ture of typical ceramics and glasses. TEXT: Kingery, Intro- chemical equilibrium, diatomic molecules including ortho duction to Ceramics. PREREQUISITES: Physical Chem- and para hydrogen: black-body radiation. TEXT: Davidson. istry and Thermodynamics. Statistcial Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: CH 444B or equiv- CH 591B BLAST AND SHOCK EFFECTS (3-0). Gener- alent. ation of blast and shock waves by explosions, propagation CH 521 A PLASTICS AND HIGH POLYMERS (3-2). of shock waves in air, scaling laws for explosions, shock A study of the general nature of plastics and high poly- and blast loads on structures, damage and damage mecha- mers, their application and limitations as engineering ma- nisms, thermal and ionizing radiation effects, principles of terials. Also, correlation between properties and chemical protection against damage. TEXT: Kinney, Shocks in Air. structure. In the laboratory plastics are made, molded, PREREQUISITES: Physical Chemistry and Thermody- tested and identified. TEXT: Kinney, Engineering Prop- namics. erties and Applications of Plastics. PREREQUISITE: CH CH 600C READING AND CONFERENCE IN CHEMIS- 103C or CH 107C. TRY (1-0 to 4-0). A closely supervised individual study CH 540A NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY I (4-0). An introduc- to be pursued by students whose backgrounds or future tion to the reactions of nuclei. Behavior and properties of plans require additional or exceptional treatment of material unstable species. TEXT: Friedlander and Kennedy, Nuclear at the undergraduate level. PREREQUISITE: Permission and Radiochemistry. PREREQUISITE: CH 150A. of the instructor.

CH 541A NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY II (3-4). A continua- CH 611C GENERAL THERMODYNAMICS (3-2). A tion of CH 540A with emphasis on techniques peculiar to ireatment of the laws of classical thermodynamics with em- chemical studies of radioactive materials; methods of iso- phasis on the analysis of processses by use of the thermo- lation, purification and analysis of mixtures. TEXT: Fried- dynamic state functions. Applications are made to simple lander and Kennedy, Nuclear and Radiochemistry. PRE- systems, but principles developed provide a foundation for REQUISITE: CH 540A. specialized material. TEXTS: Zemansky, Heat and Thermo-

CH 542B REACTION MOTORS (3-2). A study of the dynamics, 4th Ed.; Kiefer, Kinney and Stuart, The Prin- fundamentals of Rocket Motors. The subject matter in- ciples of Engineering Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITES: cludes the basic mechanics of Jet Propulsion engines, prop- Ch 107C or Ch 103C. erties of solid and liquid propellants, the design and per- CH 711B CHEMICAL ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS formance parameters of rocket motors. In the laboratory (3-2). Engineering problems involving mass and energy periods representative problems are solved. TEXT: Sutton, relations in chemical and physical-chemical processes.

Propulsion Elements. PREREQUISITE: CH 611C er con- TEXT: Hougen, Etc., Chemical Process Principles, Part 1. sent of instructor. PREREQUISITE: Ch 103C or Ch 107C.

103 MATERIAL SCIENCE AND CHEMISTRY NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

CH 721B UNIT OPERATIONS I (3-2). An introduction CH 900E RESEARCH (0-2 to 0-10). Experimental inves- to the study of the unit operations of chemical engineering. tigation of original problems. PREREQUISITE: Permission Selection of and primary emphasis on particular unit oper- of the professor in charge. ations will be made on the basis of current student spe- MATERIALS cialties. TEXT: Smith and McCabe, Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering. PREREQUISITE: Physical Chem- MS 021C ELEMENTS OF MATERIALS SCIENCE I (3-2). introduction to of istry. An the science and application engineering materials. The subject matter covers many of CH 741A HEAT TRANSFER (3-2). The fundamentals of the principles underlying the properties and behavior of heat transfer by conduction, convection and radiation and materials, including atomic and crystal structure, mechani- their application to problems in ordnance. In the labora- cal properties and phase equilibria. PREREQUISITE: A tory periods problems illustrating these principles are course in general chemistry. solved. TEXTS: Schenck, Heat Transfer Engineering; Mc- Adains, Heat Transmission. PREREQUISITE: Consent of MS 022C ELEMENTS OF MATERIALS SCIENCE II instructor. (3-2). A continuation of Mt 021C in which basic principles are applied in studying the properties, application, fabrica- CH 750A APPLIED MATHEMATICS IN CHEMICAL tion and corrosion of metals and other materials. PREREQ- ENGINEERING (3-2). The differential equations describ- UISITE: MS 021C. ing various chemical engineering processes are derived and solved using analytic and numeric techniques. Electronic MS 101C PHYSICAL GEOLOGY (3-2). The study of the computers will be used to obtain solutions to problems. various geological phenomena. Topics discussed are: rock- TEXT: Sherwood, Mickley and Reed, Applied Mathematics forming minerals; igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic in Chemical Engineering. PREREQUISITE: CH 721B. rocks; weathering and erosion; stream sculpture; glacia- tion; surface and sub-surface waters; volcanism, dynamic CH 760A CHEMICAL ENGINEERING KINETICS (3-2). processes; structural geology; and interpretations of topo- Rate equations are postulated for various chemical reactions graphic maps. TEXT: Gilluly, Principles of Geology. and the application of these equations studied using electronic computers. Chemical reactors will be designed using MS 201C ENGINEERING MATERIALS I (3-2). Prin- rate equations obtained. Design variations will be studied ciples underlying the properties and behavior of materials by using computers. TEXT: Smith, Chemical Engineering which make them useful in structures, machines, and de- Kinetics. PREREQUISITE: CH 721B. vices, including atomic arrangements and imperfections in crystalline and non-crystalline phases; equilibrium and non- CH 770A PROCESS CONTROL (3-2). Differential equa- equilibrium phase relationships in one-, two-, and three- tions are set up to describe the behavior of processes oc- component systems; elasticity and fracture; recovery, recurring in chemical and physical plants. Response of these crystallization and grain growth; mechanisms and kinetics equations to various forcings are determined. Feed-back of diffusion and phase transformation; chemical behavior control elements are incorporated in the processes and sys- and corrosion. Introduction to metallic, ionic, and polymeric tem response determined. Stability and frequency behavior materials to correlate structure with properties in illustrat- are investigated. Use is made of digital and analog com- ing the above subjects. TEXT: Clark and Varney, Physical puters to simulate processes and their feed-back control. Metallurgy for Engineers, 3rd ed., 1962. PREREQUISITES: TEXT: Shilling, Process Dynamics and Control. PREREQ- General Chemistry, General Physics. UISITE: Physical Chemistry and Thermodynamics. MS 202C ENGINEERING MATERIALS II (3-2). Ex- CH 771 A PROCESS CONTROL (3-2). A continuation tension of the principles of materials science to the metallic of EC 770 wherein complex control systems are studied. state; nucleation and growth; diffusion-controlled and dif- These include valves and transmission lines, heat exchang- fusionless transformation; heat treatment and hardenability; ers, level control, flow control, control of distillation col- thermal and transformation stresses; relaxation processes; umns and chemical reactors and finally blending and pH quench aging and strain aging; engineering alloy systems control. Sampled data systems and optimization techniques including iron, steel, alloy steels, stainless steels, PH stain- are considered. TEXT: Harriott, Process Control. PRE- less steels, high temperature alloys; corrosion problems. REQUISITE CH 770A. TEXT: Clark and Varney, Physical Metallurgy for Engi- CH 800E CHEMISTRY SEMINAR (0-1). A departmental neers, 3rd ed., 1962. PREREQUISITE: MS 201C. program in which invited speakers and resident faculty MS 203B PHYSICAL METALLURGY (Special Topics) speak on current topics in chemistry and related areas. (2-2). A continuation of material presented in MS 201C Mature students may be assigned topics from the litera- and MS 202C, including a discussion of powder metallurgy, ture or may be requested to report on their research. PRE- welding and casting, fatigue, properties of metals at low REQUISITE: Consent of the Instructor. temperatures, and surveys of the alloys of aluminum and Physical Metal- CH 850A SPECIAL TOPICS IN CHEMISTRY (Credit magnesium. TEXTS: Coonan, Principles of Clark and to be arranged). Pursuit of deeper understanding of some lurgy; Heyer, Engineering Physical Metallurgy; topic chosen by the student and the instructor; may involve Varney, Physical Metallurgy for Engineers; Woldman. 202C. directed reading and conference or a lecture pattern. May Metal Process Engineering. PREREQUISITE: MS be repeated for credit with a different topic. PREREQUI- MS 204A NON-FERROUS METALLOGRAPHY (3-3). SITE: Permission of the Instructor. An expansion of material introduced in MS 201C, MS

104 :

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MATERIAL SCIENCE AND CHEMISTRY

202C and MS 203B with greater emphasis on the intrinsic A course in introductory materials science or equivalent. properties of specific non-ferrous metals and alloys. PRE- MS 271 A CRYSTALLOGRAPHY AND X-RAY TECH- REQUISITE: MS 202C. NIQUES (3-2). The essential concepts of crystallography,

MS 205A ADVANCED PHYSICAL METALLURGY (3-4). the stereographic projection, modern x-ray diffraction and The subject matter includes equilibrium in alloy systems, radiographic apparatus and techniques, the theory of x-ray the crystallography of metals and alloys, phase trans- diffraction, high temperature diffraction techniques. The

formations and diffusion. The laboratory time is devoted to laboratory work includes a study of crystal models for x-ray techniques used in metallurgical studies. TEXTS: symmetry, forms, and combinations; the construction of Rarrett, Structure of Metals: Cullity, Elements of X-ray stereographic projections; and actual practice in making Diffraction; Rhines. Phase Diagrams in Metallurgy. PRE- and interpreting of x-ray diffraction photographs. TEXTS: REQUISITE: MS 202C, PH 620B or equivalent. Buerger. Elementary Crystallography; Azaroff and Buerger, The 107C. MS 206A ADVANCED PHYSICAL METALLURGY (3-4). Potvder Method. PREREQUISITE: CH The subject matter is an extension of that offered in MS MS 302A ALLOY STEELS (3-3). A study of the effects

205A but is primarily concerned with dislocations and of alloying elements including carbon commonly used in other imperfections and their influences on the physical steel making, plus precipitation hardening and dispersion properties of metals. TEXTS: Cottrell, Dislocation and hardening effects. Descriptive material includes super high Plastic Flow in Crystals; Read, Dislocation in Crystals. strength alloys, high temperature alloys, corrosion resistant PREREQUISITE: MS 205A. alloys. TEXT: E. C. Bain, The Alloying Elements in Steel. PREREQUISITE: MS 202C. MS 207B PHYSICS OF SOLIDS (3-0). A course for en- ar- gineers intended as an introduction to the physics of solids. MS 303A METALLURGY SEMINAR. Hours to be ranged. technical journals Topics discussed include introductory statistical mechanics, Papers from current will be re- atomic structure and spectra, introductory quantum mechan- ported on and discussed by students. PREREQUISITE: 203B or 205A. ics, binding and energy bands, crystal structure and imper- MS MS fections in crystals. TEXT: Sproull, Modern Physics. PRE- MS 304A SPECIAL TOPICS IN MATERIALS SCIENCE REQUISITE: MS 202C. (credit by arrangement). An advanced course in which theoretical and practical problems of materials properties, MS 208B PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS (3-2). This applications and fabrication are discussed. PREREQUI- course is designed for the specific needs of the aeronautical SITE: Consent of Instructor. engineer, and includes the effects of various mechanical and MS 308A MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR ENGINEER- thermal treatments on the structures and properties of air- OF ING MATERIALS (3-2). Mechanical properties of mate- craft and space materials including steels, titanium, alumi- rials for various environmental conditions including static, num, magnesium, and other alloys. Discussion of corrosion fatigue, damping, impact, shock, creep and temperature and oxidation-resisting materials, including chromium-nickel of loading. Evaluation of properties for metals and alloys, stainless steels, precipitation hardening alloy steels, ceram- plastics and polymers, ceramics and cermets, composite and ics, cermets, and plastics. A correlation of the foregoing reinforced plastics. Interpretation and utilization of proper- principles with corrosion, creep, and fatigue type failures. ties in engineering. TEXT: Marin, Mechanical Behavior TEXT: Clark and Varney, Physical Metallurgy for Engi- J. of Engineering Materials. PREREQUISITE: ME 510C or neers, 2nd ed., 1962. PREREQUISITE: MS 201C. equivalent. MS 221B PHASE TRANSFORMATIONS (3-0). Kinetics, MS 312A MATERIALS SYSTEMS FOR ADVERSE EN- thermodynamics and mechanisms of nucleation and growth VIRONMENTS (4-0). Discussion of environmental factors solidification, precipitation, recrystallization. martensitic such as temperature, corrosion, thermal and mechanical transformations, eutectoid transformations and order-dis- shock, vibration, and sustained loading. Response of mate- order phenomena. PREREQUISITE: MS 202C. rials to environmental factors. Characteristics of metallic MS 222A MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS alloy systems, ceramics, plastics, and composite materials (3-0). Elements of elastic and plastic deformations; discus- as they relate to performance under adverse conditions. sion of mechanical properties; deformation and fracture in PREREQUISITE: MS 202C or MS 208B. single crystal and polycrystalline metals; the effect of tem- MS 402B NUCLEAR REACTOR MATERIALS — EF- perature; the correlation of mechanical properties and phe- FECTS OF RADIATION (3-0). A course designed for stu- nomena with microstructures imperfections. and PREREQ- dents in nuclear engineering. Includes a study of materials UISITE: MS 202C. of reactor construction ; factors in materials selection ; com- MS 223A MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL AND ELEC- mercially available materials; liquid metal coolants; nature TRONIC APPLICATIONS (3-0). The fundamental prin- of radiation damage on materials. TEXTS: The Reactor ciples underlying the electrical, electronic, and magnetic Handbook—General Properties Materials; Finniston and properties of solids. Perfect and imperfect crystals; non- Howe, Metallurgy and Fuels; Drenes and Vineyard, Radia- crystalline materials. The nature and properties of conduction Effects in Solids. PREREQUISITE: MS 207B, or tors, semiconductors, insulators and magnetic materials. equivalent. The relation between structure and properties; the effect of MS 900E RESEARCH (0-2 to 0-10). Experimental inves- impurities and of fabrication. Theoretical aspects are illus- tigations of original problems. PREREQUISITE: Consent trated by describing typical materials. PREREQUISITE: of Instructor,

105 MATHEMATICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Eric Siddon Langford, Assistant Professor of Mathematics - (1964); B.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology , 1959; M.S., Rutgers Univ., 1960; Ph.D., 1963. Robert Eucene Gaskell, Professor of Mathematics; Chair- man (1966)*: A.B., Albion College, 1933; M.S., Univ. of Kenneth Robert Lucas, Associate Professor of Mathemat- Michigan, 1934; Ph.D., 1940. ics (1958); B.S., Washburn Univ., 1949; Ph.D., Kansas Univ., 1957. Charles Henry Rawlins, Jr., Professor Emeritus of Math- College, ematics and Mechanics (1922) ; Ph.B., Dickinson Herman Bernhard Marks, Associate Professor of Mathe- 1910; M.A., 1913; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins Univ., 1916. matics (1961); B.S., Southern Methodist Univ., 1950; M.A., Univ. of Texas, 1959. Richard D. Amori, Ensign, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Math- ematics (1965); B.S., Univ. of Scranton, 1964; M.S., Hugo Murua Martinez, Associate Professor of Mathemat- Bucknell Univ., 1965. ics (1964); B.A., Univ. of California, 1952; M.S., Stan- ford Univ., 1961; Ph.D., Univ. of Chicago, 1963. Horace Crookham Ayres, Professor of Mathematics and Mechanics (1958); B.S., Univ. of Washington, 1931; Aladuke Boyd Mewborn, Professor of Mathematics and M.S., 1931; Ph.D., Univ. of California, 1936. Mechanics (1946); B.S., Univ. of Arizona, 1927; M.S., 1931; Ph.D., California Institute of Technology, 1940. Wlllard Evan Bleick, Professor of Mathematics and Me- Technology, chanics (1946) : M.E., Stevens Institute of Robert Russell Pearson, Lieutenant, U.S. Naval Reserve;

1929; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins Univ., 1933. Instructor in Mathematics (1963) ; B.A., Univ. of Connec- ticut, 1959. Richard Crowley Campbell, Professor of Mathematics and Mechanics (1948); B.S., Muhlenberg College, 1940: Robert Merlin Pickrell, Commander, U.S. Navy; In- M.A., Univ. of Pennsylvania, 1942. structor of Mathematics (1963); B.S., U.S. Naval Acad- emy, 1945. Warren Randolph Church, Professor of Mathematics John Philip Pierce, Professor of Mathematics (1948); (1938); B.A., Amherst, 1926; M.A., Univ. of Pennsyl- B.S. in E.E., Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1931; Mas- vania, 1930; Ph.D., Yale Univ., 1935. ter of E.E., Polytechnic Institute of Brooklyn, 1937.

Franklin L. Daniels, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. Naval Francis McConnell Pulliam, Professor of Mathematics Reserve; Instructor of Mathematics (1966); B.A., Okla- and Mechanics (1949): B.A.. Univ. of Illinois, 1937; homa City Univ., 1964: M.A., 1966. M.A.. 1938; Ph.D., 1947.

Donald MacAllister Fairborn, Lieutenant Junior Grade, George Donald Schmeic, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. U.S. Naval Reserve; Instructor in Mathematics (1964): Naval Reserve; Instructor in Mathematics (1963); B.A., B.S., George Peabody College, 1963. Univ. of South Dakota, 1963.

Frank David Faulkner, Professor of Mathematics and Elmo Joseph Stewart, Professor of Mathematics (1955); Mechanics (1950) ; B.S., Kansas State Teachers College, B.S., Univ. of Utah, 1937; M.S., 1939; Ph.D., Rice Insti- 1940: M.S., Kansas State College, 1942. tue, 1953.

Joseph Giarratana, Professor of Mathematics and Mechan- Charles Chapman Torrance. Professor of Mathematics ics (1946); B.S., Univ. of Montana, 1928; Ph.D., New and Mechanics (1946); M.E., Cornell Univ., 1922; M.A., York Univ., 1936. 1927; Ph.D., 1931.

Herbert J. Hauer, Assistant Professor of Mathematics and Thurman Bader Wenzl, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. Mechanics (1963); B.S., Queens College, 1949; M.A., Navy; Instructor in Mathematics (1965); B.S., Rensse- Univ. of California, 1955. laer Polytechnic Institute. 1963; M.S., Univ., of Virgina, 1965. Walter Jennings. Professor of Mathematics and Mechan- ics (1947); B.A., Ohio State Univ.. 1932; B.S., 1932: Francis Merrill Williams, Assistant Professor of Math- M.A., 1934. ematics (1965); B.S., New Mexico State Univ., 1958; M.S., 1960; Ph.D., 1964. William Joseph Kennedy, Jr., Lieutenant, U.S. Naval Re- serve; Instructor in Mathematics (1963); B.A., Whitman Richard Paul Woodrinc, Lieutenant, U.S. Naval Reserve; College, 1960. Instructor in Mathematics (1964) ; B.A., Washington and Jefferson College, 1957: M.S., Univ. of Utah, 1959. Uno Robert Kodres, Associate Profeessor of Mathematics and Mechanics (1963); B.A., Wartburg College, 1954; *The year of joining the Postgraduate School faculty is Indi- M.S., Iowa State Univ., 1956; Ph.D., 1958. cated in parenthesis.

106 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SGHOOL MATHEMATICS

DEGREES WITH MAJOR IN MATHEMATICS These 24 term hours must include at least 6 hours in each of the fields of analysis and algebra. Each Officer students may, under special conditions, be offered student majoring in mathematics will set up in the opportunity to qualify for either a Bachelor of Science advance, in consultation with the Chairman of the or Master of Science degree with major in mathematics. Department, and approved by him, a mathematics Any interested student should consult the Chairman of the curriculum fitted to the student's aims, aptitudes, Department of Mathematics for an evaluation of his pre- preparation and interests. This original curriculum vious work to determine his potential for obtaining either may, however, be modified as work progresses, but degree and to consider the possibility of scheduling the only in consultation with and with the approval of necessary work. Evaluation of courses presented upon enter- the Chairman of the Department. ing the Postgraduate School for credit toward these de- c. A student pursuing a program leading to the degree grees must be completed prior to entering a program lead- of Master of Science with major in mathematics will ing to these degrees. The requirements in mathematics for be required to write a thesis in Mathematics. The these degrees are given below. They provide, on the bache- nature of the thesis may but need not be an original lor's or master's level, a working knowledge of one fieeld contribution to knowledge. The purpose of the thesis of mathematics and a well-rounded background in three is to demonstrate the student's ability to recognize of the major fields of mathematics. a problem, define that problem, investigate and successfully complete various facets of the problem and then be able to his 1. Requirements for the degree of Bachelor oj Science document and present with major in Mathematics. work on the problem. For the completion of the thesis the student will be given 8 hours credit,

a. Of the total term hours specified in the general re- which will be in addition to the required 24 hours.

quirements for the degree of Bachelor of Science, a d. In addition to the above requirements, a student

student majoring in mathematics must complete at must pass a written comprehensive examination in

least 36 term hours of approved course work in mathematics. This examination is given twice each mathematics beyond the calculus, and must have year and normally a student will take his exami- an average QPR of 1.25 or better in these 36 term nation within the year preceding the award of the hours. Master of Science degree.

b. These 36 term hours in mathematics must include 3. The thesis director, topic, and subject of specializa- at least 6 hours of approved course work in each of tion shall be chosen, with the consent of the chairman of

three fields of mathematics and two of these fields the department, as early as possible (but in all events, not must be analysis and algebra. later than two terms prior to the time for granting the degree). departures from c. Each student majoring in mathematics will set up in Minor the preceding requirements advance, in consultation with the Chairman of the may be authorized by the Chairman of the Department of Department, and approved by him, a mathematics Mathematics.

curriculum fitted to his aims, aptitudes, preparation, and interests. This original curriculum may, how- MATHEMATICS ever, be modified as work progresses, but only in Ma OOOE, Ma 001E PROBLEM SESSION (0-1). Non- consultation with and with the approval of the credit problem session to supplement other courses. Chairman of the Department.

2. Requirements for the degree of Master Science of Ma 010D BASIC ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY I with major in Mathematics. (4-0). Review of arithmetic processes. The real number a. A student pursuing a program leading to a Master system. Engineering notation and the slide rule. Algebraic of Science degree with major in mathematics must operations. Linear equations. Graphs. Laws of exponents. have completed work which would qualify him for a Quadratic equations; the quadratic formula. Logarithms. Bachelor of Science degree with major in mathe- Definition of trigonometric functions. Solution of the right matics as defined in paragraph 1. A student whose triangle. PREREQUISITE: None. background does not satisfy this requirement may take course work to eliminate this deficiency while Ma 025D ELEMENTARY SETS WITH APPLICATIONS simultaneously pursuing the Master of Science Pro- (3-0). Study of the vital role played by set theory through- gram. However, course work pursued to eliminate out contemporary mathematics. A brief introduction to naive

this deficiency cannot be counted toward satisfying set theory is followed by an elementary treatment of logic either the general or departmental requirements for and the nature of mathematical proof. Techniques of in- the degree of Master of Science. formal proof are implemented in proving standard theorems b. Of the total term hours specified in the general about sets. Following a study of relation and function as

requirements for the degree of Master of Science, a an application of set theory a Boolean algebra is defined student majoring in mathematics must complete at and used to summarize the algebra of both sets and logic.

least 24 term hours of approved A or B level course A final application is given through a systematic treatment work in mathematics, and must have an average of finite probability theory from a set point of view. PRE- QPR of 2.125 or better in these 24 term hours. REQUISITE: None.

107 MATHEMATICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

integration. Numerical methods. Improper integrals. Partial Ma 030D INTERMEDIATE ALGEBRA (5-0). The set of development of the derivatives, directional derivatives. Total differential. Chain real numbers and postulates for the theor- rule differentiation. Introduction to vector analysis. Del algebra of real numbers. Proofs of some elementary Applications of the operator. Line integrals. Multiple integrals with applica- ems for the algebra of the real numbers. multipli- tions. PREREQUISITES: Ma 071D. postulates and theorems to addition, subtraction, factorization of algebraic expressions. cation, division and Ma 073C DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (5-0). A con- problems, first degree equations and Application to word tinuation of Ma 072D. Series of constants; power series; degree. Functions, graphs and inequali- equations of higher Fourier series; first order ordinary differential equations; logarithms. Sequences, series and the ties. Exponents and ordinary linear differential equations with constant coef- numbers. PREREQUISITE: binomial theorem. Complex ficients; simultaneous solution of ordinary differential equa-

None. tions. Series solution of ordinary differential equations, including Bessel's Equation. PREREQUISITE: Ma 072D. Ma 031D COLLEGE ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY review of algebraic fundamentals. Slide rule (5-0). Brief Ma 100C THEORY OF EQUATIONS (3-0). Polynomials methods of computation. Algebra of com- and logarithmic in one variable algebraic equations and their roots, rational quadratic equations. Systems of equations, plex numbers, roots, cubic and bi-quadratic equations, symmetric func- determinants: Cramer's rule. Binomial Theorem. Mathemat- tions, approximate evaluation of roots. PREREQUISITE: Trigonometric functions of the general angle. ical induction. Calculus. Identities. Solution of right and oblique triangles. Elements of the theory of equation. PREREQUISITES: Previous Ma 101B LINEAR ALGEBRA I (3-0). Systems of Linear courses in College Algebra and Trigonometry. Equations. Vector Spaces. Algebra of Matrices. Determi- nants. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. Ma 032C MATHEMATICS FOR MANAGEMENT (4-0). Ma 102B LINEAR ALGEBRA II (3-0). Bilinear and This course is designed to provide the mathematical back- Quadratic Forms. Linear Transformation on a Vector Space. ground needed to understand modern managerial tools and Canonical Representations of techniques. Specific areas covered include a review of Matrices. PREREQUISITE: Ma 101B. algebra, probability, and a survey of calculus. PREREQUI- SITE: Consent of Instructor. Ma 103C PROJECTIVE GEOMETRY (3-0). Transforma- tions in Euclidean Ma 051D CALCULUS AND ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I geometry; invariants; perspectives: Desargue's triangle theorems; principle (5-0). Fundamentals of plane analytic geometry, concepts of duality; homogeneous coordinates of points lines; of function, limit, continuity. The derivative and differentia- and linear combinations of points and lines: cross ratio, tion of algebraic and trigonometric functions with applica- a projective in- variant; harmonic division, properties of tions. Derivatives of higher order. Differentials. Formal in- complete quad- rangles and complete quadrilaterals; tegration of elementary functions. Rolles' theorem, areas, projective transformations, the projective properties. volumes of revolution. PREREQUISITE: Ma 031D or its PREREQUISITE: Con- sent of Instructor. equivalent.

Ma 104A ALGEBRAIC (3-0). Ma 052D CALCULUS AND ANALYTIC GEOMETRY II CURVES An introduction to study of algebraic geometry is given (5-0). Selected topics from plane geometry. Differentiation by means of a solution of topics from the theory of curves, centering and integration of transcendental functions. Hyperbolic around birational transformations and linear functions. Parametric equations. Formal integration. Nu- series. PREREQUI- SITES: Ma 103C and or merical integration. Improper integrals. Polar coordinates. Ma 105B consent of Instructor. Plane vectors. PREREQUISITE: Ma 051D. Ma 105B FUNDAMENTALS OF MODERN ALGEBRA I (3-0). Concept of group; subgroups; Ma 053D CALCULUS AND ANALYTIC GEOMETRY III composition of (5-0). Partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total dif- groups; basic theorems for Abelian groups. Rings; integral ferential. Chain rule differentiation. Introduction to vector domains; ideals; polynomial rings; basis theorems for rings. analysis. Del operator. Line integrals. Multiple integration PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. and applications. Introduction to infinite series. PREREQ- Ma 106B FUNDAMENTALS OF MODERN ALGEBRA UISITE: Ma 052D. II (3-0). Continuation of Ma 105B. Fields: field extensions; algebraic numbers; algebraic integers; root fields and their Ma 071D CALCULUS I (5-0). The calculus of functions

of a single independent variable with emphasis on basic Galois groups: properties of the Galois group and its sub- concepts. Derivatives, differentials, applications, Rolles' groups; finite fields; insolvability of the quintic polynomial. theorem and the mean value theorem. Definite integral with PREREQUISITE: Ma 105B. applications. Elementary transcendental functions. Topics Ma 107B INTRODUCTION TO GENERAL TOPOLOGY from plane analytic geometry to be introduced as necessary. (3-0). Review of usual topology in En fundamentals of Polar coordinates. PREREQUISITES: Ma 031D or its point set topology, e.g., compactness, connectivity, homeo- equivalent, and previous work in calculus. morphism, etc. Hausdorff, metrizable, regular spaces, and

Ma 072D CALCULUS II (5-0). Advanced transcendental embedding theorems. Applications. PREREQUISITE: Ma functions including hyperbolic functions. Methods of formal 10QB or consent of Instructor.

108 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MATHEMATICS

keyboard calculators; emphasis is given to methods which Ma 109B FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALYSIS I (3-0). are useful with large scale automatic digital computers. Elemements of set theory and topology in En ; vector valued 240C or equivalent. functions, dffferentials and Jacobians; functions of hounded PREREQUISITE: Ma variation. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. Ma 128B NUMERICAL METHODS IN PARTIAL DIF- FERENTIAL EQUATIONS (3-1). Finite difference expres- Ma HOB FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALYSIS II (3-0). sions for derivatives. Boundary value problems in ordinary Theory of Reimann-Stieltges integration, multiple integrals, differential equations. Iterative methods for solving systems sequences and series of functions. PREREQUISITE: Ma of linear algebraic equations. Relaxation methods. Basic 109B. numerical methods for linear second order partial differen-

Ma 111 A FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALYSIS III (3-0). tial equations of Laplace. Poisson, heat-flow and the one-

Continuation of Ma HOB. Line and surface integrals. dimensional wave equation. Introduction to difference equa- Stokes theorem, improper integrals, Fourier series and tions. Stability. Discretization and round-off errors. PRE- Fourier integrals. PREREQUISITES: Ma 109R and Ma REQUISITES: Ma 125B and Ma 421C. HOB. Ma HOB LINEAR ALGEBRA AND MATRIX THEORY and Ma 113B VECTOR ANALYSIS PARTIAL DIFFER- (4-0). Systems of linear equations, equalities and inequali- ENTIAL (4-0). Calculus of vectors: differ- EQUATIONS ties. Vector spaces, bases. Determinants and matrices. Linear ential operators: line and surface integrals; Green's, Stokes, transformations, bilinear and quadratic forms. Canonical variables: boundary and divergence theorems. Separation of representations. Geometrical interpretations. Latent roots conditions: applications to flow. PREREQUISITES: heat and vectors of a matrix. PREREQUISITE: Ma HID or the Ma 120C, Ma 240C and Ma 251C. equivalent.

Ma 116B MATRICES AND NUMERICAL METHODS Ma HID REVIEW OF ANALYTIC GEOMETRY AND (3-2). Finite differences, interpolation, numerical differenti- CALCULUS (5-0). Cartesian coordinates; analytical geom- ation and integration; numerical solution of polynomial etry of straight line and second degree curves. Trigonometry. equations; numerical methods for initial value and boundary Concepts of function, limit and continuity. Differential and value problems involving ordinary and partial differential integral calculus. Functions of several variables. Algebra equations; solution of systems of linear algebraic equations; and the theory of equations. Inequalities. PREREQUISITE: latent roots and characteristic vectors of matrices: numeri- Previous course in analytic geometry and calculus. cal methods for inversion of matrices. PREREQUISITES: Ma 113B, or Ma 183B, or Ma 245B, or Ma 246B. Ma 146B NUMERICAL ANALYSIS AND DIGITAL COMPUTERS (3-0). Finite differences. Interpolation and Ma 120C VECTORS AND MATRICES WITH GEOMET- function representation. Difference equations. Numerical in- RICAL APPLICATIONS (3-1). Algebra of complex num- tegration. Algebraic and transcendental equations. Matrix bers. Vector algebra. Points, lines and planes in vector and manipulation: linear simultaneous algebraic equations, la- scalar notation. Surfaces and space curves. Matrices, de- tent roots and vectors of matrices. (Computer methods will terminants, linear systems and linear dependence. Labora- be emphasized throughout.) PREREQUISITE: Ma HOB. tory periods devoted to a review of essential topics in algebra, trignometry and plane analytic geometry. PRE- Ma 150C VECTORS AND MATRICES WITH GEOMET- of REQUISITE: A course in plane analytic geometry. RICAL APPLICATIONS (4-1). Algebra complex numbers. Vector algebra. Points, lines and planes in scalar and Ma 125B NUMERICAL METHODS FOR DIGITAL vector notation. Surfaces and space curves. Frenet-Serret COMPUTERS (2-2). Numerical solution of systems of lin- formulae. Directional derivatives, gradient and curl. De- ear algebraic equations, polynomial equations, and systems terminants, matrices, linear systems and linear dependence. of non-linear algebraic equations; finite differences, numeri- Laboratory periods devoted to a review of essential topics

cal interpolation, differentiation, integration; numerical in algebra, trigonometry and plane analytic geometry. methods for solving initial value and boundary value prob- PREREQUISITE: A course in plane analytic geometry. lems involving ordinary and partial differential equations. (4-1). Review PREREQUISITE: Ma 113B or Ma 183B. or Ma 245B or Ma 151C DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS coordinates and change Ma 246B. of calculus. Partial derivatives. Polar of variables. Elements of differential equations; first order; Ma 126B NUMERICAL METHODS FOR DIGITAL linear, total; systems of linear equations. PREREQUISITE: COMPUTERS (3-2). Lagrangian polynomial approximations A course in differential and integral calculus. to real functions. Introduction to best polynomial approxi- AND LAPLACE mations in the sense of least squares. Minimax polynomial Ma 158B COMPLEX VARIABLES Cauchy's theorem approximations. Numerical methods for solving equations TRANSFORMS (4-0). Analytic functions. series, residues, contour and systems of equations. Difference calculus, numerical dif- and formula. Taylor and Laurent Laplace transform and ferentiation and integration. Selected numerical methods for integration, conformal mapping. The differential equations; inversion solving initial value and boundary value problems involving its use in solving ordinary differential equations. Stability ordinary and partial differential equations. The laboratory integral. Systems of linear periods include sample problems solved on hand-operated criteria. PREREQUISITES: Ma 120C and Ma 151C.

109 MATHEMATICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Ma 180C VECTORS, MATRICES & VECTOR SPACES NEERING MATHEMATICS (4-0). Taylor and Fourier ex- (3-1). Algebra of complex numbers. Vector algebra. Points, pansions. Differential equations, including series solutions. lines and planes in scalar and vector notation. Surfaces and Bessel and Legendre functions with applications to solu- space curves. Matrices, determinants and systems of linear tions of partial differential equations. PREREQUISITE: equations and linear inequalities. Abstract vector spaces. Consent of instructor. Laboratory periods devoted to a review of essential topics Ma 232D CALCULUS REVIEW (5-0). A review of se- in algebra, trigonometry and analytic geometry. PREREQ- lected topics in the calculus of one variable including the QUISITE: A course in plane analytic geometry. solution of linear differential equations. PREREQUISITE: Ma 181D PARTIAL DERIVATIVES AND MULTIPLE A previous course in calculus. INTEGRALS (4-1). Review of elementary calculus. Hyper- Ma 240C ELEMENTARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS bolic functions. Infinite series. Partial and total derivatives. (2-0). Elements of differential equations including basic Directional derivatives and and gradients and their physical types of first order equations and linear equations of all interpretation. Jacobians. Leibnitz's Theorem for differenti- orders with constant coefficients. Systems of linear equa- ating integrals. Line integrals. Double and triple integrals. tions. PREREQUISITE: Ma 230D (may be taken concur- PREREQUISITES: A course in differential and integral rently). calculus and Ma 120C to be taken concurrently. Ma 241C ELEMENTARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Ma 182C DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND VECTOR (3-0). A longer version of Ma 240C including more em- ANALYSIS (5-0). Differential equations. Series solutions of phasis on first order equations. PREREQUISITE: Ma 230D ordinary differential equations. Systems of differential equa- (may be taken concurrently). tions, including matrix methods. Vector differentiation. Vec- tor integral relations. PREREQUISITE: Ma 181D. Ma 244C ELEMENTARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND INFINITE SERIES (4-0). An abbreviated version of Ma 183B FOURIER SERIES AND COMPLEX VARIA- Ma 073C not including series solution of differential equa- BLES (4-0). Expansion of functions. Fourier series and tions. PREREQUISITE: Ma 230D. solution of partial differential equations. Algebra of complex numbers. Analytic functions of a complex variable, and Ma 245B PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (3-0). the elementary transcendental functions. Complex integra- Solution of boundary value problems by separation of vari- tion. Residues. PREREQUISITE: Ma 182C. ables; Sturm-Liouville theory; Fourier Bessel series solution. PREREQUISITES: Ma 251C and Ma 240C. Ma 193C SET THEORY AND INTEGRATION (2-0). Ma 246B PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (4-0). Set theoretic concepts. Basic concepts in the theories of Series solution of linear differential equations, generalized Riemann, Lebesgue, and Stieltjes integrals with emphasis orthogonal functions; solution of boundary value problems on applications to probability theory. PREREQUISITE: by separation of variables; Sturm-Liouville theory; Fourier- Ma 181D or the equivalent. Bessel series solutions. PREREQUISITE: Ma 240C. Ma 196B MATRIX THEORY (3-0). Advanced topics in Ma 248B DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS FOR OPTI- matrix theory; characteristic equation of a matrix; Cayley- MUM CONTROL (3-0). Methods in differential equations Hamilton and Sylvester theorems; positive definite and for calculating differentials based on the adjoint system of semidefinite quadratic forms; canonical forms of a matrix differential equations. Applications to problems in optimum and reduction of a matrix to a canonical form. PREREQ- control, particularly trajectories and minimum time prob- UISITE: Ma 120C or Ma 180C, or equivalent. lems. Numerical methods for determining and correcting Ma 220C PARTICLE DYNAMICS (2-2). Review of vec- trajectories, particularly optimum trajectories, on a digital tor algebra and statics. Moment of a force about a point computer. PREREQUISITES: Ma 240C or equivalent, and and about an axis. Axial and polar vectors. Reduction of a Ma 42 1C or consent of Instructor. general force system and Poinsot's central axis. Centroids. Ma 251C ELEMENTARY INFINITE SERIES (3-0). Se- Vector kinematics referred to a rotating coordinate frame. quences, series, convergence tests, Taylor's series, Fourier The Coriolis theorem and application to curvilinear coordi- series, series solution of linear differential equations. Bessel nates. Potential energy and stability. Particle dynamics. and Legendre functions. PREREQUISITES: Ma 230D and

PREREQUISITE : A previous course in mechanics. Ma 240C.

Ma 230D CALCULUS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES (4-0). Ma 254C TAYLOR AND FOURIER SERIES (3-0). Se- Review calculus of one variable. Taylor series, Leibnitz and quences and series; power series; Taylor series expansions: L'Hospitals rules. Differential calculus of functions of sev- uniform convergence; Fourier series. PREREQUISITE: Ma eral variables, directional derivatives, gradient vectors, geom- 230D. etry of tangent planes to surfaces. Double and triple integration in rectangular coordinates. PREREQUISITE: A pre- Ma 255C DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND SERIES differential equations; lin- vious course in calculus and Ma 120C or Ma 150C (may be SOLUTIONS (3-0). First order

taken concurrently). ear equations with constant coefficients ; systems of linear equations; series solutions of differential equations; sepa- Ma 231C REVIEW OF SELECTED TOPICS OF ENGI- ration and solution of boundary value problem equations no NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MATHEMATICS

in terms of Fourier series. Legendre and Bessel functions. solution to simultaneous differential equations of any order. PREREQUISITE: Ma 254C (may be taken concurrently). Solution of the Legendre, Bessel and Hermite equations. PREREQUISITE: Ma 240C or equivalent. Ma 260C VECTOR ANALYSIS (3-0). Vector differential and integral calculus including differential geometry of Ma 405C DIGITAL COMPUTERS AND BUSINESS AP- lines and surfaces, line and surface integrals, change of PLICATIONS (4-0). Description of a general purpose variable formulas and curvilinear coordinates. PREREQ- digital computer. Programming fundamentals. Specific pro- UISITES: Ma 120C and Ma 230D. gramming problems from the managerial area. A current survey Ma 261B VECTOR MECHANICS (5-0). Line, surface of business applications. TEXT: McCracken, A and volume integrals. Green's divergence, and Stokes' the- Guide to Fortran Programming. PREREQUISITE: None. orems. Vector differential calculus, and the vector differen- Ma 411C DIGITAL COMPUTERS AND MILITARY tial operators in rectangular and curvilinear coordinates. APPLICATIONS (4-0). Description of a general purpose The integral theorems in vector form. The vector equations digital computer. Programming fundamentals. The use of of motion. Irrotational. solenoidal and linear vector fields subroutines, assembly routines and compilers in program- with applications to fluid mechanics in meteorology. Total ming. Applications such as war gaming, simulation of sys- differential equation and systems of total differential equa- tems, logistics and data processing, demonstrations on a tions. PREREQUISITES: Ma 240C and Ma 251C. computer. PREREQUISITE: Ma 073C or equivalent. Ma 262B VECTOR ANALYSIS (4-0). A longer version Ma 412C (3-2). of Ma 260C including a discussion of the divergence and SMALL SCALE DIGITAL COMPUTERS Octal binary Description of general curl operators in fluid flow from the Lagrange viewpoint, and number systems. characteristics and and applications of vector analysis to boundary value prob- purpose digital computers. Operating fundamentals of for the Pro- lems in fluid and heat flow. PREREQUISITES: Ma 120C programming CDC-160A. and Ma 230D. gramming with meteorological applications, and operation of the 160. Course designed for meteorology students who Ma 270C COMPLEX VARIABLES (3-0). Analytic func- may be expected to program for, and operate similar equip- tions: series expansion; integration formulas: residue the- ment upon completion of study. PREREQUISITE: PS 381C. ory. PREREQUISITES: Ma 120C, Ma 230D.

Ma 271C COMPLEX VARIABLES (4-0). A longer ver- Ma 416C NUMERICAL METHODS AND FORTRAN solutions of systems of sion of Ma 270C including more emphasis on Contour inte- PROGRAMMING (4-1). Numerical differences: gration as required for transform theory. PREREQUI- linear and nonlinear algebraic equations: finite SITES: Ma 120C, Ma 230D. numerical interpolation, differentiation: integration: numerical methods of solving initial value and boundary value ver- Ma 272C COMPLEX VARIABLES (4-0). A longer problems. The first half of course is devoted to learning the sion of Ma 270C including a treatment of potential flow Fortran language and writing programs of increasing com- trans- around a cylinder with circulation, and Joukowski plexity. In the last half of the course attention is focused formation of a circle into an airfoil with application of mainly on the numerical methods, making use of already the Blasius lift and moment formulas. PREREQUISITE: existing library subroutines to supplement theory with ex- Ma 230D. amples. PREREQUISITE: Calculus. Differential Equations.

Ma 280B LAPLACE TRANSFORMATIONS (2-0). Defi- Ma 420E COMPUTER OPERATION (1-1). (For 5 wks.). nitions and existence conditions; applications to systems This is a non-credit course designed for students whose involving linear differences, differential and integral equa- course or thesis work requires a knowledge of computer tions; inversion integral. PREREQUISITES: Ma 240C and operation. In a combination of lecture and laboratory pe- Ma 270C (the latter may be taken concurrently). riods details of operation of computer and peripheral equip- Ma 282B LAPLACE TRANSFORMS (3-0). A longer ver- ment are covered as well as input-output techniques and sion of Ma 280B with more emphasis on the solution of power-on power-off procedures. PREREQUISITE: Ma 412C boundary value problems. PREREQUISITE: A course in or equivalent. differential equations and in complex variables (the latter may be taken concurrently). Ma 421C INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL COMPUTERS (4-1). Octal and binary number systems. Description of Ma 401B ANALOG COMPUTERS (4-0). Elementary an- general purpose digital computer. Operating characteristics alog devices which may be used to perform addition, mul- and fundamentals of programming. Programming, using tiplication, vector resolution, function generation, integra- assembly routines and compilers. Engineering applications tion, etc. Combinations of such devices for solution of dif- of digital computers. PREREQUISITE: None. ferential equations, systems of linear equations, algebraic equations, harmonic analysis, etc. Gimbal solvers. Digital Ma 423B ADVANCED DIGITAL COMPUTER PRO- differential analyzers. PREREQUISITE: Ma 240C or equiv- GRAMMING (4-0). Theory and design of sub-routines, as- alent. sembly routines and compilers. Symbol manipulation. Prob- Ma 402B ANALOG COMPUTERS (2-0). Theory of D.C. lem oriented languages and control languages. PREREQ- Amplifiers, servos, plotters and function multipliers. Analog UISITE: Ma 421C.

Ill MATHEMATICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Ma 426B ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS (4-1). ordinary differential equations as well as boundary and Representations of functions and/or data by Chebyshev ap- initial value problems for partial differential equations of proximation, Continued Fractions, Economization of Series, mathematical physics are introduced. Operational calculus. Quadrature Methods and Multivariate Interpolation by PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. least squares. Matrices and Linear Systems. Methods for Ma 542B APPLIED MATHEMATICS (3-0). A continu- Numerical Quadrature. Multiple Quadrature by Monte ation of Ma 541B. The material introduced in Ma 541B is Carlo Methods. Numerical Solution of Differential Equa- studied more extensively. PREREQUISITE: Ma 541B. tions. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor.

Ma 427C PROGRAMMING I — INTRODUCTION (3-1). Ma 546B SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (3-0). Special functions General description of data processing equipment. History of mathematical physics. Orthogonal polynomials. Legendrc and development of computing devices. Characteristics of functions. Bessel functions. Mathieu functions. Spherical a general-purpose digital computer and its operation. Pro- harmonics. Recursion formulas, Rodrigues' formulas. Gen- gramming in a procedure-oriented language, e.g., FOR- erating functions. Addition theorems. Relationship with TRAN, COBOL or ALGOL. PREREQUISITE: None. hypergeometric differential equation. Expansion and ortho- gonality properties. PREREQUISITES: Consent of In- Ma 428B PROGRAMMING Ha (3-1). Number systems. structor. Programming in machine language. Assembly routines. solving program planning techniques. Use of Problem and Ma 548B PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (3-0). subroutines, program testing aids and monitor systems. The Cauchy problem for partial differential operators. Input and output considerations. PREREQUISITE: Ma Cauchy-Kowalewsky Theorems. Methods of characteristics. 427C or consent of instructor. Well-posed problems for elliptic, hyperbolic and parabolic partial differential equations. PREREQUISITE: Consent Ma 429A PROGRAMMING lib (4-0). Programming lan- of Instructor. guages. Systems programming. Theory and construction of assembly and compiler programs. Executive routines and Ma 549B FOURIER BESSEL EXPANSIONS AND CAL- operating systems for modern computer systems. PREREQ- CULUS OF VARIATIONS (2-0). Partial differential equa- UISITE: Ma 428B or equivalent. tions, separation of variables, Sturm-Liouville systems, Fourier Bessel expansions, orthogonal functions, Bessel's Ma 501C THEORY OF NUMBERS (3-0). Divisibility, inequality. Euler equations, Hamilton's principle, applica- congruences, quadratic reciprocity, diophantine equations, tion to physics. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. continued fractions, partitions. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. Ma 555A INTEGRAL EQUATIONS (3-0). Fredholm integral equations of the first and second kinds. The Fredholm Ma 502B DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY (3-0). Curves alternative. Volterra equations. Neumann series. Integral and surfaces. Parametric representation. Curvature. Prin- equations with symmetric kernels. Hilbert-Schmidt theory. cipal normal. Binomial. Torsion. The Frenet formula. Trans- Singular equations. Applications. PREREQUISITE: Con- formations of coordinates. Covariant and contravariant vec- sent of Instructor. tors. Symmetric and skew-symmetric tensors. Christoffel symbols. Reimannian tensor. Gaussian curvature Goedesics. Ma 571B THEORY OF FUNCTIONS OF A COMPLEX PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. VARIABLE (3-0). Selected topics from the theory of functions of a real variable. Complex functions and analytic Ma 503B FOUNDATION OF MATHEMATICS (3-0). functions. Integration in the complex plane. Series of com- Fundamental concepts of mathematics with some emphasis plex functions. Power series. Laurent series. PREREQUI- on the axiomatic method including consistency, complete- SITE: Consent of Instructor. ness and independence of axioms in an axiom system. Ma 572B THEORY OF FUNCTIONS OF A COMPLEX PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. VARIABLE (3-0). Singularities of complex functions. Res-

Ma 504C CALCULUS OF FINITE DIFFERENCES (3-0). idues and contour integration. Zeros of analytic functions, analytic Finite differences, factorial polynomials, sums, infinite prod- factors of and infinite product representations for ucts, Bernoulli numbers and polynomials, linear difference functions. Maximum modulus theorems for analytic and equations. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. harmonic functions. Conformal mapping. PREREQUISITE: Ma 571B or consent of Instructor. Ma 524A BOOLEAN ALGEBRA (3-0). A treatment of Ma 573A THEORY OF FUNCTIONS OF A COMPLEX Boolean algebra as an abstract mathematical system. The VARIABLE (3-0). Special functions of a complex variable. interrelationships between Boolean algebra, set theory and Analytic theory of differential equations. PREREQUISITE: logic are stressed through the algebra of sets and the state- Ma 572B or consent or Instructor. ment calculus. Stone representation theorem for a Boolean Ma 576A LAPLACE TRANSFORMATIONS (3-0). The- algebra is covered in detail. PREREQUISITE: Ma 705B of the Laplace transform with particular reference to or equivalent. ory its properties as a function of a complex variable. Applica- Ma 541B APPLIED MATHEMATICS (3-0). Green's tions of the transform to difference, differential, integral function techniques for solving Sturm-Liouville problems for equations of convolution type and boundary value problems.

112 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MATHEMATICS

Sturm-Liouville systems. PREREQUISITE: Ma 573A or structors; usually content will be special topics from the consent of Instructor. fields of functional analysis and partial differential equations. Number of hours subject to arrangement. PREREQ- Ma 701R SEMINAR IN ANALYSIS (2-0). Topics in an- UISITE: Consent of Instructor. alysis. Content of the course varies. Students will be allowed the than one time. credit for taking course more PREREQ- Ma 842A DATA PROCESSING SEMINAR (3-0). A work- UISITE: Consent of Instructor. ing seminar on advanced topics in informaiton processing. The selection of topics will depend on the instructor and Ma 705B SET THEORY (3-0). Elementary logic and the clas-- interest. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. methods of proof in mathematics; properties of sets and operations with sets: relations and function from a set- theoretic point of view: equivalence of sets and their cardi- MECHANICS nality: infinite sets and their classification by cardinal num- Mc 101D ENGINEERING MECHANICS I (2-2). Review bers. PREREQUISITE: Differential and integral calculus of statics, free-body diagrams: distributed forces: centroids; or consent of Instructor. moments and products of inertia of areas: hydrostatics: principles Ma 709A FUNCTIONS OF REAL VARIABLES (3-0). friction, general of dynamics: dimensional analy- Review of set theory and real numbers. Topological and sis; kinematics of a particle; relative and absolute time metric spaces, convergence of directed functions, continuity rate of change of a vector: Coriolis acceleration. PREREQ- and semicontinuity. Functions of bounded variation, abso- QUISITES: Ma 120C or Ma 150C (may be taken con lutely continuous functions, differentials. PREREQUISITE: currently). Ma 109B. Mc 102D ENGINEERING MECHANICS II (2-2). Dy Ma 710A FUNCTIONS OF REAL VARIABLES (3-0). namics of a particle; impulse and momentum; work and Continuation of Ma 709. Lebesque-Stieltjes integrals, meas- energy; potential; conservation of energy; vibrating sys- ure and measurable function. Radon-Nikodym theorem, tems, free and forced, with and without damping: impact; function spaces, Lp spaces. PREREQUISITE: Ma 709A. dynamics of rigid bodies; moments and products of inertia: principal axes of inertia; the gyroscope. PREREQUISITE: Ma 711 A INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTIONAL ANAL- Mc 101D. YSIS (3-0). Linear spaces and functionals. Banach and Hilbert spaces. Weak and weak* topologies, completely Mc 11 1C VECTOR MECHANICS I (4-0). Review of vec- continuous operators, spectral theorems. PREREQUISITE: tor algebra and statics. Reduction of a general force system Consent of Instructor. and Poinsot's central axis. Axial and polar vectors. Cen- troids. Vector kinematics referred to a rotating coordinate

Ma 740A CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS (3-0). Bliss's frame. The Coriolis theorem and its application to curvil- differential methods, adjoint differential equations. Euler inear coordinates. Potential energy and stability. Particle equations, maximum principle. Weirstrass and Legendre dynamics. Spherical pendulum. PREREQUISITE: A pre- conditions. Perturbation techniques, numerical procedures vious course in mechanics. for determining solutions, and application to control prob- Mc I12C VECTOR MECHANICS II (4-0). Vector dynam- lems. PREREQUISITES: Ma 240C or the equivalent and ics of rigid bodies. The instantaneous screw axis. Euler Ma 421C or consent of Instructor. angles. Body and space centrodes. Ellipsoid of inertia and principal axes. Poinsot's force free motion and the forced Ma 751B TENSOR ANALYSIS I (3-0). The basic concepts of differential geometry. Definition of a tensor. Physi- precession of a gyro, with application to the earth. Dynami- variable. Elementary cal interpretations. The metric tensor. Covariant differentia- cal stability of a gyro by complex 111C. tion. Geodesies. PREREQUISITES: Ma 120C. Ma 181D. theory of missile stability. PREREQUISITE: Mc Ma 182C or the equivalent. Mc 201B METHODS IN DYNAMICS (2-2). The prin- linear momentum, angular momentum, work and Ma 752A TENSOR ANALYSIS II (3-0). A continuation ciples of conservation of energy, virtual of Ma 751B. Introduction to special relativity theory, with energy, power and energy, emphasis upon axiomatic and philosophical foundations. work, and d'Alembert are developed and discussed in detail. Formulation of the laws of mechanics and electromagnetism This work is followed by a development and interpretation motion. Application of these in relativistic form. PREREQUISITE: Ma 751B and a of Lagrange's equations of the differential equations of sound background in classical mechanics and electromag- various principles to obtain netism. motion of dynamical systems is given particular attention. PREREQUISITE: Mc 102D. Ma 753A TENSOR ANALYSIS III (3-0). A continuation (3-2). Kinematics of vibrations; of Ma 752A. Introduction to general relativity theory. Par- Mc 311C VIBRATIONS forced vibrations of systems with one degree of allel displacement and the curvature tensor. PREREQUI- free and SITE: Ma 752A. freedom; theory of vibration measuring instruments and of vibration insulation; systems with many degrees of freedom; Ma 801A SEMINAR IN ANALYSIS. Subject matter of normal modes of vibration; computation of fastest and slow- this seminar will in general be left to the discretion of in- est modes by matrix methods; vibrations of strings; beams,

113 ;

MATHEMATICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

shafts and membranes, Rayleigh's method; Stodola's meth- PS 311C INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY AND od; critical speeds; self-excited vibrations; effects of impact STATISTICS (4-1). An elementary treatment of probability on elastic structures. PREREQUISITES: Mc 102D and a with some statistical applications. Topics discussed are prob- course in beam deflection theory. ability models, discrete and continuous random variables, moment properties, testing statistical hypotheses, and statis- Mc 402B MECHANICS OF GYROSCOPIC INSTRU- tical estimation. PREREQUISITE: Ma 031D or equivalent. MENTS (3-0). Review of the vector kinematics and dynam- PS 321B PROBABILITY (4-2). Elements of set theory. ics involved in the angular motion of rigid bodies; steady, Foundations of Probability and basic rules of computation. free and forced precession and general motion of a gyro: Sample space, random variable, discrete and continuous dis- stability of a free gyro; the gyrocompass and gyropendu- tribution functions. The classical distribution functions. lum; gyro angular velocity indicator; the stable platform; Joint, marginal and conditional distribution functions. Char- Shuler tuning of inertial guidance instruments. PREREQ- acteristic functions. Limit theorems. Introduction to random UISITE: Mc 102D. processes. Applications to fields of interest of the class. Markov chains. PREREQUISITES: Ma 244C and Ma 271C Mc 403B KINEMATICS OF GUIDANCE (3-0). Kinemat- or the equivalent. ics and geometry of guidance and interception systems; special coordinates; inertial references frames; accelerom- PS 322A DECISION THEORY AND CLASSICAL STA- mis- eters; inertial guidance; Dovap; guidance of a ballistic TISTICS (3-2). Testing statistical hypotheses, point estima- adjoint sile and of an interceptor; perturbations and the tion, interval estimation, regression analysis. Decision theo- control: differential equations in guidance and optimum retic problem with specific attention given to minimax introductory orbit theory. PREREQUISITE: A course in strategies. Bayes strategies, and admissibility. PREREQUI- differential equations and Mc 102D. SITE: PS 321B and consent of Instructor.

Mc 404B MISSILE MECHANICS (3-0). A survey of PS 332B STATISTICS I (3-0). Introduction to probabil- ballistic missile dynamics including discussions of atmos- ity theory. Derivation and properties of principal frequency pheric structures; standard conditions; drag; stability de- functions of discrete and continuous random variables. Joint rivatives; equations of yawing, swerving and angular mo- distributions and introduction to regression and correlation. PREREQUISITE: Ma 230D or the equivalent. tion ; electronic digital integration of equations of motion effects of variations from standard conditions; rocket motor PS 333B STATISTICS II (2-2). A continuation of Ma thrust and torque; tricyclic motion; aeroballistic range 332B. Applications of probability in statistics. Derived dis- measurements of stability derivatives; contributions of aero- tributions. Estimators of parameters and their frequency dynamic jump and drift to dispersion; dynamic wind functions. Mathematical expectation. Introduction to sam- tunnel tests; dynamic stability. PREREQUISITE: A course pling theory. Applications in meteorology. PREREQUI- in dynamics. SITE: PS 332B or the equivalent.

Mc 405B ORBITAL MECHANICS (3-0). Review of ki- PS 351B PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS (4-2). Ele- nematics. Lagrange's equation of motion. The earth's gravi- ments of set theory. Foundations of probability and basic

tational field. Control force motion. The two body problem. rules of computation. Sample space, random variable, dis- The determination of orbits. The three body problem. Per- crete and continuous distribution functions. Bayes Theorem. turbations. PREREQUISITE: Mc 102D. The classical distribution functions. Expectations, propagation of error. Joint, Marginal, and conditional distribution Mc 406A INTRODUCTORY CONTROL AND GUID- functions, least squares. Limit theorems. Derivation of ANCE (4-0). Elements of orbits, orbit determination, gravi- Poisson process. Elements of hypothesis testing and estima- tational harmonics due to oblateness. Equation of motion of tion. PREREQUISITE: Ma 230D. a rocket; integration for thrust constant. Variational and PS 352B APPLIED ENGINEERING STATISTICS (2-2). adjoint equations in trajectory determination and optimi- Tests of hypothesis and estimation. Analysis of variance. zation; perturbations. Rendezvous and interception trajec- Statistical quality control, control charts. Sampling inspec- tories, impulse solutions, error correction. Closed form solution. Reliability theory and application. PREREQUISITE: tions for nearly circular orbits. Pitch, yaw, roll stabilization. PS 351B. Stable platform. Inertial guidance of airplanes and missiles. PREREQUISITE: Ph 153A. PS 362B APPLIED STATISTICS (3-1). Elements of statistical estimation and hypothesis testing. Regression analy- ysis, selected topics in quality assurance and sampling PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS inspection. Elementary topics in reliability theory and maintainability. PREREQUISITE: PS 351B. PS 310C ELEMENTARY PROBABILITY AND STATIS- TICS (3-1). An introduction to probability and statistics. PS 381C ELEMENTARY PROBABILITY AND STATIS- Methods of data summary. Tests of hypotheses and estima- TICS (4-2). Elements of the theory of probability. The tion. This course is limited to students in the BA/BS Pro- classical probability distributions. Elements of statistical in- gram. PREREQUISITE: A previous course in college al- ference with applications in the field of the group. PRE- gebra. REQUISITE: Ma 181D or equivalent.

114 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING ENGINEERING

a. Entrance Requirements. Prior to entering an approved Robert Eugene Newton, Professor of Mechanical Engi- curriculum, a student must have successfully completed col- neering; Chairman (1951)*; B.S. in M.E., Washington lege courses as follows: Mathematics through integral cal- Univ., 1938; M.S., 1939; Ph.D., Univ. of Michigan, 1951. culus, one year of chemistry, and one year of physics. In addition, through completed course work or examination, Dennis Kavanauch. Professor Emeritus of Mechanical En- the student must demonstrate a knowledge of the funda-

gineering (1926) ; B.S.. Lehigh Univ., 1914. mentals of engineering graphics.

b. Mechanical Engineering Courses. Minimum credit of John Edison Brock, Professor of Mechanical Engineering 65 term hours in mechanical engineering courses is required. (1954); B.S.M.E., Purdue Univ., 1938; M.S.E., 1941; These must include the following minimum number of term Ph.D., Univ. of Minnesota, 1950. hours in the indicated areas. The minimum acceptable

quality point ratio in these courses is 1.0. Gilles Cantin, Associate Professor of Mechanical En- gineering (1960); B.A.Sc, Ecole Polytechnique (Mon- Area Minimum Term Hours treal). 1950; M.Sc. Stanford Univ., 1960. Energy Conversion (Includes thermodynamics, gas dynamics, heat trans- 18 combustion engines. Virgil Morinc Faires, Professor of Mechanical Engineer- fer, internal Must include a course in power ing (1958); B.S. in M.E., Univ. of Colorado, 1922: M.S., plants.) 1925; M.E.. 1926.

Applied Mechanics (Includes static*.

Ernest Kenneth Gatcombe, Professor of Mechanical En- dynamics, fluid mechanics, and vi- 15 gineering (1946): B.S., Univ. of Maine. 1931; M.S.. brations.) Purdue Univ., 1939: Ph.D.. Cornell Univ.. 1944. Mechanics of Solids and Machine De- sign (Includes kinematics of ma- 15 Cecil Dudley Gregg King, Associate Professor of Mechan- chinery. Must include a course in

ical Engineering (1952) ; B.E., Yale Univ., 1943; M.S. in machine design.) M.E., Univ. of California (Berkeley), 1952.

c. Other Specific Coverage. The following minimum re-

Paul James Marto, Lieutenant, U.S. Naval Reserve; As- quirements must be met in each of the indicated disciplines.

sistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering (1965) : MATHEMATICS — One course in each of the following B.S., Univ. of Notre Dame, 1960; M.S. in Nuc. Sci., subjects: vector algebra, differential equations, and digital Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1962; Sc.D.. 1965. computers.

Roy Walters Prowell, Professor of Mechanical Engineer- ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING— 15 term hours.

ing (1946): B.S. in I.E., Lehigh Univ., 1936; M.S. in METALLURGY — 6 term hours. M.E.. Univ. of Pittsburgh, 1943.

Some of these requirements may, with the consent of the Paul Francis Pucci, Associate Professor of Mechanical department, be met by transfer credit.

Engineering (1956); B.S. in M.E., Purdue Univ., 1949: d. Upper Division Credit. Minimum credit of 105 term

M.S. in M.E., 1950: Ph.D., Stanford Univ. 1955. hours in upper division or higher level courses is required.

e. Department Approval. Any program leading to award Harold Marshall Wright, Professor of Mechanical Engi- of this degree must be approved by the department at least neering (1945) ; B.Sc. in M.E., North Carolina State Col- 3 terms before completion. In general, approved programs lege, 1930; M.M.E.. Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, 1931. will require more than the minimum degree requirements in order to conform to the needs and objectives of the U.S.

*The year of joining the Postgraduate School faculty is indi- Navy. cated in parenthesis.

DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREES MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MECHANICAL IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING ENGINEERING

Following is a statement of departmental minimum re- a. Undergraduate Preparation. A candidate shall have quirements for degrees in Mechanical Engineering. It is satisfied the requirements for the degree Bachelor of Science noted that candidates for these degrees must also satisfy in Mechanical Engineering. Credit requirements in suc- general degree requirements as determined by the Academic ceeding paragraphs must be met by courses in addition to

Council. those used to satisfy this requirement.

115 ;

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL b. Mechanical Engineering Courses. Minimum credit fluid mechanics and the thermodynamics of compressible of 20 term hours in A level courses in mechanical engineer- flow, turbine blading, elements of heat transfer. Comple- ing is required. mentary laboratory experiments. TEXT: Faires, Thermo- dynamics. PREREQUISITE: ME 132C. c. Courses in Other Departments. A minimum of 12 term hours of graduate credit must be earned outside the ME 211B THERMODYNAMICS OF COMPRESSIBLE major department. FLOW. (3-0). The thermodynamic and dynamic fundamentals of compressible fluid flow. One-dimensional analyses d. A Level Courses. At least 24 term hours of A level including the effects of area change, friction, and heat courses must be included in the program. Courses used to transfer. TEXT: Shapiro, Thermodynamics and Dynamics meet the requirement of paragraph b may also be counted of Compressible Fluid Flow, Vol. I. PREREQUISITES: to meet this requirement. ME 112C, ME 411C, and Ma 113B. e. Thesis. Completion of a thesis and its acceptance by ME 212A ADVANCED THERMODYNAMICS (3-0). the department are required. For this a maximum of 8 Mathematical development of property relations and their term hours of graduate credit may be allowed toward use with experimental data : energy conversion systems satisfaction of the school requirement for 48 term hours. employing thermoelectricity, thermionics, MHD, photovol- The thesis credit may not be used to satisfy any of the taic effect, and fuel cells. TEXTS: Faires, Thermodynamics requirements of paragraphs b and d. Chang, Energy Conversion. PREREQUISITES: ME 112C f. Department Approval. Any program leading to award and Ma 113B. of this degree must be approved by the department at least ME 215B MARINE PROPULSION SYSTEMS I (2-4). 3 terms before completion. In general, approved programs Preliminary planning of marine power plants. Estimation will require more than the minimum degree requirements of hull, main engine and auxiliary power requirements, in order to conform to the needs and objectives of the inter-relationship of components, heat balances and flow U.S. Navy. diagrams, computation of ship and plant performance in-

dices. TEXTS: Seward, Marine Engineering, Vols. I and MECHANICAL ENGINEERING II; Church, Steam Turbines, 3rd Ed. PREREQUISITE: ME 211B. ME 111C ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS I (5-0). The laws and processes of transforming energy from one ME 216B MARINE PROPULSION SYSTEMS II (2-4). form to another; first law analysis; second law analysis and This course is a continuation of ME 215B, carries to com- cycle analysis for reversible processes; transient flow; ir- pletion the project work of the latter, with additional proj- reversible processes and available energy. Applications to ect work in preliminary investigation of main propulsion ideal gas cases; internal combustion engines, gas turbines, equipment and other major equipment items. TEXTS: turbojets, rockets. TEXT: Faires, Thermodynamics. PRE- Seward, Marine Engineering, Vols. I and II; Church, Steam REQUISITE: Ma 230D. Turbines, 3rd Ed. PREREQUISITE: ME 215B.

ME 112C ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS II (5-0). 217B INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES (3-2). Continuation of ME 111C. Applications of thermodynamic ME Theoretical and real-fuel cycles, combustion processes for principles to marine steam power plants; reversed cycles; spark-ignition and compression-ignition engines. Combus- gas-vapor mixtures; combustion with dissociation prob- tion chambers, carburetion and fuel-injection phenomena. lems. TEXT: Faires, Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITE: ME 111C. Factors affecting engine performance and design. TEXT: Taylor and Taylor, Internal Combustion Engines. PRE- ME 132C ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS II (4-2). REQUISITE: ME 112C. Continuation of ME 111C. Applications of thermodynamic principles to marine power plant equipment, steam power ME 221C GASDYNAMICS AND HEAT TRANSFER plants and cycles, refrigeration and heat-pump systems, (4-2). Fundamentals of one-dimensional compressible fluid gas-vapor mixtures. Methods of handling imperfect gases. flow including effects of area change, friction, and heat Complementary laboratory experiments. TEXT: Faires, addition. Fundamentals of conduction, convection, and ra- Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITE: ME 111C. diation heat transfer, including heat exchanger analysis. TEXT: Giedt, Principles oj Engineering Heat Transfer. ME 142C THERMODYNAMICS (4-0). Survey of engi- PREREQUISITES: ME 112C and ME 411C. neering thermodynamics with emphasis on the application of thermodynamic principles to marine nuclear power ME 222C THERMODYNAMICS LABORATORY (1-4). plants. Review of first and second laws of thermodynamics, Laboratory experiments applying thermodynamic principles and properties of two phase fluids. Power plant cycles. to a gas turbine engine, refrigeration plant, air compressor, Steam turbines. Elementary fluid mechanics and heat trans- compressible flow metering and heat transfer. TEXT: fer. TEXT: Faires, Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITE: Faires, Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITES: ME 112C and PH 530C. ME 411C.

ME 210C APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS (3-2). Con- ME 223B MARINE POWER PLANT ANALYSIS (2-4). tinuation of the application of thermodynamic principles, Preliminary planning of marine power plants. Estimation

116 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

of hull, main engine and auxiliary power requirements, analysis. Dimensional analysis and similitude. Elements of interrelationship of components, heat balances and flow hydrodynamic lubrication. Analysis of fluid machinery and diagrams, computation of ship and plant performance in- fluid systems. Laboratory experiments and problem work. dices, preliminary investigation of major equipment items. TEXT: Streeter, Fluid Mechanics. PREREQUISITES: Ma TEXTS: Seward, Marine Engineering, Vols. I and II; 230D and ME 502C. Church, Steam Turbines. 3rd Ed. PREREQUISITE: ME 221C or equivalent. ME 412A ADVANCED MECHANICS OF FLUIDS (4-2). Potential flow theory. Linearized compressible flow. Oblique ME 230B MARINE POWER PLANT ANALYSIS (2-4). shock relations. Viscous flow and boundary layer theory. Preliminary planning of ship propulsion plants. Estimation TEXTS: Shapiro, Thermodynamics and Dynamics of Com- of hull, main engine and auxiliary power requirements, pressible Flow. Vols I and II; Li and Lam, Principles of interrelationship of components, heat balances, computa- Fluid Mechanics. PREREQUISITES: ME 211B, ME 411C tion of ship and plant performance indices, preliminary and Ma 113B. investigation of some major equipment items. PREREQUI- SITE: ME 211B or equivalent. ME 501C MECHANICS I (4-0). Laws of statics. Force systems, equilibrium, simple structures, distributed forces, ME 240B NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS (4-0). Survey of friction, virtual work. Basic concepts of kinematics. TEXT: nuclear power engineering. The reactor as a power source Beer and Johnston. Vector Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: as affected by technical feasibility and economics. Ele- Ma 120C (may be concurrent). mentary nuclear reactor physics. Engineering considerations in core design, including problems of core design, power ME 502C MECHANICS II (4-0). Kinematics, Newton's removal and utilization and shielding. Discussion of reactor laws, kinetics of particles. Work and energy, impulse and types. TEXT: King, Nuclear Power Systems. PREREQUI- momentum. Moment of inertia of mass. Kinetics of rigid SITES: ME 210C or ME 221C; PH 621B. bodies. TEXT: Beer and Johnston, Vector Mechanics. PRE- REQUISITE: ME 501C and Ma 240C (may be concurrent). ME 241 A NUCLEAR PROPULSION SYSTEMS I (4-0). The first of a two-course sequence covering engineering ME 503A ADVANCED MECHANICS (4-0). Intensive aspects of nuclear power reactors. Reactor types, char- treatment of vector kinematics. Orbital mechanics including acteristics, and criteria for selection. Advanced heat trans- major perturbations for earth satellites. The inertia tensor fer, fluid mechanics and thermodynamics as applied to (dyadic). Rigid body kinetics. Jacobian elliptic functions. characteristic cycles. TEXT: Glasstone, Principles of Nu- Lagrangian methods. TEXTS: Yeh and Abrams, Mechan- clear Reactor Engineering. PREREQUISITES: ME 310B ics of Solids, Vol. I; Synge and Griffith. Principles of Me- and PH 652A. chanics. PREREQUISITE: ME 502C.

504B (4-0). Restatement ME 242A NUCLEAR PROPULSION SYSTEMS II (3-3). ME ADVANCED DYNAMICS different coor- Reactor shielding. Elementary thermal core and plant de- of laws of mechanics. Particle kinetics in rotation. Tensor of inertia. sign. Detailed study of existing reactor plants. TEXT: dinate systems. Effects of earth's of a rigid body. Gyroscopes. Numerical Glasstone, Principles of Nuclear Reactor Engineering. PRE- General motion REQUISITE: ME 241 A. procedures. Generalized coordinates and Lagrange's equations. TEXTS: Yeh and Abrams, Mechanics of Solids, Vol. Dynamics. ME 246B NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS (4-0). A general I; Timoshenko and Young, Advanced PREREQ- survey of nuclear reactor principles intended for other than UISITE: ME 502C. Mechanical Engineering students. Essential elements of ME 510C MECHANICS OF SOLIDS I (4-2). Stress, neutron physics, reactor physics, and reactor control. Ma- strain, Hooke's law, tension and compression, shearing terials for reactors, reactor shielding and reactor types. stresses, connections, thin vessels, torsion, statics of beams, Discussion of reactor thermal and hydraulic problems. stresses in beams, deflections of beams, combined loadings TEXT: King, Nuclear Power Systems. PREREQUISITE: and combined stresses, columns. Strain energy, impact, Ph 620B. simple indeterminate structures. Supporting laboratory ME 310B HEAT TRANSFER (4-2). The fundamentals work. TEXT: Timoshenko and Young, Elements of Strength of heat transfer mechanisms: one- and two-dimensional con- of Materials. PREREQUISITES: Ma 230D and ME 501C. duction, free and forced convection, condensation, boiling, II (5-0). Further thermal radiation, transient and periodic systems, and heat ME 511A MECHANICS OF SOLIDS of statically indeterminate structures, beam exchanger analysis. Use of the thermal circuit, analog, nu- elastic analysis unsymmetrical bending, shear cen- merical and graphical techniques. TEXT: Holman, Heat columns, curved beams, plates and shells, thick- Transfer. PREREQUISITES: ME 112C, ME 412A, and ter, beams on elastic foundations, thermal Ma 113B. walled cylinders, rotating discs, and elementary stresses. TEXTS: Timoshenko, Strength of Materials, Vols. 41 (4-2). Mechanical ME 1C MECHANICS OF FLUIDS I and II. PREREQUISITES: ME 510C and Ma 240C. properties of fluids, hydrostatics, buoyancy and stability analysis. Energy aspects of ideal and real fluid flow, flow ME 512A MECHANICS OF SOLIDS III (4-0). Elements metering and control. Impulse-momentum principles and of theory of elasticity. Stress tensor and theories of failure.

117 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Torsion of non-circular sections. Plastic analysis. Matrix response characteristics, brittle lacquer, photoelasticity, an- methods in structural analysis. Brittle fracture. TEXTS: alog methods, model theory. Complementary laboratory ex- Timoshenko, Strength of Materials, Vol. II; Timoshenko periments. TEXTS: Beckwith and Buck, Mechanical Meas- and Goodier, Theory of Elasticity; Parker, Brittle Behavior urements; Perry and Lissner, Strain Gage Primer; Lee, of Engineering Structures. PREREQUISITES: Ma 113B An Introduction to Experimental Stress Analysis. PREREQ- and ME 511A. UISITES: ME 512A and ME 712A.

ME 521C MECHANICS OF SOLIDS II (4-0). Statically ME 622B EXPERIMENTAL MECHANICS (2-2). Funda- indeterminate problems in bending, symmetrical beams of mentals of mechanical measurements, resistance strain variable cross section, beams of two materials, unsym- gages, transducers and instrumentation systems, dynamic metrical bending, thick-walled cylinders, rotating disks, response characteristics, photoelasticity. Complementary lab- curved bars, beams with combined axial and lateral loads. oratory experiments. TEXTS: Lee, An Introduction to Ex- TEXTS: Timoshenko, Strength of Materials, Vols. I and II. perimental Stress Analysis; Perry and Lissner. Strain Gage PREREQUISITES: ME 510C and Ma 240C. Primer. PREREQUISITES: ME 522B and ME 722B.

ME 522B MECHANICS OF SOLIDS III (4-0). Stress ME 711B MECHANICS OF MACHINERY (3-2). Alge- concentration, deformations beyond the elastic limit, me- braic analysis of the motion of cam followers; design of chanical properties of materials, strength theories, impact, cams. Velocities and acceleration of machine parts. Kine- fatigue, torsion of non-circular sections, thin plates and matics of gearing. Synthesis. Dynamic forces on machine shells. TEXT: Timoshenko, Strength of Materials, Vol. II. members. TEXT: Faires, Kinematics. PREREQUISITE: PREREQUISITE: ME 521C. ME 502C.

ME 540C MECHANICS OF SOLIDS (3-2). Fundamental ME 712A THEORY OF VIBRATIONS (3-2). The single concepts of the mechanics of solids. Stress, strain, Hooke's degree of freedom linear system. Multidegree linear sys- law, tension, compression, shearing stresses, bending stresses, tems. Emphasis is on matrix treatments, including the beam deflections, combined stresses, columns. Laboratory complex eigenvalue problem and approximations valid for experiments based on standard mechanical tests. TEXT: small damping. Transfer matrix methods. Introduction to Timoshenko and Young, Elements of Strength of Materials. nonlinear systems. Laboratory experiments to illustrate prin- PREREQUISITES: Ma 240C, PH 151C. ciples and introduce use of analog computer. TEXTS: Du- plicated notes and Den Hartog, Mechanical Vibrations. ME 547C STATICS AND STRENGTH OF MATERIALS PREREQUISITES: Ma 280B, ME 503A, and ME 511A. (5-0). Review of principles of statics, statics of determinate structures, pin-connected trusses. Stress, strain, Hooke's law, ME 7f3A ADVANCED DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY tension and compression, shearing stresses. Connections, (3-0). Special topics such as: shock and vibration mounts, thin vessels, torsion. Statics of beams, flexural stresses and torsional vibrations of crank shafts, vibration absorbers, deformations, numerical procedures. Simple indeterminate special bearings, gear lubrication, sleeve bearings with pul- structures. Combined loadings and combined stresses. Col- sating loads, oil film whirl, turbine blade vibrations, non- umns. TEXT: Timoshenko and Young, Elements of Strength linear vibration problems. Additional matrix methods. of Materials. PREREQUISITE: PH 151C. TEXTS: Den Hartog, Mechanical Vibrations; Karman and Biot, Mathematical Methods in Engineering. PREREQUI- ME 548B STRUCTURAL THEORY (5-0). Fundamental SITE: ME 712A. concepts. Stability and determinacy of simple structures. Energy methods. Matrix methods. Flexibility and stiffness ME 721C MECHANICS OF MACHINERY (3-2). Alge- methods. Dynamic disturbances. Systems with one, two and braic analysis of the motion of cam followers; design of many degrees of freedom. TEXTS: Gere and Weaver, An- cams. Velocity and acceleration of machine parts. Kine- alysis of Framed Structures; Rogers, Dynamics of Framed matics of gearing. Static and dynamic forces on machine Structures. PREREQUISITES: ME 547C and Ma 240C. members. TEXT: Faires, Kinematics. PREREQUISITE: ME 502C. ME 561C MECHANICS I (4-0). Principles of statics. Force systems. Two dimensional problems of equilibrium. ME 722B MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS (3-2). Free and Centroids and center of gravity. Friction. Basic kinematics. forced vibration of linear systems having one, two, and Basic kinetics. TEXT: Meriam, Mechanics. 2nd Ed. PRE- many degrees of freedom. Matrix methods. Vibration iso- REQUISITE: Ma 052D. lation and absorbers, torsional vibration, continuous sys-

ME 562C MECHANICS II (4-0). Work and energy. Im- tems. Laboratory experiments with prototype and simulated pulse and momentum. Rocket motion. Kepler's laws. Arti- systems. TEXTS: Den Hartog, Mechanical Vibrations; ficial satellites. Space vehicles. TEXT: Meriam, Mechanics, Thomson, Mechanical Vibrations. PREREQUISITES: Ma 2nd Ed., and Notes. PREREQUISITES: ME 561C and 073C, ME 504B, and ME 521C. Ma 053D. ME 811B MACHINE DESIGN I (3-2). First of a two-

ME 612A EXPERIMENTAL MECHANICS (3-2). Funda- course sequence. Studies of fits, tolerances, allowances, ma- mentals of mechanical measurements, resistance strain terial selection, stress concentration, bearings, shafting, gages, transducers and instrumentation systems, dynamic screws, belts, chains, brakes, clutches and cams. TEXT:

118 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Faires, Design of Machine Elements. PREREQUISITES: quire additional or exceptional treatment of material at ME 512A and ME 71 IB. the undergraduate level. PREREQUISITE: Permission of Department Chairman. ME 812B MACHINE DESIGN II (3-4). Continuation of ME 811B; springs, gearing, and advanced design problems. ME 902A ADVANCED STUDY IN MECHANICAL EN- Machine design projects of a comprehensive nature. TEXT: GINEERING (Credit to be arranged). Directed advanced Faires, Design of Machine Elements. PREREQUISITES: study in mechanical engineering on a subject of mutual ME 811B and ME 712A. interest to student and staff member. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. PREREQUISITE: Permission ME 820C MACHINE DESIGN (2-4). Studies of fits, tol- of Department Chairman. erances, allowances, stress concentration, material selection, bearings, gears, shafts, cams, springs, screws, brakes and ME 910E NAVAL ARCHITECTURE SEMINAR (3-0). Seminar discussions of various phases of naval clutches. TEXT: Faires, Design of Machine Elements. PRE- architecture. REQUISITES: ME 522B and ME 711B. Typical discussion subjects will be: drydocking, launching procedures and calculations, elements of ship resistance, ME 901C INDIVIDUAL STUDY IN MECHANICAL EN- action of ship propulsion devices, hull efficiencies and some GINEERING (Credit to be arranged). Directed individual aspects of small craft design. PREREQUISITE: ME 223B study by a student whose background or future plans re- or ME 230B.

Checking Data in Laboratory

119 ;

METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

DEPARTMENT OF METEOROLOGY William van der Bijl, Associate Professor of Meteorology (1961); B.Sc, Free Univ. of Amsterdam, 1941; M.Sc., AND OCEANOGRAPHY 1943; Ph.D., State Univ. Utrecht, 1952.

George Joseph Haltiner, Professor of Meteorology; Chair- Jacob Bertram Wickham, Associate Professor of Ocean- man (1946)*; B.S., College of St. Thomas, 1940; Ph.M., ography (1951); B.S., Univ. of California, 1947; M.S., Univ. of Wisconsin, 1942; Ph.D., 1948. Scripps Institution of Oceanography. 1949.

Harry Llewellyn Bixey, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. *The year of joining the Postgraduate School Faculty is indi- Navy; Assistant Professor of Meteorology; B.S., U.S. cated In parenthesis. Naval Academy. 1952; M.S., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1962. DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREES Burford Arlen Carlson, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. IN Navy; Assistant Professor of Meteorology; M.S., U.S. METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY Naval Postgraduate School, 1960. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

Edmund Theodore Clark, Commander, U.S. Navy; As- Subject Term Hours Required

sistant Professor of Meteorology; B.S., U.S. Naval Acad- I Meteorology B.S. in Meteorology

emy, 1945; M.S.. U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1959. a. Descriptive 6 b. Dynamics 8 Warren Wilson Denner, Assistant Professor of Ocean- c. Physical _... 13 ography (1964); B.S., Portland State College, 1961; d. Synoptic 22 M.S., Oregon State Univ., 1963. II Oceanography William Dwicht Duthie, Fellow, Professor of Meteorolo- a. Descriptive 6

(1945) ; B.A., Univ. of Washington, 1935; M.S., 1937; gy b. Dynamic Ph.D., Princeton Univ., 1940. c. Field and Lab

Theodore Green, III, Assistant Professor of Oceanography Ill Electives 20 (1965); A.B., Amherst College, 1959; M.S., Stanford Univ., 1961; Ph.D., 1965. 75

Eugene Clinton Haderlie, Associate Professor of Ocean- Electives may be chosen from any of I or II plus mathe- ography (1965); A.B., Univ. of California. 1943; M.A., matics courses covering the following subjects: Probability 1948; Ph.D., 1950. and Statistics, Vector Analysis. Digital Computation, and Differential Equations. A research paper is required.

Glenn Harold Jung, Professor of Oceanography (1958) : B.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 1949: M.S., MASTER OF SCIENCE 1952; Ph.D., Texas Agricultural and Mechanical College, 1955. Subject Term Hours Required M.S. in M.S. in Physical Frank Lionel Martin, Professor of Meteorology (1947) Meteorology Oceanography B.A., Univ. of British Columbia, 1936: M.A., 1938; Ph.D., I Meteorology Univ. of Chicago, 1941. a. Dynamic 15 b. Physical 11 Robert Joseph Renard. Associate Professor of Meteor- c. Synoptic 7 ology (1952); M.S., Univ. of Chicago, 1952.

II Oceanography William Stevens, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. In- Navy; a. Descriptive 12 structor in Meteorology; B.S., U.S. Academy, Naval 1955; b. Physical 20 M.S., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1961. c. Field and Lab 6

Donald Allen Still, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; III Electives 29 18 Instructor in Oceanography; B.S., Oregon State College, 1950; Scripps Institution of Oceanography, 1955. 62 56

Electives may be chosen from any of I or II plus mathe- Charles Luther Taylor, Associate Professor of Meteor- matics courses covering the following subjects: Probability ology (1954); B.S., Pennsylvania State Univ., 1942; M.S., 1947. and Statistics, Vector Analysis, Digital Computation, and Partial Differential Equations. At least 20 term hours must Warren Charles Thompson, Professor of Oceanography be A-level Meteorology and Oceanography courses with the

(1953); B.A., Univ. of Calif., at Los Angeles, 1943; remainder not less than B level. An acceptable thesis is

M.S., Scripps Institution of Oceanography, 1948; Ph.D.. required. B.S. in Meteorology or equivalent is prerequisite

Texas Agricultural and Mechanical College, 1953. to M.S. in Meteorology.

120 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY

METEOROLOGY techniques and local forecasting. TEXT: Same as Mr 215B. PREREQUISITE: Mr 204B. Mr 001D WEATHER CODES AND ELEMENTARY ANALYSIS (0-3). Designed to acquaint Environmental Mr 206C NAVAL WEATHER SERVICE OPERATION- (1-12). Instruction and laboratory Science students with weather codes and observation, stress- AL PROCEDURES prac- functions responsibilities of the ing utility and application and to introduce the essential tice in the operational and Service activities ashore elements of meteorological analysis. TEXTS: WBAN Man- Naval Weather and afloat. TEXTS: publications; depart- ual for Synoptic Codes: WBAN Manual for Radiosonde Selected NavWeps, AWS and NWRF Code; WBAN Manual for Upper Wind Code; International mental notes. PREREQUISITES: Mr 204B and Mr 205B. Cloud Atlas. PREREQUISITE: None. Mr 208B TROPICAL AND SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE Mr 010D METEOROLOGY (3-0). The principles of me- METEOROLOGY (1-5). Laboratory course associated with teorology and the effects of weather phenomena on naval Mr 228B. Southern hemisphere analysis; contour (isobaric), operations. Included topics: structure of the atmosphere; streamline, and isotach analysis and forecasting with em- weather elements; the station model, pressure and winds; phasis on tropical cyclones and meteorological satellite ob- theory of air masses and fronts; tropical storms; sources of servations. TEXT: Same as Mr 228B plus Harding and weather information; sea and swell condiitons; climatology Kotsch, Heavy Weather Guide; departmental notes. PRE- and the principles of weather map analysis and forecasting. REQUISITES: Mr 215B and Mr 228B. TEXT: Donn, Meteorology with Marine Applications. PRE- Mr 211C ELEMENTARY WEATHER-MAP ANALYSIS REQUISITE: None. (3-0). Objectives and techniques of surface and upper-air Mr 200C INTRODUCTION TO METEOROLOGY (3-0). analysis, including contours (isobars), isotherms and fronts. A general course which treats descriptively the composi- TEXTS: Berry, Bollay, and Beers, Handbook of Meteorol- tion and vertical structure of the atmosphere, physical proc- ogy; departmental notes. PREREQUISITES: Mr 001D and esses, general circulation, air masses, fronts, cyclones and Mr 200C. anticyclones. TEXTS: Petterssen, Introduction to Mete- Mr 212C INTRODUCTION TO WEATHER ELEMENTS orology; Glossary Meteorology. PREREQUISITE: AMS of (3-0). Continuation of Mr 211C. Structure and behavior of None. extratropical cyclones; graphical arithmetic; stability an- Mr 201C ELEMENTARY WEATHER-MAP ANALYSIS alysis and air masses; space/time cross sections; extended (0-9). Laboratory course taught in conjunction with Mr analyses. TEXTS: Same as Mr 211C plus the NAWAC 211C. Practice in upper-air and surface analysis stressing Manual, departmental notes. PREREQUISITE: Mr 211C. basic techniques and continuity. TEXT: Same as Mr 211C. Mr 213B ANALYSIS AND FORECASTING OF OPERA- PREREQUISITES: Mr 200C and a knowledge of weather TIONAL WEATHER ELEMENTS (3-0). Continuation of codes and observations. Mr 212C. Objective and quantitative forecasting of hydro- meteors, temperature and wind, with emphasis on observa- Mr 202C WEATHER-MAP ANALYSIS (0-6). Laboratory tions from meteorological satellites and utilization of nu- course taught in conjunction with Mr 212C. Practice in sea- merical products. TEXTS: Widger, Meteorological Satel- level and frontal analysis, graphical arithmetic, analysis of lites; various USN, and ESSA publications, reprints, upper-air soundings, and vertical space/time cross sections. AWS departmental notes. PREREQUISITE: Mr 212C. Introduces local forecasting techniques and mesoscale synoptic analysis. TEXT: Same as Mr 212C. PREREQUISITE: Mr 214B THE MIDDLE ATMOSPHERE (3-0). Objec- Mr 201C. tives and techniques of high-tropospheric (above 500 mb) Mr 203C ANALYSIS AND FORECASTING OF OPER- and stratospheric (to 10 mb) analysis and prognosis, in- ATIONAL WEATHER ELEMENTS (0-6). Laboratory cluding jet stream, maximum-wind layer and tropopause. course taught in conjunction with Mr 213B. Practice in Synoptic climatology: interpolation and extrapolation of objective and quantitative forecasting techniques on meso height, temperature and wind data. TEXTS: Riehl, Jet and synoptic scales; applications of meteorological satellite Streams of the Atmosphere; Craig, The Upper Atmosphere; observations and numerical products. TEXT: Same as Mr various USN, AWS ESSA publications, reprints and de- 213B. PREREQUISITE: Mr 202C. partmental notes. PREREQUISITES: Mr 213B, Mr 301B or Mr 321A. Mr 204B THE MIDDLE ATMOSPHERE (0-6). Labora- tory course taught in conjunction with Mr 214B. Practice Mr 215B UPPER-AIR AND SURFACE PROGNOSIS in analysis of contour, temperature and wind fields (jet (4-0). Qualitative and quantitative application of mecha- stream and maximum-wind layer) and tropopause on verti- nisms of pressure change and kinematics to surface and cal cross sections and constant pressure surfaces in upper upper-air prognosis (up to 500 mb) of height, thickness tropopause and stratosphere (to 10 mb) ; vertical extrapola- and temperature fields. Manually applied graphical and tion techniques. TEXT: Same as Mr 214B. PREREQUI- numerical techniques; extended forecasting by weather- SITE: Mr 203C. type methods. TEXTS: Petterssen, Vol. I, Weather Analysis Forecasting; NavWeps 50-1P-548, NAWAC Manual. Mr 205B UPPER-AIR AND SURFACE PROGNOSIS and PREREQUISITES: Mr 214B, Mr 302B or Mr 322A. (0-6). Laboratory course taught in conjunction with Mr 215B. Practice in prognosis of upper-air and surface charts Mr 228B TROPICAL AND SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE using current and classical methods. Practice in graphical METEOROLOGY (3-0). Tropical meteorology, especially

121 METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

climatology and synoptic models; Southern hemisphere thermodynamics and its application in meteorology, with synoptic meteorology with emphasis on the Antarctic. particular emphasis on thermodynamic charts and diagrams. TEXT: Riehl, Tropical Meteorology. PREREQUISITE: Theories of condensation and precipitation processes. Static Mr 301B or Mr 321A. stability and instability phenomena. TEXT: Haltiner and Martin, Dynamical and Physical Meteorology. PREREQUI- Mr 301B ELEMENTARY DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY I SITES: PH 191D and Ma 052D or equivalent. (4-0). The equations of motion; trajectories and stream- lines; thermal wind; mechanism of pressure changes and Mr 403B INTRODUCTION TO MICROMETEOROLOGY kinematics of pressure systems. TEXT: Haltiner and Mar- (4-0). Properties of radiating matter in general; solar and tin, Dynamical and Physical Meteorology. PREREQUI- terrestrial radiation and their effects on the temperature SITES: Mr 200C, Mr 402C, PH 191 D. distribution; the heat budget; structure of the wind (in the friction layer) and its significance in turbulent transfer; DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY Mr 302B ELEMENTARY air-mass modification; forecasting the micrometeorological II (4-0). continuation of Mr 301B. Vorticity and circu- A variables and their use in diffusion from point and line lation ; dynamical forecasting by numerical methods ; select- sources. TEXT: Same as Mr 402C. PREREQUISITES: ed topics including fronts and frontogenesis. TEXT: Same Mr 302B and PS 381C or equivalent. as Mr 301B. PREREQUISITE: Mr 301B. Mr 410C METEOROLOGICAL INSTRUMENTS (2-2). Mr 321A DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY I (3-0). The equa- Principles of design and operation of meteorological instru- tions of motion; horizontal flow; geostrophic and gradient ments used in naval meteorology with special emphasis on winds; vertical variation of wind and pressure systems; new developments and requirements. Application of elec- kinematics of pressure systems; continuity and tendency tronic meteorological instruments used by the fleet meteor- equations. TEXT: Same as Mr 301B. PREREQUISITES: ologist. TEXTS: Middleton and Spilhaus, Meteorological Mr 413B, Ma 240C and Ma 261B concurrently. Instruments; selected papers and departmental notes. PRE- REQUISITES: Ma 052D or equivalent and PH 196C or Mr 322A DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY II (3-0). A con- equivalent. tinuation of Mr 321A. Circulation theorems, vorticity equation and applications, solution of hydrodynamic equations Mr 412A PHYSICAL METEOROLOGY (3-0). Solar and by (a) perturbation methods, (b) by numerical integration; terrestrial radiation; absorption, scattering and diffuse re- barotropic and baroclinic models: fronts and frontogenesis. flection of solar radiation; terrestrial radiation and the at- TEXT: Same as Mr 301B. PREREQUISITES: Ma 125B mosphere radiation chart; applications to air-mass modifica- concurrently and Mr 321A. tion and minimum-temperature forecasting; heat budget of earth-atmosphere system. TEXTS: Same as Mr 402C; Mr 323A DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY III (TURBU- plus Fleagle and Businger, An Introduction to Atmospheric LENCE AND DIFFUSION) (3-0). Viscosity and turbu- Physics; Craig, The Upper Atmosphere. PREREQUISITE: lence; equations of motion for viscous and turbulent flows; Mr 413B. wind in the friction layers; diffusion of momentum, heat, water vapor, chemicals, etc.; diurnal temperature varia- Mr 413B THERMODYNAMICS OF METEOROLOGY tion: transformation: statistical properties of tur- air-mass (3-2). The physical variables; equations of state; first law bulence. TEXTS: Same as Mr 301B plus Lumley and Pan- of thermodynamics; properties of gases; properties of ofckv, T^e Structure of Atmnsnhere Turbulence. PREREQ- water and moist air; theories of condensation and precipi- UISITES: Mr 322A and PS 333B. tation processes; thermodynamic diagrams; air-mass iden-

tification indices; geopotential determinations; altimetry; Mr 324A DYNAMICAL PREDICTION (3-3). The solu- instability phenomena and criteria. TEXTS: Same as Mr tion of the hydrodynamical equations for meteorological 402C; departmental notes. PREREQUISITES: Ma 230D phenomena by analytical and numerical methods. Objective and 196C. analysis. TEXT: Thompson, Numerical Wecther Analysis PH and Prediction. PREREQUISITES: Mr 323A and Ma 128B. Mr 415B RADAR METEOROLOGY (2-0). Characteris- Mr 325A ENERGETICS OF THE GENERAL CIRCULA- tics of radar sets; propagation of electromagnetic waves in standard and non-standard atmospheres; scattering by hy- TION (2-0). The equations for energy and momentum bal- drometeors; attenuation; quantitative precipitation esti- ance in the atmosphere; zonal and eddy energy; adiabatic mates; applications of radar in convective clouds, meso- heating and its conversion into kinetic energy. Models of meteorology and larger-scale weather systems. TEXT: Bat- the general circulation. Transport of enthalpy, momen- tan, Radar Meteorology. PREREQUISITES: Mr 321 A or tum, kinetic energy, etc., using Fourier transforms. TEXTS: Mr 301B; PS 333B or PS 381C. Pfeffer, Dynamics of Climate; departmental notes. PRE- REQUISITES: Mr 323A and Ma 128B. Mr 420B UPPER-ATMOSPHERE PHYSICS (4-0). The fundamental laws of atmospheric flow; balloon and rocket Mr 335A THEORETICAL METEOROLOGY (3-0). Ad- research; sounding the atmosphere by acoustic and radio vanced topics in theoretical meteorology to fit the needs of techniques; the ozonosphere; aerial tides and magnetic the students. PREREQUISITE: Consent of the Instructor.

effects ; solar, magnetic and ionospheric disturbances, me- Mr 402C INTRODUCTION TO METEOROLOGICAL teors, cosmic rays and satellites. TEXTS: Massey and Boyd, THERMODYNAMICS (3-2). A treatment of elementary The Upper Atmosphere; Fleagle and Businger, An Intro-

122 A

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY

duction to Atmosphere Physics; departmental notes. PRE- Internal waves in stratified water on a rotating earth. Wind REQUISITES: PH 365C, PII 541B and PH 671B. wave spectra. TEXTS: Kinsman, Wind Waves. Defant,

Physical Oceanography II. PREREQUISITES: Oc 251 Mr 422A THE UPPER ATMOSPHERE (4-0). The com- or Mr 321A concurrently. position of the upper atmosphere: temperature and wind structure as deduced from several lines of observation; var- Oc 212A TIDES AND TIDAL CURRENTS (3-0). The- iations of electron concentration in die ionosphere; terres- ories of the astronomical tides; the tide-producing forces; trial magnetic variations; solar disturbances and their tidal oscillations in ocean basins; geographical variation effects in the upper atmosphere; the aurora. TEXTS: Same of the tides; analysis and prediction of tides; tidal datum as Mr 420B, plus Goody, The Physics of the Stratosphere. planes. Meteorological tides. Seiches. Tidal currents. PREREQUISITE: Mr 323A. TEXTS: Defant, Physical Oceanography; Marmer, Tidal Datum Planes. PREREQUISITE: Oc 211A. Mr 510C CLIMATOLOGY (2-0). The distribution with respect to season, geography, and orography of the major Oc 213A SHALLOW-WATER OCEANOGRAPHY (3-1). meteorological elements. Definitions of climatic zones and Transformation of waves in shoal water; nearshore water types according to Koeppen and their meteorological de- circulation and littoral drift; beaches and coasts. TEXTS: scriptions; micrometeorology ; regional climatology of the Weigel, Oceanographical Engineering; H.O. 234, Breakers oceans; climatology as a tool in objective forecasting. and Surf. PREREQUISITES: Oc HOC and Oc 610B or TEXT: Landsberg, Physical Climatology. PREREQUISITE: Oc 611 A (one of the latter may be taken concurrently). Mr 200C. Oc 220B DESCRIPTIVE OCEANOGRAPHY (3-0). Prop- Mr 521B SYNOPTIC CLIMATOLOGY (2-2). The study erties of sea water; water masses, currents and three-dimen- and statistical evaluation of meteorological elements in re- sional circulation in all oceans; distribution of tempera- lation to the macro- and microclimates; the Koeppen sys- tures, salinity and oxygen; temperature-salinity relation- tem; methods of presenting climatological data to non- ship. TEXTS: Sverdrup, Johnson and Fleming, The Oceans; meteorological personnel ; construction and use of forecast selected references. PREREQUISITE: Oc HOC. registers; climatological techniques in objective forecasting. TEXT: Landsberg, Physical Climatology. PREREQUI- Oc 241B ELEMENTARY DYNAMIC OCEANOGRAPHY SITES: Mr 200C and PS 381 C or PS 333B concurrently. (3-0). The equations of motion; geostrophic currents and their calculation by the indirect method; inertial motion; Mr 600C INTRODUCTORY SYNOPTIC METEOROLO- vorticity; frictional effects and wind-driven currents; dy- GY (2-4). Designed to acquaint oceanography students namic models of the ocean circulation. TEXTS: von Arx, with weather codes and observations; techniques of syn- Introduction to Physical Oceanography; Stommel, The optic analysis with emphasis on surface charts; determina- Gulf Stream. PREREQUISITES: Oc HOC and Mr 302B. tion of meteorological parameters for application to problems in oceanography. TEXTS: Same as Mr 010D. PRE- Oc250B ENVIRONMENTAL THERMODYNAMICS (3-0). REQUISITES: None! Basic thermodynamics; applications to an ideal gas; radiation in the atmosphere and the sea. TEXTS: Haltiner and 810B IN Mr SEMINAR METEOROLOGY AND OCEAN- Martin, Dynamical and Physical Meteorology; Defant, OGRAPHY (2-0). Students present original research or Physical Oceanography. PREREQUISITES: PH 196C, prepare summaries of recent findings in the fields of me- Ma 230D. teorology or oceanography and present synopses for group Oc 251A DYNAMIC OCEANOGRAPHY I (3-0). The discussion. PREREQUISITES: Mr 422A or Mr 403B, Mr equations of relative motion, incompressible flow, energy 521B. conservation, vorticity; special cases of frictionless flow OCEANOGRAPHY in the sea, particularly the "dynamic method" for calcula- Oc HOC INTRODUCTION TO OCEANOGRAPHY (3-0). tion of the geostrophic current. TEXTS: Haltiner and Mar- A survey course treating physical and chemical properties tin, Dynamical and Physical Oceanography; Stommel, The of sea water, marine biology, and submarine geology; the Gulf Stream; Fomin, The Dynamical Method. PREREQ- heat budget of the oceans; water masses and the general UISITES: Oc 110, Ma 261. circulation; currents, waves, and tides. TEXT: Pickard, Oc 252A DYNAMIC OCEANOGRAPHY II (3-0). Turbu- Descriptive Physical Oceanography. PREREQUISITE: lence and diffusion in the ocean; boundary-layer flow; the None. wind-driven circulation; topographical influences on cur-

Oc 201B OCEAN WAVES AND TIDES (3-1). The prop- rents. TEXTS: Defant, Physical Oceanography; Stommel, erties of waves of small amplitude in all water depths; The Gulf Stream. PREREQUISITE: Oc 251 A or Mr 321A. wave spectra and analysis; refraction; near-shore circula- Oc 253A DYNAMIC OCEANOGRAPHY III (3-0). Non- tions; tide-producing forces, tides and tidal currents, and linear theories of the wind-driven circulation; the equation analysis of tidal records; internal waves. TEXT: Depart- of state; convection cells; general treatment of thermal mental notes. PREREQUISITES: Oc HOC and PH 196C, motions; theories of the thermocline and the deep thermo- or equivalent. haline circulation. TEXTS: Defant, Physical Oceanogra- Oc 211 A OCEAN WAVES (3-0). Theory of surface waves phy; Stommel, The Gulf Stream. PREREQUISITE: Oc of small amplitude; approximations for finite amplitudes. 252A.

123 METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

Oc 260B SOUND IN THE OCEAN (3-0). The oceano- Oc 611A OCEAN WAVE FORECASTING (3-6). Same graphic factors involved in sound ranging, including ther- as Oc 601C with more rigorous treatment of wave genera- mal gradients, sound absorption properties of sea water, tion and application of digital methods to forecasting. sound scattering and reflection characteristics of the sea TEXTS: H.O. Pu. 603; Kinsman, Wind Waves. PREREQ surface and sea floor, scattering properties of marine organ- UISITE: Oc 211 A, PS 333B. isms, and ambient noise arising in the sea. TEXTS : Kinsler Oc 612B ARCTIC OCEANOGRAPHY (3-0). Marine ge- and Frey, Fundamentals of Acoustics (2nd ed.); depart- ography of the Arctic; sea ice observations, formation, prop- mental notes. PREREQUISITES: Oc HOC and PH 196C erties, growth, deformation and disintegration; sea ice drift or equivalent. due wind and currents. TEXT: Sea Ice Manual (unpub- Oc 320B INTRODUCTION TO GEOLOGICAL OCEAN- lished). PREREQUISITES: Oc 201B and Oc 241B. (3-2). Physiography of the sea floor, especially OGRAPHY Oc 613B ARCTIC OCEANOGRAPHY (3-4). Same as Oc continental shelves and slopes, submarine canyons, coral 612B with laboratory exercises in forecasting sea ice drift, deep-sea floor; character and distribution of reefs, and the growth and disintegration. TEXT: Sea Ice Manual (unpub- of deposition; structure and origin of sediments and rates lished). PREREQUISITES: Oc 201B and Oc 241B. the ocean basins. TEXTS: Shepard, Submarine Geology (2nd ed.); Gilluly, Waters and Woodford, Principles oj Oc 615B OCEANOGRAPHIC FORECASTING I (3-4).

Geology (2nd ed.). PREREQUISITE: Oc HOC. Space/time distributions of mixed-layer thickness; diurnal variations in the vertical temperature structure. Analysis of Oc 340A MARINE GEOPHYSICS (2-0). Geophysical charts of surface temperature, mixed-layer depth, tempera- measurements of the earth; gravity, magnetism and seis- ture gradients and currents; synoptic forecasting of these micity of the oceans; acoustical studies of the sea floor; elements in the laboratory. TEXTS: Laevastu, Factors Af- earth's crust beneath the ocean basins. TEXTS: Dobrin, fecting the Temperature of the Surface of the Sea; Selected Geophysical Prospecting (2nd ed.); and selected publica- publications. PREREQUISITES: Oc 220B; Mr 201 C, or tion. PREREQUISITE: Oc 320B. Mr 600C.

Oc 420B INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGICAL OCEAN- Oc 617B OCEANOGRAPHIC FORECASTING II (3-4). OGRAPHY (3-3). General biological principles; the sea Reviews variation of ocean thermal structure and processes as an environment for life; major plant and animal groups involved ; techniques in forecasting thermal structure illus- in the sea; plankton and food cycles; primary productivity; trated by laboratory exercises; practice in developing fore- boring and fouling organisms; bioacoustics, bioluminescence cast methods from air and sea data. Applications of ocean- and deep scattering layers; dangerous marine organisms; ography in ASWEPS and other Navy operations; radar physiology of shallow water diving. Laboratory work and propagation. TEXTS: Selected references. PREREQUI- field trips dealing with marine organisms. TEXTS: Russell SITES: Oc 260B and Oc 615B. and Yonge, The Seas; Hedgepeth, Seashore Life of the Oc 619B OCEANOGRAPHIC FORECASTING (3-4). Re- San Francisco Bay Region and the Coast of Northern Cal- views variation of ocean thermal structure and processes ifornia. PREREQUISITE: Oc HOC. involved; space-time distributions of mixed-layer thickness; Oc 520B INTRODUCTION TO CHEMICAL OCEANOG- analysis of oceanographic charts of surface temperature, temperature gradients, currents; synoptic forecasting of RAPHY (3-2). Basic chemistry of solutions; chemical com- these elements. Applications in and other Navy position of the oceans (dissolved solids, gases, nutrients, ASWEPS operations. TEXTS: Laevastu, Factors Affecting the Tem- etc.); distribution of constituents in the ocean; analytical perature the Surface Layer the Sea; selected publica- methods used in chemical oceanography; carbonate, nu- of of tions. PREREQUISITES: 220B, Oc 260B and Mr 201C. trient and other cycles in the sea: desalinization; corro- Oc sion; geochemistry. TEXTS: Strickland and Parsons, Oc 700B OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTRUMENTS AND OB- Methods in Chemical Oceanography. PREREQUISITES: SERVATIONS (2-2). Theory and operation of oceano- Oc and either CH 001D or Ch 106D, or equivalent. HOC graphic instruments; instructions in recording oceanograph-

ic observations, measurements and samples on log sheets. Oc 601B OCEAN WAVE FORECASTING (3-6). The TEXTS: H.O. 607; selected references. PREREQUISITE: generation, propagation and attenuation of surface wind Oc 220B. waves; their spectral and statistical properties; wave observations and analysis of data; forecasting wind waves from Oc 710B OCEANOGRAPHIC AND METEOROLOGICAL meteorological data. TEXT: H.O. Pub. 603. PREREQUI- INSTRUMENTS (4-2). Principles of design and field use SITE: Oc 201B taken concurrently. of primary meteorological and oceanographic instrumentation; survey of recent developments in instrumentation and Oc 610B OCEAN WAVE FORECASTING (3-0). The problems in environmental measures. TEXTS: Middleton generation and propagation of ocean wind waves; their and Spilhaus, Meteorological Instruments, H.O. 607; se- spectral and statistical properties; wave observations and lected references, departmental notes. PREREQUISITES: analysis of data; forecasting wind waves from meteorologi- Ma 052D or equivalent and PH 196C or equivalent. cal data; applications to operations at sea. TEXTS: H.O. 603; departmental notes. PREREQUISITES: Oc 211A or Oc 720B FIELD EXPERIENCE IN OCEANOGRAPHY Oc 201B. (0-4). Field operation of instruments to accomplish a com-

124 WVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY

prehensive oceanographic survey, processing and storage of Lectures or seminars on topics in oceanography not con- the data and samples, and interpretation of the results. tained in other courses, including a review hy the student

TEXTS: H.O. 607; selected references. PREREQUISITE: of recent research papers of significance; course taken by- Oc 220B. students in the environmental sciences curricula toward the end of their program. TEXT: Selected publications. Oc 810B SEMINAR IN OCEANOGRAPHY (2-0). Stu- PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. dents in the environmental sciences curricula conduct original research or summarize the literature in oceanography Oc 830A SPECIAL TOPICS IN OCEANOGRAPHY (3-0). concerning a selected topic, and during their last term pre- Lectures or seminars on specialized subjects in oceanogra- sent their results for group discussion. PREREQUISITE: phy of particular interest to students enrolled in curricula None. other than those in the environmental sciences; taken toward the end of the student's program. TEXT: Selected Oc 820A SPECIAL TOPICS IN OCEANOGRAPHY (3-0). publications. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor.

Oceanographic Studies Under Environmental Sciences Curriculum

125 NAVAL WARFARE NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

DEPARTMENT OF NAVAL WARFARE William Theodore Sorensen, Commander, U.S. Navy; In- structor in Naval Intelligence, and Personal Affairs. Carl Calvin Schmuck, Commander, U.S. Navy, Chairman; Boone Case Taylor, Commander, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Associate Professor of Operational Planning; B.S.M.E., Anti-Submarine Warfare; B.A., U.S. Naval Academy, Purdue Univ., 1939. 1948; M.S., George Washington Univ., 1965. James Roy Bell, Commander, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Lester Charles Wible, Assistant Professor of Aviation Tactics and CIC. Accident Prevention and Crash Investigation; B.S., U.S. Wayne Chester Bender, Lieutenant, U.S. Navy; Instructor Naval Academy, 1945. in Navigation; B.A., State Teachers College, Millersville, Pennsylvania, 1957. NAVAL WARFARE

William Bergbauer, Jr., Lieutenant Commander, Harry NW 101C TACTICS AND COMBAT INFORMATION U.S. Navy; Instructor in Anti-Air Warfare; B.S., U.S. CENTER (5-0). Shipboard tactical doctrine and procedures, Naval Academy, 1953. and functions and organization of CIC. Course includes Richard Franklin Campbell, Lieutenant Commander, basic maneuvering board fundamentals, and introduction to operational communications doctrine, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Missiles and Space Operations; organization, and responsibilities. Usual basis for exemption: Qual- B.A., Ohio State Univ., 1960. command ified Destroyer Type OOD underway, or CIC School of 4 In- Thomas Hanford Cathcart, Lieutenant, U.S. Navy; weeks or longer or qualified CIC officer. Foreign officers structor in Tactics and CIC; B.A., Yale Univ., 1960. take NW 191D.

Sheldon Drews, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; As- NW 103C ANTI-SUBMARINE WARFARE (5-0). Sur- Safe- sistant Professor of Aeronautical Engineering and face, air, and sub-surface ASW doctrine. Submarine operat- ty; B.S. U.S. Naval Academy, 1952; U.S. Naval Post- ing characteristics, offensive and defensive tactics, and graduate School, 1960; M.S., Massachusetts Institute of weapons. ASW search, detection and attack procedures, Technology, 1961. weapons systems, and coordinated ASW operations. PRE- REQUISITE: NW 101C (or exempt therefrom). USUAL George William Fairbanks, Commander, U.S. Navy; In- BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: Recent completion of: Coordi- structor in Damage Control. nated ASW Course at NORFOLK, SAN DIEGO, LONDON- Edward Dree Jackson, Commander, U.S. Navy; Instructor DERRY, or HALIFAX, or ASW Officer or CO/XO Anti- in Operational Planning and Naval Aviation Survey; Submarine Course at Fleet Sonar School. Foreign Officers B.A.E., Univ. of Mississippi, 1958. take NW 193D.

James Kenneth Jobe, Commander, U.S. Navy, Instructor NW 105C ANTI-AIR WARFARE (4-0). Study of AAW in Leadership; A.B., George Washington Univ., 1963; Tactical doctrine and capabilities of U.S. Naval Forces; M.A., 1964. concepts and procedures for Fast Carrier Strike Force AAW operations; future developments in AAW including com- James Robert Johnson, Lieutenant Commander, Supply mand and control, weapons and communications. PREREQ- Corps, U.S. Navy; Assistant Professor of Logistics and UISITES: NW 101C and NW 303C or exemptions there- Naval Supply; B.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1951; M.B.A., from. 1953.

NW 162C COMMUNICATIONS ORGANIZATION (5-0). Nathan Hughes King, Commander, U.S. Navy; Instructor Organization and functions of the Department of Defense in Naval Tactical Data System. Communication Systems including Command and Control Glenn Elwood Kitzelman, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. functions. A study of the National Communications Sys- Navy; Instructor in Celestial Navigation, Piloting and tem, Defense Communications Systems and the complete Seamanship; B.A., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, 1962. Naval Communications Systems including the Naval Se- curity Group. Individual missions and/or integration of Charles William Learned, Jr., Lieutenant Commander, the systems are analyzed. U.S. Navy; Instructor in Marine Nuclear Propulsion and Marine Engineering; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1954. NW 163C OPERATIONAL AND COMMUNICATION PLANNING (4-0). Material covers the Navy Planing Sys- Thomas Leigh Lindsay, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; tem in general, including the Estimate of the Situation, Assistant Professor of Aeronautical Engineering and Development of the Plan and the Preparation of the Di- Safety; B.S., Univ. of Notre Dame, 1954; M.S., Massa- rective. Emphasis given to the communication aspects of chusetts Institute of Technology, 1961. planning.

Alan J. Marceson, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; NW 164C COMMUNICATIONS ADMINISTRATION AND

Instructor in Anti-Submarine Warfare; B.S., Tufts Univ., PROCEDURES I (5-0). Basic organization of unit includ- 1952. ing departmental organization. Communications Center

126 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL NAVAL WARFARE functions with emphasis on Message Center handling and/or NW 209C AERO ENGINEERING SAFETY (5-2). A routing by semi-auto or automatic methods including prece- survey of aeronautical engineering for the aviator and the dence procedures. Security in general, both physical and Aviation Safety Officer. Material covered includes basic electrical, is studied along with the Registered Publication aerodynamics, subsonic and supersonic aircraft character- System (RPS). istics, aircraft performance, stability and control, and aircraft structural limitations. PREREQUISITES: Ma 031D 165C COMMUNICATIONS ADMINISTRATION AND NW and PH 008D, or equivalents. PROCEDURES II (3-0). A continuation of NW 164C. PREREQUISITE: NW 164C. NW 292D AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS (4-0). Basic Orientation to include doctrine, planning and fundamentals 166C COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT AND SYS- NW of troop organization, helicopter operations, embarkation, TEM APPLICATION I (4-0). A "hardware" course which ship-to-shore movement, and coordination of supporting includes all equipment from basic primary source to so- arms. USUAL BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: Completion of phisticated antennas and transmission lines. Synthesized a Marine Corps or Amphibious Forces School and/or a transmitters and receivers, terminal equipment and micro- tour of duty with an amphibious staff at PhibRon level or wave relay equipment usage. Frequency compatibility and higher. Foreign officer course. management and use of propagation prediction charts. An- cillary equipment associated with transmission and/or re- NW 293D NAVAL AVIATION SURVEY (3-0). Organi- ception of electromagnetic energy is also studied. zational structure and command relationship of entire naval aviation system; research and development, procurement, NW 167C COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT AND SYS- testing and evaluation of naval aircraft ; specific discussions TEM APPLICATION II (3-2). A continuation of NW based on latest material available on missions, tasks, cur- 166C, operation and adjustment of teletypewriter, facsimile, rent and projected equipment, as well as present and future transmitter and receiver equipments in the laboratory. employment of aircraft squadrons, carriers and seaplane PREREQUISITE: NW 166C. tenders. USUAL BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: Extensive NW 168C SPECIAL COMMUNICATIONS TOPICS aviation duty. Foreign officer course. (CLASSIFIED) (5-0). Crypto Systems and environmental NW 303C MTSSILES AND SPACE OPERATIONS (4-0). control are studied. Special Communication Systems for Principles of guidance and propulsion, operational capabil- either multiple or singular purpose are discussed. Prob- ities and limitations of guided missile systems. Orientation lems and/or solutions associated with compatibility, hard- in space technology, problems and potentialities of opera- ward procurement, and installation procedures are studied. tions in outer space. USUAL BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: NW 191D TACTICS AND COMBAT INFORMATION Equivalent experience or educational background. Foreign CENTER (5-0). Shipboard tactical doctrine and procedures, officers take NW 393D. and functions and organization of CIC. Foreign Officers NW 304C INTRODUCTION TO NAVAL TACTICAL course. DATA SYSTEM (3-0). A brief review of number systems NW 193D ANTI-SUBMARINE WARFARE (3-0). Sur- with concentration in octal and binary operations. An intro- face, air, sub-surface ASW doctrine. Submarine operating duction to Boolean algebra and logic circuitry of modern characteristics, offensive and defensive tactics, and weapons. computers. Modern high-speed digital computer principles. ASW search, detection and attack procedures, and weapons An introduction to operational programming for NTDS. A systems. PREREQUISITE: NW 191D (or exempt there- comprehensive coverage of the Naval Tactical Data System from). Foreign Officers course. and its associated elements, its capabilities and limitations as planned for CVA(N), CG(N) and DLG types. NW 201C OPERATIONAL PLANNING (2-0). Purpose and procedure for the Estimate of the Situation, the Devel- NW 391D ORDNANCE-WEAPON SYSTEMS (3-0). A opment of the Plan, and the Preparation of the Directive survey of the fields of surface ordnance, including guns,

(OpOrder) ; including the preparation of each under super- ammunition, and associated fire control systems. An analysis vision. Staff organization. The Navy Planning System. of weapon systems capabilities and limitations. Foreign USUAL BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: Naval War College officers course. Correspondence course "Strategy and Tactics (Part I)" or NW 393D MISSILES AND SPACE OPERATIONS (3-0). "Operational Planning and Staff Organization." Principles of guidance and propulsion. Orientation in space NW 208C AVIATION ACCIDENT PREVENTION AND technology, problems and potentialities of operations in CRASH INVESTIGATION (4-2). This course consists of outer space. Foreign officers course. (a) a study of all existing Navy Department instructions NW 395D MINE WARFARE (3-0). Fundamentals of covering all aspects of accident investigation and reporting mine laying and mining planning. Principles of mine coun- procedures, (b) methods and techniques of accident inves- termeasures operations, planning, and harbor defense. For- tigation, (c) implementation and use of a prevention pro- eign officers course. gram, and (d) aero medicine lectures on physiological factors in flight. PREREQUISITE: NW 209C or may be NW 401C LEADERSHIP AND ADMINISTRATION (3-0). taken concurrently with NW 209C. The improvement of Naval Leadership by broadening the

127 NAVAL WARFARE NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

line officer's knowledge and understanding of the following Course, or completion of correspondence courses "Practical topics: methods and techniques of enlisted personnel ad- Damage Control" (NAVPERS 10936), "Theoretical Dam- ministration ; applications of the principles of management age Control" (NAVPERS 10937), and "Radiological De- to the naval unit; philosophy of authority and responsibility fense" (NAVPERS 10771). with major emphasis on the principles of effective naval NW 503C MARINE NUCLEAR PROPULSION (2-0). An leadership. Instruction methods emphasize individual study introduction to nuclear power plants of possible use in projects and group study discussion. marine propulsion. Includes principles of operation, fuels

NW 403C CELESTIAL NAVIGATION (3-0). The theory and materials, limitations and economy of various reactors, and practice of celestial navigation as applicable to the and a brief description of reactor power plants currently in navigator's work at sea. Included topics: introduction to use. nautical astronomy; the use of the nautical almanacs and NW 591D MARINE ENGINEERING (4-0). Shipboard the H. 0. 214; the applications of celestial navigation. Prac- steam and diesel main propulsion plants and auxiliaries, tical work covers the navigator's day's work at sea. shipboard electrical distribution, miscellaneous naval auxiliary machinery, and organization and administration of NW 404C LOGISTICS AND NAVAL SUPPLY (3-0). shipboard engineering department. USUAL BASIS FOR The initial phase of the course stresses the importance of EXEMPTION: Qualification as Engineering Officer of the military logistics to our national security. Topics covered Watch of a steam-propelled ship. Foreign officer course. are: the fundamental elements of the logistics process; the planning, programming, and organizational aspects of logis- AVIATION SAFETY OFFICER PROGRAM tical administration; the budget process; and joint logistical The following listed courses comprise the Aviation Safety procedures. The final phase of the course emphasizes naval Officers Program and are available only to those officers so logistics and its relationship to combat readiness. Topics ordered by the Chief of Naval Personnel. All courses are included are: the Navy Supply System; the role of bases, taken simultaneously during one term. mobile support, and the operating unit in naval logistics; and logistics management at the unit command level. NW 610C AERO ENGINEERING CAFETY (6-0). A survey of aeronautical engineering for the aviator and the

NW 405D PERSONAL AFFAIRS (3-0). The fundamen- Aviation Safety Officer. Material covered includes basic tals of personal estate planning. Included topics: govern- aerodynamics, subsonic and supersonic aircraft character- ment benefits; life insurance and general insurance; budget- istics, aircraft performance, stability and control, and air- ing and banking; borrowing; real estate; securities; wills, craft structural limitations. (Includes mathematics review.) trusts, and related legal matters. NW 620C AVIATION ACCIDENT PREVENTION AND NW 407D NAVAL INTELLIGENCE (3-0). An overview CRASH INVESTIGATION (4-0). This course consists of of intelligence functions. Included topics: nature of intelli- (a) a study of all existing Navy Department instructions gence; development of modern intelligence; the role of in- covering all aspects of accident investigation and reporting telligence in planning national policy and military strategy; procedures, (b) methods and techniques of accident inves- the rise of Russia and Communism as international forces; tigation, and (c) implementation and use of a prevention the intelligence cycle, including the line officer's role in program. intelligence collection; employment of intelligence by opera- SP 630C ART OF PRESENTATION (2-0). A study of tional commanders; counterintelligence. principles of speaking with visual aids, with practice in pre- NW 408C SEAMANSHIP AND MARINE PILOTING paring presentations. The course is especially designed for (3-2). The fundamentals of seamanship as applicable to the Aviation Safety Program. the responsibilities and duties assigned to the commanding GV 640C AVIATION LAW (1-0). A study of Federal and officer of a naval vessel. Practical aspects of shipboard nav- State laws and regulations relating to military aviation, de- igation, including marine piloting, radar and loran naviga- signed especially for the Aviation Safety Program. tion. Practical work covers the use of hydrographic publications and performance of chart work. USUAL BASIS PY 650C PSYCHOLOGY IN ACCIDENT PREVENTION FOR EXEMPTION: Successful completion of USNA, AND INVESTIGATION (4-0). A study of logical and psy- NROTC, OCS or equivalent course; or previous assign- chological principles and practices useful in developing ment as navigator (assistant navigator of a large ship) for mental efficiency and emotional strength, designed espe- one year. cially for the Aviation Safety Program.

NW 502C DAMAGE CONTROL AND ATOMIC BIO- NW 660C AVIATION PHYSIOLOGY (2-0). A review of LOGICAL CHEMICAL WARFARE DEFENSE (4-0). basic fundamentals of physiology with emphasis on the Fundamentals of ship construction and stability, stability circulatory and respiratory systems with the objective of calculations and analysis, damage control systems and or- understanding the principles associated with the physio- ganization, repair of damage; effects of ABC weapons, ABC logical stresses encountered in aviation. The role of the detection, decontamination and personnel protection; dis- squadron flight surgeon in the squadron training program aster control ashore. USUAL BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: and his duties in aviation accident prevention, investigation Completion of 10 weeks "Officers' Basic Damage Control" and reporting.

128 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL OPERATIONS ANALYSIS

DEPARTMENT OF OPERATIONS ANALYSIS Walter Max Woods, Associate Professor of Operations Re-

search ( 1961 ) ; B.S., Kansas State Teachers College, Jack Raymond Borsting, Professor of Operations Research, 1951; M.S., Univ. of Oregon, 1957; Ph.D., Stanford Chairman (1959); B.A., Oregon State Univ., 1951; M.A., Univ., 1961. Univ. of Oregon, 1952, Ph.D., 1959. Peter William Zehna, Associate Professor of Operations Research (1961); B.A., Colorado State College, 1950: Alvin Francis Andrus, Associate Professor of Operations M.A., 1951; M.A., Univ. of Kansas, 1956; Ph.D., Stan- Research (1963): B.A., Univ. of Florida, 1957; M.A.. ford Univ., 1959. 1958. Hans Jacob Zweig, Associate Professor of Operations Re- Donald R. Barr, Assistant Professor of Operations Research search (1965); B.A., Univ. of Rochester, 1949; M.A., (1966); B.A., Whittier College, 1960: M.S., Colorado Brown Univ.. 1951; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1963. Univ., 1962; Ph.D., 1965. *The year of joining the Postgraduate School faculty is indi- Robert Neacle Forrest, Associate Professor of Operations cated in parenthesis. Research (1964); B.S., Univ. of Oregon, 1950; M.S., 1952; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1959. DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREE

Carl Russell Jones, Associate Professor of Operations IN OPERATIONS RESEARCH Research (1965); B.S., Carnegie Institute of Technology. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 1956; M.B.A., Univ. of Southern California, 1963; Ph.D.. The basic requirement for the degree Bachelor of Science Claremont Graduate School, 1965. with major in Operations Research consists of a minimum Harold Joseph Larson, Associate Professor of Operations of 64 term hours in residence at the Postgraduate School Research (1962); B.S., Iowa State Univ.. 1956: M.S., and including at least:

1957; Ph.D., 1960. a. 24 term hours of Operations Research

b. 15 terni hours of Probability and Statistics Glenn Frank Lindsay, Assistant Professor of Operations c. 10 term hours of mathematics beyond elementary

Research (1965) ; B.Sc, Oregon State Univ., 1960; M.Sc. Calculus The Ohio State Univ., 1962; Ph.D.. 1966. d. 10 term hours of upper division Physical Science.

Alan Wayne McMasters, Assistant Professor of Opera- Engineering, or Management courses. tions Research (1965): B.S., Univ. of California, 1957; The degree of Bachelor of Science with major in Opera- M.S., 1962; Ph.D., 1966. tions Research will be granted to a student who has successfully completed the above requirements and can demon- Paul Robert Milch, Assistant Professor of Operations Re- strate that he has met the general requirements of the Naval search (1963); B.S., Brown Univ., 1958; Ph.D.. Stanford Postgraduate School for a Bachelor of Science degree. Univ., 1966.

Samuel Howard Parry, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN Naval Reserve; Instructor in Operations Research (1964); OPERATIONS RESEARCH B.I.E., Georgia Institute of Technology, 1963; M.S.. In order to qualify for the degree Master of Science in Northwestern Univ., 1964. Operations Research in accordance with the requirements Stephen Michael Pollock, Assistant Professor of Opera- listed below, a student must first meet the requirements for

tions Research (1965) ; B.E.P., Cornell Univ., 1958; M.S., the degree Bachelor of Science with major in Operations Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1960; Ph.D., 1964. Research. Specific course requirements include a minimum

Robert Richard Read, Associate Professor of Operations of 48 term hours of A and B level courses of which:

Research (1961); B.S., Ohio State Univ., 1951; Ph.D., a. At least 18 term hours must be in A level Opera- Univ. California, 1957. tions Research courses including: Linear Program- ming, Dynamic Programming and Queueing Theory. David Alan Schrady, Assistant Professor of Operations b. At least 12 term hours must be in advanced physics Research (1965) ; B.S.M.S., Case Institute of Technology. eourses. 1961; M.S.O.R., 1963; Ph.D., 1965. <-. At least one of the sequences of elective courses Shudde, Rex Hawkins Associate Professor of Operations recommended by the Department of Operations Research (1962^; B.S., B.A., Univ. of California at Los Analysis. Angeles, 1952; Ph.D., Univ. of California, 1956. In addition a student must submit a thesis on a subject Roger Glenn Schroeder, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. approved by the Department of Operations Analysis and

Navy. Assistant Professor of Operations Research (1965) ; demonstrate that he has met the general requirements of the B.S., Univ. of Minnesota, 1962: M.S.I.E., 1963; Ph.D., Naval Postgraduate School for a Master of Science degree. Northwestern Univ., 1966.

Gary Allen Tuck, Assistant Professor of Operations Re- OPERATIONS ANALYSIS search (1966); B.A., Univ. of Oklahoma. 1955: M.S., OA 101C ELEMENTS OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH/ 1964; Ph.D., 1965. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-1). An introductory course pri-

129 OPERATIONS ANALYSIS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

marily for students in the Engineering Science Curriculum. OA 141B FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATIONS RE- Topics covered include: nature, origin, and contemporary SEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-1). The role of oper- status of operations analysis; problem formulations, meas- ations analysis in the solution of military problems. Meas- ures of effectiveness; brief introduction to linear program- ures of effectiveness. Special techniques such as search the- ming, game theory, and system reliability. TEXTS: Mc- ory, game theory and linear programming. TEXTS: Mc- Closkey and Trefethen, Operations Research for Manage- Closkey and Trefethen, Operations Research for Manage- ments, Vols. I and II; Sasieni, Operations Research Methods ment, Vols. I and II; Gass, Linear Programming; Hitch and Problems; Instructor's Notes. PREREQUISITE: PS and McKean, The Economics of Defense in the Nuclear 311C. Age; Williams, The Compleat Strategyst; Koopman, Search and Screening. PREREQUISITE: PS 321B. OA 11 IB PRINCIPLES OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH/ 151B RELIABILITY ENGINEERING SYS- SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-2). An introductory course, pri- OA AND (3-0). Elements of life testing plans, marily for students in the Management Data Processing TEMS ANALYSIS point interval estimates of reliability. Curriculum. The definition of operations and systems an- and systems Elements of systems analysis pertaining to redundancy, maintaina- alysis and its relation to management science. Topics in- bility, preventative maintenance policies. clude: Linear Programming, Game Theory, Reliability The- spares, and announced. 362B. ory, and Dynamic Programming. TEXTS: McCloskey and TEXTS: To be PREREQUISITE: PS

Trefethen, Operations Research for Management, Vols. I OA 202A ECONOMETRICS (3-0). An introduction to the and II; Blackett, Studies of War; Gass, Linear Program- construction and testing of econometric models, analysis ming; Williams, The Compleat Strategyst; Lloyd and of economic time series and the use of multivariate statis- Lipow, Reliability; Bellman and Dreyfus, Applied Dynamic tical analysis in the study of economic behavior. TEXTS: Programming; Roberts, Mathematical Methods in Reliabil- To be announced. PREREQUISITES: Mn 436A and PS ity Engineering. PREREQUISITES: Ma 140B or its equiv- 304B. alent; PS 315C or its equivalent; PS 316B or its equivalent (may be taken concurrently). OA 211 A LINEAR PROGRAMMING (4-1). Theory of optimization of linear functions subject to linear constraints. OA 112A ADVANCED METHODS IN OPERATIONS The simplex algorithm, duality, sensitivity analysis, trans- ANALYSIS (4-0). A continuation of OA 111B. A survey portation problem algorithm, parametric linear program- of such techniques as queueing theory, inventory control, ming, relation of linear programming to the theory of simulation and Monte Carlo methods; computer gaming. games, the dual simplex algorithm, and integer linear pro- PERT and CPM. and a selected case study in systems anal- gramming. TEXTS: Hadley, Linear Programming; Gass, ysis. TEXTS: Saaty, Elements of Queueing Theory; Sasi- Linear Programming. PREREQUISITE: Ma 196B or its eni, Yaspan, and Friedman, Operations Research — Meth- equivalent. ods and Problems; Moder and Phillips, Project Manage- OA 212A NONLINEAR AND DYNAMIC PROGRAM- ment with CPM and PERT. PREREQUISITES: OA 11 IB. MING (3-1). Introduction to modern optimization tech- and a second course in probability and statistics to be niques and multistage decision processes. Topics include: taken concurrently. integer linear programming, quadratic programming, Kuhn- Tucker theory and dynamic programming. TEXTS: Bell- OA 121A PRINCIPLES OF OPERATIONS ANALYSIS man, Dynamic Programming; Bellman and Dreyfus, Ap- (4-1). The nature, origin, and contemporary status of oper- plied Dynamic Programming; Hadley, Nonlinear and Dy- ations analysis; fundamental concepts with special emphasis namic Programming; Bellman, Adaptive Control Processes. on applications; introduction to game theory, search theory, PREREQUISITE: OA 211A. linear programming, and other advanced techniques. Kimball, Operations TEXTS: Morse and Methods of Re- OA 213B INVENTORY SYSTEMS (3-0). A study of the search; McCloskey and Trefethen, Operations Research for nature of inventory systems involving the construction of Management, Vols. I and II; Gass, Linear Programming; increasingly complicated models and the determination of Hitch and McKean, The Economics of Defense in the operating doctrines based on penally costs. Both determin- Nuclear Age; Williams, Compleat Strategyst; Koop- The istic and random demands are discussed within the struc- man, Search and Screening. PREREQUISITES: PS 321B ture of reorder point models as well as periodic review and PS 322A. models. TEXTS: Hanssman, Operations Research in Pro- duction and Inventory Control; Hadley and Whitin, Analy- OA 131B METHODS OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH & sis of Inventory Systems. PREREQUISITE: PS 302B. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). This course is an introduction to the technique of Operations Research and Systems OA 214A GRAPH THEORY (3-0). Elements of the the- Analysis, primarily for students in the technical curricula. ory of graphs, with emphasis on applications to the study The primary emphasis of the course will be on problem of organizations, communication systems, and transportation formulation using the techniques of operations analysis and networks. TEXTS: Berge, The Theory of Graphs and Its management science. The use of digital computer as an aid Applications; Ore, Theory of Graphs; Ford and Fulkerson. to problem solution will be emphasized throughout. PRE- Flows in Netivorks. PREREQUISITES: Ma 196B and Ma REQUISITES: PS 351B, MN 310C. 193C.

130 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL OPERATIONS ANALYSIS

OA 215A GRAPH THEORY II (3-0). A continuation of ment of utility. Applications to problems of human rela- OA 214A. TEXTS: Berge, The Theory of Graphs and Its tions. TEXTS: Davidson, Supper, Siegel, Decision Making;

Applications; Ore, Theory of Graphs; Ford, and Fulkerson, Churchman, Prediction and Optimal Decision ; Hagen, The- Floivs in Networks. PREREQUISITE: OA 214A. ory of Social Change; Thorp, Biology and the Nature of Man. PREREQUISITE: OA 292B. OA 216A CYBERNETICS (3-0). This course deals with philosophy the problems of controlling very complex systems by feed- OA 237A UTILITY THEORY II (3-0). The of measurement. relation the concept of utility back and "black boxes." Contributions to the theory of The between and parallel concepts in psychophysics. relation be- cybernetics from logic, biophysics, and other sources are The tween utility and social philosophy. The selection and pro- developed. Applications are made to mechanical, social, and curement of data necessary for social decisions. first mental systems. TEXTS: W.R. Ashby, An Introduction to The part of this course is based on a suitable text; but the main Cybernetics; S. Beer, Cybernetics and Management. PRE- REQUISITES: OA 291C and OA 292B. part of this course consists of student reports on the current literature. TEXT: C. W. Churchman and P. Ratoosh. OA 217A THEORY OF PATTERN RECOGNITION (3-0). Measurement. PREREQUISITE: OA 236A. Survey of principles governing the design of pattern recog- OA 291C INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS ANALY- nition and detection devices of both the adaptive and non- SIS (4-0). Development of fundamental concepts of oper- adaptive type. Elements of learning theory; separability of ations and system analysis. Concepts of operations analysis object space using quadratic and linear decision functions; illustrated in depth in the fields of submarine and anti- convergence of deterministic and stochastic adaptive tech- submarine warfare. Overall measures of effectiveness of a niques; survey of important, concrete applications. TEXTS: submarine as a weapon system. Determination of effective- Instructor's notes and selected papers from technical jour- ness as a product of measures of detection, attack, and kill nals. PREREQUISITE: PS 307 A or equivalent. probabilities. Lanchester's equations. TEXTS: Blackett, OA 218A SEMINAR IN SUPPLY SYSTEMS (3-0). A Studies of War; McCloskey and Trefethen, Operations Re- survey of supply systems not only from an inventory point search for Management, Vols. I and II; Morse and Kimball, of view but also as a critical area in logistics. Topics for Methods of Operations Research; Shudde, Introduction to Military discussion will be selected from the current literature and Operations Research, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School will be chosen according to students' interests. Periodically, Notes. PREREQUISITES: PS 302B and Ma 182C (both experts in the supply field will provide guest lectures on may be taken concurrently). current research areas. TEXTS: Arrow, Karlin and Scarf, OA 292B METHODS OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH/ Studies in the Mathematical Theory of Inventory and Pro- SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). The methodologies and ob- duction; Arrow, Karlin and Scarf, Studies in Applied jectives of operations research and systems analysis. Topics Probability and Management Science; Scarf, Gilford and include: reliability theory, PERT and PERT/COST net- Shelly, Multistage Inventory Models and Techniques. PRE- works, dynamic programming, recent developments in oper- REQUISITES: OA 213B and PS 307A or consent of In- ations research and systems analysis. TEXTS: Lloyd and structor. Lipow, Reliability; Roberts, Mathematical Methods in Re- OA 225A AIR WARFARE (3-0). Analyses of fleet air liability Engineering; Evarts, Introduction to PERT: Moder defense exercises. Changes in tactics and force disposition and Phillips, Project Management with CPM and PERT; arising from the introduction of nuclear weapons and mis- Bellman, Dynamic Programming; Bellman and Dreyfus, siles. Active and passive air defense. Relationship of air Applied Dynamic Programming. PREREQUISITES: OA defense to strike capability and ASW. TEXT: Classified 291C and Mn 211C. official publications. PREREQUISITES: OA 292B and OA OA 293B SEARCH THEORY (4-0). Detection devices 293B. and their characteristics. Sweep rates and lateral range

OA 234A QUEUEING THEORY (3-0). Basic principles curves. Evaluation of search radars. Theories of radar de- of stochastic processes applied to a class of queueing mod- tection. The design of screen and barrier patrols. Alloca- els: connection between Poisson and exponential distribution of search effort. TEXTS: Morse and Kimball, Methods

tions; derivation of queue length and waiting time distri- of Operations Research; Koopman, Search and Screenings; butions for single and parallel channel models. TEXT: Classified publications. PREREQUISITE: OA 292B. Cox and Smith, Queues. PREREQUISITE: PS 304B. OA 296A DEVELOPMENT OF WEAPONS SYSTEMS (3-0). of of the OA 235A DECISION CRITERIA (3-0). Survey and cri- The areas application various techniques of

tique of the current literature dealing with decision criteria. operations research which the student has learned are re-

Philosophy of values and allocation of effort. Applications viewed and placed in perspective relative to the procedure to problems of human relations. TEXT: Luce and Raiffa. for evolving new weapons systems. Emphasis is placed upon Games and Decisions. PREREQUISITE: OA 292B. the role of operations research in formulating operational requirements, developing prototype systems, and determining OA 236A UTILITY THEORY (3-0). General concept of military specifications for selected systems and the role of utility and its measurement. Survey and critique of the operations analysis in various phases of operational testing current literature dealing with the concept and measure- of the system. The contributions of operations research to

131 OPERATIONS ANALYSIS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL the coordination of the functions of those segments of the OA 398A ADVANCED PROJECTS IN OPERATIONS military establishment concerned with weapons systems de- RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS III (2-0 to 5-0). Con- velopment are analyzed. TEXTS: Classified official publica- tinuation of OA 397A. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: tions and instructor's notes. PREREQUISITE: OA 211A. Consent of the instructor.

OA 297A SELECTED TOPICS IN OPERATIONS RE- OA 399A ADVANCED PROJECTS IN OPERATIONS

SEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS I (2-0 to 5-0). Presenta- RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS IV (2-0 to 5-0). Con- tion of a wide selection of reports from the current litera- tinuation of OA 398A. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: ture. At the end of the term an attempt will be made to Consent of the instructor. summarize the philosophy and principal methodologies of OA 421C INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL COMPUTERS operations research. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: A (5-0). Description of general purpose digital computers and background of advanced work in operations research. peripheral equipment; data processing and problem formulation with emphasis on military OA 298A SELECTED TOPICS IN OPERATIONS RE- environment. Binary and octal number systems. Basic FORTRAN and CODAP pro- SEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS II (2-0 to 5-0). A con- gramming. TEXTS: McCracken, Digital Computer Pro- tinuation of OA 297A. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: gramming; McCracken, A Guide to FORTRAN IV Pro- A background of advanced work in operations research. gramming; Organick, A FORTRAN Primer; Selected Con- OA 299A SELECTED TOPICS IN OPERATIONS RE- trol Data Corporation 1604 Manuals. PREREQUISITES: SEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS III (2-0 to 5-0). A con- None. tinuation of OA 298A. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: OA 471B OPERATIONS ANALYSIS FOR NAVY MAN- A background of advanced work in operations research. AGEMENT (4-1). The nature, origin and contemporary status of operations analysis. Fundamental concepts with OA 391B GAMES OF STRATEGY (3-2). Two-person special emphasis on application in the fields of transporta- zero-sum games, the minimax theorem. Methods of solving tion, inventory control and personnel management. Introduc- finite games. Specific games with appropriate application. tion to game theory. TEXTS: McCloskey and Trefethen, Methods of solving continuous games on unit square with Operations Research for Management, Vols. I and II; Gass, continuous payoff functions. Applications. TEXTS: Dresher, Linear Programming; Williams, Complete Strategyst; Cher- Theory and Applications of Games of Strategy; Luce and noff and Moses, Elementary Decision Theory. PREREQ- Raiffa, Games and Decisions; McKinsey, Introduction to UISITE: PS 371C. the Theory of Games. PREREQUISITES: PS 301C or the equivalent; Ma 196B. (The latter may be taken concur- OA 491B METHODS FOR COMBAT DEVELOPMENT rently.) EXPERIMENTATION (4-0). Introduction to the intent, design, procedures, analysis, and reporting of field experi- OA 393B INTRODUCTION TO WAR GAMING (2-2). ments. Rationale for combat experiments, criteria selection, Simulation and Monte Carlo techniques employing manual statistical analysis, and interpretation of results. TEXT: and computer methods; random number generation; analy- None. PREREQUISITES: OA 291C and PS 304B. sis of results of war games. TEXTS : Instructor's notes and prepared handouts. PREREQUISITES: OA 291B, PS 303B, OA 501A INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS ANALYSIS OA 421C or consent of the instructor. (4-0). A survey of military economic problems including

the determination of the total budget level and its allo- OA 394A WAR GAMING (2-2). Consideration of the cation among the services and weapons systems. TEXT: problems inherent in the construction and use of manual Hitch and McKean, The Economics of Defense in the Nu- and computer war games. Problems in the analysis of re- clear Age. PREREQUISITE: MN 413A. sults of such games. Utilization of decision laboratory techniques. Construction of simulations. TEXT: Instructor's OA 502A SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). Detailed exami- notes and classified official publications. PREREQUISITE: nation of resources allocation among weapons systems. Ex- OA 393B or consent of the instructor. amination of criteria problems, the treatment of intangibles, spillovers, uncertainty and related problems. The use of OA 396A ADVANCED PROJECTS IN OPERATIONS mathematical, statistical and economic methods to arrive at

RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS I (2-0 to 5-0). A "preferred," if not optimum allocation decisions. TEXT: course in solving special problems by the use of advanced Quade, An Appreciation of Analysis for Military Decisions, techniques of Operations Research. Emphasis is upon ex- plus current systems studies. PREREQUISITE: OA 501A. tending the student's ability to formulate and solve sophis- ticated models of problems arising in Operations Research/ OA 510B SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). The aim of this Systems Analysis. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: Consent course is to present the nature, the aims, and limitations of of the instructor. analysis as it exists today and contributes to military problems. The common principles of cost/effectiveness analysis, OA 397A ADVANCED PROJECTS IN OPERATIONS design and formulation of the study, methods of solution, RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS II (2-0 to 5-0). Con- sensitivity analysis, pitfalls and limitations. Case studies tinuation of OA 396A. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: from the fields of interest of the class will be discussed. Consent of the instructor. PREREQUISITES: PS 351B, MN 310C, OA 131B.

132 ;

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL OPERATIONS ANALYSIS

OA 891E SEMINAR I (0-2). Review of summer assign- queueing theory. PREREQUISITE: PS 304B or consent of ments; selection of thesis topics; special lectures. TEXT: the Instructor. None. PS 308A STOCHASTIC PROCESS II (3-0). Orthogonal

OA 892E SEMINAR II (0-2). A continuation of OA 891 E. representation of stochastic processes. Stationary time se- Special lectures. TEXT: None. PREREQUISITE: None. ries; harmonic analysis of the auto correlation function. Ergodic properties. Applications. PREREQUISITE: PS OA 893E SEMINAR III (0-2). Presentation of thesis de- 307A. velopments. Special lectures. TEXT: None. PREREQUI- SITE: None. PS 309A SELECTED TOPICS IN ADVANCED STATIS- TICS II (3-0). A continuation of PS 306A. PREREQUI- OA 894E SEMINAR IV (0-2). A continuation of OA SITE: PS 306A. 8

I (3-2). Descriptive statistics. Point estimation. Principles PS 326A ADVANCED PROBABILITY I (3-0). Proba- of choice and properties of estimators. Methods for calcu- bility viewed as a measure. Sets, measures and integration. lation. Confidence intervals. Applications. Testing hypothe- Convergence almost surely, in probability and in quadratic ses. Concepts of power, most powerful tests. Applications. mean. Distribution function and characteristic functions. PREREQUISITE: PS 302B. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. PS 304B THEORY AND TECHNIQUES IN STATISTICS PS 327A ADVANCED PROBABILITY II (3-0). Infinitely II (3-0). continuation of 303B. Regression A PS and cor- divisible laws. Strong and weak laws of large numbers. relation. Least squares. Elements of analysis of variance. Classical central limit problems, modern central limit prob- comparisons. Sequential sampling. control. Multiple Quality lems. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. Sampling inspection. PREREQUISITE: PS 303B. PS 355A SYSTEM RELIABILITY AND LIFE TESTING PS 305A DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS (3-1). Theory of (3-0). Reliability functions and their point and interval esti- the general linear hypothesis. Analysis of variance. Plan- mates under various sampling plans. Standard and acceler- ning of experiments. Randomized blocks and Latin Squares. ated life testing plans. Analysis of serial, parallel, and Simple factorial experiments. PREREQUISITE: PS 304B mixed systems. Analysis of reliability apportionment and or consent of Instructor. inherent design reliability. Reliability growth models and methods for updating reliability estimates. Properties of PS 306A SELECTED TOPICS IN ADVANCED STATIS- functions with monotone failure rate. PREREQUISITES: (3-1). Topics will be selected by instructor to fit TICS the PS 303B and PS 304B, or PS 321B and PS 322A. needs and background of the students. Areas of choice to include the fields of sequential analysis, non-parametric PS 371B MANAGEMENT STATISTICS (4-0). Elements methods and multivariate analysis. The course may be re- of probability theory with emphasis on random variables peated for credit if the topic changes. PREREQUISITE: and their probability distributions. Distributions of estima- PS 304B, or consent of Instructor. tors of parameters. Applications of these concepts as aids in decision making. PREREQUISITE: Ma 032C. PS 307A STOCHASTIC PROCESS I (3-0). Poisson and Wiener processes. Markov chains. Discrete and continuous PS 372B MANAGEMENT STATISTICS II (4-1). A con- parameter cases. Ergodic properties and passage probabili- tinuation of PS 371B. Further discussion of tests of hypothe- ties. Rirth and death processes and their application to sis and parameter estimation. Regression and correlation

133 OPERATIONS ANALYSIS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

theory. Bayesian Methods. Applications to Management control with emphasis on recent developments. PREREQ- Problems. PREREQUISITE: PS 371B. UISITE: PS 304B or PS 322A.

PS 396A DECISION THEORY (3-0). Basic concepts. PS 831B SEMINAR IN PROBABILITY AND STATIS- admissible, minimax, and regret strategies. Princi- Bayes, TICS. Content of the course varies. Students will be al- ples of choice. Relation of statistical decision functions to lowed credit for taking the course more than one time. the theory of games. Applications in the planning of opera- PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. tional evaluation trials. PREREQUISITES: PS 304A, Ma 193C and OA 391B. (The latter may be taken concurrently.) PS 832A SEMINAR IN PROBABILITY AND STATIS-

TICS. Content of the course varies. Students al- PS 397A THEORY OF INFORMATION COMMUNICA- will be lowed credit for taking the course more than one time. TION (3-0). Markov chains; surprisal of events and uncer- PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. tainty of distributions; characterization of uncertainty; noise and rate of information transmission; limit distribu- PS 931B READING IN PROBABILITY AND STATIS- tions connected with sequences from an ergodic Markov TICS. Content of the course varies. Students will be al- chain; Shannan-Fano coding; detection. PREREQUISITES: lowed credit for taking the course more than one time. Ma 120C or Ma 150C and PS 321B. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. PS 398B SAMPLING INSPECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL (3-1). Attribute and variables sampling plans. PS 932B READING IN PROBABILITY AND STATIS-

MIL. STD., sampling plans with modifications. Multi-level TICS. Content of the course varies. Students will be al- continuous sampling plans and sequential sampling plans. lowed credit for taking the course more than one time. Distribution of effort in related sampling plans. Quality PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor.

134 ; ;

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL PHYSICS

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS Herman Medwin, Professor of Physics (1955) ; B.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1941; M.S., Univ. of Fucene Casson Crittenden, Jr., Professor of Physics, California at Los Angeles, 1948; Ph.D., 1953. Chairman (1953)*: B.A., Cornell Univ., 1934; Ph.D., Edmund Alexander Milne, Associate Professor of Physics 1938. (1954); B.A., Oregon State College, 1949; M.S., Cali- Robert Louis Armstead. Assistant Professor of Physics fornia Institute of Technology, 1950; Ph.D., 1953. (1964): B.S., Univ. of Rochester. 1958: Ph.D., Univ. of

John Robert Neighbours, Professor of Physics (1959) ; California at Berkeley, 1965. B.S., Case Institute of Technology, 1949; M.S., 1951; Franz August Bumiller, Professor of Physics (1962) Ph.D., 1953.

M.S., Univ. of Zurich, 1951 : Ph.D.. 1955. Norman Lee Oleson, Professor of Physics (1948); B.S,. Fred Ramon Buskirk. Associate Professor of Physics Univ. of Michigan. 1935; M.S.. 1937: Ph.D., 1940. (1960); B.S., Western Reserve Univ.. 1951; Ph.D., Case

Leonard Oliver Olsen, Professor of Physics (1960) ; B.A.. Institute of Technology, 1958. Iowa State Teachers College. 1932; M.S.. State Univ. of Alfred William Madison Cooper, Associate Professor of Iowa. 1934: Ph.D.. 1937.

Physics (1957) ; B.A., Univ. of Dublin, 1955; M.A., 1959: William Reese, Assistant Professor of Physics Ph.D., The Queen's University of Belfast, 1961. (1963); B.A., Reed College, 1958; M.S., Univ. of Illinois, 1960;

John Niessink Cooper, Professor of Physics (1956) : B.A.. Ph.D., 1962. Kalamazoo College, 1935; Ph.D., Cornell Univ., 1940. John Dewitt Riggin, Professor of Physics (1946); B.S., Alan Berchard Coppens, Assistant Professor of Physics Univ. of Mississippi, 1934; M.S., 1936. (1964); B.Eng.Phy., Cornell Univ., 1959; M.S.. Brown George Rodeback, Associate Professor of Physics Univ., 1962; Ph.D., Brown Univ., 1965. Wayne (1960); B.S., Univ. of Idaho, 1943; M.S., Univ. of Illi-

Peter Pierce Crooker, Instructor in Physics (I960) ; B.S., nois, 1947: Ph.D.. 1951. Oregon State College, 1959. James Vincent Sanders. Assistant Professor of Physics William Peyton Cunningham, Professor of Physics (1961): B.S., Kent State Univ.. 1954: Ph.D., Cornell (1946); B.S., Yale Univ., 1928; Ph.D., 1932. Univ., 1961.

Harvey Arnold Dahl, Assistant Professor of Physics Gordon Everett Schacher, Assistant Professor of Physics (1964); B.S., Stanford Univ.. 1951; Ph.D., 1963. (1964); A.B., Reed College, 1956; Ph.D., Rutgers, 1961.

Norvell Dyer, Associate Professor of Physics John (1961) ; Ronald Wayne Staab, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. Naval B.A., Univ. of California. 1956: Ph.D.. 1960. Reserve; Instructor in Physics (1965) ; B.S., Columbia Univ., 1964; M.S., 1965. Austin Rogers Frey, Professor of Physics (1946); B.S..

Harvard Univ., 1920; M.S., 1924; Ph.D., 1929. Oscar Bryan Wilson. Jr., Professor of Physics (1957) B.S., Univ. of Texas, 1944; M.A., Univ. of California at Harry Elias Handler, Professor of Physics (1958); B.A.. Los Angeles, 1948: Ph.D., 1951. Univ., of California at Los Angeles, 1949; M.A., 1951;

Ph.D., 1955. Karlheinz Edgar Woehler, Associate Professor of Physics

(1963) ; B.S., Univ. of Bonn, 1953; M.S., Technical Univ., Don Edward Harrison, Jr., Associate Professor of Physics Aachen, 1955; Ph.D., Univ. of Munich, 1962. (1961); B.S., College of William and Mary, 1949; M.S., Yale Univ., 1950; Ph.D., 1953. William Bardwell Zeleny, Associate Professor of Physics (1962); B.S., Univ. of Maryland, 1956; M.S., Syracuse Otto Heinz, Associate Professor of Physics (1962); B.A.. Univ., 1958; Ph.D., 1960. Univ. of California, 1948; Ph.D., 1954.

*The year of joining the Postgraduate School faculty is indi- William Lewis Johnson, Lieutenant Junior Grade, U.S. cated in parenthesis. Naval Reserve; Instructor in Physics (1963); B.S., Univ. of Southern Mississippi, 1962. DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREE

Sydney Hobart Kalmbach. Professor of Physics (1947) : IN PHYSICS B.S., Marquette Univ., 1934; M.S., 1937. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICS

Raymond Leroy Kelly, Associate Professor of Physics 1. It is required that any specific curriculum must be (1960); B.A., Univ. of Wichita, 1947; M.S., Univ. of consistent with the general minimum requirements for any Wisconsin, 1949; Ph.D., 1951. degree of Bachelor of Science as determined by the Aca- demic Council. Lawrence Edward Kinsler, Professor of Physics (1946); B.S., California Institute of Technology, 1931; Ph.D., 2. A major in physics must include a minimum of 54 1934. term hours in physics, including required courses and elec-

135 PHYSICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

tives, a minimum of 38 term hours in mathematics, and the a. Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics—The stu- equivalent of a course in general chemistry. In addition, a dent must take a two-term sequence (for example, PH 530 minimum of 20 term hours of elective credits must be and PH 541 ) or present equivalent undergraduate prepara- chosen in other specified areas. 108 term hours must be tion in this subject matter area. clearly of upper division level. b. Advanced Mechanics and Hydrodynamics—for example, PH 153 or PH 161. 3. The following requirements must be met: (courses marked with an asterisk must include a laboratory). c. Special Topics in Electromagnetism—for example, PH Approximate 367. Discipline Subject Term Hours 4. The student will be expected to specialize in one of Physics General Physics* 16 the available options such as: (a) Acoustics, (b) Nuclear Physical Optics* 5 Physics, (c) Plasma Physics, (d) Solid State Physics, or Analytical Mechanics 8 (e) other recognized Physics specialization. Electricity and Magnetics 8 Atomic Physics* 7 PHYSICS

44 PH 001(D) -PH 004(D)

This series of courses is intended primarily for Engineer- Mathematics College Algebra and Trigonometry 5 ing Science students with limited background in mathe- Analytic Geometry and Calculus 13 matics. Differential Equations 3 Infinite Series 3 PH 001 D GENERAL PHYSICS I (4-0). Mechanics—The Vector Algebra and Vector Analysis 6 purpose of this course as well as the following 3 units is to provide a knowledge of the principles of physics and 30 thus to help the student understand the scientific background of modern civilization. The first unit deals with Chemistry General Chemistry* 10 physical quantities and the concepts of motion, force, momentum energy. Sears and Zemansky, College 4. The remaining required hours in physics and mathe- and TEXT: matics are elective and must be of clearly upper division Physics. level. By choosing appropriate elective sequences in physics PH 002D GENERAL PHYSICS II (4-0). Harmonic Mo-

the student can begin a specialty-area on the undergraduate tion, Sound and Heat — This is a continuation of Ph 001D level. Suggested elective courses in physics are: Thermo- and considers simple harmonic motion, oscillating systems dynamics, Statistical Mechanics, Physics of the Solid State, including those producing sound, the propagation of sound Nuclear Physics, and Acoustics; in mathematics are: Com- and wave motion. The mechanics of gases, thermometry, plex Variables, Partial Differential Equations, and Proba- transfer of heat, the thermodynamics are among other top- bility and Statistics. ics considered. TEXT: Sears and Zemansky, College Phys-

20 term hours of electives must be chosen in the areas of ics. PREREQUISITE: PH 001D. (a) electric circuits, (b) electronics, and (c) chemistry be- PH 003D GENERAL PHYSICS III (4-0). Electricity and yond general chemistry. At least 10 of the 20 term hours Magnetism. This is a further continuation of General Phys- must be from one of these three areas. ics I and II and presents the subject of electrostatics,

5. The student must maintain grade point averages of at including Coulomb's Law, potential and capacitance, elec- least 1.0 in both physics and mathematics. tric current and electric circuits, magnetics, and induced electromotive force. TEXT: Sears and Zemansky, College MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICS Physics. PREREQUISITES: PH 001D and PH 002D.

1. It is required that any specific curriculum be consistent PH 004D GENERAL PHYSICS IV (4-0). Light and with the general minimum requirements for of any degree Modern Physics. This is the final unit of a four-term se- Master of Science as determined by the Academic Council. quence of General Physics and treats selected topics in

2. Each student's program of study must have a minimum light including the geometrical optics of mirrors and lenses, of 36 term hours of physics courses, not including thesis, dis- interference and diffraction and optical instruments. A brief tributed between A and B level; of this 36 hours, a mini- introduction to modern physics is also given. This includes mum of 12 hours must be A level. In lieu of the preceding the topics of atomic structure, optical and X-ray spectra, requirement, students who are qualified to pursue graduate radioactivity, and nuclear structure. TEXT: Sears and Ze- courses in physics when they arrive at the Postgraduate mansky, College Physics. PREREQUISITES: PH 001 D, School may complete a minimum of 24 hours entirely of PH 002D, and PH 003D.

A level courses. In addition, all students must register for PH 006D SURVEY OF PHYSICS (5-0). An introduction research and present an acceptable thesis. to the fundamental concepts and laws of statics and dy- 3. The following specific course requirements must be namics, including Newton's laws of motion, force, energy, successfully completed for a student to earn the degree of momentum, and harmonic motion. Survey of gas laws, heat, M.S. in Physics: wave propagation, sound and the properties of light. US-

136 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL PHYSICS

UAL BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: Equivalent educational Physics; Resnick and Halliday, Physics for Students of background. TEXT: White, Modern College Physics, 3rd Science and Engineering. PREREQUISITES: PH 011D ed. PREREQUISITE: Ma 010D or equivalent. and PH 012D.

014C PHYSICS IV (4-2). Modern Phys- PH 007(D) -PH 010(D) PH GENERAL ics. This is a continuation of General Physics I, II, and III This series of courses is intended primarily for BA students. and deals with the fundamentals of atomic and nuclear

PH 007(D) GENERAL PHYSICS I (3-2). Mechanics physics. Topics include: atomic and nuclear structure, opti- concepts of velocity, acceleration, force, torque linear and cal spectra, radioactivity, nuclear processes, and particle angular momenta, energy. Conservation laws of mechanics accelerators. TEXT: Weidner and Sells, Introductory Mod- and applications. Laboratory exercises. TEXT: Smith and ern Physics. PREREQUISITES: PH 011D, PH 012D and Cooper, Elements of Physics. PH 013D.

PH 008(D) GENERAL PHYSICS II (3-2). Harmonic PH 016(D) -PH 019(C)

Motion, Sound and Heat. This is a continuation of PH This series of courses is intended primarily for Engineer- 008(D). Simple harmonic motion, oscillating systems; wave ing Science students with some prior knowledge of calculus. motion, production and propagation of sound waves. Prop- erties of gases, heat transfer and thermodynamics. Labora- PH 016D GENERAL PHYSICS MECHANICS (4-0). This tory exercises. TEXT: Smith and Cooper, Elements of course is a review in depth of that portion of General Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH 007(D). Physics dealing with Newtonian Mechanics and stressing quantitative use of such concepts as force, conservation of PH 009(D) GENERAL PHYSICS III (3-2). Electricity energy, conservation of momentum, rotational motion, elas- and Magnetism, Coulomb's Law. electrostatics, potential ticity and hydrodynamics. It is primarily for engineering concept, DC currents, simple circuits, magnetism, induced science students needing physics review at that level. EMF. Laboratory exercises. TEXT: Smith and Cooper, TEXTS: Sears and Zemansky, University Physics; Resnick Elements of Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH 008(D). and Halliday. Physics for Students of Science and Engi- neering. PREREQUISITES: Previous exposure to college PH 010(D) GENERAL PHYSICS IV (3-2). Light and mathematics through calculus and one course in college Modern physics, geometric optics, interference and diffrac- physics. tion, optical instruments. Brief introduction to modern physics: Atomic structure, optical and X-ray spectra, radio- PH 017D GENERAL PHYSICS—THERMODYNAMICS activity and nuclear structure. TEXT: Smith and Cooper, SOUND AND LIGHT (4-0). This course is a continuation Elements of Physics; PREREQUISITES: PH 007(D), PH of PH 016D and is a further review in depth of General 008(D), PH 009(D). Physics, stressing the concepts of temperature, heat trans-

fer, thermal properties of solids, liquids and gases and the PH 011(D) -PH 014(C) laws of thermodynamics. The propagation of waves in vari- This series of courses is intended primarily for BS students. ous media is considered with emphasis on sound waves.

PH 011D GENERAL PHYSICS I (4-3). Mechanics. This In optics, the geometrical optics of mirrors, lenses and op-

course is designed to provide a knowledge of the principles tical instruments will be considered; and in physical optics of physics and to provide a scientific background for the interference and diffraction will be stressed. TEXTS: Sears

study of engineering. It consists of lectures, recitations, and Zemansky, University Physics; Resnick and Halliday, problem sessions, and laboratory work dealing with force, Physics for Students of Science and Engineering. PRE- motion, energy, momentum, elasticity, and hydrodynamics. REQUISITE: PH 016D. TEXT: Sears and Zemansky, University Physics, and Res- 018D PHYSICS — ELECTRICITY AND nick and Halliday, Physics for Students of Science and PH GENERAL is study of the con- Engineering. PREREQUISITE: One term of calculus. MAGNETISM. (4-0). This course a cepts of electrostatics stressing Gauss' Law and the theory PH 012D GENERAL PHYSICS II (4-3). Heat, Sound, of electric fields and potentials. Attention will also be

and Light. This is a continuation of General Physics I and given to direct the alternating current flow, electromagnetic deals with molecular mechanics, behavior of gases, thermal phenomena and ferromagnetism. TEXTS: Sears and Ze- expansion, calorimetry, the laws of hermodynamics, wave mansky, University Physics; Resnick and Halliday, Physics motion, vibrating bodies, reflection and refraction of light, for Students of Science and Engineering. PREREQUI- dispersion, interference and diffraction, and optical instru- SITES: Successful completion of PH 016D and PH 01 7D. ments. TEXTS: Sears and Zemansky, University Physics; MODERN PHYSICS (4-0). This is a final Resnick and Halliday, Physics for Students of Science and PH 019C sequence and consists of a moder- Engineering. PREREQUISITE: PH 011D. course of a four-term ately rigorous study of some of the most fundamental con- PH 013D GENERAL PHYSICS III (3-3). Electricity and cepts of atomic and nuclear physics. Topics included are

magnetism. This is a continuation of General Physics I and atomic structure, radiation from atoms, nuclear structure

II and deals with the fundamental principles of electro- and nuclear processes. TEXT: Weidner and Sells, Intro-

statics, electromagnetism, electrochemistry, direct and alter- ductory Modern Physics. PREREQUISITES: Successful nating currents. TEXTS: Sears and Zemansky, University completion of PH 016D, PH 017D, and PH 018D.

137 PHYSICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

PH 021(D) -PH 025(C) of Motion, Work and Energy, Momentum, Conservation This series of courses is intended primarily lor Engineering Laws. TEXT: Resnick and Halliday, Physics for Students

Science students with good background in mathematics and of Science and Engineering, Part I. PREREQUISITES: some previous work in physics. Previous courses in general physics and calculus.

PH 021D MECHANICS (4-0). This course is a review PH 061D REVIEW OF MECHANICS AND ELECTRO- and extension of the Mechanics portion of General College MAGNETISM (4-2). Review of basic concepts of mechan- Physics. Emphasis is placed on a study in depth of the ics and of electricity and magnetism: Force, Newton's important concepts of physical mechanics. Representative Laws of Motion, Work and Energy, Momentum, Conserva- topics are Newton's Laws of Motion, Conservation of En- tion Laws of Mechanics, Electric Charge and Field, Poten-

ergy, Conservation of Momentum, Rotational Motion and tial Concept, Direct Currents, KirchhofFs Laws, Magnetic Simple Harmonic Motion. TEXT: Halliday and Resnick. Effects of Direct Currents. TEXT: Resnick and Halliday,

Physics for Students of Science and Engineering. PRE- Physics for Students of Science and Engineering, Parts I REQUISITE: 8 to 10 semester hours of College Physics and II. PREREQUISITES: Previous courses in general and 8 to 10 hours of Calculus, with acceptable grades, or physics and calculus. demonstrated aptitude in Science and Mathematics. PH 105D MECHANICS AND THERMODYNAMICS (4-0).

PH 022D FLUID MECHANICS WAVE MOTION AND The first term in a sequence of fundamental physics for THERMODYNAMICS (4-0). This course is a continuation students in Electrical Engineering and Electronics. The of PH 021D. The emphasis will be on developing a thor- sequence includes PH 105C, PH 205C, and either PH 604C ough understanding of the important concepts of physics or PH 605B and PH 705B. The subject matter in the first which are normally catalogued under the title of this course. term includes: kinematics, dynamics of a particle, energy, The relationship of Wave Motion and Acoustics will be momentum, rotational motion, orbital motion, oscillations stressed as will the laws of Thermodynamics. TEXT: Halli- and introductory thermodynamics. TEXT: Resnick and day and Resnick, Physics for Students of Science and En- Halliday, Physics for Students of Science and Engineering, gineering. PREREQUISITE: Successful completion of PH Vol. I. 021D. PH 141B ANALYTICAL MECHANICS (4-0). Kinematics PH 023D ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM (4-0). and dynamics of a particle, moving reference systems, cen- This course is a continuation of PH 021D and PH 022D. tial forces and celestial mechanics. TEXT: Fowles, Analyti- A careful study will be made of the concepts of electro- cal Mechanics. PREREQUISITES: At least 8 semester statics, Electric Fields and Gauss' Law, Electrical Poten- hours of College Physics and 8 semester hours of Calculus: tial, Magnetic Effects of Currents. Electromagnetism and Ma 182C (may be taken concurrently). the Phenomena of Ferromagnetism. DC and AC electric PH 142B ANALYTICAL MECHANICS (4-0). Dynamics currents will be studies. TEXT: Resnick and Halliday, of a system of particles, rigid bodies, Lagrange's equations Physics for Students of Science and Engineering. PRE- and the Hamiltonian theory of vibrations. TEXT: Fowles, REQUISITE: Successful completion of PH 021D. Analytical Mechanics. PREREQUISITES: Ma 183B (may PH 024D ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND OP- be taken concurrently) and PH 141B.

TICS (4-0). This course is a continuation of PH 021D, PH 151C MECHANICS I (4-1). Brief review of elemen- PH 022D and PH 023D and gives the student a better tary mechanics. Motion of a particle in one dimension with understanding of the electrical and magnetic character of emphasis on oscillatory motion. Statics of a particle. Motion radiation. Maxwell's Laws will be studied. In Optics, max- of a particle in two and three dimensions with emphasis imum attention will be given to understanding interfer- on projectile trajectories and motion in a central force ence and diffraction. Polarization of Radiation will also be field. The laboratory periods will be devoted to demonstra- studied. TEXT: Resnick and Halliday, Physics for Stu- tions and problem solving. TEXTS: Resnick and Halliday, dents of Science and Engineering. PREREQUISITES: Suc- Physics for Students of Science and Engineering, Part I; cessful completion of PH 021D and PH 023D. Symon, Mechanics, 2nd ed. PREREQUISITES: A previous

PH 025C MODERN PHYSICS (4-0). This is the con- college course in General Physics, Calculus, Vector Algebra, cluding course in a sequence of courses designed to pro- and Ordinary Differential Equations (the latter may be vide the student with a substantial understanding of some taken concurrently). of the most important and basic concepts of physics. Sev- PH 152B MECHANICS II (4-0). A continuation of PH eral topics classified as "modern physics" will be studied 151C. Motion of a system of particles, including the con- in depth. Among these are atomic structure, radiation from servation laws, center of mass, and collision problems. atomic systems, nuclear structure, nuclear processes and Coupled harmonic oscillators. Rotation of a rigid body the tools of modern physics experimentation. TEXT: Weid- about an axis. Motion of a pendulum. Statics of rigid bodies. ner and Sells, Introductory Modern Physics. PREREQUI- Stress and strain. Rotating coordinate systems. The vibrat- SITES: Successful completion of PH 021 D, PH 022D, PH ing string and wave propagation along a string. TEXTS: 023D and PH 024D. Resnick and Halliday, Physics for Students of Science and PH 051D REVIEW OF ELEMENTARY MECHANICS Engineering, Part II; Symon, Mechanics, 2nd ed. PRE- (2-2). Basic concepts of mechanics: Force, Newton's Laws REQUISITE: PH 151C.

138 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL PHYSICS

PH 153A MECHANICS III (4-0). A continuation of PH Smith and Cooper, Elements of Physics. PREREQUISITE: 152B. Topics selected from: mechanics of continuous media: PH 190D or equivalent. gravitational theory; Lagrange's equations; Hamilton's PH 192D SURVEY OF PHYSICS III (3-0). A continua- equations; tensor algebra and the rotation of a rigid body tion of PH 191 D. Survey of physical optics. Introduction to in three dimensions; theory of small vibrations; perturba- atomic structure including kinetic theory. TEXT: Smith tion theory. TEXT: Symon, Mechanics, 2nd ed. PREREQ- and Cooper, Elements of Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH UISITE: PH 152B. 191D or equivalent. PH 154A SPACE AND MISSILE MECHANICS (4-0). PH 196D REVIEW OF GENERAL PHYSICS (4-2). Prin- The solar system. Missile and satellite trajectories including ciples of statics and dynamics, oscillatory motion, wave intercept problems and perturbations. Equations of motion motion fields, electricity and magnetism. TEXT: Resnick of a missile including yawing, swerving, drag, and angular and Halliday, Physics for Students of Engineering and motion. Stability considerations. TEXT: Instructor's notes. Science. PREREQUISITES: Ma 230D and Ma 120C or PREREQUISITE: PH 153A. equivalent.

PH 155A ADVANCED MECHANICS I (3-0). Review of PH 205C WAVES AND PARTICLES (4-0). Second term

elementary principles. Lagrange's formulations with applica- in the sequence of fundamental physics for students in Elec-

tions. Hamilton's principle with applications to non-con- trical Engineering and Electronics. The properties of waves,

servative and non-holonomic systems. The two body central propagation. Doppler effect, waves in three dimensions, re- force problem. Kinematics of rigid body motion. Orthogonal flection, refraction, interference and diffraction, polarization, transformation. Formal properties of transformation matrix. wave-particle duality, photons, electron waves, phonons, in- Infinitesimal rotation. Coriolis force. Rigid body motion, the determinacy principle, Bohr model of the atom and its inertia tensor, Euler's equation, the symmetrical top. TEXT: defects. TEXT: Halliday and Resnick. Physics for Students

Goldstein, Classical Mechanics. PREREQUISITES: PH of Science and Engineering. Vols. I and II. Weidner and 142B or PH 153A. PH 365C (the latter may be taken con- Sells, Elementary Modern Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH currently). 105D.

PH 240C OPTICS (3-3). Reflection and PH 156A ADVANCED MECHANICS II (3-0). Special AND SPECTRA refraction of light, optical systems, dispersion, interference, relativity in classical mechanics, including Lorentz transformation and Lagrange formulation. Hamilton's equations diffraction, polarization. Basic atomic structure, photoelec- of motion. Canonical transformations. Hamilton-Jacobi equa- tric effect, radiation from atoms, molecules and solids. Sears, Optics: Jenkins and White, Fundamentals tion. Small oscillations, classical perturbation theory. TEXT: TEXTS: Goldstein, Classical Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: PH of Optics.

155A. PH 241C RADIATION (3-3). Fundamentals of geometric and physical optics. Wave phenomena and wave propaga- PH 161A FLUID MECHANICS (3-0). The fundamental tion. Origin of the quantum theory, photoelectric effect, concepts of fluid mechanics from the continuum and kinetic radiation from atoms, molecules and solids, target detection theory points of view; development and interpretation of the by optical and infrared devices. TEXTS: Sears, Optics; equation of continuity, the Navier-Stokes equation, the equa- Jenkins and White. Fundamentals of Optics. tion of state. TEXT: Landau and Lifshitz, Fluid Mechanics and instructor's notes. PREREQUISITES: PH 541B, Ma PH 242C RADIATION (3-0). Fundamentals of geometric 260C and Ma 245B or equivalents. and physical optics. Wave phenomena and wave propagation. Particles and waves. Radiation from atoms, molecules, 162A (.3-0). Solu- PH ADVANCED HYDRODYNAMICS and solids. Sensors used for target detection. TEXTS: Sears, tions to the equations of fluid dynamics; potential flow, Optics; Jenkins and White, Fundamentals of Optics. exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes equation, laminar and turbulent boundary layers, transitions, non-steady flow, hy- PH 260C PHYSICAL OPTICS (3-2). Reflection and re- drodynamic noise. TEXTS: Landau and Lifshitz, Fluid Me- fraction of light, optical systems, dispersion, interference, chanics, Schlichting, Boundary Layer Theory. PREREQUI- diffraction, polarization. Basic atomic structure, photoelec- SITE: PH 161A. tric effect, radiation from atoms, molecules and solids. TEXTS: Sears, Optics; Jenkins and White, Fundamentals PH 190D SURVEY OF PHYSICS I (3-0). Elementary of Optics. concepts and laws of statics and dynamics. Introduction to PH 265C PHYSICAL OPTICS (4-2). Elementary geo- the statics and dynamics of fluids. Temperature, heat, radia- metrical optics. Wave phenomena and wave propagation, tion, kinetic theory and the gas laws. Fundamentals of vec- interference and diffraction, polarization. Properties of light tor representation and notation. TEXT: Smith and Cooper, sources. TEXTS: Sears, Optics; Jenkins and White, Funda- Elements of Physics. mentals of Optics.

PH 191D SURVEY OF PHYSICS II (3-0). A continua- PH 270B PHYSICAL OPTICS (4-2). Review of geometri- tion of PH 190D. A survey of wave propagation, sound, cal optics. Wave phenomena and wave propagation, inter- electricity and magnetism, atomic structure, the properties ference, diffraction, polarization, double refraction, disper- of light, and other electromagnetic wave phenomena. TEXT: sion. TEXT: Jenkins and White, Fundamentals of Optics.

139 PHYSICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

PH 350B SPECIAL TOPICS IN ELECTROMAGNETISM PH 425B UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS (3-2). A contin- (4-0). Development and applications of Maxwell's Equa- uation of PH 424B for students of operations analysis. An tions for selected students. TEXTS: Whitmer, Electromag- analytical survey of the propagation of underwater acoustic

netics; Kraus, Electromagnetics. PREREQUISITE: Consent waves as influenced by boundary conditions, refraction, scat- of Instructor. tering, and attenuation. Physical characteristics of sonar transducers. Sonar systems and developments. Experiments PH 360B ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM (4-0). in underwater acoustics and noise analysis. TEXTS: Kinsler Electrostatics. Electric currents. The magnetic field, Max- and Frey, Fundamentals of Acoustics; NDRC Technical well's equations. Plane waves, reflection, radiation. TEXT: Summary, Principles of Underwater Sound; NDRC Techni- Skilling, Fundamentals of Electric Waves. PREREQUI- cal Summary, Physics of Sound in the Sea. PREREQUI- SITES: PH 241C, PH 14IB. SITE: PH 424B. PH 365C ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM (4-1). PH 431B FUNDAMENTAL ACOUSTICS (4-0). This Electrostatics. Dielectric media. Direct currents. Magneto- course is designed to provide a background in vibration and statics. Induced emf. Magnetic media. Maxwell's equations. sound for students of electronics or ordnance. An analytical The laboratory periods will be devoted to demonstrations study of the dynamics of free, forced, and damped simple and problem solving. TEXT: Schwarz, Intermediate Electro- harmonic oscillators, strings, bars, and membranes. Develop- magnetic Theory. PREREQUISITE: PH 701C or equiva- ment of, and solutions to, the acoustic wave equation. Prop- lent. agation of plane waves in fluids and between media. Acous-

PH 366B ELECTROMAGNETISM (4-0). A continuation tic filters. Beam patterns and directivity of acoustic radia- of PH 365C. Applications of Maxwell's equations: plane tion from a piston, radiation reaction. Loudspeakers and waves in unbounded media; refraction and reflection of microphones. TEXT: Kinsler and Frey, Fundamentals of plane waves; transmission lines; wave guides; introduction Acoustics. PREREQUISITES: MA 113B and PH 105C, PH to relativity. TEXT: Schwarz, Intermediate Electromagnetic 151C. Theory. PREREQUISITE: PH 365C. PH 432B UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS (4-3). A contin- PH 367A ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM I (4-0). uation of PH 431B for students of electronics or ordnance. Solutions to Laplace's and Poisson's equations. Applica- Transmission of sound in the ocean, including problems of tions of Hertz potential or vector potential to radiation refraction, attenuation, scattering, reverberation, and chan- problems. Scattering and dispersion. TEXT: Jackson, Clas- nel propagation. Physical principles used in sonar systems. sical Electrodynamics. PREREQUISITE: PH 366B. Experiments in acoustical measurements, transducer measurements and noise analysis. TEXTS: Kinsler and Frey, PH 368A ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM II (3-0). Fundamentals of Acoustics; NDRC Technical Summary — Tensors in special relativity. Relativistic classical electro- Principles of Underwater Sound; and NDRC Technical magnetic field theory. The Lienard-Wiechert potentials. Summary—Physics of Sound in the Sea. PREREQUISITE: Lorentz electron theory. TEXTS: Landau and Lifshitz. PH 431B. Classical Theory of Fields; Barut, Electrodynamics and. Classical Theory of Fields and Particles. PREREQUI- PH 433A PROPAGATION OF WAVES IN FLUIDS SITES: PH 367A and PH 155A. (3-0). A theoretical treatment of the propagation of sound in fluids including molecular relaxation effects and both ray PH 400C SURVEY OF UNDERWATER SOUND AND and wave propagation characteristics in bounded, inhomo- ITS APPLICATIONS (3-0). This course is designed to geneous media. TEXTS: Lindsay. Mechanical Radiation; acquaint the student wtih the physical properties of under- Officer, Introduction to the Theory of Sound Transmission. water sound, its environment and the related laws which PREREQUISITE: PH 432B. pertain to its detection, especially in naval applications. The noise environment, sonar equation, range prediction, PH 441B SHOCK WAVES IN FLUIDS (4-0). Hydro- and passive and active detection mechanisms are some of dynamic equations. Propagation of acoustic waves in fluids. the topics covered. PREREQUISITES: Ma 051D or its Shock waves propagated from nuclear explosions; Rankine- equivalent and SECRET clearance. Hugoniot equations for the shock front, scaling laws, experimental measurements. TEXTS: Kinsler and Frey, Funda- PH 424B FUNDAMENTAL ACOUSTICS (4-0). This mentals of Acoustics; Cole, Underwater Explosions. PRE- course is designed to provide a background in vibration and REQUISITES: Ma 183B and PH 152B, or equivalents. sound for students of operations analysis. An analytical study of the dynamics of free, forced and damped simple PH 442A FINITE AMPLITUDE WAVES IN FLUIDS harmonic oscillators, strings, bars and membranes. Develop- (3-0). Non-linear effects of intense sounds. Theory of prop- ment of, and solutions to, the acoustic wave equation. Prop- agation of shock waves in fluids. TEXTS: Cole, Under- agation of plane waves in fluids and between different water Explosions; Lindsay, Mechanical Radiation; and media. Acoustic filters. Beam patterns and directivity of Landau and Lifshitz, Fluid Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: ucoustic radiation from a piston. Radiation reaction. Trans- PH 432B or equivalent. ducers for underwater sound. TEXT: Kinsler and Frey, Fundamentals of Acoustics. PREREQUISITES: Ma 182C PH 450C UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS (3-2). A survey and PH 141B. of the fundamentals of acoustics, with particular emphasis

140 —

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL PHYSICS

on the radiation, transmission and detection of sound in the solids, and radiation. TEXTS: Sears, Thermodynamics; sea. TEXTS: Kinsler and Frey, Fundamentals of Acoustics; Andrews, Equilibrium Statistical Mechanics. PREREQUI- Equa- NDRC Technical Summary — Principles of Undenvater SITES: PH 152B, PH 530C, Ordinary Differential Sound; NDRC Technical Summary Physics of Sound in tions. the Sea. PREREQUISITE: Ma 073C or Ma 244C or equiv- PH 545A STATISTICAL PHYSICS (3-0). Kinetic the- alent. ory and the Boltzmann theorem: configuration and phase

PH 461 A TRANSDUCER THEORY AND DESIGN (3-3). space; the Liouville Theorem; ensemble theory: micro- A theoretical treatment of the fundamental phenomena in canonical, canonical, and grand canonical ensembles; quan- the design of crystal, magneto-strictive, and ceramic sonar tum statistics. TEXT: Huang, Statistical Mechanics. PRE- transducers. Characteristics and parameters of various sonar REQUISITES: PH 153 A or PH 156A, PH 636B or PH transducer systems are studied in the Laboratory. TEXTS: 671B, PH 541B, and PH 366B. Hueter and Bolt, Sanies: NDRC Technical Summary, Mag- PH 546A STATISTICAL PHYSICS II (3-0). A contin- netostriction Transducers; Kinsler and Frey, Fundamentals uation of PH 545A with selected applications to molecules. of Acoustics. PREREQUISITE: PH 432B or equivalent. Bose-Einstein gases, Fermi-Dirac liquids and superconduc- PH 462B VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL (3-0). tivity. TEXT: Huang. Statistical Mechanics. PREREQUI- An analytical treatment of the physics of the generation SITE: PH 545A. of mechanical vibration and noise with particular em- PH 600D NUCLEONICS FUNDAMENTALS (3-0). A phasis on its control in naval applications. TEXT: Instruc- study of atomic structure, natural and artificial radioactivity, tor's notes. PREREQUISITE: PH 432B or equivalent. nuclear structure, nuclear fission, and chain reaction. In- PH 463B SPECIAL TOPICS IN UNDERWATER ACOUS- troduction to reactor principles, reactor components, and TICS (3-2). A terminal course following PH 432 for stu- nuclear power plants. USUAL BASIS FOR EXEMPTION: dents in a two-year program. Topics may include additional Equivalent educational background. TEXTS: Hoisington, material in underwater acoustics, transducer theory, non- Nucleonics Fundamental and NAVPERS 10786, Basic Nu- linear phenomena in acoustics, explosive waves in water, clear Physics. noise and vibration control. Laboratory experiments on re- PH 604C STRUCTURE OF ATOMS AND SOLIDS (4-0). lated material. TEXT: Instructor's notes. PREREQUISITE: Third term in the sequence of fundamental physics for PH 432B or equivalent. those students in Electrical Engineering and Electronics, PH 471 A ACOUSTICS RESEARCH (0-3). Advanced not planning to take PH 705B. Kinetic theory of gases, laboratory projects in acoustics. PREREQUISITE: PH fundamental particles, brief treatment of nuclear physics, 432B or equivalent. special relativity, the general principles of quantum mechanics, periodic chart of the elements, vector model of PH 480E ACOUSTICS COLLOQUIUM (0-1). Reports on the atom, electrons in solids, semi-conductors and semi- current research and study of recent research literature in conducting devices. TEXTS: Weidner and Sells, Elemen- conjunction with the student thesis. PREREQUISITE: PH tary Modern Physics; Sproull. Modern Physics, 2nd ed. 432B or equivalent. PREREQUISITE: PH 205C. PH 481A SEMINAR IN APPLICATIONS OF UNDER- PH 605B ATOMIC PHYSICS (4-0). Third term in the WATER SOUND (3-0). A study of current literature on sequence of fundamental physics for students in Electrical applications of acoustics to problems of naval interest. PRE- Engineering and Electronics planning to take PH 705B. REQUISITE: PH 433 or consent of the instructor. Kinetic theory of gases, Boltzmann function, statistical dis- mechanics, free and bound particles, PH 530C THERMODYNAMICS (3-0). Fundamental the- tributions, quantum radiation, the one-electron atom, ory of thermodynamics and applications to physical prob- emission and absorption of many-electron atoms, elec- lems. First and second laws of thermodynamics, equations periodic table of the elements, vibration-rotation spectra for molecules. of state, phase changes, thermodynamic potentials. TEXT: tron spin, X-rays, ed.; Weidner and Sears, Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITES: Calculus of TEXTS: Sproull, Modern Physics, 2nd Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH Several Variables. Introduction to Mechanics. Sells, Elementary Modern 205C. PH 531A ADVANCED THERMODYNAMICS (3-0). Prin- (4-0). An ciples of classical thermodynamics. Extremum principles PH 610C SURVEY OF MODERN PHYSICS modern physics. Particle aspects of and thermodynamic stability. Applications to gases, solids, introductory course in of material particles, atomic and and to electric and magnetic systems. Introduction to fluc- radiation and wave aspects nuclear fission. TEXT: tuations and irreversible thermodynamics. TEXT: Callen, nuclear structure, nuclear reactions, Sells, Elementary Modern Physics. PRE- Thermodynamics. PREREQUISITES: PH 153A or PH Weidner and equivalent. 155A, PH 366B, PH 636B or PH 671B, PH 530C or equiv- REQUISITE: PH 360B or alent. PH 620C ELEMENTARY ATOMIC PHYSICS (4-0). PH 541B INTRODUCTORY STATISTICAL PHYSICS Fundamental particles, forces on particles, kinetic theory, (4-0). Distribution functions, kinetic theory, introduction to photons as waves and particles, electrons as particles and

classical and quantum statistics. Applications to gases, waves, elementary quantum physics, binding energies in

141 PHYSICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

atoms and nuclei. Atomic structure and spectra, X-rays, of nuclear radiations with matter; statistics of decay; detec- molecular structure, atoms in solids. TEXT: Weidner and tion techniques. TEXTS: Segre, Nuclei and Particles; Kap- Sells, Elementary Modern Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH lan, Nuclear Physics; Valente, A Manual on Experiments 141B or equivalent. in Reactor Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH 637B.

PH 621C ELEMENTARY NUCLEAR PHYSICS (4-0). PH 639A NUCLEAR PHYSICS II (4-3). Quantitative A descriptive and phenomenological course including prop- treatment of nuclear moments and angular momentum; erties of nucleons, nuclear structure, radioactivity, nuclear models; partial wave analysis of reactions; the deuteron; reactions, fission, and fusion. TEXT: Kaplan, Nuclear Phys- quantum mechanical treatment of radioactive decay processes; nuclear fission reactors. Laboratory: Same as ics. PREREQUISITE: PH 620C or PH 630C. and PH 638B. TEXTS: Same as PH 638B. PREREQUISITE: PH PH 622C NUCLEAR PHYSICS LABORATORY (0-3). 637B. Discussions and experiments on the interaction of nuclear radiations with matter. Detection techniques. PREREQ- PH 646A ADVANCED NUCLEAR PHYSICS I (3-0). UISITE: PH 621C (may be taken concurrently). Partial wave analysis of scattering, the theories of nuclear reactions, nuclear forces. TEXTS: Blatt and Weisskopf, PH 630C ELEMENTARY ATOMIC PHYSICS (4-0). Theoretical Nuclear Physics; Sachs, Nuclear Theory; Bethe Elementary particles, interaction of particles, photoelectric and Morrison, Elementary Nuclear Theory; the periodicals effect, electron diffraction, the nuclear atom. Bohr model of of nuclear physics. PREREQUISITES: PH 639A, PH 367A, the atom, energy levels in atoms, optical and X-ray spectra. and PH 712A. Pauli exclusion principle. Zeeman effect, Schroedinger's PH 647A ADVANCED NUCLEAR PHYSICS II (3-0). equation. TEXT: Weidner and Sells, Elementary Modern Nuclear models, theory of beta-decay, theory of gamma Physics. PREREQUISITES: PH 152B and PH 240C or emission, theory of alpha-decay. TEXTS: Blatt and Weiss- equivalents. kopf, Theoretical Nuclear Physics; Sachs, Nuclear Theory; PH 631C ATOMIC PHYSICS LABORATORY (0-3). Bethe and Morrison, Elementary Nuclear Theory; the peri- Quantitative laboratory exercises in atomic physics. PRE- odicals of nuclear physics. PREREQUISITE: PH 646A. REQUISITE: PH 620C or PH 630C (must be taken concurrently). PH 648A HIGH ENERGY PHYSICS (3-0). Introduction to techniques and theories. Topics selected from scattering,

PH 635B ATOMIC PHYSICS I (5-0). Special theory of relativistic particle dynamics, nuclear reactions, elementary relativity. Fundamental particles, interactions of particles, particles, and accelerators and other experimental equip- photoelectric effect, wave-particle duality, Rutherford scat- ment. TEXTS: Jackson, Physics of Elementary Particles; tering, elementary quantum mechanics, Schroedinger equa- Ritson, Techniques of High Energy Physics. PREREQUI- tion, quantum mechanical operators, Bohr theory of the SITES: PH 636B or 671B, PH 638B, PH 711A. atom, quantum mechanical solution for the hydrogen atom, vector model of the atom, quantum numbers, Pauli exclu- PH 650B PHYSICS OF ELECTRICAL DISCHARGES sion principle, periodic table of the elements. TEXTS: IN GASES (4-0). A course covering the fundamental proc- Richtmyer, Kennard and Lauritsen, Modern Physics, and esses occurring in electrical discharge in gases. Emission Sproull, Modern Physics. PREREQUISITES: Ma 230D and of electrons from surfaces, excitation, ionization, recombi- PH 240C. nation, deexcitation of atoms and molecules. Mobility and diffusion, electrical breakdown in gases. Glow and arc dis- PH 636B ATOMIC PHYSICS II (4-3). Fine structures in charges, sheaths, experimental methods. TEXTS: Cobine. the hydrogen atom, Zeeman effect, selection rules in atomic Gaseous Conductors; Von Engel, Ionized Gases; Francis, spectra, X-rays, binding energies in molecules, molecular Ionization Phenomena in Gases. PREREQUISITES: PH structure, band theory of solids, semi-conductors, electron 630C or PH 635B. and nuclear spin resonance. Laboratory: Quantitative experiments related to the lecture material of PH 635B and PH PH 651 A REACTOR THEORY I (3-0). Nuclear fission, 636B. TEXTS: Richtmyer, Kennard and Lauritsen, Modern the diffusion and slowing down of neutrons, homogeneous Physics; Sproull, Modern Physics. PREREQUISITE: PH thermal reactors. TEXTS: Glasstone and Edlund, The Ele- 635B. ments of Nuclear Reactor Theory; Murray, Nuclear Reactor Physics. PREREQUISITES: PH 638B and Ma 113B or PH 637B NUCLEAR PHYSICS I (3-0). Basic nuclear equivalent. concepts; mass, binding energy and stability; radioactivity and decay law; passage of charged particles and photons PH 652A REACTOR THEORY II (3-0). A continuation through matter. TEXTS: Segre, Nuclei and Particles; Kap- of PH 651A. Time behavior, reactor control, reflected sys- lan, Nuclear Physics; others as required by instructor. tems, multigroup theory, heterogeneous systems, perturba- PREREQUISITES: PH 365C. PH 636B or PH 671B. tion theory. TEXTS: Glasstone and Edlund, The Elements of Nuclear Reactor Theory; Murray, Nuclear Reactor PH 638B NUCLEAR PHYSICS II (3-3). Further nuclear Theory. PREREQUISITE: PH 651A. properties; electric and magnetic moments: nuclear models; nuclear reactions; fission: theories of alpha-, beta-, and PH 653A REACTOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (0-2). gamma-decay. Laboratory: experiments on the interactions Experiments using the AGN-201 reactor including the meas-

142 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL PHYSICS urement of the basic reactor parameters and the study of PH 672A ATOMIC SPECTROSCOPY (3-0). Vector model its transient behavior. TEXTS: Aerojet-General, Elementary- of the atom and applications to complex spectra, selection Reactor Experimentation; Hughes, Pile Neutron Research; rules, line broadening problems and applications to diag- Glasstone and Edlund, The Elements of Nuclear Reactor nostic measurements in plasma systems, spectroscopic tech- Theory. PREREQUISITES: PH 651A and PH 652A. (The niques, selected topics on physics of the upper atmosphere. latter may be taken concurrently.) TEXTS: Griem, Plasma Spectroscopy; Kuhn, Atomic Spec- tra. PREREQUISITES: PH 636 or PH 671 or consent of PH 654A PLASMA PHYSICS I (4-0). Introduction to instructor. physical and mathematical concepts fundamental to various branches of plasma physics such as ionospheric communi- PH 675A ATOMIC COLLISION PROCESSES (3-0). cations, ion propulsion, plasma amplifiers and controlled Atomic interactions of interest in low density gases. Classi- fusion. Hydromagnetic and Boltzmann equations. Behavior cal and quantum description of the collision process. Se- lected applications of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields. Inter- from the physics of the upper atmos- action of electromagnetic waves with plasmas. Magnetic phere, effects of solar radiation on atmospheric and inter- planetary pressure. Debye length. TEXTS: Uman, Introduction to gases. Discussion of pertinent experimental tech- Plasma Physics; Rose and Clark, Plasma and Controlled niques. TEXT: McDaniels, Collision Phenomena in Ionized Fusion; Glasstone and Loveberg, Controlled Thermonuclear Gases. PREREQUISITES: PH 636B or PH 671B, or con- Reactions. PREREQUISITES: PH 367A. PH 541B, and sent of instructor. PH 636B or PH 671B. PH 701C INTRODUCTION TO THE METHODS OF THEORETICAL PHYSICS (4-0). An introduction to the PH 655A PLASMA PHYSICS II (4-0). A continuation techniques used in solving problems in the classical field of Plasma Physics I. Collisions of plasma particles, relaxa- theories. Vector and scalar fields are studied. Solutions to tion times. Bremsstrahlung and cyclotron radiation. Longi- the source-free equations most often encountered in physics tudinal oscillations of electrons and ions. Hydromagnetic are discussed. TEXT: To be chosen by instructor. PRE- waves in plasmas. Transport theory using the Boltzmann REQUISITES: Calculus of Several Variables, Algebra of equation. Pinch effect, plasma instabilities. TEXTS: Same Complex Numbers, Vector Algebra, and Ordinary Differen- as PH 654A. PREREQUISITE: PH 654A. tial Equations (the latter may be taken concurrently). PH 656A ADVANCED PLASMA THEORY (3-0). Topics PH 705B ELECTRONIC PROCESSES IN MATERIALS covered will be related to research problems in progress or (4-2). Fourth term in the sequence of fundamental physics contemplated and will depend somewhat on the interests for students in Electrical Engineering and Electronics. of the students enrolled. Possible topics are: diffusion in Crystals and lattice properties, X-ray diffraction, free-elec- plasmas, radiation from plasmas and the propagation of tron theory, electrical conductivity, band theory, Brillouin hydromagnetic waves in plasmas. Use will be made of the zones, effective mass, holes, intrinsic and impurity semi- current scientific literature. TEXTS: Allis, Buchsbaum and conductors, diodes, transistors, thermoelectric effects, brief Bers, Waves in Anisotropic Plasmas; Lecture Notes. PRE- treatment of magnetic properties. TEXTS: Kittel, Intro- REQUISITE: PH 655A. duction to Solid State Physics. 2nd ed. ; Azaroff and Bro- phy. Electronic Processes in Materials. PREREQUISITE: PH 657A ADVANCED PLASMA PHYSICS II (3-0). A PH 605B. continuation of Physics 656A with emphasis on the current scientific literature. PREREQUISITE: PH 656A. PH 711A QUANTUM MECHANICS I (3-0). The need for quantum theory. Matrix formulation of quantum me- PH 670B ATOMIC PHYSICS I (3-0). Fundamental par- chanics. The square well potential and the harmonic oscil- ticles, kinetic theory, forces on particles, special theory of lator. TEXTS: Dirac, Quantum Mechanics: Schiff, Quan- relativity, wave-particle duality, quantum mechanics of tum Mechanics. PREREQUISITES: PH 156A, PH 366B, simple systems, quantum mechanical operators, Bohr model PH 636B or PH 671B. of the atom, quantum mechanical solution for the hydrogen atom. TEXTS: Richtmyer, Kennard and Lauritsen, Modern PH 712A QUANTUM MECHANICS II (3-0). The hyper- Physics; Eisberg, Fundamentals of Modern Physics; Lec- drogen atom. Time independent and time dependent ture Notes. PREREQUISITES: PH 152B or equivalent. Ma turbation theory. Identical particles and spin. TEXTS: 240C or equivalent, and PH 270B. Dirac, Quantum Mechanics; Schiff. Quantum Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: PH 711 A.

PH 671B ATOMIC PHYSICS II (3-3). Fine structure in PH 713A QUANTUM MECHANICS III (3-0). Atoms, the hydrogen atom, vector model of the atom, spectroscopic relativistic particle wave equations and solutions. TEXTS: notation, Zeeman effect, many-electron atoms, periodic table Schiff, Quantum Mechanics; Bjorken and Drell. Relativistic in terms of quantum numbers, X-rays, binding in molecules. Quantum Mechanics. PREREQUISITE: PH 712A. Laboratory: Quantitative experiments related to lecture material of PH 670B and PH 671B. TEXTS: Richtmyer, PH 714A QUANTUM FIELD THEORY I (3-0). Quanti-

Kennard and Lauritsen, Modern Physics; Eisberg, Funda- zation of scalar, spinor, and vector fields. Interacting fields. mentals of Modern Physics; Lecture Note9. PREREQUI- TEXT: Schweber. Introduction to Relativistic Quantum SITE: PH 670B. Field Theory. PREREQUISITE: PH 713A.

143 PHYSICS NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

PH 715A QUANTUM FIELD THEORY II (3-0). The specific heat, thermal conductivity, properties of phonons. S-matrix and renormalization. Strong, electromagnetic, and TEXTS: Wannier, Solid State Theory; Kittel, Introduction weak interactions. Introduction to dispersion relations. to Solid State Physics. PREREQUISITES: PH 635B, PH TEXT: Schweber, Introduction to Relativistic Quantum 636B. Field Theory. PREREQUISITE: PH 714A. PH 726A PHYSICS OF SOLIDS II (4-2). A continuation of PH 725A, with laboratory experiments relating to both PH 718A PHYSICAL GROUP THEORY (3-0). Invari- terms. Electronic properties of solids, band theory, effective ance of quantum mechanical systems to certain groups of electron masses, Brillouin zones, semiconductors, and solid transformations. Topics to be selected from finite rotation state electronic devices, magnetic properties, spin resonance, groups and crystal symmetries, the continuous rotation dielectrics, superconductivity, imperfections in solids and group in three dimensions, transformation groups associated the related mechanical properties. TEXTS: Wannier, Solid with elementary particle symmetries. PREREQUISITE: State Theory; Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics. PH 712A. PREREQUISITE: PH 725A.

PH 719A RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY (3-0). Foun- PH 730A PHYSICS OF THE SOLID STATE (4-2). Fun- dations of the special theory of relativity, tensor calculus, damental theory and related laboratory experiments dealing introduction to the general theory of relativity. Experimen- with solids, with emphasis on electronic properties; crystals, tal tests of the general theory. Introduction to cosmology. binding energy, anisotropy, lattice oscillations, band theory TEXTS: Eddington, The Mathematical Theory of Relativ- of electrons, Brillouin zones, "hole" concept, effective mass, ity; Bondi, Cosmology. PREREQUISITES: PH 636B or electrical conductivity, insulators and semiconductors, fluo- PH 671B, Ma 260C, PH 368A. rescence, junction rectifiers, transistors, magnetism, and dielectrics. TEXTS: Dekker, Solid State Physics; Kittel, PH 723B THEORY OF SOLID STATE AND QUANTUM Introduction to Solid State Physics. PREREQUISITES: PH DEVICES (4-0). Theory of the structure of solids with 636B or PH 671B. emphasis on the electronic structure. Topics in quantum mechanics with special emphasis on quantum behavior as PH 731 A ADVANCED SOLID STATE PHYSICS I (3-0). applied to quantum electronic devices: stimulated emission, Fundamental studies of selected topics in solid state phys- spin resonance, rotating coordinate, relaxation times. Ap- ics. The material selected will be chosen from: Theory of plications to masers, lasers, parametric amplifiers, magnetic specific heats, transport properties, one electron approxi- instruments, extreme constant frequency oscillators, etc. mations, the cohesive energy, mechanical properties, optical TEXTS: Decker, Introduction to Solids; Herzberg, Atomic properties, magnetic properties, and resonance methods. Spectra; Singer, Masers. PREREQUISITE: PH 630C. TEXTS: Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics; Seitz, Modern Theory of Solids; Seitz and Turnbull, Solid State PH 724A THEORY OF QUANTUM ELECTRONIC DE- Physics; and current literature. PREREQUISITES: PH VICES (4-0). Theory of the operation of electronic devices 730A and PH 711A. depending on energy states and the quantum nature of PH 732A ADVANCED SOLID STATE PHYSICS II radiation; topics in quantum mechanics, spin resonance, (3-0). A continuation of PH 731 A with emphasis on the rotating coordinates, relaxation times, internal fields; appli- study of the current scientific literature. PREREQUISITE: cation to specific electronic devices such as masers, micro- PH 731A. wave and optical pumping devices, paramagnetic amplifiers, magnetic instruments. TEXTS: Herzberg, Atomic Spectra; PH 750E PHYSICS COLLOQUIUM (0-1). Discussion of Townes, Microwave Spectroscopy. PREREQUISITE: PH topics of current interest in the field of physics and student 620C or equivalent. thesis reports.

PH 725A PHYSICS OF SOLIDS I (4-0). Theory of the PH 770A READING IN ADVANCED PHYSICS (3-0). structure and properties of solids; crystal symmetry and the Supervised reading from the periodicals in fields of ad- anisotropy of physical properties, binding energy, lattice vanced physics selected to meet the needs of the student.

144 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

NAVY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS CENTER

Edward Joseph O'Donnell, Rear Admiral, U.S. Navy; DEFENSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS COURSE Director; B.S., U.S., Naval Academy, 1929; U.S. Naval The Navy Management Systems Center has been estab- Postgraduate School, 1939. lished at the U.S. Naval Postgraduate School to conduct Herman Paul Ecker, Professor; Associate Director the Defense Management Systems Course. Faculty members (1957)*; B.A.. Pomona College, 1948; M.A., Claremont have been drawn from the regular faculty of the Postgrad- Graduate School, 1949: Ph.D. (pending). uate School to insure the academic excellence of the program. Mii.es Edminston Twaodel, Commander, U.S. Navy: Cur- developed ricular Officer/Assistant Professor (1965): B.S., Ohio The Planning-Programming-Budgeting System since 1961 the Office the Secretary of has State Univ., 1959; M.S., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School. by of Defense provided a framework for examining various force mixes, 1962. allocation of resources, and relationships to military capa-

Roscoe Lloyd Barrett, Jr., Lieutenant Colonel, U.S. Ma- bilities. rine Corps; Assistant Professor (1966); B.J., Univ. of The objective of the Defense Management Systems Course Missouri, 1947; M.S., U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, is to provide an appreciation of the concepts, principles, 1964. and methods of defense management as they concern plan-

Sherman Wesley Blandin, Jr., Captain, SC, U.S. Navy, ning, programming, budgeting, and related activities. The Associate Professor (1962); B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, course will cover force planning, and DoD programming, 1944; B.S., Georgia Institute of Technology, 1952; M.S., program budgeting, and their interrelationships with re- 1953. source management systems. Emphasis will be placed on the analytical aspects of management; including require-

Frank Elmer Childs, Professor (1965) ; B.A., Willamette ments studies, systems analysis, cost/effectiveness, cost esti- Univ., 1934; M.B.A., Univ. of Southern California, 1936; mating and analysis. Ph.D., Univ. of Minnesota, 1956. Students are not expected to become experts or techni-

Ronald Kochems, Assistant Professor (1965) ; B.S., Pur- cians in the various disciplines and subjects included in due Univ., 1961; M.S., 1962; Ph.D. (pending). the curriculum. The objectives are to provide orientation on the overall functioning of the defense management proc-

William Alan Mauer, Associate Professor (1966) ; A.B., ess, insights as to what defense management requires in San Jose State, 1955; M.S., Agricultural and Mechanical the way of inputs and analyses for decision making, under- College of Texas, 1957: Ph.D.. Duke Univ.. 1960. standing of the principles, methods and techniques used, Burton Ross Pierce, Assistant Professor (1964); A.B., and awareness of the interfaces between the management Harvard Univ., 1956; M.B.A., Stanford Univ., 1962. requirements of the DoD components and the Office of the Secretary of Defense. Donald Blessing Rice, Jr., Lieutenant, U.S. Army; As-

sistant Professor (1965) ; B.S., Univ. of Notre Dame. CALENDAR- Academic Year 1966-67 1961; M.S., Purdue Univ., 1962; Ph.D., 1965.

26 June - 22 July 1966 Symposium

John Dancy Richardson, Associate Professor (1966) ; 31 July - 5 August 1966 Flag Rank/General B.S., Univ. of North Carolina, 1953; M.A., George Wash- ington, 1960; Ph.D., Univ. of North Carolina (pending). 16 October- 11 November 1966 Class #1 27 November -20 December 1966 Class #2 Charles Ernest Tychsen, Lieutenant Colonel, U.S. Air 8 January - 3 February 1967 Class Force; Associate Professor (1965); B.S., Princeton #3 Univ., 1943; M.S., Air Force Institute of Technology. 12 February -10 March 1967 Class #4

1953; M.B.A., Ohio State Univ., 1956; Ph.D., Univ. of 19 March - 24 March 1967 .... Flag Rank/General Maryland (pending). 2 April -28 April 1967 Class #5

7 May - 2 June 1967 Class #6 *The year of joining the Postgraduate School faculty indi cated in parenthesis. 11 June -7 July 1967 Class #7

145 GRADUATES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL STATISTICS GRADUATES BY YEARS

1946- 1951- 1956-

1950 1955 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 Total

Bachelor of Arts 4 59 47 70 180

B.S. n Aeronautical Engineering 73 212 212 57 36 29 34 25 678

B.S. n Chemistry 3 3 6

B.S. n Communications Engineering 42 12 13 7 30 33 137

B.S. n Electrical Engineering 62 115 98 50 60 31 59 53 528

B.S. n Engineering Electronics 94 177 92 18 45 28 44 37 535

B.S. n Environmental Science 12 12

B.S. n Management 9 3 14 27 53

B.S. n Mechanical Engineering 43 116 52 22 14 10 16 20 293

B.S. n Meteorology 16 104 77 25 30 16 21 16 305

B.S. n Physics 15 36 8 21 16 16 14 126

Bachelor of Science 56 94 103 116 115 119 130 733

Total Baccalaureate Degrees 288 795 706 304 342 328 413 410 3586

n Aeroelectronics 4 4

n Aeronautical Engineering 3 4 12 7 10 36

n Chemistry 16 2 1 2 21

n Materials Science 5 5

n Electrical Engineering 7 34 46 26 19 15 15 11 173

n Engineering Electronics 68 120 78 11 23 24 22 24 370

n Management 74 87 89 71 85 406

n Management/Data Processing 7 15 22

n Mechanical Engineering 20 36 48 11 14 9 8 7 153

n Meteorology 23 19 40 14 14 6 10 9 135

n Operations Research 31 32 63

n Physics 25 104 20 28 39 15 33 264

Total Master's Degrees 118 251 397 175 209 221 212 253 1836

Aeronautical Engineer 1 3 4

Doctor of Philosophy 1 1 2 3 5 3 15

TOTAL DEGREES 406 1046 1104 480 553 553 630 670 5442

146 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GRADUATES

GRADUATES OF THE POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL 1965

DIPLOMAS OF COMPLETION, KEATHLEY, Charles C, LCDR, USN KENNEDY, Walter J., LCDR, USN ENGINEERING SCIENCE KILLINGER, Edwin E., LT, USN KROLLMAN, Richard W., LT, USN KRAMER, George, CDR, USN LANGFORD, John A., Jr., LT, USN ALLGOOD, Dempsey E., LT, USN KUNKEL, Barry E., LT, USN LOTTON, Donald E., LCDR, USN

AUSTIN, Paul B., LT, USN LARKIN, Robert J., LT, USN McVEIGH, Paul J., CDR, USN BAXTER, Robert C, LT, USN LIGHTON, Paul G., LT, USN PETRIE, Roland A., LCDR, USN

BELL, John M., LT, USN LUPFER, Alexander M., Jr., LT, USN TYSON, Billie C, LCDR, USN

BLACKMON, Thomas L.. LT, USN MATTSON, Donald J., LCDR, USN BLOSE, Larry E., LT, USN MESTON, Stanley S., LTJG, USN DIPLOMAS OF COMPLETION, BORDEN, Douglas H., Jr., LCDR, USN MONSON, Arthur C, LT, USNR MANAGEMENT/DATA BOTHWELL, Michael P., LT, USN MORR, James F., LT, USNR PROCESSING

BROWN, Michael J., LT, USN OAKSMITH, David E., Jr., LCDR, USN KATZ, Donald L, LT, USN CALVERT, William R., LT, USN O'CONNELL, Michael J., LTJG, USN SMITH, Jay R., LCDR, USN CAMPBELL, Carlos C, LT, USN O'MALLEY, Anthony V., Jr., LTJG, USN

CAMPBELL, Craig S., LT, USN O'NEILL, Daniel I., LT, USN DIPLOMAS OF COMPLETION, CARRELL, Douglas E., LT, USNR ORD, George D., Jr., LT, USN TECHNICAL CURRICULUM CASEY, Richard J., LT, USN PARKER, Robert C, Jr., LT, USN

CRABBS, Edward H., Jr., LT, PATTERSON, Larry L., LT, USN USN DOYLE, Thomas J., LT, USN CREIGHTON, George C, III, LT, USN QUAST, Harry S., LT, USN FITZGERALD, Robert M., CAPT, USMC Harrison R., CROWSON, Christopher G., LT, USN RAYNIS, LT, USN HOHENSTEIN, Clyde G., LT, USN DEFFET, L., LT, John B., LT, Thomas USN REDMAN. USN HOUSTON, Richard S., LT, USN LT, DESROSIERS, Roland J., LCDR, USN RICE, Edward J., USNR ROURKE, William B., CAPT, USMC DICK, Calvin R., LT, RODERICK, T., LT, USN John USN SWARTWOOD, Robert E., CAPT, USMC DRAKE, James A., Jr., LT, USNR ROSS, William M., Jr., LT, USN TAYLOR, Philip H., LT, USN DUPLER, Larry N., LT, USN ROTH, Charles J., Jr., LT, USNR EASTMAN, Leonard C, LT, USN ROUDEBUSH, Loren K., LT, USNR DIPLOMAS OF COMPLETION, EIBERT, Don C, LCDR, USN SALISBURY, Herbert D., LT, USN GENERAL LINE CURRICULUM EKSTROM, John S., LT, USN SAUNDERS, William H., Ill, LCDR.

ELLINGWOOD, Arthur R., Jr., LT, USN USN CHAI, Hsiang-Yeh, LCDR EYER, Jack W., LT, USN SELTZER, James L„ LT, USN Republic of China Navy

FLYNN, Samuel C, Jr., LT, USN SIMON, James W., LT, USN YANG, Yung-Sheng, LCDR FOSS, Donald M., LT, USN SMITH, Frank W., LT, USN Republic of China Navy FULLERTON, George E., Jr., LT, USN SMITH, Samuel, Jr., LT, USN FLORES, Carlos U., LT GALBRAITH, William R., LT, USN STEPHENS, William L., LT, USN Ecuadorian Navy GEANEY, John R., LT, USN SWANSON, Matthew C, LT, USN MINO, Vicente, LT GIERSCH, Albert E., LT, USN TOPP, David P., LT, USN Ecuadorian Navy

GOODE, Martin, CDR, USN VAN SLYKE, James C, Jr., LTJG, USN MERSHA, Girma, LT GUDMUNDSON, Marvin L., LT, USN WALLACE, Robert C, LCDR, USN Imperial Ethiopian Navy GUILBAULT, Roland G., LT, USN WALTER, Merritt N., LTJG, USNR MESFIN, Bedlou, LT

HAAS, William R., LT, USN WARDWELL, Arthur F., Jr., LT, USN Imperial Ethiopian Navy

HARWELL, Layne H., LT, USN WELCH, William C. Jr., LT, USN TELAHOUN, Demissei, LT

HEADLEY, Allen B., LCDR, USN WHITE. Tramel A., Jr., LTJG, USNR Imperial Ethiopian Navy

HEAL, Charles W., Jr., LT, USNR WICKERT, Alan J., LTJG, USN GHAVAMI, Taghi, LTJG HEATON, John E., LT, USN WILSON, Alger L., LT, USN Imperial Iranian Navy HENDREN, Edward D., LTJG, USN WITHERSPOON, Emanuel E., LT, USN SANGELAJI, Ali, LTJG

HERBERGER, Albert J., LCDR, USN Imperial Iranian Navy HERIG, Richard W., LT, USN DIPLOMAS OF COMPLETION, KIM, Tae Chip, LCDR HILL, Edward R., LT, USN MANAGEMENT Republic of Korea Navy HILL, Lucio W., LCDR, USN PAK, Tong Kyu, LT HITTSON, Ward Y., T, USN BARRETT, Charles W„ LCDR, USN Republic of Korea Navy

HODAPP, David H., LT, USN DUNHAM, Chester J., Jr., LT, USN YI, To Hyon, LCDR

HOPF Elwood J., LCDR, USN HARRIS, Richard A., LT, USN Republic of Korea Navy HOSPES, Alan E., LT, USN HEELEY, Eric W. L., LT, USN FAJARDO, Dario T., LTJG HOUGHTON, Harry A., Jr., LT, USN HIBBARD, Grant W., LT, USN Philippine Navy

HUBBARD, Charles W.. Jr., LT, USN HINES, Kenneth F., LT, USN TOLENTINO, Samuel G., LT HUYSER, Harvey L., LT, USN JANIEC, Roy T., CDR, USN Philippine Navy

JOHNSON, Dale W., LCDR, USN JEFFRIES, Rollin E., Jr., LCDR, USN RATASIRAYAKORN, Saroj, LT KARRE, David H., LT, USN KARGE, Ronald E., LCDR, USN Royal Thai Navy

147 GRADUATES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

AN, Nguyen-Van, LT RILEY, Raymond T., LCDR, USN FAHRNEY, David L., LT, USN Vietnamese Navy ROBERTS, Charles T., LCDR, USN FRYKSDALE, Frans H., LCDR, USN CON, Phan-Van, LT ROSE, Russell L., LCDR, USN FURGERSON, John A., LCDR, USN Vietnamese Navy SCHUSSLER, Gerald A., LT, USN GRACY, Ronald A., LT, USN HAY, Phan-Dong, LT SERVICE, James E., LCDR, USN HALEY, George K., LT, USN Vietnamese Navy SMITH, Donald D., LT, USN HENDRICKS, Paul V., LT, USN

PHU, Luu-Dinh, LT STOKES, Bobby J., LT, USN HEYDEN, Hanley E., LT, USN Vietnamese Navy TAYLOR, Jeremy D., LT, USN HINCHY, Frank T., LT, USNR THOMPSON, Emil S., Jr., LCDR, USN HOEVER, Milton H., LT, USN BACHELOR OF ARTS TOBIAS, David L., LCDR, USN HUFFMAN, Donald R., CAPT, USMC

TOMLINSON, Alva C, LCDR, USN KAGEY, L. Owen, Jr., LCDR, USN ACKERMAN, Warren J., LCDR, USN TOUCHTON, John H., Jr., LT, USN KIHUNE, Robert K., LT, USN ANDERSEN, Thomas C, LT, USN VOLLAIRE, Robert L., LT, USN KING, John R., Jr., LT, USN BARSTAD, Clarence H., LT, USN WALKER, Wilburn O., LT, USN KOSTENBADER, Karl T., LT, USNR BELAY, William J., LCDR, USN WESELESKEY, Allen E., LT, USN LAWLER, Casimir E., LT, USN BENNETT, Robert E., CDR, USN WESOLOWSKI, Walter, LT, USN LOMAN, Cleve E., Jr., LT, USN BORGSTROM, Charles O., Jr., LCDR, USN WILLIS, Clyde P., LT, USN McKEOWN, Thomas J., Jr., LCDR, USN WINFREY, Harvey M., Jr., LCDR NOLL, Charles F., LT, USN BROWN, Howard A., LT, USN WOLYNIES, Jon G., LT, USN PATTERSON, Bruce A., LT, USCG BULLMAN, Howard L., LCDR, USN WOOD, Walter S., LT, USN QUIGLEY, Francis J., LT, USN CECIL, Durward, LCDR, USN WUNSCH, John R., LCDR, USN RODER, Peter S., LT, USN DAVID, Ralph H., LT, USN SIMMONS, Dean M., LT, USN DAVIS, Noble J., Jr., LCDR, USN BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN THOMPSON, Richard D., LT, USCG DAVISON, Gregory L., LT, USN WEBB, Paul H., LT, USN ELLIS, James L., LCDR, USN AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING WILKINS, George H., LT, USN ENGEL, Richard E., LCDR, USN BANK, Milton H., II, LT, USN WILLIAMS, Richard E., LCDR, USN FERRARINI, Richard L., LT, USN BETTS, Stanton W., LT, USN YANCURA, John R., LT, USNR FISCHER, Robert J., LT, USN BROOKS, Dennis M., LT, USN FLYNN, Donald J., LCDR, USN BYNG, Weston H., LT, USN BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN FRASER, Robert E., LCDR, USN DEMAND, Daniel H., LT, USN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING GARDELLA, John K., LT, USN DIFIORE, Harold J., CAPT, USMC GILLES, John M., LT, USN ACKART, Leon E., LT, USN GOUGH, Melvin N., Jr., LT, USN GODSEY, Shirley T., LT, USN AGNEW, Dwight M., Jr., LCDR, USN HENDERSON, Arnold H., LT, USN GOODSELL, Norton H., LCDR, USN ALEXANDER, Edward E., Jr., LT, USN HOWER, James J., LCDR, USN HASSEL, Rolland R., LT, USN ASCHER, David C, LT, USN LUDERS, Ernest C, LT, USN HELLMAN, John S., LT, USN BIEGEL, Herbert K., LCDR, USN MANAHAN, Maurice H., LT, USN JELLISON, Robert K., LCDR, USN BISHOP, Larry D., LT, USN McCULLOUGH, Martin L., LT, USN JONES, James F., LCDR, USN BLYTHE, Russell M., LCDR, USN McGILL, James A., LT, USN KENNEY, Theodore C, Jr., LCDR, USN BRADY, Allen C, LCDR, USN MrHUGH, John T., LCDR, USN KIDD, William S., LCDR, USN BROOKS, Otis M., LT, USN McNULLA, James E., Ill, LT, USN KLING, William T., LCDR, USN BROWNLIE, Robert C, Jr., LT, USN MIRCHEFF, Robert A., LCDR, USN KREINBERG, Alfred G., CDR, USN BURRIS, John R., LCDR, USN MORRISON, Jerry E., LT, USN LAMER, Wayne L., LT, USN CAMERON, Jim F., LCDR, USN NEWBURY, Alfred C, LCDR, USN LANGE, Christian A., Jr., LT, USN CECELSKI, Arthur R., LCDR, USN ROBINSON, Martin E., LT, USNR LEE, Bobby C, LT, USN CREAGER, Leslie F., LT, USN RUNZO, Melvin A., LT, USN LINEBERGER, Preston H., LT, USN DALLA MURA, Bart M., Jr., LCDR, SMITH, William B., LT, USN LIPFORD, Charles E., LCDR, USN USN SWORD, Curtis S., Jr., LT, USN McCARDELL, James E., Jr., LCDR, USN DICKERSON, Kenneth A., LT, USN WILLEY, Bruce T., LT, USN McCARTHY, James P., Jr., LCDR, USN DOUGH DRILL, Charles W., LT, USN WILLMARTH, John M., CAPT, USMC MELVILLE, Charles W., Jr., LCDR, USI^ EMMETT, Richard F., LT, USN WOODROW, Warren A., LT, USN METCALF, Louis E., Jr., LCDR, USN EVANS, Frederic H., LT, USN MYERS, Charles B., LCDR, USN FLIKEID, Jack R., LT, USN BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NEWSOM, Joe R., LT, Frederick LT, USN COMMUNICATIONS GOSEBRINK, J., USN O'BRIEN, Charles Jr., USN GUNDERSON, Donald H., LT, USN J., CDR, ENGINEERING OHLRICH, Walter E., Jr., CDR, USN HODKINS, William F., LT, USN

ORTEGA, Joseph J., LCDR, USN AVEN, Donald J., LCDR, USN HOILAND, Odd A., LCDR, PERSONS, George R., LT, USN BOWLEY, George A., LT, USN Norwegian Navy PETHERICK, George L., LCDR, USN CARLL, Randall C, CAPT, USMC HOLMES, Donald D., LT, USN RAGEN, Jerome C, LT, USN CRUMPACKER, John P., LT, USN JARDINIANO, Tagumpay R., LT,

RALPH, Richard P., LCDR, USN I).- LONG, Clyde S., Jr., MAJ, USMC Philippine Navy RICE, Richard G., LCDR, USN ERIKSON, Theodore W., LT, USN JOHNSON, Joseph W., LT, USN

148 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GRADUATES

KONKEL, Harry W., LT, USN LYNCH, Clayton W., LT, USN SURRATT, Henry C, Jr., LT, USN KRUEGER, Milton E., LT. USN MOHIN, William B., LT, USCG VILORIA, Victor M., LCDR,

LEMAY, Urban R., Jr., LT, USN NARRO, Arthur T., LT, USN Venezuelan Navy LIN, Yu-Ping, LCDR, NOWE, Basil, LCDR, WEBSTER, Edward C, LT, USN Republic of China Navy Royal Canadian Navy

MAUZ, Henry H., Jr., LT, USN O'HALLORAN, William J., LT, USN BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MAY, Donald R., LT, USNR RADZYMINSKI, John T., Sr., METEOROLOGY MORRISON, Daniel N., LCDR, USN CAPT, USMC ALLERTON, George N., CAPT, USMC MUSGROVE, Robert W., LT, USN SCHREINER, Raymond J., LCDR, USN BROWN, Dale S., Jr., LT, USN NGA, Ho-Ngoc, LT, SCHUTT, Harold J., LT, USN BUSCHMANN, Virginia, LT, USN Vietnamese Navy SCOTT, Douglas L., LT, USN CALHOON, Theodore H., LT, USN PENDLETON, Reid. LT, USN STIERS, Lawrence K., LT, USN COLE, Leonard I., Jr., LCDR, USN POOLE, James R., LT, USN SUMI, David A., LT, USCG DANIELS, Shane P., LT, USN PEREDO, Mario Sanchez, LCDR, THIBAULT, Joseph P. E., F/LT, GILCHRIST, James L., LT, USN Peruvian Navy Royal Canadian Air Force GILMORE, Kenneth D., LCDR, USN SMITH, Gene A., LT, USN THOMPSON, Amos D., Jr., JOHNSTON, Donald W., LT, USN SMITH, William J., LT, USN CAPT, USMC MITCHELL, Walter F., LT, USN STEELNACK, Robert A., LT, USN WILCOX, John B., LT, USN NOURIE, John E., LT, USN STILLWELL, William H., LT, USN ZAIMA, Yukio, LCDR, OLDS, Frederick A., LT, USN STREETER, Gregory F., LT, USN Japanese Maritime Self-Defense Force PRIEN, Richard K., LT, USN TAKASU, Koichi, LCDR, ROBINSON, John W., LT, USN Japanese Maritime Self-Defense Force BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN SCHWARTZ, Ralph C, LT, USN THOMPSON, Jack C, Jr., LCDR, USN ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE WILSON, James S., Jr., LT, USN TIRSCHFIELD, William J., CAPT, USMC BLANCH, Robert F., LT, USN CRICHTON, Ian BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN VAEWSORN, Thavorn, LCDR, R., LT, USN Thailand Navy HEIGES, John M., LT, USN PHYSICS KLEIN, Peter F., CDR, USN VAN ORDEN, Douglass L., LT, USN AMERSON, Hinton S., CAPT, USA KRAFT, Jacob C, LT, USN WANDELL, John J., Jr., LT, USN BICKHART, Donald F., CAPT, USA LESTER, Robert F., LT, USN WHEATON, William C, LT, USN CASWELL, Philip P., CAPT, USA LOWN, Paul C, LT, USN WICHMANN, Robert H., LT, USN COCKEY, John M., MAJ, USMC MORONEY, William M., LT, USN WYRICK, David H., LT, USN DALEBOUT, Ronald A., LT, USN OLIVERIO, Theodore E., LT, USN EDGERTON, Everett W., Jr., LT, USN BACHELOR OF SCIENCE PETREE, Noel H., Jr., LT, USN IN GRANT, Terry R., LT, USCG ENGINEERING ELECTRONICS RAUDIO, Victor J., LT, USN JOHNSON, J. M., Jr., MAJ, USMC VALDIVIA, German K., LTJG, Charles M., BARTON, Donald I., LUTZ, CAPT, USA LT, USNR Chilean Navy Charles W., LT, BEHRENDS, Paul 0., LT, USN QUANTOCK, USN Clifton BOYLE, Alonzo R., LT, USN SANDS, A., CAPT, USA BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BROWN, Donald L., LT, USN SHERMAN, Lee H., LCDR, USN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING VOYER, Irving L., LCDR, USN BUSH, Garret T., Ill, LT, USCG WHITE, Bernard A., LCDR, USN CONVERSE, Paul T., LT, USN ARATA, William A., III. LT, USN CORRELL, Ward W., LT, USN BUNCH, Peter A., LT, USN BACHELOR OF SCIENCE COSTE, James W., Jr., LT, USCG CLIFFORD, Norman, LCDR, USN CUNNINGHAM, Forrest T., Jr., LT, USN DAVIS, Donald B., LT, USCG ABDON, Albert L., LCDR, USN D'ARMAND, Monte, LT, USN DIEU, Nguyen Dinh, LTJG,, ABE, Henry H., LCDR, USN DUNDON, Alan M., LT, USN Vietnamese Navy ABELS, Robert F., CDR, USN ESTRELLA, Alfredo N., LT, GAGLIANO, Sam J., LT, USNR ABERCROMBIE, Jerry T., LCDR, USN Ecuadorian Navy GIMBER, Harry, M. S., Ill, LT, USN AUCOIN, James B., LT, USN FAJARDO, Patricio C, LT, JACOBSEN, Patrick M., LCDR, USCG BAKER, Norman K., CDR, USN Thilepn Navy KUHN, Edward R., LT, USN BEAGLE, Clyde A., Jr., LT, USN FESLER, Robert J., LT, USN LAMB, Dennis W., LT, USNR BEATTY, Don G., LT, USN FRICK, Walter B., LCDR, USN LINDSAY, Gene H., LT, USN BILLINGS, R. K., CDR, USN

GOSEN, Lawrence D., LT, USN MAGANIARIS, Spyros, LCDR, BLEDSOE, Paul I., LT, USN HALL, Howard L., LCDR, USN Royal Hellenic Navy BOW, Jean HEWITT, William B., LT, USCG MARSHALL, Walter W., LT, USN BRIGGS, John M., LT, USN INGLE, Carl E., LT, USN McGANKA, Steven W., LT, USN BRITTON, Jack B., LT, USN

JAHNSEN, Oscar R., LT, O'PEZIO, Lawrence J., LT, USCG BRUNSON, Wright "A.", Jr., Peruvian Navy SHARRAH, Ronald L., LCDR, USN LCDR, USN KETTLEWELL, John, LCDR, USN SIMPSON, Carlos E., LT, BUCKLIN, Jerald W., LCDR, USN LUTTON, Thomas C, LCDR, USCG Peruvian Navy CANNON, John W., LT, USN

149 GRADUATES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

CARLSON, Richard A., Jr., LT, USN MILLER, Alfred E., LCDR, USN GAGE, Robert J., LT, USN CARROLL, Thomas D., LT, USN MITCHELL, Henry H., LT, USN GENTZ, Richard C, LT, USN CHAUNCEY, Arvin R., LT, USN MOLENDA, Paul H., LT, USN NAGEL, "L," LT, USN

CLARE, James S., LCDR, USN MORAN, Richard A., LT, USN CLARK, Richard G., LCDR, USN MOYE, William B., Jr., LCDR, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN CLEMENT, Russell L., LT, USN MULHOLLAND, Howard E., LT, USN AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING CONNOLLY, Robert D., LCDR, USN MURPHY, William L., CDR, USN Richard L., LT, COSKEY, Kenneth L., LCDR, USN NICHOLAS, Philip W., CDR, USN BRECKON, USN Philip R., LT, COUGHLIN, Paul G., LCDR, USN NICHOLSON, John L., Jr., LCDR. USN HITE, USN A., LT, DAVIS, Frederick P., LCDR, USN NIEDBALA, Joseph T., Jr., USN JOHNSON, Robert USN DAVIS, Jimmy W., LT, USN OLMSTEAD, Clifford D., LT, USN LUNDBERG, Darwin D., CAPT, USMC James H., DEAL, Walter C, Jr., LCDR, USN PAGE, Richard L., LT, USN McGEE, MAJ, USMC David V., ECKERD, George E., CDR, USN PARRISH, Donald E., LCDR, USN SHUTER, CAPT, USMC H., LT, EDWARDS, Robert L., LT, USN PATTERSON, Jerry C, LCDR, USN SLOAN, John USN EDWARDS, Scott, LT, USN PERRY, Richard C, LT, USN TUCKER, Edwin B., LT, USN FRANKLIN, B. D., LCDR, USN PERRYMAN, Donald B., LCDR, USN WILCOX, Bruce A., LT, USN Albert N., LT, FREEMAN, Thomas L., LT, USN POWELL, William G., MAJ, USA YOST, USN

GALES, George M., LT, USN PRIES, Robert E., LT, USN

HAMILTON, Jackie D., LT, USN PURNELL, Clement I., LT, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN HARRE, James L., LT, USN RAINES, Frederick L., LT, USN CHEMISTRY HAYES, James C, LT, USN RASMUSSEN, Robert L., LCDR, USN BuCHWALD, Robert D., LT, USN HEILER, Frederick J., CAPT, USN RENICKY, Donald D., LCDR, USN SMITH, Jimmy F., LT, USN HEINZ, Paul R., LT, USN RICE, Lloyd K., LT, USN HERD, Robert V., LT, USN RIORDAN, William P., LT, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN HERZOG, Louis L., LCDR, USN F., LCDR, USN ROGERS, Warren ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING HESTER, James H., LT, USN ROTTGERING, Charles D., LT, USN HODGENS, Jack A., LT, USN RUONA, Keith V., LT, USN DONOHUE, Douglas J., LT, USN HOECH, Donald G., LT, USN SCANTLIN, Williams S., LT, USN FENICK, Joseph D., Jr., LT, USN

HOLINE, Leif A., LCDR, USN SCHAUB, John R., Jr., LT, USN HARRISON, Joe P., LT, USN HOPGOOD, Roy E., LCDR, USN SCHMIDT, Arnold C, LT, USN HOLLOWAY, Lowell J., LCDR, USN HUGHES, David L., CDR, USN SCHULZ, Paul H., LT, USN LEIBOVICH, Harry A., LT, INGLEY, Edmund W., LCDR, USN SCHUMACHER, Duane 0., LT, USN Argentine Navy IVERSON, Dale A., LT, USN SHEFFIELD, Hughie D., LCDR, USN NACE, Larry D., LT, USN JACKMOND, Arnold D., LT, USN SIRRINE, Jack D., LCDR, USN NUTTING, Roger M., LT, USN JOHNSON, Richard L., LCDR, USN SKELTON, Stuart A., LCDR, USN O'BRIEN, Gerald H., LT, USN KALINOWSKI, Raymond S., LT, USN SOLMS. William R., LT, USN UMBEER, Alejandro G.. LTJG, KAMRAD, Joseph G., CDR, USN SPADONI, Eugene A., LT, USN Chilean Navy KEARNS, James T., LCDR, USN SPENCER, Lane L., LT, USN VAUGHAN, Edward B., Jr., LT, USN KIM, Kyong K., LT, STEINBRINK, Earl E., LT, USN YOCKEY, Harry M., LT, USN Republic of Korea Navy STRONG, Daniel L., LT, USN KINGSBURY, Ben P., LCDR, USN TARKOWSKI, Ronald C, LT, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN

KIRKCONNELL, William B., LT, USN TREADWELL, Lawrence P., Jr., ENGINEERING ELECTRONICS

KIRKLAND, Thomas J., Ill, LT, USN LCDR, USN AUSTIN, Donald R., LT, USN KLIMETZ, Robert "J" W., LCDR, USN TURLAY, William E., LT, USN BORDEN, Edward L., LT, USN KNAPP, Norman E., Jr., LT, USN VADEN, Donald E., LCDR, USN BROWNE, Edward R., CAPT, USMC KNIGHT, Dennis K., LT, USN VEZINA, George R., LT, USN BURCHER, Philip E., LT, USN KOCH, Richard A., LCDR, USN WALKER, Benny R., LCDR, USN BUXCEY, Stanley, LCDR, KOLSTAD, Thomas C, LT, USN WHEELER, Robert L., LCDR, USN Royal Canadian Navy KRUEGER, Orton G., LT, USN WHITE, Billy J., LCDR, USN CASCIATO, Anthony C, LT, USN LAMBERTSON, Wayne R., LT, USN WILSON, Charles E., LCDR, USN COATES, Dannie R., LT, USN LANE, Robert E., LCDR, USN WILSON, Leonard 0., LT, USN FAJARDO, Patricio C, LCDR, LEAHY, Vincent LT, USN WIRTH, Charles G., LT, USN J., Chilean Navy LIBEY, John D., LCDR, USN WITCHER, John R., LCDR, USN HAMILTON, George S., CAPT, USMC MADDEN, Raymond A., LCDR, USN WOOD, Thomas B., CDR, USN JARDINE, Frederick D., LCDR, YOCOM, Ernest, LCDR, USN MADDOX, Ralph R., LT, USN Royal Canadian Navy YOUNGBLOOD, Norman L., Jr., MARKS, Arthur J., LT, USN JOHNSON, James E., LT, USN LCDR, USN MATHERSON, Richard, LCDR, USN KELLERMAN, Donald W., LCDR, USN McARTHUR, Robert R„ LCDR, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN LAKE, Rodney D., LCDR, USN Mclaughlin, James f., lt, usn AEROELECTRONICS LANDRUM, Raymond G., LT, USN Robert H., Jr., LT, USN McMAHON, Thomas J., LCDR, USN DeGRESS, Francis C, LT, USN MARKS,

150 NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL GRADUATES

MrNEIL, James E., F/LT, MADISON, Howard D., LT, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN Royal Canadian Air Force McCLELLAN, Parker W., LCDR, USN MATERIALS SCIENCE NEWELL, John W., LT, USN McMAHAN, Paul T., LCDR, USN CHUMLEY, Sylvester OGDEN, Don J., CAPT, USMC McQUAY, Robert B., LT, USNR G., LT, USN

SIMOES, Carlos P., LT, MELVILLE, Charles W., Jr.. LARSEN, John T., LT, USN Portuguese Navy LCDR, USN McHUGH, William M., LT, USN

SMITH, John S., LT, USN MERCIER, Arthur G., LCDR, USN MEINIG, George R., Jr., LT, USN SOULES, Charles W., LT, USN MESLER, Robert A., LCDR, USN RANDALL, Robert H., LT, USNR STOGIS, Peter D., LT, USN MILLER, Eric H., Jr., LCDR, USN YU, Wan Mu, LT, Government of MIXSON, Riley D., LT, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN the Republic of China Navy MOONEY, Malcolm T., LCDR, USN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING YOUNGMANN, Kenneth C, LT, USN MURPHY, William L., CDR, USN ALBERO, Carl M., LT, USN MYERS, Stephen G., LT, USN BAIRD, Winfield S., Jr., LCDR, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN NUNNALLY, Roy S., CDR, USN HIEP, Dang Dinh, LT, O'CONNOR, Michael G., II, LT, USN MANAGEMENT Vietnamese Navy OLSEN, Robert M., LCDR, USN ACOSTA, Delores Y., LT, USN KLORIG. William N.. LT, USN PAULSEN, Raymond E., LCDR, USN MIKLOS, Thomas LT, ADRIAN, Rodger J., CDR, USN J., USN PIAZZA, Thomas J., CDR, USN AINSWORTH, Gerald I., LT, USN PIERSALL, Charles H., Jr., LT, USN REDDEN, Edward G., LT, USN ALBERTSON, William H.. LCDR, USN WARD, John P., LT, USN RISINGER, Robert E., LT, USN BAINBRIDGE, John K., LT, USN ROBERTS, John A., LCDR, USN BAUMGARDNER, John F., LCDR. USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ROONEY, James J., Ill, LCDR. USCG BEIMA, Joseph C, LT, USCG METEOROLOGY RUSHING, Charles F, LCDR, USN BERRY, Henry M., CDR, USN SCOTT, William M., LT, USN BARRETT, Elizabeth M., LCDR, USN BIRD, David R., CDR, USN SHANLEY, John J., Jr., LT, USN BELL, James H., LT, USNR BROWN, Everett G., LCDR, USN SHAW, Joan D., LCDR, USN CARRIGAN, Richard C, LT, USN BURCHETT, Chester W., LT, USN SKELTON, Stuart A., LCDR, USN CASIMES, Theodore C, LCDR, USN BUSH, William J., LT, USN SMITH, Herbert R., LCDR, USN McCLOSKEY, Terry J., LT, USN CARR, Roland J., LCDR, USN SMITH, Marven M., LCDR, USNR PAGNILLO, Richard J., LT, USN CHAPMAN, Jean L., LCDR, USN SMITH, Roland E., CAPT, USMC RILEY, Larry M., LT, USN CORLEY, Bennie L.. LCDR, USN SPENCE, John C, LT, USCG SEGELBACHER, George F., LT. USN CUNNINGHAM, David F., LT, USCG SULLIVAN, John G., LCDR, USN SWOR. Jerry G., LCDR, USN DAVIDSON, Darrell U., CAPT, USMC THIEL, Louis H., Jr., LCDR, USN DAVIDSON, Harrison, W., Jr.. TROSKOSKI. Delores, LCDR, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE CDR, USN IN WELCHEL, Henry C, Jr., LCDR, USN OPERATIONS RESEARCH DAVIS, James B., CDR, USN WILSON, James C, CDR, USN DAVIS, Robert W., LCDR, USN BANGERT, James E., LT, USN WRIGHT, Walter F., Jr., LCDR, USN EARL, Robert J., LCDR, USN BANKS, Peter A., LCDR, WURTH, John G., LT, USN USN EDSON, Theodore M., LCDR, USN BEATTY, James R., Ill, LT, YEOMAN, Marjorie A., LT, USN USN FRANTZ, Donald E., LCDR, USCG BOICE, Frank B., LT, USN YOUNG, Jack L., LT, USN FRITZKE, Herman E., Jr., CDR, USN BROWN, Lee, LT, ZIPPERER, William R.. LT, USN USN GARRETT, Royce R., LT, USCG BUCK, Ralph V., LT, USN GEORGE, Hugo C, LT, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN DAVIS, Charles E., LT, USN

GOSLIN, Thomas C, Jr., LCDR, USN MANAGEMENT/DATA DOUGHERTY, William A., Jr.. LT, USN GRIFFIN, Gerald B.. LT. USN PROCESSING FISLER, Louis H., LT, USN HAMAKER, Rex G., LT, USN ADSIT, Carol A., LT, USN FLESCH, Robert W., LT, USN HARNAD, Paul K., LT, USN CHAPMAN, Charles B., Ill, LCDR, USN GRAESSLE, Philip G., LCDR, USN HEMANN, John W., CDR, USN DESSELLE, Albert M., MAJ, USMC GRANDJEAN, Charles A., LCDR, USN HODGENS, Jack A., LT, USN GRIMES, Fred M., LCDR, USN HARRISON, James L., CAPT, USMC

HODGKINS, William S., LT, USN JAHN, Donald R., LT, USN HAWORTH, Alvin G., Jr., LT, USN HORN, Emile L., LT, USN NELSON, Robert A., LT, USN HODGSKISS, William L., LT, USN HOWARD, Maynard L., LCDR, USNR OTTO, Ronald E., LT, USN HOWE, John E., LT, USN HUGHES, David L., CDR, USN PATTERSON, Jerry G., LT, USN KINGSTON, Kenneth H., LT, USN

JENSEN, Robert L., LT, USN REGAN, James D., LT, USN KIRSCH, Walter J., Ill, LT, USN KARGE, Ronald E., LCDR, USN SMITH, William L., LT, USN KNUTSON, Jerry G., LT, USN

KEARNS, James T., LCDR, USN SOJKA, Casimir E., LCDR, USN LOGAN, Robert S., Jr., LT, USN

KELT, William N., LCDR, USN STERNER, Francis J., LCDR, USN LYON, Frederick M., LT, USN

KENNEDY, Walter J., LCDR, USN WEST, Morgan W., MAJ, USMC MILLER, Richard A., CDR, USN KONOPIK, Joseph F., Jr., LT, USN WILLIAMS, Raymond L., LCDR, USN PAGE, James R., CDR, USN LEAMAN, Richard E., LCDR, USN ZEBERLEIN, George V., Jr., LCDR, POWELL, Wendell W., LT, USN LESLIE, William H., LT, USN USN REILLY, Joseph V., Jr., LT, USN

151 GRADUATES NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL

RUSSELL, Kay, LT, USN KELLY, Patrick J., CAPT, USA CERES, Robert L., LT, USN SEARIGHT, Murland W., LCDR, USN KENASTON, George W., LT, USN FURMINGER, Harry C, LT, USN SLANKARD, Max L., CDR, USN KINNIER, John W., LT, USN GATJE, Peter H., LT, USN STANLEY, Walter L., LT, USN KIRKPATRICK, John H., LT, USN IRVINE, Kenneth M., LT, USN

STILLINGS, Thomas J., LT, USN LEVY, Norman S., LCDR, USN JAEGER, James W., LT, USN

STONE, Donald R., LT, USN LOWRY, Montecue J., MAJ, USA JONES, David L., LT, USN WEBER, James G., LT, USN LUKE, Charles T., Jr., LT, USN KORDEK, Walter A., LT, USN MATTHIAS, Harold L., CAPT, USA LAW, W. Patrick, LT, USN MASTER OF SCIENCE IN McDANIEL, Dan R., MAJ, USA MILLER, Robert H., LCDR, USN PHYSICS MOORE, William N., LT, USN MONTEATH, Gordon M., Jr., LT, USN

MORSE, Carl S., LT, USN PAIGE, Eddie C, Jr., CAPT, USMC BOUSEK, Ronald R., 1/LT, USAF NARMI, Ronald E., LCDR, USN PIZINGER, Donald D., LT, USN BUTTON, Edward J., 1/LT, USAF OLIVER, Philip Jr., LCDR, USN THOMAS, David M., LT, USN CARLSON, William C, LT, USN OSGOOD, Franklin B., LT, USN CARRETTA, Albert A., Jr., LT, USN PITTENGER, Richard F., LT, USN AERONAUTICAL ENGINEER COMBS, Martin F., CDR, USN REISTER, Walter A., LT, USN DACHOS, John, LT, USN KRAFT, Robert M., LT, USN RICHTER, Herbert B., LT, USN GERTNER, Charles A., Jr., LT, USN LOUSMA, Jack R., CAPT, USMC SMITH, Thomas M., CDR, USN GONCZ, Joseph P., CAPT, USA NEVILLE, Ronald W., LT, STOCKING, SIGURD I., LT, USN GREILING, David S., LT, USN Royal Canadian Navy GRISSOM, Charles C, MAJ, USA MASTER OF SCIENCE HASKELL, Hugh B., LT, USN DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

HORN, Leslie J., LT, USN ANDERSON, Richard S., Jr., LT, USN HARRIS, Jack R., LCDR, USN, Faculty HUTTON, Gary D. BASSETT, Charles H., Jr., LT, USN HOLLISTER, Floyd H., LT, USN

JENKINS, George J., Jr., LT, USN BREIDENSTEIN, John F., LT, USN MILLER, Aloysius R., LT, USN

Graduation

152 INDEX

Admissions Procedures 16 Management and Industrial Engineering 64, 67 Advanced Science Curricula 27 Management 83 Aeronautical Engineering Curricula ... 27 Material Science and Chemistry Department 100 Aeronautics Department 74 Materials 104 Mathematics Department Aviation Safety Officer Program . . . .128 106 Mechanical Engineering (CEC) .... 64, 67 Bachelor of Arts 44, 96 Mechanical Engineering Department. . .115 44 Bachelor of Science Mechanics 113 89 Biology Metallurgical Engineering 64, 67 65 Business Administration 64, Meteorology 121 Business Administration and Meteorology and Oceanography Department 120 Department 82 Economics Mission of the Postgraduate School ... 3 Calendar 9

Naval Auxiliary Landing Field . . . . 15 Chemistry and Chemical Engineering . .101 Naval Construction and Engineering . . 64, 67 Civil Engineering (Advanced) .... 64, 65 Naval Engineering Curricula 45 Communications Engineering 35 Naval Warfare Department 126 Construction Engineering (CEC) . . . 64, 67 Naval Management and Operations Curricula at Other Universities 64 Analysis Curricula 49 Curricula at the Postgraduate School . . 26 Navy Management Systems Center . . .145

Data Processing Curriculum 50 Nuclear Engineering (Advanced) . . . 64, 68 Degrees, Accreditation and Nuclear Engineering (Effects) 52

Standards 16 Nuclear Power Engineering (CEC) . . . 64, 68 Dependent Information 15 Distinguished Alumni 11 Oceanography 123

Oceanography (Civilian Universities) . . 64, 68 Electrical Engineering (CEC) 64, 66 Operations Analysis Curriculum .... 50 Electrical Engineering Department ... 87 Operations Analysis Department . . . .129 Electronics and Communications Ordnance Engineering Curricula .... 52 Engineering Curricula 33 Organization and Functions of the Engineering Chemistry 101 Postgraduate School 14 Engineering Electronics (CEC) .... 64, 66 Engineering Science Curricula 37 Petroleum Administration English 97 and Management 64, 68 Environmental Sciences Curricula .... 39 Petroleum Engineering (CEC) .... 64, 69 Petroleum Management 64, 69 Facilities of Postgraduate School . . . . 15 Physics Department 135 Financial Management 64, 66 Political Science 64, 69 General Information 13-18 Procurement Management 64, 69 General Line and Baccalaureate Curricula 43 Proficiency Flying 15

Geography 97 Probability and Statistics . . . . 114,133 Government 97 Psychology 99 Relations Government and Humanities Department . 96 Public 64,69 Graduates by Years 146 Religion 64, 69 Graduates of 1965 147 Retailing 64, 69 History 98 History of Postgraduate School .... 13 Speech 99 Student and Dependent Information 15 . ... Hydrographic Engineering (Geodesy) . 64, 67 Subsistence Technology 64, 70 Industrial Engineering and Management 64, 67 Superintendent's Staff 7, 8 Information, General 13-18 Systems Inventory Management . . . 64, 70 International Relations 64, 67 Texile Technology 64, 70 Laboratory Facilities 21 Transportation Management .... 64, 70 Law 64, 67 Lecture Series 24 Underwater Physics Systems Curriculum . 54 Libraries 19 Literature 99 Weapons System Curriculum 55

Abbey Press, Inc. Oakland, California